V18 Site Preparation and Installation

V18 Site Preparation and Installation
RS3t
Site Preparation and Installation
August 1998
U.S. Manual PN: 10P56990201
A-4 Size Manual PN: 10P56990211
10P56995101
10P56995111
E 1987--1999 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Components of the RS3 distributed process control system may be protected by U.S. patent Nos. 4,243,931; 4,370,257; 4,581,734. Other
Patents Pending.
RS3 is a mark of one of the Fisher-Rosemount group of companies. All other marks are property of their respective owners. The contents
of this publication are presented for informational purposes only, and while every effort has been made to ensure their accuracy, they are
not to be construed as warranties or guarantees, express or implied, regarding the products or services described herein or their use or
applicability. We reserve the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of such products without notice.
Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc.
8301 Cameron Road
Austin, Texas 78754--3895 U.S.A.
Telephone:
FAX:
(512) 835--2190
(512) 834--7200
Comment Form
RS3t Manuals
Site Preparation and Installation
10P569902x1
Please give us your feedback to help improve this manual.
Never
Rarely
Sometimes
Usually
Always
D
configuring
making changes or enhancements
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
D
operating the system
______
______
______
______
______
D
troubleshooting
D
other __________________________
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
1. Do you actually use this manual when
you are:
D
2. Does this manual answer your questions?
3. What could be changed in this manual to make it more useful?
Errors and Problems: Please note errors or problems in this manual, including chapter and page number,
if applicable; or send a marked-up copy of the affected page(s).
May we contact you about your comments?
j Yes
j No
Name
______________________________________________
Company
______________________________________________
Phone
______________________________________________
Date
______________________________________________
Fisher-Rosemount FAX #: (512) 834--7200
Thank you!
Name
Place
stamp
here
Company
Address
Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc.
Technical Documentation
8301 Cameron Road
Austin, Texas 78754--3895
U.S.A.
Seal with tape.
SP: v
RS3t
Site Preparation and Installation
About This Manual
The Site Preparation and Installation Manual is intended to assist in the
preliminary planning for a RS3 installation and to supply detailed
information on hardware installation. Only equipment in current
production for new orders is included. Information about earlier
equipment can be found in previous versions of this document.
Details about equipment, such as size and general cabling, is at the
front of each section.
NOTE: If any RS3 system, or any equipment therein, is used in a
manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by
the system and the equipment therein may be impaired.
Changes for This Release
The manual has been revised, reorganized, and extended to cover new
equipment.
D
D
Numerous corrections and minor revisions have been made
throughout the manual.
Information on the RS3 Millennium Package (RMP), the System
Power Supply Unit, and the MPC5 Controller Processor with the
4 Meg NV Memory has been integrated into the manual.
Information on the MAI16 along with the Loop Power Module has
also been added.
Revision Level for This Manual
This manual should be used to plan hardware installation for all
versions of the software.
For This
Software
Version:
All
Refer to This Document:
Title
Site Preparation and Installation
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Date
Part Number
August 1998
10P569902x1
About This Manual
SP: vi
NOTE: The “x” in the part number is 0 for U.S. size (8-1/2 x 11 inch) or
1 for A-4 size manuals.
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
About This Manual
SP: vii
References to Other Manuals
References to other RS3 user manuals list the manual, chapter, and
sometimes the section as shown below.
Sample Entries:
For ..., see CC: 3.
Manual Title
Chapter
For ..., see CC: 1-1.
Manual Title
Chapter-Section
Abbreviations of Manual Titles
AL = Alarm Messages
BA= ABC Batch
CB= ControlBlock Configuration
CC= Console Configuration
DT = Disk and Tape Functions
IO = I/O Block Configuration
OP= Operator’s Guide
OV= System Overview and Glossary
PW= PeerWay Interfaces
RB= Rosemount Basic Language
RI = RNI Installation Guide
RP = RNI Programmer’s Reference Manual
RR= RNI Release Notes
SP = Site Preparation and Installation
SV = Service
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
About This Manual
SP: viii
Reference Documents
Prerequisite Documents
You should be familiar with the information in the following documents
before using this manual:
System Overview Manual and Glossary
1984-2640-21x0
Related Documents
You may find the following documents helpful when using this manual:
ABC Batch Software Manual
1984-2654-21x0
Alarm Messages Manual
1984-2657-19x1
ABC Batch Quick Reference Guide
1984-2818-1103
Configuration Quick Reference Guide
1984-2812-0808
Console Configuration Manual
1984-2643-21x0
ControlBlock Configuration Manual
1984-2646-21x0
I/O Block Configuration Manual
1984-2645-21x0
Operator’s Guide
1984-2647-19x1
PeerWay Interfaces Manual
1984-2650-21x0
Rosemount Basic Language Manual
1984-2653-21x0
RNI Programmer’s Reference Manual
1984-3356-03x1
RNI Release Notes
RNI Installation Guide
10P574830x1
1984-3357-02x5
Service Manual, Volume 1
10P569802x1
Service Manual, Volume 2
10P569802x2
Service Quick Reference Guide
10P57000201
Software Discrepancies for Performance Series 1
10P56870304
Software Loading and Upgrade Procedure,
Including Batch, Performance Series 1
10P56870206
Software Release Notes, Performance Series 1
10P56870106
User Manual Master Index
1984-2641-21x0
NOTE: The “x” in the part number is 0 for U.S. size (8-1/2 x 11 inch)
and 1 to 9 for A-4 size manuals.
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
About This Manual
Contents
Chapter 1:
Preliminary Planning
Section 1:
Environmental Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1
Optimum Equipment Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling Relative Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosive Environment Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use of Reactivity Coupons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Humidity Effects on Reactivity Coupons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dusty Environment Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shock and Vibration Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static and Electromagnetic Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintaining the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-2
1-1-3
1-1-4
1-1-6
1-1-7
1-1-8
1-1-11
1-1-12
1-1-15
1-1-19
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1
Power Distribution Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Voltage Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Voltage Dropout -- AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding the DC Load on a Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding the Number of Power Supplies Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining the Number of AC Entrance Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining the Total AC Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-redundant Bus Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant Bus Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental Power Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual AC Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Generator -- AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Battery Backup -- AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Full Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-4
1-2-7
1-2-8
1-2-8
1-2-9
1-2-9
1-2-12
1-2-12
1-2-12
1-2-12
1-2-13
1-2-14
1-2-14
1-2-19
1-2-19
1-2-20
1-2-21
1-2-21
1-2-21
1-2-21
1-2-23
1-2-24
1-2-25
1-2-25
Section 2:
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: x
Section 3:
Partial Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console CRT and Printer Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Millennium Cabinet and AC Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-27
1-2-27
1-2-28
Grounding Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-1
Chassis Interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Earth Ground Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding Separate System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Grounding Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolation Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intrinsic Safety Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lightning Arrestors and Surge Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-2
1-3-3
1-3-4
1-3-5
1-3-7
1-3-7
1-3-7
1-3-8
1-3-9
1-3-10
1-3-14
Chapter 2:
System Cabinets
Section 1:
Moving and Unpacking the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinets Shipped Upright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinets Shipped Horizontally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2
2-1-3
2-1-4
2-1-7
2-1-9
The RS3 Millennium Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1
RMP Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RMP Installation and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding RMP Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RMP Cabinet Fan Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wire Entry into RMP System Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-3
2-2-4
2-2-4
2-2-5
2-2-5
Series 2 System Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1
Series 2 Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joining Series 2 Cabinets Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing Series 2 System Cabinets to the Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding the Series 2 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series 2 Cabinet Fan Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insulation Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wire Entry into Series 2 System Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bottom Entry, Series 2 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top Entry, Series 2 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2
2-3-5
2-3-6
2-3-7
2-3-9
2-3-10
2-3-12
2-3-13
2-3-15
Series 1 System Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-1
Installing Vibration Protection for Series 1 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-2
Section 2:
Section 3:
Section 4:
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xi
Section 5:
Section 6:
Section 7:
Joining Series 1 Cabinets Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing Series 1 Cabinets to the Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Series 1 Cabinet Air Flow Switch to an Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wire Entry into Series 1 System Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bottom Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wire Routing to Card Cages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wire Routing to Marshaling Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-3
2-4-4
2-4-5
2-4-7
2-4-7
2-4-9
2-4-10
2-4-11
Floor-Mounted I/O Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-1
Joining 2X5 or 4X5 I/O Cabinets Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Vibration Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stabilizing 2X5 and 4X5 I/O Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding the Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring a 2X5 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring a 4X5 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Multipoint I/O Termination Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Remote Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-7
2-5-8
2-5-9
2-5-10
2-5-11
2-5-12
2-5-13
2-5-14
Wall-Mounted I/O Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6-1
Grounding the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6-3
2-6-4
Remote I/O Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7-1
Remote I/O Power Supply Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Distribution Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote I/O Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Distribution Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIN Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Remote I/O Power Supply in an I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7-2
2-7-4
2-7-7
2-7-8
2-7-11
2-7-11
2-7-11
2-7-13
Chapter 3:
Consoles
Section 1:
Series 2 Console Furniture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1
Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1200 mm Deep Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zero Level Front-Facing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
--1 Level Rear-Facing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+1 Level Rear-Facing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fastening the Tables to the Floor (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2
3-1-2
3-1-3
3-1-3
3-1-4
3-1-4
3-1-5
3-1-8
3-1-10
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xii
Section 2:
Leveling the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Table Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronics Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard System Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspended Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Other Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Interface Card Cage Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE-Compliant Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for Power and PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for SCSI and Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling from the OI Card Cage to the Keyboard/Video Interface . . . . . . .
Cabling the Keyboard/Video Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-11
3-1-11
3-1-12
3-1-12
3-1-12
3-1-13
3-1-13
3-1-13
3-1-14
3-1-18
3-1-19
3-1-21
3-1-21
3-1-22
3-1-23
3-1-24
3-1-25
Series 1 Console Furniture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1
Console Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tabletops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronics Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Electronics Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tower Electronics Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard System Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing Tabletops to Each Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Connecting Modesty Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leveling the Table Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Distribution Box Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-EMC Operator Interface Card Cage Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CE-Compliant Operator Interface Card Cage Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE-Compliant Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for Power and PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for SCSI and Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling from the OI Card Cage to the Keyboard/Video Interface . . . . . . .
Cabling the Keyboard/Video Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-2
3-2-3
3-2-5
3-2-5
3-2-6
3-2-7
3-2-8
3-2-9
3-2-10
3-2-10
3-2-11
3-2-13
3-2-14
3-2-20
3-2-24
3-2-25
3-2-27
3-2-27
3-2-28
3-2-29
3-2-30
3-2-31
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xiii
Section 3:
Section 4:
Section 5:
Section 6:
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1
Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Keyboard Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Labels in the Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing an Articulating-base CRT to the Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Modem Connection to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-2
3-3-5
3-3-10
3-3-12
3-3-14
3-3-15
3-3-16
3-3-16
Hardened Command Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1
Installing Vibration Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing the Console to the Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Keyboard Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-3
3-4-5
3-4-5
3-4-11
System Manager Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1
Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape Drive and Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard/Video Interface (KVI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Interface Card Cage Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE-Compliant Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for Power and PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Extender Tap Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for SCSI and Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling from the OI Card Cage to the Keyboard/Video Interface . . . . . . .
Cabling the Keyboard/Video Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-2
3-5-3
3-5-4
3-5-4
3-5-5
3-5-5
3-5-6
3-5-10
3-5-11
3-5-11
3-5-12
3-5-12
3-5-13
3-5-14
3-5-15
RS3 Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-1
Planning a Process Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Process Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expanded Process Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection to a Plant Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process Network Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Process Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Router-Connected Process Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the RNI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS CRTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-2
3-6-3
3-6-4
3-6-5
3-6-7
3-6-8
3-6-8
3-6-9
3-6-10
3-6-11
3-6-12
3-6-14
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xiv
ROS CRT: Hitachi HM--4721--D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS CRT: ViewSonic P810 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS CRT: Iiyama Vision Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS Operator Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Circuit Board (10P56910001) . . . . . . .
Connecting the ROS Operator Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UPS Software Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-14
3-6-14
3-6-14
3-6-15
3-6-17
3-6-18
3-6-19
3-6-20
3-6-21
Chapter 4:
ControlFiles
Section 1:
ControlFiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting System Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to an I/O Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM NV Memory Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for EMC-Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-3
4-1-5
4-1-6
4-1-7
4-1-7
4-1-8
4-1-9
4-1-10
4-1-11
Chapter 5:
System Cables and Power Distribution
Section 1:
Standard System Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1
Section 2:
AC Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1
Installing a Single-feed AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Dual-feed AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking AC Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2
5-2-4
5-2-6
AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-1
Rack Mounting the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing an AC/DC Power Supply With Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Alarm Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) LEDs and Controls . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring Output Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the AC/DC Power Supply to AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5409 for Operator Interface Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-3
5-3-5
5-3-7
5-3-8
5-3-10
5-3-10
5-3-10
5-3-12
5-3-13
5-3-14
5-3-15
Section 3:
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xv
10P5409 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5409 Remote Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5409 Remote Power Supply Checking and Adjusting Output . . . . . . .
10P5409 Remote Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5756 for Operator Interface Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5503 for I/O Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for EMC-Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5503 Remote Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Checking and Adjusting Output . . . . . . .
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5701 for I/O Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section 4:
Section 5:
Section 6:
System Power Supply Units
5-3-16
5-3-16
5-3-16
5-3-17
5-3-18
5-3-19
5-3-22
5-3-22
5-3-22
5-3-22
5-3-23
5-3-24
..............................
5-4-1
Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabinet and AC Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabinet DC Power Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Housing in a Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Power Supply in a Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Auxiliary AC Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-1
5-4-3
5-4-5
5-4-6
5-4-7
5-4-7
5-4-8
5-4-11
5-4-12
5-4-13
5-4-13
5-4-13
5-4-14
5-4-15
DC Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-1
DC Power Distribution Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Output Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Output Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard DC Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant DC Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heavy Load Redundant DC Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking DC Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-3
5-5-5
5-5-7
5-5-8
5-5-8
5-5-9
5-5-10
5-5-11
Electrical (Twinax) PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-1
Twinax PeerWay Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routing and Installing Twinax PeerWay Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Twinax PeerWay Tap Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting Twinax PeerWay Tap Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Twinax PeerWay Cables to Tap Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding Twinax PeerWay Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminating Twinax PeerWay Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-2
5-6-4
5-6-6
5-6-7
5-6-7
5-6-9
5-6-9
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xvi
Section 7:
Section 8:
Section 9:
Checklist for CE-Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Twinax Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-10
5-6-11
Optical PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-1
Installing an Optical Tap Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Cables to an Optical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing an Electrical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding Optical and Electrical Tap Box Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Fixed Optical Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing an Optical Repeater/Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Star Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-5
5-7-7
5-7-9
5-7-10
5-7-13
5-7-14
5-7-16
PeerWay Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-1
Checklist for CE Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding the Twinax PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal/Test Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic Link in a Twinax PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hybrid Fiber Optic and Twinax PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Twinax Segment Added to a Fiber Optic PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic “Star” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hybrid PeerWay Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Twinax Segment Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic Segment Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hybrid PeerWay Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-4
5-8-5
5-8-6
5-8-8
5-8-9
5-8-10
5-8-10
5-8-11
5-8-12
5-8-12
5-8-12
5-8-13
5-8-14
5-8-15
5-8-15
5-8-16
5-8-17
5-8-20
Field Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-1
Connecting Multipoint I/O to a ControlFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Distant Card Cage to a ControlFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Communications Connect Card V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Remote Communications Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CE Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Optical Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-2
5-9-5
5-9-6
5-9-8
5-9-10
5-9-11
5-9-12
5-9-13
5-9-14
5-9-15
5-9-16
5-9-17
5-9-20
5-9-21
5-9-22
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xvii
Section 10:
Fiber Optic Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10-1
Installing Fiber Optic Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing the Optical PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loss Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing the Attenuation of a Test Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Transmitter and Receiver Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repeater Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting an Optical PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10-3
5-10-4
5-10-6
5-10-7
5-10-8
5-10-10
5-10-13
Chapter 6:
Analog Card Cages
Section 1:
Analog Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-1
Connecting to the ControlFile: Direct Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the ControlFile: Via Comm Term Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the Analog Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard (non-CE) Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CE Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to Multipoint I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Card Cage Address Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for EMC-Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting Analog Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Junction Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring to an Analog Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4--20 mA Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Electronics Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wire Routing to Marshaling Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-2
6-1-4
6-1-6
6-1-7
6-1-7
6-1-7
6-1-8
6-1-9
6-1-10
6-1-12
6-1-13
6-1-15
6-1-16
6-1-17
6-1-17
6-1-19
6-1-22
6-1-28
6-1-30
6-1-31
6-1-32
MUX Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1
Field Wiring to a Multiplexer FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Marshaling Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring to a Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring to a Current (4--20 mA) MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . .
RTD MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring to an RTD MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-5
6-2-8
6-2-8
6-2-9
6-2-10
6-2-11
6-2-13
6-2-13
Section 2:
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xviii
Section 3:
Contact I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1
Installing a Contact Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage FIC Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Contact FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Local Termination Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Termination Board Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Termination Board Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Isolator Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Contact Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Marshaling Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Marshaling Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Isolator Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-3
6-3-5
6-3-6
6-3-8
6-3-8
6-3-9
6-3-10
6-3-10
6-3-10
6-3-11
6-3-14
6-3-14
6-3-15
Chapter 7:
Multipoint I/O
Section 1:
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-1
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Address Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Scanning Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O FIM Redundancy and Online Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O FIM Online Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O FIM Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel FIM Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Online
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Redundancy . .
7-1-4
7-1-4
7-1-5
7-1-6
7-1-6
7-1-6
7-1-8
7-1-8
7-1-9
7-1-11
7-1-12
7-1-13
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-1
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDIOH High-Side Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDIOL Low-Side Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-2
7-2-4
7-2-5
7-2-6
7-2-7
7-2-8
7-2-9
7-2-10
7-2-11
7-2-12
7-2-13
7-2-13
7-2-14
Section 2:
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xix
Section 3:
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LVD Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field I/O Hazardous Voltage Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field I/O Voltage Applications with SELV Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Termination Panel to Termination Panel Field I/O Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Wiring for All Isolated Discrete Termination Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Ambient Temperature Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solid State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LVD Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field I/O Hazardous Voltage Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field I/O Voltage Applications with SELV Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group-to-Group Field I/O Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring for High Density Termination Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Wiring for All Isolated Discrete Termination Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Ambient Temperature Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solid State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-16
7-2-18
7-2-19
7-2-19
7-2-20
7-2-20
7-2-21
7-2-21
7-2-21
7-2-23
7-2-24
7-2-25
7-2-26
7-2-27
7-2-28
7-2-29
7-2-31
7-2-33
7-2-33
7-2-34
7-2-34
7-2-35
7-2-35
7-2-35
7-2-36
7-2-36
7-2-36
7-2-37
7-2-38
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-1
MAIO16 Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Field Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-2
7-3-5
7-3-5
7-3-7
7-3-14
7-3-21
7-3-23
7-3-25
7-3-27
7-3-31
7-3-33
7-3-37
7-3-38
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xx
Section 4:
Section 5:
MIO Marshaling Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-1
Standard Remote Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-2
Intrinsic Safety (IS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-1
MTL IS Termination Panel for Discrete Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping I/O points to MTL Discrete Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Fault Detection (LFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL Discrete Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel A Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel B Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL IS Termination Panel for Analog Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL Analog Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-5
7-5-7
7-5-8
7-5-8
7-5-8
7-5-9
7-5-10
7-5-12
7-5-13
7-5-13
7-5-13
7-5-14
7-5-18
7-5-21
7-5-21
7-5-21
7-5-21
7-5-21
7-5-21
7-5-22
7-5-22
7-5-23
Chapter 8:
PeerWay Interface Devices
Section 1:
VAX/PeerWay Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-1
QBI Hardware Kit for the MicroVAX II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MicroVAX II -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QBI Hardware Kit for the VAX 3xxx and VAX 4xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX 3xxx/VAX 4xxx -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Marshaling Panel LEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Board 1 (CPU Card) Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card) Jumpers . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-3
8-1-4
8-1-5
8-1-6
8-1-7
8-1-8
8-1-10
8-1-13
8-1-15
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-1
RS-232C Asynchronous Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 Asynchronous Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 Asynchronous Protocol Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 X.25 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-4
8-2-7
8-2-8
8-2-9
Section 2:
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xxi
RS-422 X.25 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE-Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 X.25 Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIA Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-11
8-2-12
8-2-13
8-2-14
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-1
HIA Direct Connection of PeerWays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIA Connection of PeerWays Using Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Jumpering for the HIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Jumper Setting for HIA Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Jumpering for HIA Connection Using Modems . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure HIA Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-2
8-3-4
8-3-6
8-3-6
8-3-6
8-3-7
8-3-8
Diogenes Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-1
Diogenes Interface TI Communications Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diogenes Communication Convertor Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-4
8-4-5
RS3 Network Interface (RNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-1
Checklist for CE Compatible Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting System Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEDs and Reset Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the RNI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-3
8-5-4
8-5-6
8-5-7
8-5-7
Appendix A:
IEC and ISO Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Appendix B:
Acronyms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Section 3:
Section 4:
Section 5:
Appendixes
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xxii
List of Figures
Figure 1.1.1. Size Distribution of a Typical Atmospheric Dust Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-1-9
Figure 1.1.2. Relative Size Chart of Common Air Contaminants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-1-10
Figure 1.2.1. Power Distribution Overview -- RS3 with AC/DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-2-5
Figure 1.2.2. Power Distribution Overview -- RS3 with System Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-2-6
Figure 1.2.3. Power Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-2-16
Figure 1.2.4. Examples of System AC Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-2-17
Figure 1.2.5. Redundant AC Power and Load Sharing DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-2-18
Figure 1.2.6. Redundant AC Power, Load Sharing DC Power Supplies, and
Redundant Power Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-2-19
Figure 1.2.7. Standard DC Power Distribution for System Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-2-20
Figure 1.2.8. Redundant DC Power Distribution System for System Power Supply Units . . . . . .
SP:1-2-21
Figure 1.2.9. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) as Backup Power Source -AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-2-23
Figure 1.2.10. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) as Backup Power Source -System Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-2-24
Figure 1.2.11. Diesel or Gasoline Powered AC Generator as Backup Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-2-25
Figure 1.2.12. Full Battery Backup Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-2-27
Figure 1.2.13. Partial Battery Backup Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-2-28
Figure 1.3.1. System Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-3-4
Figure 1.3.2. Supplemental Grounding Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-3-6
Figure 1.3.3. Isolation Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-3-8
Figure 1.3.4. System Grounding with Intrinsically Safe Barrier Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-3-9
Figure 1.3.5. Conductor Bend Radius Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-3-12
Figure 1.3.6. Typical Lightning Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-3-13
Figure 2.1.1. Equipment Packed for Domestic Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-1-5
Figure 2.1.2. Equipment Crated for International Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-1-6
Figure 2.1.3. Transport of Cabinets that are Secured to a Pallet in an Upright Position . . . . . . .
SP:2-1-7
Figure 2.1.4. Cabinet-to-pallet Bolt Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-1-8
Figure 2.1.5. Removing Cabinet from Pallet Without a Hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-1-8
Figure 2.1.6. Transport of Cabinets That Are Shipped in a Horizontal Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-1-9
Figure 2.2.1. RS3 Millennium Package Cabinet -- Side VIew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-2-1
Figure 2.2.2. RS3 Millennium Package Cabinet -- Front and Rear Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-2-2
Figure 2.2.3. RS3 Millennium Package Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-2-3
Figure 2.3.1. System Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-3-3
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xxiii
Figure 2.3.2. Door (Inside View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-3-4
Figure 2.3.3. System Cabinet Base Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-3-4
Figure 2.3.4. Joining Series 2 Cabinets Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-3-5
Figure 2.3.5. Vibration Protection (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-3-6
Figure 2.3.6. Grounding a Group of Series 2 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-3-8
Figure 2.3.7. Power Component Location for Bottom Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-3-14
Figure 2.3.8. Power Component Location for Top Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-3-15
Figure 2.4.1. Vibration Protection (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-4-2
Figure 2.4.2. Bolt Hole Locations for Securing Series 1 Cabinets Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-4-3
Figure 2.4.3. Bolt Hole Locations for Securing Series 1 Cabinets to the Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-4-4
Figure 2.4.4. Cabinet Fan AC Receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-4-5
Figure 2.4.5. Air Flow Switch Alarm to Contact Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-4-6
Figure 2.4.6. Air Flow Switch Alarm to Contact FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-4-6
Figure 2.4.7. Methods of Bottom Cable Entry into System Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-4-8
Figure 2.4.8. Methods of Top Cable Entry into System Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-4-9
Figure 2.4.9. Field Wire Routing to Card Cages (Bottom Entry Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-4-10
Figure 2.4.10. Field Wire Routing To Marshaling Panels (Bottom Entry Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-4-11
Figure 2.5.1. 2X5 I/O Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-5-2
Figure 2.5.2. 2X5 Cabinet Foundation Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-5-3
Figure 2.5.3. 4X5 I/O Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-5-4
Figure 2.5.4. 4X5 Cabinet Foundation Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-5-5
Figure 2.5.5. DIN Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-5-6
Figure 2.5.6. Joining I/O Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-5-7
Figure 2.5.7. Vibration Protection (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-5-8
Figure 2.5.8. Grounding a Group of 2X5 or 4X5 I/O Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-5-10
Figure 2.5.9. Field and System Wiring in a 2X5 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-5-11
Figure 2.5.10. Field and System Wiring in a 4X5 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-5-12
Figure 2.5.11. Typical Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-5-13
Figure 2.5.12. Typical Installation in a 2X5 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-5-14
Figure 2.6.1. DIN Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-6-1
Figure 2.6.2. 2X2 Wall-Mounted I/O Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-6-2
Figure 2.6.3. Field and System Wiring in a 2X2 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-6-4
Figure 2.6.4. Typical Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-6-5
Figure 2.6.5. Installing a Remote I/O Power Supply in a 2X2 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-6-6
Figure 2.7.1. Typical Remote I/O Power Supply Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-7-2
Figure 2.7.2. Typical Remote I/O Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-7-3
Figure 2.7.3. AC Distribution Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-7-5
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xxiv
Figure 2.7.4. Typical AC Distribution Block Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-7-6
Figure 2.7.5. Remote I/O Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-7-7
Figure 2.7.6. DC Distribution Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-7-9
Figure 2.7.7. Typical DC Distribution Block Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-7-10
Figure 2.7.8. Remote I/O Power Supply Fuse Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-7-12
Figure 2.7.9. Installing a Remote I/O Power Supply in a 2X5 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-7-14
Figure 2.7.10. Installing a Remote I/O Power Supply in a 2X2 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:2-7-15
Figure 3.1.1. Typical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-1
Figure 3.1.2. 1200 mm Deep Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-3
Figure 3.1.3. Zero Level Front-Facing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-3
Figure 3.1.4. --1 Level Rear-Facing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-4
Figure 3.1.5. +1 Level Rear-Facing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-4
Figure 3.1.6. Legs
SP:3-1-5
Figure 3.1.7. 750 mm Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-6
Figure 3.1.8. 1275 mm Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-7
Figure 3.1.9. Suspended Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-12
Figure 3.1.10. OI Card Cage Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-14
Figure 3.1.11. Card Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-15
Figure 3.1.12. Rear View of Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-16
Figure 3.1.13. SCSI Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-19
Figure 3.1.14. Power Supply Mounting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-20
Figure 3.1.15. Power and Peerway Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-21
Figure 3.1.16. SCSI and Printer Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-22
Figure 3.1.17. Alarm Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-23
Figure 3.1.18. Keyboard Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-24
Figure 3.1.19. Keyboard/Video Interface Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-25
Figure 3.2.1. Series 1 Console Furniture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-1
Figure 3.2.2. Rectangular Tabletop Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-3
Figure 3.2.3. Angle Tabletop Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-4
Figure 3.2.4. Standard Electronics Cabinet Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-5
Figure 3.2.5. Tower Electronics Cabinet Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-6
Figure 3.2.6. Series 1 Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-9
Figure 3.2.7. Keyboard/Video Interface Card, AC Distribution Box, and Monitor Cable Routing
SP:3-2-12
Figure 3.2.8. Typical Non-EMC Electronics Cabinet Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-15
Figure 3.2.9. Connecting Peerway Cables to Tap Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-16
Figure 3.2.10. Card Cage Numbering Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-17
Figure 3.2.11. Console Alarm Output Board External Alarm Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-19
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xxv
Figure 3.2.12. OI Card Cage Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-20
Figure 3.2.13. Card Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-21
Figure 3.2.14. Rear View of Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-22
Figure 3.2.15. SCSI Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-25
Figure 3.2.16. Power Supply Mounting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-26
Figure 3.2.17. Power and Peerway Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-27
Figure 3.2.18. SCSI and Printer Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-28
Figure 3.2.19. Alarm Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-29
Figure 3.2.20. Keyboard Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-30
Figure 3.2.21. Keyboard/Video Interface Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-31
Figure 3.3.1. Elevated Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-2
Figure 3.3.2. Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-3
Figure 3.3.3. Trackball Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-3
Figure 3.3.4. Configuration Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-4
Figure 3.3.5. Removing the Console Keyboard Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-5
Figure 3.3.6. Keyboard Interface Card Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-6
Figure 3.3.7. Free-Standing (tabletop) CRT Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-7
Figure 3.3.8. Barco CRT (Back View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-8
Figure 3.3.9. Installing Labels in Callup Buttons Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-10
Figure 3.3.10. Installing Labels in Operator Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-11
Figure 3.3.11. Free-standing CRT and Base Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-12
Figure 3.3.12. Turret-base CRT Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-13
Figure 3.3.13. Articulating-base CRT Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-13
Figure 3.3.14. Securing Articulating-base CRT to Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-14
Figure 3.3.15. Fujitsu Printer Model M3389 (DL3800) Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . .
SP:3-3-15
Figure 3.3.16. Printer Stand Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-15
Figure 3.3.17. Modem Connection to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-17
Figure 3.4.1. Hardened Command Console Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-4-1
Figure 3.4.2. Hardened Command Console Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-4-2
Figure 3.4.3. Vibration Protection Using Neoprene Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-4-3
Figure 3.4.4. Vibration Protection Using Shell With Resilient Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-4-4
Figure 3.4.5. Hardened Command Console (Doors Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-4-6
Figure 3.4.6. AC Distribution Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-4-7
Figure 3.4.7. Connecting PeerWay and Drop Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-4-9
Figure 3.4.8. Configuration Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-4-10
Figure 3.4.9. Installing Labels in Callup Buttons Keyboard and Operator Keyboards . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-4-12
Figure 3.5.1. System Manager Station: Front Door Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-5-1
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xxvi
Figure 3.5.2. System Manager Station Electronics Cabinet Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
SP:3-5-2
Figure 3.5.3. Internal Tower Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-5-4
Figure 3.5.4. OI Card Cage Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-5-6
Figure 3.5.5. Card Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-5-7
Figure 3.5.6. Rear View of Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-5-8
Figure 3.5.7. Power and Peerway Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-5-11
Figure 3.5.8. SCSI and Printer Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-5-12
Figure 3.5.9. Alarm Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-5-13
Figure 3.5.10. Keyboard Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-5-14
Figure 3.5.11. Keyboard/Video Interface Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-5-15
Figure 3.6.1. Basic Process Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-6-3
Figure 3.6.2. Expanded Process Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-6-4
Figure 3.6.3. Connection to a Plant Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-6-5
Figure 3.6.4. Network Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-6-6
Figure 3.6.5. RNI Write-on Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-6-11
Figure 3.6.6. Elevated Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-6-15
Figure 3.6.7. Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-6-16
Figure 3.6.8. ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-6-17
Figure 3.6.9. ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-6-18
Figure 4.1.1. ControlFile Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:4-1-1
Figure 4.1.2. ControlFile Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:4-1-4
Figure 4.1.3. ControlFile Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:4-1-5
Figure 4.1.4. RAM NV Memory Fuse, Jumper, and Test Point Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:4-1-9
Figure 5.2.1. Single Feed AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-2-2
Figure 5.2.2. Dual-Feed AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-2-4
Figure 5.2.3. AC Distribution Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-2-6
Figure 5.3.1. AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-1
Figure 5.3.2. Typical Power Supply Cabinet Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-3
Figure 5.3.3. Power Supply Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-4
Figure 5.3.4. Accessing the Battery Charger Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-6
Figure 5.3.5. Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Alarm Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-7
Figure 5.3.6. Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-8
Figure 5.3.7. Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Panel Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-11
Figure 5.3.8. AC/DC Power Supply Electrical Connections and Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-13
Figure 5.3.9. 10P5409 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-15
Figure 5.3.10. 10P5756 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-18
Figure 5.3.11. 10P5503 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-19
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xxvii
Figure 5.3.12. Typical Remote I/O Power Supply Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-20
Figure 5.3.13. 10P5409 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-24
Figure 5.4.1. System Power Supply Unit with Two Power Modules Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-4-2
Figure 5.4.2. System Power Supply Unit with (Housing Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-4-3
Figure 5.4.3. DC Output and Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-4-3
Figure 5.4.4. Input and Output Connectors and Auxiliary Output Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-4-4
Figure 5.4.5. Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-4-5
Figure 5.4.6. System Cabinet DC Output Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-4-8
Figure 5.4.7. Standard DC Power Distribution for System Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-4-10
Figure 5.4.8. Redundant DC Power Distribution System for System Power Supply Units . . . . . .
SP:5-4-10
Figure 5.4.9. Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-4-11
Figure 5.4.10. Alarm Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-4-12
Figure 5.4.11. Input and Auxiliary Output Connectors and Auxiliary Output Circuit Breakers . . .
SP:5-4-15
Figure 5.4.12. Power Supply Housing AC Input and Auxiliary AC Output Schematic Diagram .
SP:5-4-16
Figure 5.5.1. Standard DC Power Distribution System for AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-5-1
Figure 5.5.2. Redundant DC Power Distribution System for AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-5-2
Figure 5.5.3. DC Power Distribution Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-5-4
Figure 5.5.4. Standard (Non-redundant) DC Distribution Bus and DC Output Card . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-5-6
Figure 5.5.5. Non-redundant DC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-5-8
Figure 5.5.6. Redundant DC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-5-9
Figure 5.5.7. Dual DC Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-5-10
Figure 5.5.8. AC/DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-5-11
Figure 5.5.9. DC Bus and DC Output Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-5-11
Figure 5.6.1. PeerWay Tap Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-6-1
Figure 5.6.2. PeerWay Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-6-4
Figure 5.6.3. Twinax PeerWay Tap Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-6-6
Figure 5.6.4. PeerWay Tap Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-6-8
Figure 5.6.5. PeerWay Taps at PeerWay Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-6-9
Figure 5.6.6. Crimp-Type Twinaxial Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-6-11
Figure 5.6.7. Solder-Type Twinaxial Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-6-13
Figure 5.7.1. Optical PeerWay (Side A or Side B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-7-1
Figure 5.7.2. Optical PeerWay Maximum Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-7-3
Figure 5.7.3. Direct Connection of Optical Tap Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-7-4
Figure 5.7.4. Optical PeerWay Tap and Cable Tie Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-7-6
Figure 5.7.5. Cable Connection to Optical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-7-8
Figure 5.7.6. PeerWay Electrical Tap Box Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-7-9
Figure 5.7.7. Example of Optical PeerWay Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-7-10
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xxviii
Figure 5.7.8. Grounding an Optical or Electrical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-7-12
Figure 5.7.9. Fiber Optic Splice/Repeater/Attenuator Box Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . .
SP:5-7-14
Figure 5.7.10. Optical Repeater/Attenuator LED and Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-7-15
Figure 5.7.11. Star Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-7-16
Figure 5.8.1. PeerWay Extender Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-8-1
Figure 5.8.2. PeerWay Extender Tap Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-8-2
Figure 5.8.3. PeerWay Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-8-3
Figure 5.8.4. PeerWay Extender Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-8-6
Figure 5.8.5. Fiber Optic Link in a Twinax PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-8-12
Figure 5.8.6. Hybrid Fiber Optic and Twinax PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-8-12
Figure 5.8.7. Twinax Segment Added to a Fiber Optic PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-8-13
Figure 5.8.8. Fiber Optic “Star” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-8-14
Figure 5.8.9. Twinax PeerWay: Propagation Delay Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-8-18
Figure 5.8.10. Three Twinax PeerWay Segments: Propagation Delay Example . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-8-19
Figure 5.9.1. Remote Communications Termination Panel II Used With Multipoint I/O . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-3
Figure 5.9.2. Communications Connect Card Used With Multipoint I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-4
Figure 5.9.3. Connecting a Distant Card Cage Using a Remote Communications
Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-5
Figure 5.9.4. Analog Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-8
Figure 5.9.5. Communications Connect Card V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-9
Figure 5.9.6. Remote Communications Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-10
Figure 5.9.7. Communications Terminal Panel II DIN Rail Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-12
Figure 5.9.8. Single Communications Termination Panel II Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-14
Figure 5.9.9. Dual Communications Termination Panel II Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-15
Figure 5.9.10. Fiber Optic I/O Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-17
Figure 5.9.11. Fiber Optic I/O Converter Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-18
Figure 5.9.12. Fiber Optic Link in a Communications Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-19
Figure 5.9.13. Power and Ground Wiring: Using Power Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-20
Figure 5.9.14. Power and Ground Wiring: Using the Power Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-21
Figure 5.9.15. Communication Line Connector Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-21
Figure 6.1.1. Analog Card Cage (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-1
Figure 6.1.2. Directly Connecting an Analog Card Cage to a ControlFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-3
Figure 6.1.3. Connecting an Analog Card Cage to a ControlFile with Comm Term Panel II . . . .
SP:6-1-5
Figure 6.1.4. Connecting an Analog Card Cage to DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-6
Figure 6.1.5. Ferrite Cable Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-6
Figure 6.1.6. Connecting an Analog Card Cage to an Analog Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-7
Figure 6.1.7. Typical Analog Card Cage Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-8
Figure 6.1.8. Analog Card Cage Address Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-9
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xxix
Figure 6.1.9. Analog Marshaling Panel 1984--2415--0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-13
Figure 6.1.10. European Analog Marshaling Panel 10P54620001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-14
Figure 6.1.11. Standard Marshaling Panel Mounting (1984--2415--0001) Dimensions . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-15
Figure 6.1.12. European Marshaling Panel (10P54590001 / 10P54620001)
Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-15
Figure 6.1.13. Analog Marshaling Panel Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-16
Figure 6.1.14. Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-18
Figure 6.1.15. Auxiliary Terminal Block Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-18
Figure 6.1.16. Analog Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-19
Figure 6.1.17. CE Field Wiring Standard Marshaling Panel (1984--2415--0001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-20
Figure 6.1.18. CE Field Wiring European Marshaling Panel (10P54590001 / 10P54620001) . . .
SP:6-1-21
Figure 6.1.19. 4--20 mA Inputs Without Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-23
Figure 6.1.20. 4--20 mA Inputs With Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-24
Figure 6.1.21. 4--20 mA 4-Wire Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-25
Figure 6.1.22. 4--20 mA Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-26
Figure 6.1.23. 4--20 mA Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-27
Figure 6.1.24. RTD Device Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-28
Figure 6.1.25. Thermocouple, Cold Junction Compensator, Millivolt Input, and
Resistance Input Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-29
Figure 6.1.26. Pulse I/O Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-30
Figure 6.1.27. 1/1 Redundancy Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-31
Figure 6.1.28. Field Wire Routing To Marshaling Panels (Bottom Entry Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-32
Figure 6.2.1. Multiplexer (MUX) FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-2-1
Figure 6.2.2. Multiplexer FlexTerm Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-2-2
Figure 6.2.3. Two MUX FlexTerms Connected to a Controller Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-2-3
Figure 6.2.4. Securing a FEM in the MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-2-4
Figure 6.2.5. Wire Routing in a Multiplexer FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-2-5
Figure 6.2.6. Labeling for RTD-type FEMs (1984--0607--0003, --0005, --0009) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-2-6
Figure 6.2.7. Labeling for Non-RTD type FEMs (1984--0607--0001, --0002, --0004, --0007) . . . .
SP:6-2-7
Figure 6.2.8. Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2457--000x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-2-9
Figure 6.2.9. 4--20 mA MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2458--000x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-2-12
Figure 6.2.10. RTD MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2456--000x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-2-14
Figure 6.3.1. Contact Flexterm Cable Connections to ControlFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-3-1
Figure 6.3.2. Contact Flexterm Field Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-3-2
Figure 6.3.3. Contact Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-3-4
Figure 6.3.4. FIC Addressing in a Contact Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-3-5
Figure 6.3.5. Contact Card Cage Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-3-6
Figure 6.3.6. Contact FIC 1984--1460--000x Fuse and Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-3-8
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xxx
Figure 6.3.7. Local Termination Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-3-9
Figure 6.3.8. Contact Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-3-11
Figure 6.3.9. Contact Marshaling Panel Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-3-12
Figure 7.1.1. Multipoint I/O Using the Communication Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-1-2
Figure 7.1.2. Multipoint I/O Using the Analog Card Cage and Communication Connect Card III
SP:7-1-3
Figure 7.1.3. Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-1-4
Figure 7.1.4. Multipoint I/O Panel Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-1-8
Figure 7.1.5. Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Power Wiring: Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-1-9
Figure 7.1.6. Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Power Wiring: Option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-1-10
Figure 7.1.7. Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Online Replacement . .
SP:7-1-12
Figure 7.1.8. Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Redundant Operation .
SP:7-1-13
Figure 7.2.1. Direct Discrete Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-3
Figure 7.2.2. Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Field Wiring Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-4
Figure 7.2.3. Label, Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-5
Figure 7.2.4. Keying the Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-6
Figure 7.2.5. MDIOH High-Side Switch Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-8
Figure 7.2.6. MDIOL Low-Side Switch Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-9
Figure 7.2.7. Field Wiring to a Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-12
Figure 7.2.8. Isolated Discrete Termination Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-17
Figure 7.2.9. Field Wiring Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-22
Figure 7.2.10. Input Point Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-23
Figure 7.2.11. Output Point Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-24
Figure 7.2.12. Label, Isolated Discrete Termination Field Wiring Panel A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-25
Figure 7.2.13. High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-30
Figure 7.2.14. Field Wiring to a Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-31
Figure 7.3.1. MAIO16 Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-3
Figure 7.3.2. Loop Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-6
Figure 7.3.3. MAIO16 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-7
Figure 7.3.4. Field I/O Point Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-9
Figure 7.3.5. MAIO16 Output Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-10
Figure 7.3.6. MAIO16 System-Powered Input Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-11
Figure 7.3.7. MAIO16 Self-Powered Input Point with External Ground Reference . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-12
Figure 7.3.8. MAIO16 Self-Powered Input Point with Ground Reference at Termination Panel .
SP:7-3-13
Figure 7.3.9. 4--20 mA Inputs Without Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-16
Figure 7.3.10. 4--20 mA Inputs With Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-17
Figure 7.3.11. 4--20 mA 4--Wire Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-18
Figure 7.3.12. 4--20 mA Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-19
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xxxi
Figure 7.3.13. 4--20 mA Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-20
Figure 7.3.14. MAIO16 Termination Panel Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-22
Figure 7.3.15. MAI32 Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-29
Figure 7.3.16. MAI32 System Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-31
Figure 7.3.17. MAI32 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-33
Figure 7.3.18. System-Powered Input Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-34
Figure 7.3.19. Self-Powered Input Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-35
Figure 7.4.1. Standard Remote Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-4-2
Figure 7.5.1. Intrinsic Safety Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-5-1
Figure 7.5.2. MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-5-3
Figure 7.5.3. MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-5-4
Figure 7.5.4. Discrete I/O with MDIO MTL IS Termination Panel A and Panel B . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-5-6
Figure 7.5.5. Line Fault Detection Jumper Settings for Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-5-12
Figure 7.5.6. Line Fault Detection Jumper Settings for Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-5-12
Figure 7.5.7. MTL Discrete IS Panel Rack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-5-14
Figure 7.5.8. MTL IS Panel I/O Cabinet Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-5-15
Figure 7.5.9. Panel Mounting Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-5-16
Figure 7.5.10. MTL IS Panel Mounting Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-5-17
Figure 7.5.11. MTL Analog IS Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-5-19
Figure 7.5.12. Analog I/O with MTL IS Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-5-20
Figure 7.5.13. MTL Analog Panel Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-5-23
Figure 7.5.14. Analog Panel Wiring Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-5-24
Figure 8.1.1. VAX QBUS Interface Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-1-2
Figure 8.1.2. MicroVAX/PeerWay Interface Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-1-4
Figure 8.1.3. VAX 3000 -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-1-6
Figure 8.1.4. Circuit Card Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-1-9
Figure 8.1.5. Board 1 Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-1-10
Figure 8.1.6. Board 1 Memory Identification Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-1-11
Figure 8.1.7. Board 1 I/O Space Code Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-1-12
Figure 8.1.8. Board 2 Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-1-13
Figure 8.1.9. PeerWay Node Address Jumper Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-1-14
Figure 8.1.10. Board 2 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-1-15
Figure 8.2.1. Supervisory Computer Interface (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-2-2
Figure 8.2.2. SCI Cabling Connections (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-2-3
Figure 8.2.3. Possible SCI/Host Computer Communication Configurations: RS-232C Port . . . .
SP:8-2-4
Figure 8.2.4. Standard RS-232C Cable Connector with SCI as a Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-2-6
Figure 8.2.5. Standard RS-232C Cable Connector with SCI as a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-2-6
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xxxii
Figure 8.2.6. RS-422 Cable Connector: Asynchronous Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-2-8
Figure 8.2.7. RS-422 X.25 Protocol Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-2-9
Figure 8.2.8. RS-422 Cable Connector: X.25 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-2-11
Figure 8.3.1. HIA Pair (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-3-1
Figure 8.3.2. HIA Cabling (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-3-2
Figure 8.3.3. PeerWays Connected by HIAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-3-3
Figure 8.3.4. HIA Modem Connection of PeerWays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-3-4
Figure 8.3.5. Configure HIA Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-3-8
Figure 8.4.1. Diogenes Interface (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-4-2
Figure 8.4.2. Diogenes Interface (Back) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-4-2
Figure 8.4.3. Diogenes/RS3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-4-3
Figure 8.4.4. Diogenes TI Comm Card Jumpering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-4-4
Figure 8.4.5. Diogenes Communication Converter Box Jumpering (Current Loop Connection) .
SP:8-4-5
Figure 8.5.1. RNI and Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-5-1
Figure 8.5.2. RNI Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-5-2
Figure 8.5.3. RNI Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-5-2
Figure 8.5.4. System Connections to the RNI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-5-4
Figure 8.5.5. RNI Ethernet Jumper Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-5-7
List of Tables
Table 1.1.1. RS3 Equipment Temperature and Humidity Operating Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-1-3
Table 1.1.2. Copper Reactivity Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-1-4
Table 1.1.3. Classification of Chemically Active Contaminants in cm3/m3 (ppm) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-1-5
Table 1.1.4. Guidelines for Environmental Characterization by
Visual Changes in Copper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-1-6
Table 1.1.5. Interpreting Humidity Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-1-7
Table 1.1.6. Shock and Vibration Limits for All Environmental Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-1-11
Table 1.1.7. Electromagnetic Field Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-1-14
Table 1.1.8. Constant Percentage (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-1-18
Table 1.2.1. Equipment DC Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-2-9
Table 1.2.2. Power Consumption for AC Powered Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:1-2-14
Table 3.1.1. Tabletops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-2
Table 3.1.2. OI Card Cage Connectors and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-17
Table 3.1.3. CE-Compliant Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-1-18
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xxxiii
Table 3.2.1. OI Card Cage Connectors and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-23
Table 3.2.2. CE-Compliant Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-2-24
Table 3.3.1. Racal-Vadic Communication Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-17
Table 3.3.2. Multitech Modem DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-3-18
Table 3.5.1. OI Card Cage Connectors and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-5-9
Table 3.5.2. CE-Compliant Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-5-10
Table 3.6.1. Typical Power Consumption Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:3-6-20
Table 4.1.1. RAM NV Memory Battery Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:4-1-9
Table 5.1.1. Standard System Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-1-1
Table 5.2.1. AC Input Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-2-3
Table 5.2.2. AC Input Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-2-5
Table 5.3.1. Battery Charger Card Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-5
Table 5.3.2. Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Indicators and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-9
Table 5.3.3. Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-11
Table 5.3.4. 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-16
Table 5.3.5. 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-17
Table 5.3.6. Distribution Block Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-21
Table 5.3.7. 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-22
Table 5.3.8. 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-3-23
Table 5.5.1. DC Output Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-5-7
Table 5.5.2. Power Cable Plugs and Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-5-9
Table 5.6.1. Twinax PeerWay Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-6-3
Table 5.6.2. Twinax Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-6-11
Table 5.7.1. Optical Repeater/Attenuator Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-7-15
Table 5.8.1. PeerWay Extender Cabling Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-8-7
Table 5.8.2. PeerWay Extender LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-8-8
Table 5.8.3. Switch S3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-8-10
Table 5.8.4. Switch S1 and S2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-8-11
Table 5.8.5. Cable Length Limits
.....................................................
SP:5-8-15
Table 5.8.6. Cable Propagation Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-8-18
Table 5.8.7. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-8-20
Table 5.9.1. Recommended Communication Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-7
Table 5.9.2. Cage Address Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-9
Table 5.9.3. Controller Redundancy Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-9
Table 5.9.4. Location Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-9
Table 5.9.5. Communications Termination Panel II Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-16
Table 5.9.6. Fiber Optic I/O Converter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-9-22
Table 5.10.1. Optical PeerWay Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-10-5
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xxxiv
Table 5.10.2. Optical PeerWay Power Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-10-14
Table 5.10.3. Optical PeerWay Repeater Power Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:5-10-15
Table 6.1.1. Analog FIC Fuse Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-12
Table 6.1.2. Analog Transfer Card Fuse Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-12
Table 6.1.3. Output Bypass Card Fuse Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-12
Table 6.1.4. Pulse I/O Field Interface Card Fuse Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-12
Table 6.1.5. European Analog Marshaling Panel 10P54620001 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-14
Table 6.1.6. Device Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-1-22
Table 6.2.1. Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-2-8
Table 6.2.2. 4--20 mA MUX Marshaling Panel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-2-10
Table 6.2.3. RTD MUX Marshaling Panel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-2-13
Table 6.3.1. Contact Card Cage Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-3-7
Table 6.3.2. Contact Field Interface Card Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-3-8
Table 6.3.3. Local Termination Board Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-3-10
Table 6.3.4. Contact Marshaling Panel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-3-13
Table 6.3.5. Contact Marshaling Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-3-14
Table 6.3.6. Optical Isolator Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:6-3-15
Table 7.1.1. I/O Point and Minimum Controller Scan Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-1-5
Table 7.2.1. Direct Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-7
Table 7.2.2. Direct Discrete Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-10
Table 7.2.3. Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-15
Table 7.2.4. Solid state Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-26
Table 7.2.5. Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-27
Table 7.2.6. Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-28
Table 7.2.7. Marshaling Panel Cable Pin-Out
..........................................
SP:7-2-32
Table 7.2.8. High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Address Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-37
Table 7.2.9. Solid State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-2-38
Table 7.3.1. MAIO16 Termination Panel Components
...................................
SP:7-3-4
Table 7.3.2. Marshaling Cable Pin-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-8
Table 7.3.3. Device Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-15
Table 7.3.4. MAIO Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-24
Table 7.3.5. MAIO16 FIM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-25
Table 7.3.6. LPM LEDs
SP:7-3-26
.............................................................
Table 7.3.7. MAI32 Termination Panel Components
....................................
SP:7-3-30
Table 7.3.8. MAI32 Marshaling Panel Cable Pin-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-3-36
Table 7.3.9. MAI32 FIM LEDs
SP:7-3-37
.......................................................
Table 7.3.10. MAIO Input “Status 2” LED Diagnostic Codes
Table 7.3.11. MAI32 Termination Panel Jumpers
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
.............................
SP:7-3-37
.......................................
SP:7-3-38
Contents
SP: xxxv
Table 7.4.1. Standard Remote Termination Panel, Marshaling Panel Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-4-3
Table 7.5.1. Mapping of I/O Points to MTL Discrete Panel A Isolators
.....................
SP:7-5-7
Table 7.5.2. Mapping of I/O Points to MTL Discrete Panel B Isolators
.....................
SP:7-5-7
................................................
SP:7-5-11
Table 7.5.4. MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-5-13
Table 7.5.5. Mounting Hole Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-5-17
Table 7.5.6. MTL Analog IS Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:7-5-21
Table 7.5.7. MTL Analog Input and Output Isolators
....................................
SP:7-5-22
Table 8.1.1. MicroVAX/Peerway Interface Marshalling Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-1-7
Table 8.1.2. Circuit Card Power Requirements
.........................................
SP:8-1-9
Table 8.1.3. Board 1 Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-1-10
Table 8.1.4. Board 2 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-1-15
Table 8.2.1. Definition of Some RS-232C Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-2-5
Table 8.2.2. RS-232C Signals and Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-2-5
Table 8.2.3. Definition of Some RS-422 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-2-7
Table 8.2.4. RS--422 Pins and Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-2-7
Table 8.2.5. X.25 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-2-10
Table 8.2.6. CE-Compliant Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-2-12
Table 8.2.7. X.25 Clocking Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-2-13
Table 8.2.8. EIA Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-2-14
Table 8.3.1. HIA/Black Box Cable Assembly Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-3-5
Table 8.3.2. CE Compliant Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-3-7
Table 8.5.1. RNI LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:8-5-6
Table A.1. IEC and ISO Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP:A-1
Table 7.5.3. MTL Discrete IS Isolators
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
SP: xxxvi
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Contents
10P56997101
10P56997111
RS3t
Site Preparation and Installation
Chapter 1:
Preliminary Planning
Section 1:
Section 2:
Environmental Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1
Optimum Equipment Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling Relative Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosive Environment Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use of Reactivity Coupons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Humidity Effects on Reactivity Coupons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dusty Environment Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shock and Vibration Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static and Electromagnetic Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintaining the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-2
1-1-3
1-1-4
1-1-6
1-1-7
1-1-8
1-1-11
1-1-12
1-1-15
1-1-19
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1
Power Distribution Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Voltage Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Voltage Dropout -- AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding the DC Load on a Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding the Number of Power Supplies Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining the Number of AC Entrance Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining the Total AC Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-redundant Bus Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant Bus Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental Power Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual AC Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Generator -- AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Battery Backup -- AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-4
1-2-7
1-2-8
1-2-8
1-2-9
1-2-9
1-2-12
1-2-12
1-2-12
1-2-12
1-2-13
1-2-14
1-2-14
1-2-19
1-2-19
1-2-20
1-2-21
1-2-21
1-2-21
1-2-21
1-2-23
1-2-24
1-2-25
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Contents
SP: ii
Section 3:
Full Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Partial Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console CRT and Printer Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Millennium Cabinet and AC Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-25
1-2-27
1-2-27
1-2-28
Grounding Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-1
Chassis Interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Earth Ground Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding Separate System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Grounding Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolation Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intrinsic Safety Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lightning Arrestors and Surge Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-2
1-3-3
1-3-4
1-3-5
1-3-7
1-3-7
1-3-7
1-3-8
1-3-9
1-3-10
1-3-14
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Contents
SP: iii
List of Figures
Figure
Page
1.1.1
Size Distribution of a Typical Atmospheric Dust Sample . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-9
1.1.2
Relative Size Chart of Common Air Contaminants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-10
1.2.1
Power Distribution Overview -- RS3 with AC/DC Power Supply . . . . . .
1-2-5
1.2.2
Power Distribution Overview -- RS3 with System Power Supply Unit .
1-2-6
1.2.3
Power Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-15
1.2.4
Examples of System AC Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-16
1.2.5
Redundant AC Power and Load Sharing DC Power Supplies . . . . . . .
1-2-17
1.2.6
Redundant AC Power, Load Sharing DC Power Supplies, and
Redundant Power Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-18
1.2.7
Standard DC Power Distribution for System Power Supply Units . . . .
1-2-19
1.2.8
Redundant DC Power Distribution System for System Power
Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-20
1.2.9
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) as Backup Power Source -AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-22
1.2.10
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) as Backup Power Source -System Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-23
1.2.11
Diesel or Gasoline Powered AC Generator as Backup Power . . . . . . .
1-2-24
1.2.12
Full Battery Backup Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-26
1.2.13
Partial Battery Backup Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-27
1.3.1
System Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-4
1.3.2
Supplemental Grounding Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-6
1.3.3
Isolation Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-8
1.3.4
System Grounding with Intrinsically Safe Barrier Installation . . . . . . . .
1-3-9
1.3.5
Conductor Bend Radius Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-12
1.3.6
Typical Lightning Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-13
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Contents
SP: iv
List of Tables
Table
Page
1.1.1
RS3 Equipment Temperature and Humidity Operating Ranges . . . . . .
1-1-3
1.1.2
Copper Reactivity Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-4
1.1.3
Classification of Chemically Active Contaminants in cm3/m3 (ppm) . .
1-1-5
1.1.4
Guidelines for Environmental Characterization by Visual Changes
in Copper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-6
1.1.5
Interpreting Humidity Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-7
1.1.6
Shock and Vibration Limits for All Environmental Categories . . . . . . . .
1-1-11
1.1.7
Electromagnetic Field Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-14
1.1.8
Constant Percentage (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-18
1.2.1
Equipment DC Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-9
1.2.2
Power Consumption for AC Powered Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-13
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Contents
SP: 1-1-1
Section 1:
Environmental Considerations
The RS3 distributed control system (DCS) does not require a
clean-room environment. However, equipment can be damaged if
subjected to atmospheric contaminants that form acids upon
condensation. Particulate material (dust) can short circuit electrical
components, restrict cooling air flow by clogging filters, and damage
mechanical components such as disk and tape drives and their
magnetic media.
The RS3 distributed control system is designed for indoor use.
This section provides information you can use to understand, measure,
and control your plant environment. A proper environment promotes
reliable operation of your process control system, whereas a poor
environment can greatly limit the reliable performance and overall
service-life of the system.
The importance of considering the site environment cannot be
understated. Whether installing a new system in a new plant, a new
system in an existing plant, or expanding an existing system,
environmental conditions must be considered, both in the immediate
area and in surrounding areas.
For example, a system may be located in a geographic area where
temperature and humidity are naturally high. Or, the process may add
heat or humidity, contaminants in the form of dust such as fly-ash from a
boiler, or corrosive vapors such as hydrogen sulfide (H2S). Obviously,
areas with these environment conditions can affect the operation of
electronic equipment. Temperature, humidity, dust (including carbon),
and corrosive vapors can cause gradual performance degradation,
intermittent failures, and malfunctions.
To ensure maximum system efficiency and reliability, the environment in
which the system is installed must not have a detrimental effect on
system operation. Therefore, all environmental conditions must be
accounted for in installation planning. Once the conditions are
identified, environmental control equipment is designed to maintain
proper environmental operating conditions within the range of the most
limited instrument.
For example, Multipoint I/O equipment is designed to operate reliably in
certain moderately corrosive environments. However, if a mainframe
computer that normally has more stringent environmental control
requirements is also installed in the area, then environmental control
must be upgraded to protect the computer.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-2
Therefore, installation planning requires both atmospheric environment
identification and the best method to protect system equipment.
Methods may have to encompass the total process area, the control
room only, or even individual equipment enclosures. If, for example, I/O
equipment and terminations will be located in a rack-room where the
atmosphere will be hostile to them, the room atmosphere must be
controlled. If the same instruments will be located on a plant floor with a
hostile environment, protecting cabinets are required.
Optimum Equipment Reliability
For optimum equipment reliability and operation, environmental control
systems must maintain the ambient temperature, relative humidity, and
hourly variations of these, within normal operating limits.
When solid-state electronic equipment is operated within the specified
temperature and humidity limits, normal reliability based on Mean Time
Between Failure (MTBF) calculations can be expected. As equipment
is operated in continuously higher temperatures, the failure rate
increases. As a rule of thumb, the equipment failure rate can be
expected to double for every 10°C temperature increase above
reference limits that occurs in the environment where the equipment is
located.
The equipment is designed to operate in the following environments (as
defined by standards published in IEC 1010--1):
D
System level overvoltage classification: Installation Category II
D
Pollution degree 2
D
Altitude limit 2000 meters (6560 feet)
Table 1.1.1 lists the temperature and humidity operating ranges for RS3
equipment.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-3
Table 1.1.1. RS3 Equipment Temperature and Humidity Operating Ranges
Storage Environment
Equipment
Operating Environment
Temperature
Humidity *
Temperature
Temperature
Change
Humidity *
Console Electronics
--40 to 70° C
(--40 to 158° F)
5 to 95%
10 to 40° C
(50 to 104° F)
1.0° C/min.
(1.8° F/min.)
20 to 80%
System Cabinet
Components
--40 to 70° C
(--40 to 158° F)
5 to 95%
0 to 50° C
(32 to 122° F)
0.5° C/min.
(0.9° F/min.)
0 to 90%
Hardened Command
Console
--40 to 70° C
(--40 to 158° F)
5 to 95%
10 to 52° C
(50 to 125° F)
1.0° C/min.
(1.8° F/min.)
0 to 90%
Multipoint I/O
Components
--40 to 85° C
(--40 to 185° F)
5 to 95%
--25 to 70° C
(--13 to 158° F)
1.0° C/min.
(1.8° F/min.)
5 to 90%
System Power
Supply Units
--55 to 85° C
(--67 to 185° F)
5 to 95%
0 to 70° C
(32 to 158° F)
N/A
5 to 95%
*
Noncondensing
Controlling Relative Humidity
One item that requires special emphasis concerns control of relative
humidity. When corrosive vapors are contained in the atmosphere,
average relative humidity must be kept below 50% to prevent the
possibility of condensation.
CAUTION
Preventing condensation is extremely important.
Corrosive vapors dissolving in condensation turn into
acids that begin to erode conductive lands, component
leads, connector pins, and other metal on electronic
equipment. The equipment can become damaged beyond
repair.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-4
Corrosive Environment Effects
Corrosive vapors are air-born contaminants, and as such, can
significantly increase the rate of instrument failures. In severe cases, a
corrosive environment can reduce an entire control system to a
non-repairable state in less than one year. Perhaps more critically, such
an environment can cause loss of accurate process control capability in
less than thirty days.
The following tables classify corrosive environments in terms of copper
reactivity rates in the presence of reactive sulfides, and also identify the
contaminant levels that cause these reactivity rates. Table 1.1.2 shows
these rates in angstroms of film formation on a copper sample after a
30-day exposure.
The Class G1 through GX ratings used in the tables are taken from
Instrument Society of America (ISA) Standard S71.04, Environmental
Conditions for Process Measurement and Control Systems: Air-Born
Contaminants. The standard contains rating definitions and application
information. We use this standard as a guide for product design and
environmental measurement.
Information in Table 1.1.2 is based on copper reactivity in which the
air-born contaminate is reactive sulfides. It is in Angstroms of film
formation per 30 day exposure. The information does not take into
account the synergistic effect of other contaminates such as chlorides.
Usually when chlorides are added to sulfides, especially in the presence
of high humidity, the combination causes copper reactivity to be worse
than the actual visual indication.
Table 1.1.2. Copper Reactivity Rates
Mild
Class G1
Moderate
Class G2
Harsh
Class G3
Special
Class GX
Less than 300
Less than 1000
Less than 2000
Greater than 2000
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-5
Table 1.1.3 lists the gas concentration levels for reference purposes.
They approximate the copper reactivity levels listed in Table 1.1.2 if the
relative humidity is less than 50 percent. For a given gas concentration,
the severity level increases by one level for each 10 percent increase in
relative humidity above 50 percent, and also increases by at least one
level for a relative humidity rate of change greater than 6 percent per
hour.
Table 1.1.3. Classification of Chemically Active Contaminants in cm3/m3 (ppm)
Class G1
(Avg. Value)
Class G2
(Avg. Value)
Class G3
(Avg. Value)
Class GX
(Avg. Value)
Sulphur
Dioxide (SO2)
£0.01
£0.1
£0.3
>0.3
Chlorine (Cl2)
(Relative Humidity
@ 50%)
£0.001
£0.002
£0.01
>0.01
Hydrogen
Fluoride (HF)
£0.001
£0.002
£0.01
>0.01
Ammonia (NH3)
£0.5
£10
£25
>25
Nitrogen
Oxides (NOx)
£0.05
£0.125
£1.25
>1.25
Ozone (O3)
£0.002
£0.025
£0.1
>0.1
Contaminant
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-6
Use of Reactivity Coupons
To obtain a better indication of the combined effects of sulfides and
chlorides, copper and silver reactivity is measured. The available
reactivity coupons contain a copper and a silver strip to give an
accurate indication of the potential for equipment corrosion at a plant
site. The coupons should be placed in the areas of highest exposure,
which is usually in the air stream cooling the equipment.
CAUTION
Damage by corrosive atmospheres occurs to most
instrumentation systems during initial installation and
during maintenance shut-downs. If the system is stored in
a harsh environment or exposed when the environmental
control system is not operational, damage will occur.
We recommend measuring the plant site environment with reactivity
coupons and then properly preparing the site for adequate environment
control before the instrument system is received. Such precaution can
prevent early instrument failure.
A general idea of the environment at your plant site can be determined
by observing exposed copper, such as power bus bars around switch
gear and the trimmed ends of copper power wires. Table 1.1.4 provides
guidelines for determining the harshness of the site environment.
Table 1.1.4. Guidelines for Environmental Characterization by Visual Changes
in Copper
Color of Exposed Copper
No visible change
Corrosion Class
Class G1 (Mild)
Light gold-brown in 4 to 6 months,
gold-brown in 12 months, or slow
change over a longer period
Class G2 (Moderate)
Blue or black in any time period (1)
Class G3 (Harsh) or
Class GX (Special)
Flaking film in 3 to 6 months
(1)
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Class G3 (Harsh)
If copper turns black in about three weeks, the atmosphere is extremely harsh to
electronic components. Users should attempt to lower the corrosive level or
move the equipment to another location.
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-7
Humidity Effects on Reactivity Coupons
The presence or absence of free moisture may attenuate or accelerate
copper or silver reactivity. For instance, when relative humidity is low,
reactivity is slowed. Alternately, when relative humidity is high, reactivity
speeds up. Both conditions can lead to misinterpretation of the
atmosphere. The slow rate can provide a false sense that a minor
problem exists; while a fast rate can do the opposite.
A way exists to minimize misinterpretation. By comparing the sulfide
film formations on the silver and copper coupons, the attenuation or
acceleration effects of humidity can be understood. Table 1.1.5
describes the meaning of the ratios between sulfide film formations on
silver and copper coupons.
Table 1.1.5. Interpreting Humidity Effects
Ratio of Silver Sulfide (Ag2S)
to Copper Sulfide (CuS)
Ag2S ³ 1.5 CuS
Ag2S > 0.5 < 1.5 CuS
Ag2S £ 0.5 CuS
Humidity Indication
Indicates low relative humidity
Indicates humidity has little effect
Indicates high relative humidity
When low relative humidity is indicated, very little moisture condensed
onto the coupons either because the atmosphere inherently contained
little moisture or the moisture was well controlled. The low humidity
may have caused the copper sulfide film formation to have been
attenuated. Additional testing of the environment is recommended.
When little humidly effects are indicated, relative humidity conditions
present during the test period are considered not to have had any
unusual effect on the copper sulfide film formation.
When high relative humidity is indicated, substantial moisture was
condensing on the coupons. The humidity may have caused the copper
sulfide film formation to accelerate. Consideration should be given to
controlling the humidity in this environment.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-8
Dusty Environment Effects
Air-born contaminates, such as uncontrolled dust, can significantly
increase the rate of instrument failures. Dust can cause failure by
insulating instruments from proper heat dissipation and by providing
electrical short circuits through the dust buildup.
Normally, if instruments are installed in an atmosphere containing a
particulate matter concentration of less than 0.1 milligrams of
particulates per cubic meter of dry air, the effects of dust are minimized.
Figure 1.1.1 portrays the size distribution of dust in a typical
atmospheric sample.
Methods are available to reduce particulate size in the surrounding air
and to minimize the effect of dust contamination. One of the most used
methods is air-inlet filters sized to meet the particulate size requirement.
Another often used method is maintaining positive pressure within
instrument enclosures or even the entire equipment room. Of course,
once the method is implemented, properly maintaining the dust control
system by renewing filters periodically and keeping all dust control
equipment operating properly is necessary.
Dust accumulating on electronic equipment can significantly affect its
operation and reliability. For proper filter sizing, some idea of the sizes
of dust normally found in an atmospheric sample is useful. The diagram
in Figure 1.1.1 shows dust sizes, quantities, and percent by volume in a
typical atmospheric sample. The diagram is reproduced courtesy of
Snyder General Corporation, Dallas, TX 75204.
Air-born contaminants can greatly reduce the reliability and life
electronic equipment. Figure 1.1.2 compares the relative size of
common air-born contaminants and illustrates the effective ranges of
popular filters per American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air
conditioning Engineers (A.S.H.R.A.E.) standards. The chart was
provided for reproduction by Cambridge Filter Corporation, Syracuse,
NY 13221-4906.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-9
(1)
(3)
(5)
(4)
Average
Particle
Size —
*Microns.
Proportionate
Quantities
by Particle
Count
30--10
20
1,000
10--5
7-1/2
35,000
0.175
52
5--3
4
50,000
0.250
11
3--1
2
214,000
1.070
6
1--1/2
3/4
1,352,000
6.780
2
1/2--0
1/4
18,280,000
91.720
1
Range of
Particle
Sizes —
*Microns.
(1)
(2)
Percent
by
Particle
Count
Percent by
Volume
(or by Wt.
for uniform
Spec. Grav.)
0.005 %
28 %
It should be pointed out that atmospheric dust varies considerably in particle size as well as
constituents. In the above sample there were very few particles noted which were in excess
of 30 microns in average diameter. With this as an upper limit, the particles were divided into
six size ranges as indicated, with Column (2) indicating the average particle size for each
group. For example the largest group consisted of those particles ranging between 30 and
10 microns — or an average of 20. In this particular size range it will be noted that the
number of particles present is indicated as 1000, as shown in Column 3. This represents the
proportionate quantities by count and indicates the relative number of particles in each size
range based upon 1000 particles for the average 20 micron size.
Figure 1.1.1. Size Distribution of a Typical Atmospheric Dust Sample
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-10
Figure 1.1.2. Relative Size Chart of Common Air Contaminants
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-11
Shock and Vibration Effects
Mechanical influences consist of sinusoidal vibration and shock.
Table 1.1.6 lists the design criteria for shock and vibration limitations.
The limits noted in the table apply to infrequent happenings. Equipment
continuously exposed to vibration or shock conditions may require
additional mounting considerations.
Table 1.1.6. Shock and Vibration Limits for All Environmental Categories
Condition
Shock
Vibration
Operating Test Limits
Storage and
Transportation
Test Limits
98 m/s2 peak acceleration
1/2 sine wave application
11 msec duration
Weight
100 kg
200 kg
300 kg
0.5 mm peak-to-peak
displacement from 5 to 7.11
Hz; 1 m/s2 peak acceleration
from 7.11 to 150 Hz
3 mm peak-to-peak displacement
from 3 to 9.19 Hz; 5 m/s2 peak
acceleration from 9.19 to 150 Hz
Free Fall Height
90 cm
50 cm
45 cm
The operational vibration limit of the system is 30--60 cycles per second
(cps) with an acceleration of 0.20 g (acceleration of gravity) peak (0.03”
peak-to-peak). The static vibration limit is 3--100 cps with peak
acceleration of 0.5 g.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-12
Static and Electromagnetic Effects
If the system enclosure is properly grounded, static discharge during
normal operations will not damage the equipment. Therefore,
personnel operating the equipment do not need to take special
precautions.
Standard electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding precautions, such as
use of a static control wrist strap, should be observed by anyone
servicing the equipment or removing or installing circuit boards.
To limit the buildup of static charge on personnel, carpet in the vicinity of
the equipment must be anti-static.
The use of portable two-way, hand-held radios and cellular telephones
in process plants impose the need for greater protection of process
control instrumentation from electromagnetic interference (EMI). This
requirement extends to protection of software media including diskettes
and magnetic tape.
Two EMI paths exist from a transmission source, such as a hand-held
radio or a cellular telephone. One path is directly to the affected
instrument from the radio antenna. The other path is indirectly by way
of the normal signal and power lines connected to the affected
instrument. In the latter case, the signal and power lines act like a
receiving antenna. RS3 instruments are designed to resist interference
by either path. But, like any instrumentation, maximum protection
occurs when the instruments are properly installed. Installation
instructions for individual pieces of RS3 equipment describe how to
install equipment in a way that provides best immunity to all types of
electromagnetic interference.
In most plant sites, maintenance personnel use hand-held radios for
routine maintenance procedures. If the radios are used within one
meter of process equipment cabinets or enclosure systems and the
doors are open, the effect on the equipment is unpredictable.
Additionally, the signal may be in a “Near Field” area (explained later),
in which case the effect on instrumentation can also be unpredictable.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-13
SAMA Standard PMC33.1, an EMI standard for process control
equipment, provides testing specifications for “Far Field” signals. Such
signals are defined as electromagnetic signals at a distance of one
meter or greater from instrumentation being tested.
Measuring radio signal field strength around cabinets should be part of
a checkout procedure before startup and periodically thereafter.
However, in a near field area, radio signal field strength cannot be
calculated or tested in a repeatable manner. No standards are
presently available for Near Field testing.
Far Field signals consist of a radiation field and a remnant of an
induction field from the radio antenna. At distances of greater than one
meter from the antenna and in the frequency range of most hand-held
radios, the induction field has negligible effects. Only the radiation field
is of concern. However, in the near field area, both the radiation field
and the induction field are important. At a distance equal to the
wavelength divided by 2p, or slightly less than l/6, the two types of fields
have equal intensity. Significant errors can occur if the measuring
instruments are set up too close to the antenna, and the probability for
adverse affects on process control equipment rapidly increases.
Some claims have been made that equipment will operate without
negative effects when a hand-held radio is used in the area of
non-protected units (i.e., open enclosure doors). Although no
degradation may seem to occur initially, large Near Field signals can
begin a circuit degradation that contributes to later failures. Until a
repeatable testing standard is developed, no equipment design can be
considered damage-resistant in Near Field signals, nor can the
equipment operation be considered predictable.
RS3 instrumentation is tested for EMI resistance with cabinet and
console doors closed and all equipment properly grounded electrically.
Closed cabinet and console doors and proper equipment grounding
provide maximum EMI protection. Test procedures are done in
accordance with SAMA Standard PMC33.1. This equipment meets the
conditions listed in Table 1.1.7.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-14
Table 1.1.7. Electromagnetic Field Limits
Environmental
Category
Reference
Operating
Limits
Normal
Operating
Limits
Operative
Limits
Storage and
Transportation
Limits
Category A
100 mV/m
20 to 1000 MHz
0.5 V/m
20 to 1000 MHz
0.5 V/m
20 to 1000 MHz
No Limit
Category B
100 mV/m
20 to 1000 MHz
10 V/m
20 to 1000 MHz
30 V/m
20 to 1000 MHz
No Limit
Category C
100 mV/m
20 to 1000 MHz
10 V/m
20 to 1000 MHz
30 V/m
20 to 1000 MHz
No Limit
To provide maximum protection, run power and signal leads in rigid,
metallic conduit that is solidly connected to a low-impedance ground.
To prevent “signal-ground loops”, electrically ground the conduit at the
power or signal source end only, and use non-conductive fittings to
connect the conduit to system cabinets. Using low-pass capacitive
filters on the signal wires connected to an instrument provides additional
EMI protection. Such filters are usually feed-through devices connected
in series with the instrumentation wires.
Minimizing radiation from an interference source minimizes EMI
problems. Therefore, do not mount radio frequency device antennas in
the vicinity of the instrumentation system. Also, avoid using radio
communication while performing maintenance, especially any time that
cabinet and console doors are open.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-15
Controlling the Environment
Controlling the environment to required specifications pays large
dividends in extended instrument life and overall system reliability.
Depending on the severity of the environment and the system
application, alternate methods for controlling the environment are
available. The four main items that any method must control are
temperature, humidity, dust, and corrosive vapors. Knowing the types
of contaminants in the plant site atmosphere and knowing their normal
sizes helps determine the protection system needed.
Often the best method to control an objectionable environment is to
install all of the system instruments in an environmentally controlled
room. This method may prove to be the most cost effective solution
when flexibility of a plant application is not inhibited. A controlled room
not only protects equipment but it protects plant personnel also.
In such a room, the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC)
system is designed to provide the specified control of temperature,
humidity, dust, and corrosive vapors required. It is tailored to control the
types of dust and corrosive gases on site, and it must maintain relative
humidity under 50%.The system should have redundancy to maximize
reliability.
Humidity control is the single most important factor affecting corrosion
rates when corrosive vapors are present. Control must include both the
average relative humidity and the rate of change per hour of the
humidity. For example, maintaining relative humidity at 45 percent with
changes of less than 6 percent per hour reduces a moderate (Class G2)
environment to a mild (Class G1) one. In contrast, an 80 percent
relative humidity causes a harsh (Class G3) environment when reactive
chlorides are present at a concentration of 0.2 to 0.3 parts per billion.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-16
Care must be given during room design to assure that a minimum
positive pressure of 0.02 milli-bars (0.08 inches of water column) can be
maintained. As a minimum, door air-lock systems are required.
Different types of construction produce different problems. For
instance, cinder block walls are porous and allow outside contaminants
to progress through the walls and eventually contaminate the room air.
To inhibit contaminants, the walls must be sealed and painted with a
water-proof paint, such as an epoxy-based or similar paint. This
sealing, along with positive pressure inside the room, effectively controls
contaminant ingress. Concrete floors present a major dust potential
unless the floors are cleaned and sealed. The dust from the floors can
clog air filters and may cause early instrument failure from excessive
heat buildup.
All pipes, cables, and conduit passing through the walls, floors, and
ceilings require sealing to maintain positive air pressure. Avoid use of
porous materials, such as fiberglass batts, to seal the holes. Open
pipes and conduit must be capped or plugged to prevent air passage.
Additionally, cooking, eating, and smoking activities must be excluded
from the room once the instrumentation system is installed.
“Blast-Proof” rooms require special construction and sealing techniques.
Experts and contractors for this type of construction should be
consulted.
For installations located on the plant floor or in remote areas, several
methods are available to control the environment. If a small room
cannot be built, then sealed cabinets or enclosure systems may be
used. The same criteria for proper environmental control applies to
cabinets and enclosure systems as it does for control rooms. As with
control rooms, the amount and types of environmental control must be
determined and then designed into the cabinet or enclosure system.
For example, needed control might include temperature only, humidity
and particulate filtration only, or perhaps particulate filtration only.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-17
If temperature and humidity control is needed, it can be accomplished
by using a small HVAC system that is mounted on the cabinet or
enclosure system, or it can be a central unit feeding several cabinet or
enclosure systems in various locations.
Another possibility is to use a purging system that supplies clean, cool,
dry air or inert gas to pressurize a cabinet or enclosure system. As with
HVAC systems, purging systems are designed for control of a specific
environment.
Often, remote process areas are a type in which high temperature and
high relative humidity occur, which also changes depending on the
weather and time of year. In addition, dust contamination is high and
high levels of corrosive gases are present. To overcome this
environment, a clean air source is found, the size and type of enclosure
(normally plastic or fiberglass in a corrosive environment) is determined,
and the volume of air required to maintain an air pressure of 0.08
inches of water column is planned. A clean air source may be high
quality instrument air or air from a locally placed chemical and
particulate filtration system.
Additionally, the cleaning system required to purge the air after a
cabinet or enclosure system door has been opened and then re-closed
must be selected. And, finally, a location to keep the cabinet or
enclosure system out of direct sunlight is selected.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-18
A rough calculation can be made to determine the air flow in cubic feet
per minute (CFM) required to maintain air pressure between 0.8 and 0.1
inches of water column. Calculation is made with the following formula:
Air Flow = (C) (width x height x depth of the room)
“C” is a constant percentage of the area volumes needed to maintain
the correct air pressure. Use Table 1.1.8 to determine the value of “C”.
Table 1.1.8. Constant Percentage (C)
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Enclosure Type
C
NEMA 12 Enclosure
5%
Blast-Proof Room
1.5 to 3.0 %
Sealed Concrete-Block-Wall Room
5 to 7 %
Typical Room Construction
10 to 12 %
Loose Room Construction
17 to 25 %
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-19
Maintaining the Environment
Maintenance of an environmental control system is equally as important
as that of the process control system.
The importance of maintaining the environmental control system can
not be overemphasized. Failure of the environmental system has a
direct effect on the reliability of the process control system. Once
corrosion begins on process control equipment, the damage caused by
corrosion is normally not reversible.
The usual item not regularly maintained is air filters. Yet, clogged air
filters directly contribute to early instrument failure by disrupting proper
instrument cooling. Clogged or used up chemical filters allow corrosive
contaminants to surround the instruments. Damaged air-lock seals and
air-lock doors held open allow contaminants to enter protected rooms or
enclosures.
Thus, scheduled preventive maintenance and periodic general
inspection for damage becomes important to optimum control system
reliability. Ongoing environmental system maintenance must be part of
up-front system installation planning.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-1-20
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Environmental Considerations
SP: 1-2-1
Section 2:
Power Requirements
This section describes RS3 AC and DC power requirements and
provides system-level recommendations and guidelines for AC and DC
power installation. Specific instructions for wiring and grounding of
individual products may be found in the appropriate product installation
section. Proper wiring and grounding is of prime importance for
operator safety, signal integrity, and electrical protection of the
instrumentation system.
NOTE: Because of differing output voltages, AC/DC power supplies
cannot be mixed on a DC bus with System Power Supply Units.
These recommendations and guidelines meet or exceed all applicable
codes. All power and ground wiring practices must conform to locally
applicable codes and regulations. The recommendations and wiring
diagrams in this planning manual are, therefore, typical examples rather
than specific requirements. Primary emphasis is on safety and proper
equipment operation.
While these recommendations and guidelines attempt to cover most
situations, there will no doubt be particular installations that may deviate
from the norm. In these situations, contact your representative for
assistance.
Plant distribution problems can be minimized by following these
recommendations to the maximum extent possible.
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Provide a dedicated AC power/cabinet/DC ground connection
(accessible for testing) for the instrumentation system.
Connect consoles or computers and associated peripherals
(which are connected together by non-isolated signal cables) to
the same power distribution and ground system.
Connect all cabinets within a grouping to one circuit breaker
panel and utilize the same ground system.
Earth ground connection must be in accordance with local, state,
and federal codes. Insure the integrity of this connection.
Provide a low impedance, high integrity ground path between all
instrumentation and the RS3 ground connection.
Limit the potential difference between the signal common and
power supply common to a maximum of 200 millivolts DC at each
device, with all units powered.
Provide an intercabinet ground for all cabinets interconnected by
non-isolated signals. Also provide an intercabinet ground for all
cabinets sharing a backup power supply.
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-2
NOTE: Devices connected only by the PeerWay do not require
connection to the same ground system. Systems so isolated may also
have separate power sources.
Commercial AC power utilities normally provide power that meets the
voltage and frequency requirements of the instrumentation system.
However, plant distribution networks may drop 5 percent or more of the
input AC power between the service entrance point to the plant and the
final power connection to the various portions of the instrumentation
system. Furthermore, starting transients from large motors and other
loads connected to the distribution system can cause additional
momentary line-voltage reductions as well as possible wave shape
distortions.
System AC power problems are of two types:
D
AC power quality
D
Plant distribution system
Quality problems generally consist of loss of power, intermittent noise,
low voltage, or transients and surges on power lines. To suppress
electrical noise, a dedicated feeder between the main distribution panel
and the instrumentation system branch panel is recommended. If low
voltage from the commercial power source or objectionable transients
and surges exists, or if noise is a problem even with a dedicated feeder,
then a device (such as a noise filter or voltage regulating power source)
that reduces input power noise may be required.
Devices that can be used include:
D
Isolation transformer
D
Noise filters
D
Line conditioner
D
Voltage regulating power source
D
Motor-generator set
D
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
NOTE: Do not use an isolation transformer, voltage regulating power
source, or uninterruptible power supply with a ferroresonant transformer
as its output device unless it is rated at least 3 kVA for each standard
AC/DC power supply it powers. Use of a smaller ferroresonant
transformer can result in oscillations.
If loss of power from a commercial power source is a problem, then a
backup power source for critical portions of the control system is
recommended.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-3
The instrumentation system should have a separately derived AC power
source that is isolated from all other loads; each building or site
containing instrumentation should have a separate power device or
backup power source. This is particularly important for the
instrumentation system control center, which generally contains the
consoles, controllers, and associated equipment. The power source
should be supplied from the highest line voltage available from the
commercial source, and only the instrumentation system equipment
should be connected to the secondary.
The reason for using the highest voltage is to take advantage of the
natural noise attenuation of the transformer when stepping down the
voltage. The power source should have sufficient capacity to handle
inrush overcurrents or surge currents (lasting about ten cycles), and still
regulate its output voltage within the nominally rated voltage tolerances
for the equipment. This tolerance is measured at the power input to the
equipment when the equipment is energized.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-4
Power Distribution Overview
The power distribution system consists of one or more of:
D
AC Entrance Panel with AC/DC Power Supplies
or
System Power Supply Units
D
Dual (A/B) DC Distribution Bus
D
DC Distribution Card
D
DC Distribution Cable
Figure 1.2.1 shows an overview of the system that includes an AC/DC
power supply. The AC Panel is used to power peripheral devices such
as CRTs and printers; and is also used to feed the cabinet fans and the
AC/DC Power Supplies. The power supply feeds the DC bus. One DC
Distribution Card feeds a ControlFile, and another feeds an Analog
Card Cage.
Figure 1.2.2 shows an overview of the system that includes a System
Power Supply Unit. System Power Supply Units do not require an AC
Entrance Panel.
For details, see Chapter 5, System Cables and Power Distribution:
SP:5-2-1 AC Distribution System
SP:5-3-1 AC/DC Power Supplies
SP:5-4-1 System Power Supply Units
SP:5-5-1 DC Distribution System
CAUTION
Extra-Low Voltage (ELV) is no more than 30 volts rms,
42.4 volts peak, and 60 volts DC. Hazardous voltage is any
voltage above ELV levels. The following rules must be
observed when installing wiring for any hazardous voltage:
External terminal wiring must have double or reinforced
insulation for the maximum supply voltage used. To
ensure single fault protection, a locking lug must be used
at the external terminals. The external terminals are
suitable for use with up to 12 AWG wire.
Field I/O wiring shall not be connected directly to the
mains supply without overcurrent protection. All AC mains
supplies, including I/O wiring must be provided with an
external switch and overcurrent protection devices, or a
circuit breaker that can be manually operated as a switch.
The external switch or circuit breaker must be installed
near the equipment.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-5
CAUTION
If the caution symbol shown on the left is present on the
cabinet door (near the handle), then multiple mains supply
circuits are located within the cabinet. Isolate all mains
supplies prior to servicing.
Utility
AC Mains
Supply
User-Supplied
Overcurrent Protection
AC Mains
Service
Entrance
15A
Distribution
Panel
30A
Printer
CRT
AC Entrance
Panel
To Cabinet Fans
AC/DC
Power
Supply
DC Distribution Card
+
Fuse
--
Bus A
Return
Bus B
ControlFile
Analog
Card Cage
Figure 1.2.1. Power Distribution Overview -- RS3 with AC/DC Power Supply
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-6
Utility
AC Mains
Supply
User-Supplied
Overcurrent Protection
AC Mains
Service
Entrance
15 A
Distribution
Panel
30 A
System
Power
Supply Unit
CRT
Printer
DC Distribution Card
+
Fuse
--
Bus A
Return
Bus B
Auxiliary Output
to Cabinet Fan
ControlFile
Analog
Card Cage
Figure 1.2.2. Power Distribution Overview -- RS3 with System Power Supply Unit
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-7
AC Power
AC power is required by the power supplies, cabinet fans, console
CRTs, and printers. AC power is also required for distributed I/O
cabinets, fans, and optional cooling units.
The RS3 distributed control system power requirements may vary with
different OEM equipment. Check appropriate sections for ratings of
these mains-powered components.
The required power falls within the following operating specifications:
AC/DC Power Supplies
D
Voltage Range:
115 VAC (100 to 137 VAC)
230 VAC (200 to 264 VAC)
D
D
Frequency Range:
Harmonic Distortion:
50 Hz
(47.6 to 52.4 Hz)
60 Hz
(57.0 to 63.0 Hz)
5% maximum
System Power Supply Units
D
Voltage Range:
85--264 VAC
D
Frequency Range:
47--63 Hz
The AC/DC power supplies do not require line conditioning, such as
isolation or regulation-type transformers, to reduce AC line noise or to
regulate the incoming voltage. The AC distribution panel contains a
capacitive filter for noise spikes. The transformers in the AC/DC power
supplies are of a ferroresonant design that provides noise immunity,
voltage regulation, and inherent current limiting. The AC distribution
panel provides AC input filtering and regulation as well as adequate
protection for the 30 VDC power under all but the most severe AC input
conditions.
Line conditioning may be required to supply clean power to the console
CRTs and printers. Conditioning may also be required for power
supplies used with distributed I/O components.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-8
AC Voltage Regulation
For input AC voltage variations within the nominal ranges, the system
does not require additional input AC regulation. However, if the average
AC input voltage is expected to be outside this range, you can use an
automatic AC tap switching-type transformer.
NOTE: A small ferroresonant-type regulating transformer is not
recommended as an AC signal conditioner because the AC/DC power
supplies use this type of transformer. An small ferroresonant source
transformer can produce an instability in the supply voltage to the
system and may cause oscillations. A ferroresonant source transformer
that is at least three times larger than the one in the power supply is
acceptable. You can use ferroresonant transformers to regulate power
to the console color monitors and printers.
AC Voltage Dropout -- AC/DC Power Supplies
Internal batteries in the standard AC/DC power supplies protect the
system from voltage loss during brief AC voltage dropouts for all parts
of the system powered by the DC distribution system. The protection
time depends on the number of supplies and the system DC load.
However, any part of the system that is not powered by the system DC
bus loses power during AC power loss. This includes console CRTs,
printers, system cabinet fans, self-powered transmitters, and any other
AC powered devices. The remote power supplies typically used with
distributed I/O cabinets do not have built-in battery backup, so some
other protection from AC line dropout (such as a UPS) must be
provided.
The AC/DC power supply is also available without batteries for
installations with an uninterruptible power supply.
NOTE: System Power Supply Units do not have a battery backup.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-9
AC Power Consumption
The AC load for each entrance panel can be determined by:
1. Finding the DC load on the bus.
2. Finding the number of AC/DC power supplies.
3. Calculating the AC load.
Finding the DC Load on a Bus
The DC load on a bus is computed by adding the loads of all devices
attached to the bus. Table 1.2.1 gives the nominal current draw for
30 VDC and 24 VDC and local heat dissipation for equipment powered
from the DC bus.
NOTE: All estimates assume a fully configured unit to allow for
expansion.
Table 1.2.1. Equipment DC Power Consumption
Nominal
Current
at 30 VDC
Amps
Nominal
Current
at 24 VDC
Amps
Heat
Output
Watts
(BTU/hr)
Multitube Command Console (MTCC) and System Manager
Station
3.11
3.67
105.5
(360)
Command Console Electronics
3.76
4.70
113
(385)
--
--
6
(20)
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
1.7
2.12
54.4
(185)
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
1.7
2.12
54.4
(185)
PeerWay Extender (A B Pair)
.14
.18
12
(41)
--
--
16
(55)
Component
Consoles and PeerWay Interfaces
Keyboard Interface, Operator Keyboard, Loop Call-up
(DC current included in Command Console Electronics)
PeerWay Tap (A B Pair)
(continued on next page)
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-10
Table 1.2.1. Equipment DC Power Consumption (continued)
Nominal
Current
at 30 VDC
Amps
Nominal
Current
at 24 VDC
Amps
Heat
Output
Watts
(BTU/hr)
10.10
12.63
305
(1040)
--
--
--
Transfer Card
1984--2494--xxxx
.09
.11
3
(10)
Output Bypass Card
1984--2551--xxxx
.11
.14
4
(12)
4--20 mA 2 in/1 out
1984--2518--xxxx or 10P5444xxxx
.19
.24
5.8
(20)
4--20 mA 2 with Smart Daughterboard
1984--2519--xxxx
.22
.27
6.6
(23)
Pulse Input/Output
1984--2546--xxxx or 10P5447xxxx
.28
.35
7
(24)
Temperature Input
1984--2731--xxxx
.11
.14
4
(12)
Multiplexer FlexTerm
(With Power Supply and Communications Board)
.42
.52
13
(43)
Multiplexer Front End Module (FEM)
.03
.04
1
(3)
.06
.07
1.8
(6)
.71
.86
21
(72)
Component
ControlFiles
ControlFile (fully loaded)
Analog FlexTerm
Communication Connect Card III, V 1984--2543--xxxx or
10P5456xxxx (Draws negligible DC current)
Field Interface Cards (FICs)
Multiplexer
Programmable Logic Controller/Rosemount Basic
Language (PLC/RBL) FlexTerm
PLC/RBL Interface Card 1984--2402--xxxx or
1984--2441--xxxx or 10P5485xxxx or 10P5488xxxx
Miscellaneous
RNI 10P5333xxxx
(continued on next page)
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-11
Table 1.2.1. Equipment DC Power Consumption (continued)
Nominal
Current
at 30 VDC
Amps
Nominal
Current
at 24 VDC
Amps
Heat
Output
Watts
(BTU/hr)
Direct Discrete Termination Panel 1984--4127--xxxx or
10P5270xxxx with redundant FIMs
.12
.15
6
(20)
note 1
MultiFIM Discrete Termination Panel 1984--4282--xxxx with
3 DIO FIMs 10P5352xxxx or 1984--4080--xxxx
.18
.22
11
(38)
note 1
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel (A and B)
1984--4121--xxxx and 1984--4124--xxxx with redundant
DIO FIMs 10P5352xxxx or 1984--4080--xxxx and
120 VAC or 24 VDC solid state relay modules
.13
.16
35
(119)
note 2
High-Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel
1984--4167--xxxx with DIO FIM 10P5352xxxx or
1984--4080--xxxx and 120 VAC or 24 VDC
solid state relay modules
.07
.09
33
(113)
note 2
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel (A and B)
1984--4121--xxxx and 1984--4124--xxxx with redundant
DIO FIMs 10P5352xxxx or 1984--4080--xxxx and
240 VAC solid state relay modules
.13
.16
50
(171)
note 2
High-Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel
1984--4167--xxxx with DIO FIM 10P5352xxxx or
1984--4080--xxxx and 240 VAC solid state relay modules
.07
.09
48
(164)
note 2
DIO IS Barrier Panel (A and B) with FIMs and barriers
10P5037xxxx and 10P5049xxxx
1.96
2.07
59
(201)
MAIO IS Barrier Panel with FIMs and barriers 10P5034xxxx
1.44
1.81
43
(147)
MAIO 16-point I/O Termination Panel with FIMs and Loop
Power Modules 10P5477xxxx
.67
.82
22
(75)
MAI 32-point Input Termination Panel (10P5349xxxx) with
FIM 10P53190004
.18
.21
9
(31)
Component
Multipoint I/O
(1)
Heat output includes some field power.
(2)
Heat output includes field side power dissipated in solid state relay modules. This figure assumes either
all inputs or input-output mix, with output leads averaging 1 amp.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-12
Finding the Number of Power Supplies Required
AC/DC Power Supplies
To determine the number of AC/DC power supplies needed to power
the DC bus:
1. Add the DC current requirements of all equipment that will be fed
from the DC bus.
2. Add an allowance for equipment expansion.
3. Multiply the total current draw by 0.06. This is an empirical
number to handle both startup and maximum operating loads.
Power Supplies Needed = 0.06 (Total Current Draw)
4. Round up the resulting number to the next higher number to find
the number of power supplies needed.
Many sites add one extra supply as an on-line standby. This provides
N+1 redundancy coverage should one supply fail.
The limit is six supplies on one bus. The power supply is rated for a
maximum DC output of 22 amps. Normal design loads each supply at
about 10 to 18 amps. The crest factor (peak current divided by average
current) is approximately 1.3. The power factor is about .90 lagging.
System Power Supply Units
To determine the number of System Power Supply Units needed to
power the DC bus:
1. Calculate the total DC amps that will be drawn.
2. Divide the total amps by 36 (this is 80% of the total output).
3. Round up to the next whole number.
4. Add one for redundancy.
The limit is four power supplies on one bus.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-13
Determining the Number of AC Entrance Panels
The AC Entrance Panel has three breakers (10-amp for 230 VAC and
15-amp for 115 VAC). Each power supply requires use of one breaker,
and the cabinet fans normally require one breaker. Therefore, a system
with two power supplies uses two breakers for the supplies and one for
the fans, thus using the full capacity of one AC Entrance Panel. Breakers
can be available for other uses if more than one panel is required.
NOTE: System Power Supply Units do not use AC entrance panels.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-14
Determining the Total AC Load
The total AC load can be determined by adding the power requirements
of system components and any other AC powered devices. Table 1.2.2
lists power consumption and heat output for equipment powered directly
from an AC power source.
Table 1.2.2. Power Consumption for AC Powered Equipment
Total Current
@ 115 VAC
Amps
Total Current
@ 220 VAC
Amps
Heat Output Watts
(BTU)
AC/DC Power Supply
8
4
120
(410)
System Power Supply Unit
15
10
514 at full load
(1754)
Multitube Command Console 21” CRT
3.0
1.8
150
(512)
Multitube Command Console 19” CRT
3.0
1.5
422
(1440)
Multitube Command Console 14” CRT
0.8
0.4
Printer—Fujitsu DPL4600C
3.4
1.5
286
(975)
Printer—Fujitsu DL3800C
2.1
1.1
242
(825)
Hansman Cabinet Fan
1.0
0.5
100
(341)
Rittal Cabinet Fan (EBM Industries, Inc.)
1.2
1.0
138
(472)
Device
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-15
Power Supply Redundancy
AC/DC Power Supplies
If your process requires a dual AC entrance, the dual AC Distribution
Panel permits the entrance of two separate AC sources. The output
side to the system is the same as with the single entrance panel.
If your process requires redundant power supplies, add one additional
power supply to the number you calculate and you will have sufficient
capacity to carry the system load if one power supply fails. Check to
see if another AC Entrance Panel is necessary to feed this power
supply.
If your process requires redundant DC distribution buses, use the
calculated number of power supplies on each bus. This will power the
two independent DC buses (A and B) and the system will survive the
loss of either DC bus by drawing off the other bus.
A block diagram of the power distribution system is shown in
Figure 1.2.3. The AC line input is brought to an AC Entrance Panel and
then distributed to AC loads such as the AC/DC Power Supply. The
AC/DC Power Supply produces 30 volt DC for distribution throughout
the system. The DC Distribution Bus carries power within a system
cabinet. A DC output card (not shown) provides a connection between
the bus and a DC Distribution Cable to the device.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-16
AC/DC
Power
Supply
AC Entrance Panel
AC Input
AC Distribution Line
DC Distribution
Bus
DC Cable
Device
DC Distribution Cable
Figure 1.2.3. Power Distribution System
Power specifications for this power distribution system are:
D
Voltage Range:
115 VAC (100 to 137 VAC)
230 VAC (200 to 264 VAC)
D
Frequency Range:
50 cycle (47.6 to 52.4 Hz)
60 cycle (57.0 to 63.0 Hz)
D
Harmonic Distortion:
5% maximum
NOTE: This is a distributed power system. Therefore, the secondary
power servicing the various parts of the building must be grounded to
the building service entrance with an impedance of less than 1 ohm at
60 Hz. All electrical equipment cabinets must be grounded with no
more than 1 ohm impedance at 60 Hz between the cabinet ground and
the building service entrance ground.
Provision is made for redundancy at each level:
D
D
D
RS3: Preliminary Planning
You may use two independent AC power sources.
You may use load-sharing redundant power supplies on a single
DC distribution bus.
You may use a dual redundant DC distribution system with two
independent sets of power supplies on the standard dual DC
power bus.
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-17
The standard AC/DC Power Supply has built-in battery backup to bridge
short power outages. Other forms of uninterruptible power supply can
be used to augment or replace the built-in battery backup. Power
supplies without batteries are available for such installations.
There are several different ways in which system power can be
installed. Figure 1.2.4 shows examples of single and redundant system
AC power. With single-source AC power (no redundancy), if the AC
power source fails, the system eventually fails. With redundant AC
power, if one AC power source fails, the system relies on the second AC
power source. The DC buses A and B are normally tied together.
Single AC Power Source
AC Entrance
Panel
Redundant AC Power Source
AC Entrance
Panel
DC
Power
Supply
DC
Power
Supply
Bus A
Return
Bus A
Return
Bus B
Bus B
System
Device
Single-source AC power
(no redundancy)
System
Device
Redundant AC power
Figure 1.2.4. Examples of System AC Power Sources
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-18
Figure 1.2.5 shows an additional power supply. The redundant DC
power supplies share the load. If one DC power supply fails, the other
DC supply assumes the load. Most sites install one more power supply
than required to carry the load. If one fails, there is still enough capacity
to run the system.
Standard AC/DC power supplies have built-in battery backup sufficient
to bridge short power outages and provide time for a graceful shutdown
for longer outages. Additional battery backup, in the form of an
uninterruptible DC power supply, may be used. This backs up the DC
powered portion of the system. Other means are required for AC
powered equipment such as CRTs.
Redundant AC Power
Source
AC Entrance
Panel
DC
Power
Supply
Load Sharing DC Power
Supply
Bus A
Ground
Bus B
System
Device
Figure 1.2.5. Redundant AC Power and Load Sharing DC Power Supplies
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-19
Figure 1.2.6 shows the highest available level of power supply
redundancy. DC bus A and DC bus B are individually fed from fully
redundant sources. The power supply is now redundant from the AC
power source to the system device.
Redundant AC Power
Source
AC Entrance
Panel
AC Entrance
Panel
DC
Power
Supply
DC
Power
Supply
Bus A
Return
Bus B
System
Device
Redundant Buses A and B
Figure 1.2.6. Redundant AC Power, Load Sharing DC Power Supplies, and Redundant Power Buses
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-20
System Power Supply Units
The RS3 Millennium Package (RMP) has a redundant power supply
without a battery backup. It must have a minimum of two System
Power Supply modules.
NOTE: Because there is no battery backup, there must always be one
extra power supply module than what is needed.
Non-redundant Bus Configuration
A standard, non-redundant, DC power distribution system consists of
one or more System Power Supply Units feeding one or more DC
Distribution Bus assemblies. Figure 1.2.7 shows a standard bus A/B
operation.
A DC Distribution Bus should have no more than two System Power
Supply Units (four DC outputs) wired to it, redundant power supply
modules included.
NOTE: If a single System Power Supply Unit is used, the configuration
should be the standard A/B distribution as shown in Figure 1.2.7.
Bus A/B Power Supply Modules (up to 4)
System Power
Supply Unit 2
PS2
--
+
System Power
Supply Unit 1
PS1
--
+
PS2
--
Bus A
Return Bus
Bus B
+
DC Bus to DC Bus
Jumper
PS1
--
+
Bus A
Return Bus
Bus B
Figure 1.2.7. Standard DC Power Distribution for System Power Supply Units
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-21
Redundant Bus Configuration
Figure 1.2.8 represents a redundant DC power distribution configuration
consisting of one System Power Supply Unit feeding bus A and another
System Power Supply Unit feeding bus B. Buses A and B are not
connected.
Each bus (A and B) needs to have a separate redundant power supply
module, so a total of two redundant power supply modules are needed
for a redundant DC power distribution. (This would be a redundant
bus/redundant power supply configuration, which meets the N+1
redundancy requirement.)
The redundant bus configuration must have the same number of power
supply modules on each bus. Four power supply modules (two Power
Supply Units) is the maximum allowed for both buses.
Bus A/B Power Supply Modules (up to 4)
System Power
Supply Unit 2
PS2
--
+
System Power
Supply Unit 1
PS1
--
+
PS2
--
+
Bus A
Return Bus
Bus B
DC Bus to DC Bus
Jumper
PS1
--
+
Bus A
Return Bus
Bus B
Figure 1.2.8. Redundant DC Power Distribution System for System Power Supply Units
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-22
Supplemental Power Systems
Individual installations may require that power to the system be
maintained through an AC power loss. You can provide AC power
backup with dual AC power sources, an uninterruptible power supply
(UPS), a motor generator, or extended battery backup. You should
locate supplemental power system equipment in a protected utility area.
Dual AC Power Sources
The dual AC Entrance Panel (used with AC/DC power supplies only)
allows a primary and secondary AC input for two power sources. Upon
the loss of the primary AC source, the secondary is automatically
switched in through an internal switching mechanism. These two
sources need not be in phase with each other. With standard AC/DC
battery-backed up power supplies, a 500-millisecond lag during
switchover does not affect system operation. Automatic switching back
to the primary is provided as soon as primary (upper input connection)
power returns. Alarm relay contacts are provided on the dual AC
Entrance Panel to indicate the active input.
Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS)
AC/DC Power Supplies
You can use a commercially available uninterruptible power supply
(UPS) as the primary source of system power (connected to the upper
input of the dual AC distribution) with the utility power as the secondary
source, or the UPS can be used as the backup to the utility power. The
UPS system can also supply command console CRT power. However,
because of efficiency and cost reasons, the UPS may not be the most
reasonable way to back up system power.
The UPS must be able to support the AC/DC power supplies:
D
D
D
D
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Be suitable for operation with the ferroresonant regulating
transformers in the RS3 AC/DC Power supplies.
Have voltage and frequency within the AC/DC power supply
limits.
Have no more than 5% total harmonic distortion.
Have Power Factor of approximately 0.90 leading.
Power Factor = (Average Power)/(Apparent Power)
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-23
D
D
Handle Inrush current of 60 amps for <10 ms and surge current
of 23 amps for <500 ms (per power supply at 115 VAC).
Have a Crest Factor of approximately 1.29.
(Crest Factor) = (Peak Current)/(RMS Current)
Figure 1.2.9 shows an example of a UPS used as a power backup for
AC/DC power supplies. Utility power is used to provide primary power
to the system. The power changeover can also be handled by a single
external switching mechanism rather than by multiple AC distribution
panels. If the UPS system is to be the primary source of power, the
UPS system must be capable of handling all power requirements of the
system with a 100% duty cycle.
NOTE: The UPS must supply an AC load of at least 1.5 times the
system AC requirement.
AC Service
Entrance Panel
Uninterruptible
Power Supply
(UPS)
DC to AC
Converter
AC Out
Battery
Charger
Battery Bank
Sized for
Required
Backup Time.
+
Dual AC
Distribution
AC/DC
Power Supplies
UPS Sized to Handle Full AC Load
Figure 1.2.9. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) as Backup Power Source -- AC/DC Power Supplies
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-24
System Power Supply Units
You can use a commercially available UPS as the primary source of
system power. The UPS system can also supply command console
CRT power. However, the UPS may not be the most effecient or
cost-effective way to back up system power.
The UPS must be able to support the System Power Supply Units:
D
D
D
Having voltage and frequency within the System Power Supply
limits.
Handling inrush current of 50 amps for <10 ms and surge current
of 23 amps for <500 ms (per power supply at 115 VAC).
Supplying a crest factor of approximately 1.29
(Crest Factor) = (Peak Current)/(RMS Current).
Figure 1.2.10 shows an example of a UPS used as a power backup for
a System Power Supply Unit. Utility power provides primary power to
the system. Power is routed through a 30 amp breaker, to the UPS and
on to each power supply module. If the UPS system is the primary
source of power, it must be capable of handling all power requirements
of the system with a 100% duty cycle.
NOTE: The UPS must supply an AC load of at least 1.5 times the
system AC requirement.
L
N
UPS
G
L
N
G
L
N
G
30 Amp
Breaker
+
-+
--
L
UPS
N
G
30 Amp
Breaker
Figure 1.2.10. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) as Backup Power Source -- System
Power Supply Units
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-25
Motor Generator -- AC/DC Power Supplies
You can use a gasoline or diesel-powered AC generator as an
economical means of providing backup power for an indefinite period of
time. The generator must use a startup mechanism that provides
power to the system before the internal AC/DC power supply batteries
are drained. A properly maintained diesel generator with an automatic
startup system can provide power within 10 to 30 seconds. Remember
that the AC powered equipment (command console CRTs, printers, etc.)
will be off during the period of time it takes to start the generator.
Frequency of the incoming power should be kept within three cycles of
the nominal 50 or 60 Hz. Figure 1.2.11 shows an example of a
generator used as backup power for a system.
Output
Lamps
Input
Lamps
Ä
Ä Ä
Ä Ä
Ä
Ä Ä
Ä Ä
Primary Input
Secondary Input
AC Service
Entrance
Panel
Dual AC
Distribution
Panel
Primary Input
AC
Input
Diesel or Gasoline
Powered AC
Generator
Secondary
Input
Figure 1.2.11. Diesel or Gasoline Powered AC Generator as Backup Power
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-26
Extended Battery Backup -- AC/DC Power Supplies
A 24-volt battery backup system can provide an economical and
efficient means of storing power. You can use a small 24 VDC to 120 or
220 VAC power inverter to back up CRTs, printers, and cabinet fans.
Full Battery Backup
Figure 1.2.12 shows an example of a battery backup system that
provides full backup capability. This requires the use of both the A and
B DC power bus in a redundant configuration. An isolation diode is not
required in the secondary DC bus input line because diode isolation is
present in each system DC power supply at all system components.
The battery must float with reference to ground to allow the DC return to
be connected to the grounding electrode. Each DC distribution system
is sized to handle a maximum of 132 amps DC. Battery cables must be
sized for minimum voltage drop.
You should use appropriate fusing along with a mechanism to
disconnect the batteries when the battery voltage drops below 18 volts.
Disconnecting the system power below 18 volts prevents the cards from
trying to restart after a low voltage dropout and eliminates complete
battery drain, which could damage the batteries.
Power for the system is supplied by the AC/DC power supplies, which
run nominally at 30 volts. In the event of a power failure, the 24 volt
batteries pick up the load immediately. You should choose battery
capacity according to required backup time. You should size the battery
charger to allow the batteries to charge in a reasonable amount of time.
The battery charger and batteries must float with reference to ground to
allow the ground connection to be made at the system return bus bar.
A DC to AC power inverter is used to convert the 24 volt battery power
to 120 VAC for backup power to the color monitors, printer, and cabinet
fans.
An AC/DC power supply without internal batteries is available for use in
this type of installation.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-27
AC
Distribution
24V Battery
Reserve Sized
for Backup
Time *
AC/DC Power
Supply
Bus A
Battery Charger
Capable of
Supplying
Adequate Battery
Charge Time
Bus B
DC to AC
Power
Inverter
AC
Transfer
Console CRT,
Cabinet Fans,
Printer
*NOTE: Battery negative lead should not be referenced to chassis ground.
Figure 1.2.12. Full Battery Backup Power
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-28
Partial Battery Backup
Figure 1.2.13 shows a battery backup system that provides a partial
system backup. The battery backup system is powered from the battery
charger while the batteries float with a nominal charge. The battery
charger should be capable of simultaneously powering the system and
charging the batteries with a ripple voltage of less than 0.5 volts.
Battery capacity is sized to the backup time required. The battery
charger and batteries must float with reference to ground to allow the
ground connection to be made at the system return bus bar.
Appropriate fusing should be used along with a mechanism to
disconnect the batteries when the battery voltage drops below 18 volts.
Disconnecting the system power below 18 volts prevents the cards from
trying to restart after a low voltage dropout and eliminates complete
battery drain, which could damage the batteries.
No AC/DC power supply or AC distribution is required for this type of system
power. A DC to AC power inverter is used to convert the 24 volt battery
power to AC for power to the color monitors, printer, and cabinet fans.
No AC/DC
Power Supply
System DC
Distribution
System
24 VDC
Battery Charger
Capable of
Suppling System
DC Load
Fusing and
Battery
Shutoff
120 VAC
24V Battery
Pack Sized
for Backup
DC to AC
Power
Inverter
Command
Console CRT,
Cabinet Fans,
Printer
Figure 1.2.13. Partial Battery Backup Power
Console CRT and Printer Backup
A small uninterruptible power supply, of the type used to back up
personal computers, can be used to backup the console CRT and
printers economically.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-29
Millennium Cabinet and AC Wiring
On-site installation for the RS3 Millennium Package is limited to mains
power supply module wiring and I/O module wiring. You will need to
provide AC power to the Millennium cabinet from an external circuit
breaker panel and wire the power leads to the AC input terminal blocks
on the power supply housing.
Refer to “Installation” in Section 4 of Chapter 5 for detailed information
about System Power Supply Unit connectivity.
Mains wiring should be supplied from a circuit breaker on a branch
circuit panel. Use a 30 amp circuit breaker for circuits in the 120 volt
range, and a 25 amp circuit breaker for circuits in the 240 volt range.
The mains supply wiring should enter the cabinet through the bottom
rear of the cabinet and be routed along the frame on the right side (as
viewed from the rear) upward to the mains supply terminal block on the
System Power Supply Unit housing. Use separate mains supply circuits
to feed Power Supply 1 and Power Supply 2. Connect the line, neutral,
and protective conductor to their respectively marked terminals.
The upper terminal block connects the mains supply to Power Supply 1
and the lower terminal block connects the mains supply circuit to Power
Supply 2. Secure the mains wiring to the cabinet frame or mounting
rails, using nylon cable ties or a similar method. (The method used
must not permit cuts, abrasion, or excess stress on the wiring
insulation.) Notice that each mains terminal block on the System Power
Supply Unit housing also has an auxiliary output circuit for peripheral
equipment. Each auxiliary circuit is over-current protected by a 15 amp
circuit breaker.
Signal wiring is also routed through the bottom of the RMP cabinet,
separate from the mains supply wiring. All signal wiring should be at
non-hazardous voltage levels in the RMP cabinet. Data communication
wiring from I/O devices to Remote Termination Panel II are routed up
through plastic ducting located at approximately the horizontal center of
the cabinet rear.
Route 26 VDC wiring outside the cabinet, down the cabinet side
opposite that from the mains supply wiring; this should be the left side of
the cabinet as viewed from the rear. Secure the DC wiring cable or
harness to the vertical mounting rails or cabinet frame using nylon cable
ties or a similar method. Ensure that the method used does not result in
cuts, abrasion, or excess stress on the wiring insulation.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-2-30
Route signal and 26 VDC wiring out of the cabinet in wireways separate
from the mains supply wiring. Be sure that signal wiring also enters and
exits the cabinet through a separate wireway from the 26 VDC, or use
an approved partitioning method if within the same wireway as the
26 VDC wiring. Secure all wiring along its routing path. Keep any
excess wiring at the bottom of the cabinet to a minimum, secured by a
positive means such that the mains supply wiring remains segregated
from the non-hazardous voltage level wiring, the 26 VDC wiring, and the
signal wiring. Keep mains supply wiring separated from extra
low-voltage wiring by a minimum of 208 mm (8 in.).
Alarm circuit wiring is the same as for the RS3 system cabinet (refer to
“Alarm Wiring.” in Section 4 of Chapter 5)
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Power Requirements
SP: 1-3-1
Section 3:
Grounding Recommendations
Safety to personnel is of primary importance in the installation of the
RS3 distributed control system. The system is designed to adhere
strictly to all National Electric Code (NEC), Canadian Standards
Association (CSA), and other safety standards to ensure that no safety
hazards exist in a properly installed system.
When installing the system, careful attention must be given to ensure
that the equipment and all chassis components are correctly grounded;
first, to ensure that no possibility exists for hazardous voltages that
could injure personnel, and second, to minimize the effects of external
voltage fluctuations on the system and its external components.
It is important that the AC supply connections to all system inputs
comply with NEC Article 250 and all other local applicable codes. This
applies not only for the permanent installation but also for temporary
connections set up for system test and configuration.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Grounding Recommendations
SP: 1-3-2
Chassis Interconnections
All cabinet panels and doors are connected together using 4mm2
(12 AWG) green wire to assure complete chassis grounding of all
components. Cabinet-to-cabinet connections are made using 25mm2
(3 AWG) wire. You may need to complete these connections upon
arrival, when placing multiple cabinets in the final control installation.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Grounding Recommendations
SP: 1-3-3
Earth Ground Connection
The system must be connected to the plant or building grounding
electrode system in two ways. First, an equipment grounding conductor
must run with every AC circuit supplying power for the system. Second,
a separate grounding electrode conductor must be installed from the
nearest practical attachment point to the grounding electrode system to
the system cabinet ground lug.
The plant or building grounding electrode system consists of
underground water pipe, metal frame of the building, electrodes in
concrete, a ground ring, and other made electrodes all connected
together. The actual installation of the grounding electrode system is
beyond the scope of this manual. A number of sources are available
that cover earth grounding, its measurement, and how to maintain low
resistance over time. It is important to realize that each individual
installation varies according to temperature, time, current loading
capacity, soil composition, moisture, and other factors. A high quality
connection to earth helps to eliminate system problems from external
noise sources and damage due to lightning.
Special consideration must be given to plant-wide grounding where
there are multiple buildings or separate open-air process areas,
particularly for protection against lightning transients. The plant
grounding electrode system must provide low impedance ground
interconnections from building to building throughout the area covered
by instrument wiring and system communications wiring, except where
fiber optic links are used. The primary goal of the grounding electrode
system is potential equalization throughout the served area, with a
secondary goal of connection to earth potential.
There is no need to create a special instrument ground for the system.
It is generally better to create a single ground system of higher integrity
for use by both instrumentation and electrical power distribution
equipment. Noisy grounds seldom cause performance problems in RS3
process control system installations, and effective corrective action
would usually involve increasing the integrity of the existing grounding
electrode system.
The grounding electrode conductor resistance (the connection between
the system cabinets and the grounding electrode system) must be less
than 0.5 ohms. Wire size must be a minimum of 35mm2 (2 AWG)
copper wire or equivalent for lengths up to 61 meters (200 feet). More
than 61 meters (200 feet) can be an excessive length. The grounding
electrode conductor must take a path that is as short and direct as
possible to the nearest connection point to the grounding electrode
system, usually structural steel.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Grounding Recommendations
SP: 1-3-4
System Grounding
Figure 1.3.1 shows the system grounding method. The grounding
electrode conductor must be a minimum of 35 mm2 (2 AWG) wire.
AC service
entrance panel
Hot
Neutral
Equipment
grounding
conductor
Power
supply
L1
L2
G
220 VAC Input
115 VAC
Input
Protective
conductor
terminal
AC distribution
CRT
DC distribution
Connection
to plant
grounding
electrode
system
DC grounding
jumper
Intercabinet grounding conductor
Grounding electrode conductor
Plant or building grounding electrode system
Figure 1.3.1. System Grounding
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Grounding Recommendations
SP: 1-3-5
Grounding Separate System Components
Separate system cabinet groups in a common area can be daisy
chained together using a 35mm2 (2 AWG) intercabinet grounding
conductor, and connected to the grounding electrode system through a
single grounding electrode conductor (Figure 1.3.2). Alternatively, each
cabinet group may have its own grounding electrode conductor to the
grounding electrode system. Multiple grounding electrode conductors
can attach at the same point on the grounding electrode system, or to
different points. If a daisy chain connection would result in a grounding
connection more than 61 meters (200 feet), a direct connection to the
grounding electrode system should be considered for the cabinet group
at the end of the daisy chain.
If the DC bus goes between any two cabinet groups, those cabinet
groups must be connected by a 35mm2 (2 AWG) intercabinet grounding
conductor. If console electronics are powered by a connection to a DC
bus in another cabinet group, the cabinet groups must be connected
with a ground wire at least as large as the DC supply wires. The same
35mm2 2 AWG wires that are used for other cabinet grounds is
recommended.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Grounding Recommendations
SP: 1-3-6
DC Bus
DC distribution
DC grounding
jumper
AC service connection
to building grounding
Additional connection to
electrode
grounding electrode system
Required when DC bus
goes between cabinets
Intercabinet grounding conductors
Building grounding
electrode system
CRT
CRT
Figure 1.3.2. Supplemental Grounding Electrode
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Grounding Recommendations
SP: 1-3-7
Other Grounding Considerations
Equipment that is connected only by the PeerWay can have individual
grounds.
Remote Power Supplies
If an I/O cabinet, console, remote FlexTerm, or any other component is
powered by a separate DC voltage source other than the system DC
distribution system (which is referenced to chassis ground), you must
connect the negative DC side of the power supply to the associated
chassis ground potential.
However, if the external power supply is used as a secondary power
source or as a backup (redundant supply) for the system DC distribution
system, you need no additional ground connection.
Communication Lines
All system communication lines, such as PeerWay, ControlFile to
FlexTerm, and printer connections, have optical isolation, which
eliminates the need to ensure that the chassis at both ends of the
communication wires are at the same voltage potential. Therefore,
ground loop currents are not a problem.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Grounding Recommendations
SP: 1-3-8
Isolation Transformers
You can use an isolation transformer to provide power to the system for
any of the following reasons:
D
D
D
The incoming power is to be transformed to a lower voltage.
There exists a voltage difference between the grounding
electrode at the plant service entrance panel and the
supplemental grounding electrode due to distance or earthing
conditions.
To allow connection of the system to an applicable ground in
areas where ungrounded power systems are used (IT or TT
systems).
You can add the isolation transformer between the AC power and the
system to allow a new local connection to the grounding electrode
system to eliminate the effects of ground currents between the system
and the plant equipment, as shown in Figure 1.3.3.
Plant AC
entrance
service panel
Plant grounding
electrode
Isolation
transformer
No connection
Figure 1.3.3. Isolation Transformer
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Grounding Recommendations
SP: 1-3-9
Intrinsic Safety Grounding
Figure 1.3.4 shows an example of a system ground that can be used for
intrinsically safe barrier installation. System grounding and all
hazardous area shields reference the potential at the barriers rather
than the plant ground. Use of isolation transformers might be needed to
allow changing of the ground reference to be closer to the system and
barrier installation.
This is only an example. Rules governing the installation of
components in and around a hazardous locations vary greatly because
of local codes and the type of barriers used. Consult the barrier
manufacturer for details of the specific barrier. Also consult National
Electric Code Articles 500 to 504, and all other local applicable codes.
AC service
entrance panel
Barrier
installation
AC
input
AC distribution
R
S
3
T
DC distribution
FlexTerm
Plant
grounding
electrode
Figure 1.3.4. System Grounding with Intrinsically Safe Barrier Installation
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Grounding Recommendations
SP: 1-3-10
Lightning Protection
The installation must protect instrumentation systems from lightning
damage. A direct strike can disrupt critical processes, start fires,
damage buildings and equipment, and injure personnel. Near strikes,
too, can disrupt critical processes and damage electronic circuitry by
inducing voltage in unprotected wiring. Therefore, adequate lightning
protection is essential in a modern processing plant.
Two factors determine the level of protection required:
D
Geographic location
D
Process criticality
Lightning strikes occur more often in some areas than in others.
Elevation, humidity, latitude, and normal weather patterns influence
frequency in a particular geographic area.
The other factor in determining appropriate lightning protection is
process criticality. The more critical a process, the more important
lightning protection is, even though the system might be in an area of
low lightning occurrence. If any strike or near strike, no matter how
unlikely, could cause loss of control of a critical process, severe financial
loss, major equipment damage, or danger to personnel, a complete
lightning protection system is appropriate.
Lightning protection systems provide safe conduction paths to the
ground. This minimizes equipment damage and personal injury. A
complete lightning protection system includes:
D
Lightning rods
D
Conductor system
D
Grounding system
D
Lightning arrestors and surge protectors
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Grounding Recommendations
SP: 1-3-11
Lightning rods (also referred to as air terminals) intercept lightning
discharges above a building or facility. The conductor system is a safe
discharge path from the lightning rods to the grounding system. The
grounding system lets the lightning discharge or dissipate safely.
Lightning arrestors and surge protectors protect power lines, data
highway cables, instrumentation wiring, and other such equipment from
induced voltages. Together, these elements minimize lightning
discharge damage.
Although a lightning protection system intercepts, conducts and
dissipates the main electrical discharge, it does not prevent possible
secondary effects, such as spark-over in nearby large metal structures.
To prevent secondary effects of lightning strikes, make sure that all
adjacent metal structures interconnect with and tie to the main
conductor system. This maintains the same electrical potential
throughout all structures in the vicinity.
A lightning rod intercepts a discharge above a structure, and directs the
discharge to a safe path. In particular, this minimizes the possibility of
fire. Lightning rods should be on structures, and parts of structures,
most likely to be struck. This means that chimneys, ventilators, towers,
and other such higher parts of buildings should have lightning rods.
The parts of flat-roofed building most likely to be struck are the roof
edges. A large area such as a plant site needs a complete system of
properly located lightning rods.
Once intercepted, a lightning discharge follows a low-impedance, metal
path to the earth (path of least resistance). A conductor system
consists of one or more such paths. Each path must be continuous
from the lightning rod to the ground. Paths must not have any sharp
bends or loops. This ensures that the system provides the most direct
path to earth for lightning discharge. As illustrated in Figure 1.3.5, no
bend should form an angle greater than 90 degrees, and no bend
should have a radius less than 76 mm (3 in.). A non-ferrous metal such
as copper or aluminum is the preferred material for the path, as it is not
susceptible to the rust or corrosion of a ferrous metal.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Grounding Recommendations
SP: 1-3-12
R
CL
CL
90°
Max Angle of bend not greater than 90°
Figure 1.3.5. Conductor Bend Radius Requirements
The impedance of a conductor system is inversely proportional to the
number of separate discharge paths. Therefore, increasing the number
of paths decreases the impedance. In a multi-path conductor system,
the paths (wires) should form a cage around the structure. The steel
framework of a structure can substitute for separate conductors, but
smooth connection straps must span any sharp bends or other
hindrance. Figure 1.3.6 shows a typical protection system with a
conductor, a grounded steel framework, and connection straps.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Grounding Recommendations
SP: 1-3-13
Optional Down
Connector If Steel
Framework is not
used
Lightning
Rods
Steel
Framework
Connection
Straps
If Down Conductor
Is Used, Strap to
Steel Framework at
Top and Bottom
Plant Grounding
System
Grounding Rods
Figure 1.3.6. Typical Lightning Protection System
In metal structures, the conductor system can use the framing instead
of separate conductor cables. In such cases, lightning rods should be
electrically bonded to the top part of the framework, and ground
terminals should be bonded to the bottom. Structures with electrically
continuous metal exteriors might not require separate lightning rod and
conductor systems, if the metal is at least 4.76 mm (0.188 in.) thick. The
metal exterior itself can intercept lightning and conduct it to the ground.
Proper grounds are essential for effective lightning protection. Each
ground connection, and each branch of each ground connection, should
extend below and at least 600 mm (2 feet) away from a building’s
foundation walls. This minimizes wall damage.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Grounding Recommendations
SP: 1-3-14
Lightning Arrestors and Surge Protectors
Lightning arrestors assist in the isolation of electrical (twinax)
PeerWays, but strikes can still jump those systems. For the fullest
protection, fiber optic links are recommended.
Lightning arrestors and surge protectors minimize current induced in
wiring of an instrumentation system. This induction can occur in two
ways:
D
D
A lightning discharge passing through the conductor system
generates a transient magnetic field, which induces current in
nearby wiring.
As the grounding system dissipates a discharge in the earth, a
step difference in potential develops in the earth itself. This
difference in potential induces current in underground
instrumentation wiring.
Protection devices use three main types of circuits:
D
Varistors
D
Semiconductors (avalanche diodes)
D
Gas discharge tubes
Varistors and semiconductors provide protection from lower current
levels. Gas discharge tubes protect the system from high current and
voltages levels. Most protection devices have a combination of these
circuits.
When planning a protection system, carefully consider environmental
conditions and plant requirements. To implement the system, follow
these suggestions:
D
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Ground the building and plant site to a single ground system. If
there is a remote or separated building at the plant site, isolate
the signals, power, and communications systems of the remote
building.
Grounding Recommendations
SP: 1-3-15
D
D
D
Use overhead cables when possible. The air around overhead
cables acts as an insulator, so such cables are less susceptible
to lightning induced voltage than are underground cables. Also,
because they are not buried, overhead cables are less
susceptible to steep potential induction in the earth than are
underground cables. Ground both types of cables, including their
conduits, pipe racking, and cable trays.
Use steel conduit, grounded at both ends, for system cables
running between buildings.
Install surge protectors on all cables running outside of buildings by:
—
Installing a protection device for power wiring at either the
substation entrance (preferred), or at each piece of powered
equipment.
—
Installing a protection device on each phone line coming into
the building.
—
Installing a protection device on instrumentation wiring, if the
structures are not all grounded to a plant-wide system, or else
the equipment is not designed to handle an induced voltage
surge.
NOTE: Connect a surge arrestor only to the shield of PeerWay cables.
Do not connect an arrestor to the signal pair.
D
When building a lightning protection system, use strong materials
that resist rust and corrosion.
Building additions or structural repairs done without consideration for a
lightning protection system can reduce the system’s effectiveness.
Deterioration or mechanical damage to the system itself can reduce its
effectiveness in similar ways.
To prevent a loss of protection, evaluate all proposed structural changes
for effects on the protection system, and ensure that no structural
repairs inhibit system protection. Inspect the structure annually for
deterioration and mechanical damage. Thoroughly inspect and test the
lightning protection system every five years.
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Grounding Recommendations
SP: 1-3-16
RS3: Preliminary Planning
Grounding Recommendations
RS3t
Site Preparation and Installation
Chapter 2:
System Cabinets
Section 1:
Section 2:
Section 3:
Section 4:
Moving and Unpacking the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinets Shipped Upright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinets Shipped Horizontally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2
2-1-3
2-1-4
2-1-7
2-1-9
The RS3 Millennium Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1
RMP Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RMP Installation and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding RMP Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RMP Cabinet Fan Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wire Entry into RMP System Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-3
2-2-4
2-2-4
2-2-5
2-2-5
Series 2 System Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1
Series 2 Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joining Series 2 Cabinets Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing Series 2 System Cabinets to the Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding the Series 2 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series 2 Cabinet Fan Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insulation Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wire Entry into Series 2 System Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bottom Entry, Series 2 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top Entry, Series 2 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2
2-3-5
2-3-6
2-3-7
2-3-9
2-3-10
2-3-12
2-3-13
2-3-15
Series 1 System Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-1
Installing Vibration Protection for Series 1 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joining Series 1 Cabinets Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing Series 1 Cabinets to the Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Series 1 Cabinet Air Flow Switch to an Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wire Entry into Series 1 System Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bottom Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wire Routing to Card Cages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wire Routing to Marshaling Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-2
2-4-3
2-4-4
2-4-5
2-4-7
2-4-7
2-4-9
2-4-10
2-4-11
RS3: System Cabinets
Contents
SP: ii
Section 5:
Section 6:
Section 7:
Floor-Mounted I/O Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-1
Joining 2X5 or 4X5 I/O Cabinets Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Vibration Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stabilizing 2X5 and 4X5 I/O Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding the Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring a 2X5 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring a 4X5 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Multipoint I/O Termination Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Remote Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-7
2-5-8
2-5-9
2-5-10
2-5-11
2-5-12
2-5-13
2-5-14
Wall-Mounted I/O Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6-1
Grounding the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6-3
2-6-4
Remote I/O Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7-1
Remote I/O Power Supply Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Distribution Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote I/O Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Distribution Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIN Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Remote I/O Power Supply in an I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7-2
2-7-4
2-7-7
2-7-8
2-7-11
2-7-11
2-7-11
2-7-13
RS3: System Cabinets
Contents
SP: iii
List of Figures
Figure
Page
2.1.1
Equipment Packed for Domestic Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-5
2.1.2
Equipment Crated for International Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-6
2.1.3
Transport of Cabinets that are Secured to a Pallet in
an Upright Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-7
2.1.4
Cabinet-to-pallet Bolt Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-8
2.1.5
Removing Cabinet from Pallet Without a Hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-8
2.1.6
Transport of Cabinets That Are Shipped in a Horizontal Position . . . .
2-1-9
2.2.1
RS3 Millennium Package Cabinet -- Side VIew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1
2.2.2
RS3 Millennium Package Cabinet -- Front and Rear Views . . . . . . . . .
2-2-2
2.2.3
RS3 Millennium Package Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-3
2.3.1
System Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-3
2.3.2
Door (Inside View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-4
2.3.3
System Cabinet Base Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-4
2.3.4
Joining Series 2 Cabinets Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-5
2.3.5
Vibration Protection (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-6
2.3.6
Grounding a Group of Series 2 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-8
2.3.7
Power Component Location for Bottom Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-14
2.3.8
Power Component Location for Top Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-15
2.4.1
Vibration Protection (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-2
2.4.2
Bolt Hole Locations for Securing Series 1 Cabinets Together . . . . . . .
2-4-3
2.4.3
Bolt Hole Locations for Securing Series 1 Cabinets to the Floor . . . . .
2-4-4
2.4.4
Cabinet Fan AC Receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-5
2.4.5
Air Flow Switch Alarm to Contact Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-6
2.4.6
Air Flow Switch Alarm to Contact FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-6
2.4.7
Methods of Bottom Cable Entry into System Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-8
2.4.8
Methods of Top Cable Entry into System Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-9
2.4.9
Field Wire Routing to Card Cages (Bottom Entry Shown) . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-10
2.4.10
Field Wire Routing To Marshaling Panels (Bottom Entry Shown) . . . .
2-4-11
2.5.1
2X5 I/O Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-2
2.5.2
2X5 Cabinet Foundation Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-3
2.5.3
4X5 I/O Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-4
2.5.4
4X5 Cabinet Foundation Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-5
2.5.5
DIN Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-6
RS3: System Cabinets
Contents
SP: iv
2.5.6
Joining I/O Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-7
2.5.7
Vibration Protection (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-8
2.5.8
Grounding a Group of 2X5 or 4X5 I/O Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-10
2.5.9
Field and System Wiring in a 2X5 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-11
2.5.10
Field and System Wiring in a 4X5 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-12
2.5.11
Typical Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-13
2.5.12
Typical Installation in a 2X5 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-14
2.6.1
DIN Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6-1
2.6.2
2X2 Wall-Mounted I/O Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6-2
2.6.3
Field and System Wiring in a 2X2 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6-4
2.6.4
Typical Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6-5
2.6.5
Installing a Remote I/O Power Supply in a 2X2 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . .
2-6-6
2.7.1
Typical Remote I/O Power Supply Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7-2
2.7.2
Typical Remote I/O Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7-3
2.7.3
AC Distribution Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7-5
2.7.4
Typical AC Distribution Block Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7-6
2.7.5
Remote I/O Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7-7
2.7.6
DC Distribution Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7-9
2.7.7
Typical DC Distribution Block Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7-10
2.7.8
Remote I/O Power Supply Fuse Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7-12
2.7.9
Installing a Remote I/O Power Supply in a 2X5 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . .
2-7-14
2.7.10
Installing a Remote I/O Power Supply in a 2X2 I/O Cabinet . . . . . . . . .
2-7-15
RS3: System Cabinets
Contents
SP: 2-1-1
Section 1:
Moving and Unpacking the System
This section describes how to handle RS3 equipment.
RS3 equipment is packed for shipment using materials and methods
chosen for optimum equipment protection and ease of handling.
WARNING
Equipment cabinets, especially single-bay cabinets, may
be top-heavy. To prevent personal injury or equipment
damage, use care when transporting and handling.
RS3: System Cabinets
Moving and Unpacking the System
SP: 2-1-2
Storage
When the equipment is received, immediately move it indoors. Store
the equipment in a location where it will not be exposed to extremes of
temperature, humidity, vibration, or shock. The following guidelines
should be followed for storing equipment at the customer site prior to
installation:
D
Temperature: --40 to 158° F (--40 to 70° C)
D
Diskettes and tapes temperature: --40 to 114° F (--40 to 46° C)
D
Humidity: 5% to 95%, non-condensing
D
Non-corrosive atmosphere
D
Cover equipment to protect from dust and water
NOTE: Do not remove the protective packing material until the
equipment is in place and ready to be powered up. Exposure to
excessive dust, moisture, or corrosive vapors may invalidate the
equipment warranty.
RS3: System Cabinets
Moving and Unpacking the System
SP: 2-1-3
Unpacking
Place equipment as close as possible to the storage area or final
installation area before unpacking.
Inspect all containers, pallets, and equipment for visible damage before
the delivery carrier leaves the site. The carrier and the customer are
normally responsible for correcting shipping damage. The packing list,
normally included inside crate #1, describes the hardware items
shipped.
Immediately report any shortage or damage found that will affect the
progress of the installation.
RS3: System Cabinets
Moving and Unpacking the System
SP: 2-1-4
Transporting Equipment
Before transporting the equipment, perform the following tasks:
D
D
Make sure that no loose-shipped items are mounted on the
equipment until it has been moved to the final installation area.
Secure all cabinet doors so they cannot open.
Figure 2.1.1 shows handling methods for domestic shipments.
Figure 2.1.2 shows handling methods for international shipments. The
weights shown in the figures are approximations.
WARNING
Equipment cabinets, especially single-bay cabinets, may
be top-heavy. To prevent personal injury or equipment
damage, use care when transporting and handling.
RS3: System Cabinets
Moving and Unpacking the System
SP: 2-1-5
Handling Method
Standard Equipment Cabinet
Single: 272 Kg (600 lb)
Hardened Command
Console
Multitube Command
Console Tabletops
Double: 362--408 Kg
(800--900 lb)
RS3 Millennium Cabinet
181--227 Kg (400--500 lb)
453 Kg (1000 lb)
113--236 Kg
(248--520 lb)
Multitube Command
Console Tower
Electronics Cabinet
Multitube Command
Console Standard
Electronics Cabinet
Multitube
Command
Console CRT
82 Kg (180 lb)
107--125 Kg
(236--276 lb)
45 Kg
(100 lb)
Accessories
22--45 Kg
(50--100 lb)
AC/DC Power Supply
45 Kg (100 lb)
System Power Supply
Housing: 7 Kg (15.5 lb)
Module: 5 Kg (11.4 lb)
Figure 2.1.1. Equipment Packed for Domestic Shipment
RS3: System Cabinets
Moving and Unpacking the System
SP: 2-1-6
Handling Method
Multitube Command Console
Tabletop
113--236 Kg (248--520 lb)
Multitube Command
Console Standard
Electronics Cabinet
107--125 Kg
(236--276 lb)
Multitube
Command
Console Tower
Electronics
Cabinet
Accessories
45--136 kg
(100--300 lb)
82 Kg (180 lb)
NOTE: A hoist is required to stand the cabinet up.
Standard Equipment Cabinet
Single: 317--362 Kg (700--800 lb)
Double: 453--589 Kg (1000--1300 lb)
Hardened Command
Console
453 Kg (1000 lb)
Multitube
Command Console
CRT
245 Kg (100 lb)
RS3 Millennium Cabinet
227--272 Kg (500--600 lb)
Accessories
25--91 kg
(50--200 lb)
AC/DC Power Supply
45 Kg (100 lb)
System Power Supply
Housing: 7 Kg (15.5 lb)
Module: 5 Kg (11.4 lb)
Figure 2.1.2. Equipment Crated for International Shipment
RS3: System Cabinets
Moving and Unpacking the System
SP: 2-1-7
Cabinets Shipped Upright
-
To transport and position cabinets that have been shipped
upright:
1. Figure 2.1.3 shows how to transport equipment cabinets that are
shipped secured to a pallet in an upright position.
OR
Figure 2.1.3. Transport of Cabinets that are Secured to a Pallet in an Upright Position
RS3: System Cabinets
Moving and Unpacking the System
SP: 2-1-8
2. When the equipment has been moved as close as possible to the
installation location, remove the bolts inside the cabinet that
secure the cabinet base to the pallet, as shown in Figure 2.1.4.
Remove
Bolts
Remove Bolts and Bar
Figure 2.1.4. Cabinet-to-pallet Bolt Locations
3. Once the cabinet is no longer secured to the pallet, it can be
moved off the pallet. If the cabinet cannot be lifted with a hoist
using the optional eye bolts, the following procedure may be
used to remove the cabinet from the pallet (see Figure 2.1.5):
a. Carefully slide one edge of the cabinet onto a wood block that
is the thickness of the pallet.
b. Tip the cabinet so that its weight is supported by the wood
block and remove the pallet from under the cabinet. Let the
cabinet edge rest on the ground while supporting the cabinet.
c. Tip the cabinet in the opposite direction and remove the
block.
d. Maneuver the cabinet into its final position by hand.
Figure 2.1.5. Removing Cabinet from Pallet Without a Hoist
RS3: System Cabinets
Moving and Unpacking the System
SP: 2-1-9
Cabinets Shipped Horizontally
Figure 2.1.6 shows how to transport equipment cabinets that are
shipped in a horizontal position and are not secured to a pallet.
1. Dismantle crate.
2. Bring cabinet to
upright position.
3. Transport.
OR
Figure 2.1.6. Transport of Cabinets That Are Shipped in a Horizontal Position
RS3: System Cabinets
Moving and Unpacking the System
SP: 2-1-10
RS3: System Cabinets
Moving and Unpacking the System
SP: 2-2-1
Section 2:
The RS3 Millennium Package
The RS3 Millennium Package (RMP) is shipped pre-assembled with all
components installed, including an RS3 System Power Supply Unit with
two 1200-watt power supply modules. The System Power Supply Unit
fits on standard 19-inch (483 mm) EIA rails in the top of the RMP
cabinet and occupies three units of vertical rack space.
Figure 2.2.1 shows the placement of the components in the the RMP
cabinet. The RMP is wired from the bottom only. Because of
temperature requirements, the System Power Supply Unit housing is
mounted at the top and the OI card cage is mounted at the bottom of
the cabinet. Figure 2.2.2 shows front and rear views of the RMP.
Rear
Front
Fan
RS3 System
Power Supply
Unit
DC Distribution
Bus
PeerWay
Twinax Tap Set
RNI
Control Files
Remote
Communication
Termination
Panels
OI Card
Cage
Cable Entry
Figure 2.2.1. RS3 Millennium Package Cabinet -- Side VIew
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-2-2
27
68
25
24
TAP
A
A B C D
TAP
B
A B C D
Peerway
Twinax Tap
Set
23
22
21
14
13
CP
NVM
PR
CP
15
PR
17
16
DHI
18
DHI
19
6600MCC101 (STD)
REDUNDANT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
20
RNI (If the cabinet does not
include an RNI, this area is
covered with a faceplate and
slotted panel)
Part of Control
File (for
Assembly)
10
09
08
07
06
27
68
25
24
23
22
OI Card Cage
04
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
F
L
04
03
02
01
01
Front View
E
K
05
02
Filler Panel
D
J
18
03
00
C
I
19
06
05
B
H
20
15
Remote
Communication
Termination
Panels II (x8)
A
G
21
17
16
Control File
12
11
DC
Distribution
28
60 mm x 60 mm x .8 m IBOCO Duct
28
DC Fan
RS3 System
Power Supply
Unit
00
Rear View
Figure 2.2.2. RS3 Millennium Package Cabinet -- Front and Rear Views
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-2-3
RMP Cabinet Dimensions
The cabinet for the RMP includes:
D
Front and rear hand door swings
D
Right and left access
Figure 2.2.3 shows the installation dimensions of the RMP cabinet.
622
(24.5)
600
(23.6)
1
Note:
1 Allow a minimum of 762 mm
(30 in.) between door side of
cabinet and any permanent
wall for maintenance access
549
(21.6)
Top View
35.6
(1.4)
57
(2.2)
Side Panel
Lock
Mechanism
1407
(55.4)
Front
Rear
mm
(INCH)
Side View (Doors Open)
Figure 2.2.3. RS3 Millennium Package Cabinet Dimensions
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-2-4
The handle for each door has a concealed lock mechanism with a
sliding cover that can be used to label the cabinet. To open an
unlocked door:
1. Slide the cover up to uncover the keyhole.
2. Press the keyhole button inward. The handle pops up.
3. Turn the handle.
To remove the locking side panels,
1. Insert the key into the lock mechanism. Turn the key.
2. Lift and pull out the side panel.
RMP Installation and Maintenance
If you need to install a System Power Supply Unit in an RMP cabinet,
see the instructions in Chapter 5, Section 3. Maintenance for the
System Power Supply Unit is also described in Chapter 5, Section 3.
Installation and maintenance for other components of the RMP are
described in the appropriate sections of this manual and the RS3
Service Manuals.
Grounding RMP Cabinets
All metalwork within the cabinet must be grounded to the plated rail
structure of the cabinet. This can be done by making bare metal to
bare metal electrical contact, by use of a bonding cable, or by using self
tapping screws in grounded metal. We recommend using more than
one screw to ground two metalwork assemblies together. The cabinet
rail structure must be connected to the building ground.
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-2-5
RMP Cabinet Fan Power
The RMP cabinet fan power is supplied by the DC bus of the System
Power Supply. The part number for the cable that connects the power
supply to the fan is 1984--4460--0001.
NOTE: The DC fan mounted in the RMP cabinet cannot use the RS3
AC/DC Power Supply; it will only work with a System Power Supply
Unit.
Field Wire Entry into RMP System Cabinets
The RMP cabinet is available with cable entry openings in the bottom
panel only (see Figure 2.2.1).
NOTE: Use separate wire channels for high-voltage (110/220 VAC)
lines and low-voltage (4--20 mA) signal lines to maintain as much
separation as possible between voltage and signal wiring. A minimum
of 203 mm (8 in.) of separation is recommended.
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-2-6
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-3-1
Section 3:
Series 2 System Cabinets
RS3 components such as ControlFiles, FlexTerms, power supplies, and
power distribution panels are housed in standard equipment cabinets.
Each installation will have one or more standard equipment cabinets.
There are two cabinet series available:
D
D
Series 1 (With round handles and round mounting holes in the
internal rails)
Series 2 (With rectangular handles and square holes in the
mounting rails)
Series 1 cabinets are used for expansion of systems with Series 1
cabinets. Series 2 cabinets are shipped with new orders and for
expansion of systems with Series 2 cabinets.
This section describes installation of Series 2 cabinets only.
Standard equipment cabinets are shipped as single-bay or double-bay
units. If more than two cabinets are to be joined together, they must be
assembled at the installation site.
D
D
RS3: System Cabinets
Cabinets with louvers and pagoda with fan will meet IP31 and
NEMA 1 protection ratings.
Sealed cabinets (no louvers, no pagoda top) will meet IP55 and
NEMA 12 protection ratings.
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-3-2
Series 2 Cabinet Dimensions
Series 2 system cabinets are available with:
D
Front and rear access
D
Front access only
D
Right or left hand door swings
Figure 2.3.1 shows the installation dimensions of the Series 2 system
cabinet. A File Pocket can be mounted on the cabinet door as shown in
Figure 2.3.2. Figure 2.3.3 shows the base mounting dimensions for
single and multiple bay installations.
The handle has a concealed lock mechanism with a sliding cover that
can be used to label the cabinet.
NOTE: To open an unlocked Series 2 cabinet:
1. Slide the cover up to uncover the keyhole.
2. Press the keyhole button inward. The handle pops up.
3. Turn the handle.
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-3-3
Door Swing
600 (23.6)
Front/Rear
1
Rear
70
(2.8)
400
(15.7)
260
(10.2)
.
.
.
.
.
.
802
(31.6)
Cable Entry Openings
1
26.5
(1.04)
Front
Top View
57
(2.2)
2303.5
(90.69)
2350
(92.5)
Rear
Front
749
(29.5)
mm
(INCH)
Side View (Doors Open)
Notes:
1 Allow minimum of 1016 mm (40 in.) between door side of cabinet and any permanent wall for
maintenance access
Figure 2.3.1. System Cabinet Dimensions
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-3-4
420 mm
(16.5 in.)
File Pocket
(Optional)
Figure 2.3.2. Door (Inside View)
Front
Rear
147
(5.8)
475
(18.7)
400
(15.7)
Rear
Notes:
1
Sliding gland plates
for cable access
287
(11.3)
125
(4.9)
600
(23.6)
1
1
675
(26.6)
750
(29.5)
Front
Single-Bay
Foundation
62.5
(2.46)
4.0 (.55) dia.
Plinth base mntg
holes
37.5
(1.48)
Multi-Bay
Foundation
mm
(INCH)
Foundation dimensions do not include side panels.
Figure 2.3.3. System Cabinet Base Dimensions
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-3-5
Joining Series 2 Cabinets Together
If Series 2 cabinets are to be joined, join them before they are secured
to the floor. Cabinets to be joined to other cabinets do not have side
panels on the mating sides.
Use the 1984--4237--0001 Cabinet Joiner Kit to secure cabinets to each
other. The kit consists of six threaded bushings and twelve
self-securing M6x12 cylinder-head screws. Figure 2.3.4 shows the
joining positions. Install thin gasket tape from the cabinet accessory kit
on the mating surfaces. Place a threaded bushing in each slot and use
a screw at each end of the bushing. Tighten the screws gradually to
bring the cabinets tightly together.
NOTE: Be sure to free any cables that are coiled in the cabinet before
the cabinets are joined. Sometimes the cables are hard to reach after
joining the cabinets.
Bushing
Screw
Screw
Cabinet Wall
Figure 2.3.4. Joining Series 2 Cabinets Together
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-3-6
Securing Series 2 System Cabinets to the Floor
Join system cabinets before securing them to the floor. Secure the
cabinets to the floor through the four bolt holes shown in the base
dimension drawing.
Vibration can damage electronic and mechanical assemblies. If a
system is to be located near equipment that can cause vibration,
cabinets should be isolated from the floor by installing a
vibration-damping medium, such as neoprene.
Neoprene can be cut to size and installed as shown in Figure 2.3.5.
Holes should be drilled in the mat to allow installation of the bolts. Nuts
should be installed loosely to minimize transmission of vibration to the
cabinet but still prevent the cabinet from tipping. The neoprene pad
must be sized carefully to match the cabinet surface area and load
factors. Neoprene is acceptable for high frequency, low amplitude
vibration.
Cabinet
Floor
Studs or Bolts
(Install Nuts Loosely)
Neoprene
Mat
Studs or Bolts
(Install Nuts Loosely)
Cabinet
Floor
Neoprene
Mat
Figure 2.3.5. Vibration Protection (Example)
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-3-7
Grounding the Series 2 Cabinets
All metalwork within the cabinet must be grounded to the plated rail
structure of the cabinet. This can be done by making bare metal to
bare metal electrical contact, by use of a bonding cable, or by using self
tapping screws in grounded metal. We recommend using more than
one screw to ground two metalwork assemblies together. The cabinet
rail structure must be connected to the building ground.
The first and last cabinets in a series have a ground block
(55P0579x001) on the bottom rail of the cabinet.
Each cabinet that has a DC distribution bus installed is shipped with a
35 mm2 (2 AWG) cable running from the DC neutral to the cabinet. This
cable should remain installed.
When several cabinets are joined into a group, the ground jumpers
(1984--4237--0039) must be connected in daisy-chain fashion between
the cabinets as shown in Figure 2.3.6. The first or last cabinet of the
group must be connected to the building ground by a 35 mm2 (2 AWG)
or larger conductor.
See the section on Grounding in Chapter 1 of this manual for more
details.
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-3-8
Ground
jumper
Building ground
Optional ground
or daisy chain
Figure 2.3.6. Grounding a Group of Series 2 Cabinets
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-3-9
Series 2 Cabinet Fan Power
Power is provided to the fan assembly using a Cabinet Fan to AC
Entrance Cable (1984--4290--xxxx), which routes between a set of AC
Entrance Panel output terminals and the nearest cabinet fan, usually
within the same cabinet. Adjacent cabinets within the same suite
receive fan power using Cabinet Fan Jumper Cables (1984--4289--xxxx)
to jumper fan to fan. These cables are a simple two-wire harness, with
1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) insulated wires. Do not jumper more than 10 fans
from one AC Entrance Panel output circuit.
Cabinetry is usually shipped with not more than two cabinets bolted
together, or with all cabinets separated. Because the fan-to-fan jumper
cables between cabinets would have to be disconnected prior to
shipping, they are usually not installed at the factory. Thus, installation
of these cables must be completed during final installation. If more
equipment is to be installed in the cabinets at the end site, it is usually
easiest to install cabling prior to installing rack mount equipment. Use
caution when routing the Cabinet Fan to AC Entrance Cable and
Cabinet Fan Jumper Cables, to prevent insulation damage. In most
cases, the Cabinet Fan to AC Entrance Cable already will have been
installed.
Route the wire harness along its entire path, but do not permanently
secure it until a suitable routing path is determined. Avoid routing
cables or harnesses near metalwork edges or corners where abrasion
of the insulation might occur. The usual route for fan-to-fan jumper
cable is directly from the fan to the side of the cabinet, where it would
be secured to the cabinet frame. The cable or harness bend radius
should not be less than about three times the largest diameter of the
wire harness. From that point, route the harness around and inside the
vertical mounting rails, to the front or rear of the cabinet frame,
whichever is closest to the fan. Continue to route the harness along the
cabinet frame until at the approximate horizontal center of the cabinet
where the final run would leave the cabinet frame and route toward the
fan connector mounted adjacent to the fan. If nonmetal flexible wire
ducting is available, it may be used to enclose the harness.
Secure the wiring at about 150 mm (6 in.) intervals or less, where
possible, along the cabinet frame, using nylon cable ties or some
equivalent securing method. Thread one end of the cable tie through
the hole in the cabinet frame. Wrap the tie around the cable and insert
the cable tie straight end through the locking end. Pull the straight end
snug, securing the wire harness against the cabinet frame. Use care
not to over-tighten the cable ties. Over-tightening could cause damage
to wire insulation. Remove the excess tail of the cable ties near the
locking mechanism to avoid snagging other cables during routing.
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-3-10
After all fan cables are installed, ensure all mating connectors are
connected near the fan. Connect the cable free end terminals to the
respective RS3 AC Entrance Panel (10P5662000x) terminals L1, L2/N,
and the Protective Conductor Terminal.
NOTE: Fan power is not to be routed between different cabinet suites.
Route and connect all wiring internal to the cabinet suite, and mount all
equipment as described in the applicable section of this manual. Then,
return to the section below and consider conducting the insulation tests
prior to interconnecting cables and wire harnesses between different
cabinet suites and consoles.
Insulation Tests
Before attempting to conduct the tests described below, be sure you
read all the information and fully understand it. If you have questions,
consult the factory.
The isolation integrity between hazardous live circuits and operator
accessible parts in systems or components of systems may need to be
verified. Systems with a European Union CE Marking, certified by CSA
to Canadian standards, or certified as NRTL to U.S. standards should
be verified if devices and/or wiring for hazardous live circuits are
installed in the cabinetry (other than mains supply wiring to the
equipment) after the equipment has left the factory.
Upon completion of final assembly of a cabinet suite, dielectric strength
tests (voltage withstanding tests or hipot tests) may be conducted to
verify that the integrity of the hazardous live wiring insulation was
maintained. Conduct these tests prior to connecting the mains supply
wiring to the equipment.
Prior to conducting dielectric strength tests, ensure that all cables and
wiring within the cabinet suite to be tested are disconnected from
equipment in all other cabinet suites. Ensure the free ends of this wiring
are secured, for safety purposes and to prevent erroneous test failure.
Then, turn on the RS3 AC Entrance Panel circuit breakers within the
cabinet suite. Set up the test equipment and conduct dielectric strength
tests described in the paragraphs below for each AC Entrance Panel
installed within the cabinet suite. If there is more than one AC Entrance
Panel within the suite, also test isolation between the different AC
Entrance Panels’ mains input terminals. That is, test isolation between
the mains input terminals of one AC Entrance Panel to the mains input
terminals of the other AC Entrance Panel(s) within the same cabinet
suite. The L1, L2/N terminals together are a good connection point for
one lead of the hipot tester. Use the terminal set labeled “AC1” on dual
input units.
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-3-11
Dielectric strength tests should be conducted by an experienced
technician or engineer. Ensure that the area is secured for safety
around the cabinet suite being tested, and that personnel cannot
approach within a safe distance of the equipment under test, as
prescribed in the site safety procedures and those of the hipot tester.
Read the hipot tester operating instructions before making any tester
connections. Tests should be conducted between the mains supply
terminals of the AC Entrance Panel, connected together to one lead of
the tester, and the grounded chassis metalwork connected to the other
lead of the tester. Conduct this test for each RS3 AC Entrance Panel
installed in the cabinet suite.
Voltage withstanding test -- test voltage and duration:
D
D
For 120 VAC supplied systems, test at 820 V rms (or 1150 VDC)
for 2 seconds.
For 240 VAC supplied systems, test at 1350 V rms (or 1900
VDC) for 2 seconds.
Permit sufficient leakage current to prevent the tester from erroneous
tripping. If the applied test voltage is AC, expect the leakage current to
be higher than that of a DC test voltage. Follow the tester operating
instructions to conduct the tests.
Hipot testing between different RS3 AC Entrance Panels is conducted
between the mains supply terminals of each AC Entrance Panel to
those terminals on the remaining AC Entrance Panels. Use the same
test voltage and duration as listed above for the supply voltage from
which the system will operate.
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-3-12
Field Wire Entry into Series 2 System Cabinets
Standard system cabinets are available with cable entry openings in
both the top or the bottom panels.
NOTE: Use separate wire channels for high-voltage (110/220 VAC)
lines and low-voltage (4--20 mA) signal lines to maintain as much
separation as possible between voltage and signal wiring. A minimum
of 203 mm (8 in.) of separation is recommended.
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-3-13
Bottom Entry, Series 2 Cabinets
System cabinets must be sealed to maintain environmental integrity by
preventing ingress of contaminants through cable ducts, trays, and
trough/gutter-type wireway environments external to the location of the
cabinetry.
The bottom of the cabinet can be sealed when only the top is used for
cable entry. In this case, moving the bottom sliding gland plates
together provides sufficient seal without extra gasketing. The cabinet
top plate should be sealed around the wire entry point to prevent entry
of contaminants.
Bottom cable entry can also be used by adjusting the bottom sliding
gland plates and using some form of gasketing or sealing material to
seal the open areas that remain after wiring entry is completed. Also,
both top and bottom can be used simultaneously for wire and cable
entry. Ensure proper sealing for both the top and bottom of the cabinet
where cabling enters the equipment.
Note that the bottom of the cabinet contains six holes in the cabinet
frame, two of which are used for bolting the cabinet to the shipping
pallet. Once the cabinet is installed, use “cap stoppers” from the
cabinet spares kit to plug all unused holes in the bottom of the cabinet
frame.
System cabinets with top-mounted fan pagoda and louvered doors as
the standard cooling method will have enclosure protection ratings of at
least NEMA 1 and IP31, provided the sealing guidelines above are
employed.
The AC entrance, power supply tray, and DC distribution bus typically
are located as shown in Figure 2.3.7.
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-3-14
DC Distribution Bus
Power Supply Tray
AC Entrance
Side View
Figure 2.3.7. Power Component Location for Bottom Entry
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-3-15
Top Entry, Series 2 Cabinets
There is a flat gland plate at the top of the cabinet. Cut properly sized
holes in this plate for the wire entry. The gland plates are fastened to
the roof of the cabinet using M6 screws and paint cutting washers.
There is a foam-in-place gasket on the top of the roof of the cabinet to
provide a NEMA 12 type seal between the gland plate and cabinet.
The AC entrance, power supply tray, and DC distribution bus typically
are located as shown in Figure 2.3.8.
AC Entrance
DC Distribution Bus
Power Supply
Power Supply Tray
Side View
Figure 2.3.8. Power Component Location for Top Entry
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-3-16
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 2 System Cabinets
SP: 2-4-1
Section 4:
Series 1 System Cabinets
RS3 components such as ControlFiles, FlexTerms, power supplies, and
power distribution panels are housed in standard equipment cabinets.
Each installation can contain one or more standard equipment cabinets.
There are two series available:
D
D
Series 1 (With round handles and round mounting holes in the
internal rails)
Series 2 (With rectangular handles and square holes in the
mounting rails)
Series 1 cabinets are used for expansion of systems with Series 1
cabinets. Series 2 cabinets are shipped with new orders and for
expansion of systems with Series 2 cabinets.
This section describes installation of Series I cabinets only.
Standard equipment cabinets are shipped as single-bay or double-bay
units. If more than two cabinets are to be joined, they must be
assembled at the installation site.
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 1 System Cabinets
SP: 2-4-2
Installing Vibration Protection for Series 1 Cabinets
Vibration can damage electronic and mechanical assemblies. If a
system is to be located near equipment that can cause vibration,
cabinets should be isolated from the floor by installing a
vibration-damping medium, such as neoprene.
Neoprene can be cut to size and installed as shown in Figure 2.4.1.
Holes should be drilled in the mat to allow installation of the bolts. Nuts
should be installed loosely to minimize transmission of vibration to the
cabinet but still prevent the cabinet from tipping. The neoprene pad
must be sized carefully to match the cabinet surface area and load
factors. Neoprene is acceptable for high frequency, low amplitude
vibration.
Cabinet
Floor
Studs or Bolts
(Install Nuts Loosely)
Neoprene
Mat
Studs or Bolts
(Install Nuts Loosely)
CabinetFloor
Neoprene
Mat
Figure 2.4.1. Vibration Protection (Example)
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 1 System Cabinets
SP: 2-4-3
Joining Series 1 Cabinets Together
If Series 1 cabinets are to be joined together, they should be joined
before they are secured to the floor. Cabinets that are to be joined to
other cabinets lack side panels on the mating sides.
NOTE: Be sure to free any cables that are coiled in the cabinet before
the cabinets are joined. Sometimes the cables are hard to reach after
joining the cabinets.
To secure cabinets to each other, bolt them together using the 1/4--20
cap screws, lock washers, and nuts provided. Bolt hole locations are
indicated in Figure 2.4.2.
Figure 2.4.2. Bolt Hole Locations for Securing Series 1 Cabinets Together
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 1 System Cabinets
SP: 2-4-4
Securing Series 1 Cabinets to the Floor
If Series 1 cabinets are to be joined together, they should be joined
before they are secured to the floor.
Secure the cabinets to the floor through the four bolt holes, as shown in
Figure 2.4.3. Remove the four lift eye bolts (if present) and seal their
openings in the top of the cabinet to prevent entry of contaminants.
19 mm (0.75 in.)
Cabinet Holddown
(4 Places)
76 mm
(3.0 in.)
86 mm
(3.4 in.)
Cabinet
Floor
Corner
Braces
Figure 2.4.3. Bolt Hole Locations for Securing Series 1 Cabinets to the Floor
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 1 System Cabinets
SP: 2-4-5
Connecting the Series 1 Cabinet Air Flow Switch to an
Alarm
You can connect the standard equipment cabinet air flow switch to an
alarm to notify you when the fan is not operating.
Figure 2.4.4 shows the cabinet fan AC receptacle. Figure 2.4.5 shows
a air flow switch alarm connected to a contact marshaling panel.
Figure 2.4.6 shows an air flow switch alarm connected to a Contact
FlexTerm. If all fans are ON, the contact will be open. If any fan is OFF,
the contact will be closed.
Cabinet
Fan
Air Flow Switch
AC Receptacle
J291
3
2
6
5
1
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
Figure 2.4.4. Cabinet Fan AC Receptacle
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 1 System Cabinets
SP: 2-4-6
Fan
Fan
J291
J291
Contact Marshaling Panel
VI
-- GI
+
Cable (1984--0207--xxxx)
TB1
Common
L1
Normally Closed
L2/N
GND
Normally Open
(Not functional----do not use)
To
AC Distribution Box
Cable (1984--0381--xxxx)
Figure 2.4.5. Air Flow Switch Alarm to Contact Marshaling Panel
Fan
Fan
J291
J291
Contact FlexTerm
__
+
Cable (1984--0207--xxxx)
__
Common
L1
Normally Closed
L2/N
GND
Normally Open
(Not functional----do not use)
+
to
AC Distribution Box
Cable (1984--0381--xxxx)
Remote
Power Supply
Figure 2.4.6. Air Flow Switch Alarm to Contact FlexTerm
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 1 System Cabinets
SP: 2-4-7
Field Wire Entry into Series 1 System Cabinets
Standard system cabinets have cable entry openings in both the top
and bottom panels.
NOTE: Use separate wire channels for high-voltage (110/220 VAC)
lines and low-voltage (4--20 mA) signal lines to maintain as much
separation as possible between voltage and signal wiring. A minimum
of 8 inches (203 mm) of separation is recommended.
Bottom Entry
Figure 2.4.7 shows two possible ways of routing cabling for bottom
entry into system cabinets. The bottom entry has a sliding panel for
sizing the opening. A foam strip along the edge of the panel reduces
entry of dust and other contaminants into the cabinet.
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 1 System Cabinets
SP: 2-4-8
Left Side View
of Cabinet
Front
Left Side View
of Cabinet
Front
Cable entry made
under raised floor
Cable entry made
through boxed area
below cabinet
Raised Floor
Floor
Sliding
Panel
Bottom View
of Cabinet
Foam
Strip
Figure 2.4.7. Methods of Bottom Cable Entry into System Cabinet
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 1 System Cabinets
SP: 2-4-9
Top Entry
Figure 2.4.8 shows a possible way of routing cabling for top entry into
system cabinets. The top entry has a sliding panel for sizing the
opening. A foam strip along the edge of the panel reduces entry of dust
and other contaminants into the cabinet.
Cable entry made into
top of cabinet
Top View of Cabinet
Front
Left Side View
of Cabinet
Sliding
Panel
Foam
Strip
Floor
Figure 2.4.8. Methods of Top Cable Entry into System Cabinet
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 1 System Cabinets
SP: 2-4-10
Field Wire Routing to Card Cages
Figure 2.4.9 shows field wire routing to card cages inside standard
system cabinets. This is a composite drawing and is not intended to
show the actual configuration of a cabinet.
For Multiplexer FlexTerms,
route field wires through
strain reliefs and leave
sufficient length for
removal of FEMs.
Route field wires through
wire channels and tiedowns.
Route field wires down
right side of cabinet using
tiedowns and tiewraps.
Route recorder wires
down left side of
cabinet using tiewraps
and tiedowns.
Route all wiring through
bottom of cabinet.
Figure 2.4.9. Field Wire Routing to Card Cages (Bottom Entry Shown)
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 1 System Cabinets
SP: 2-4-11
Field Wire Routing to Marshaling Panels
Figure 2.4.10 shows field wire routing to marshaling panels inside
standard system cabinets. This is a composite drawing and is not
intended to show the actual configuration of a cabinet.
Route field wires through
tiewraps and tiedowns.
Route cables from
marshaling panels to
FlexTerms down left side
of cabinet using tiewraps
and tiedowns.
Route field wires down
right side of cabinet
using tiedowns and
tiewraps.
Route all wiring through
bottom of cabinet.
Figure 2.4.10. Field Wire Routing To Marshaling Panels (Bottom Entry Shown)
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 1 System Cabinets
SP: 2-4-12
RS3: System Cabinets
Series 1 System Cabinets
SP: 2-5-1
Section 5:
Floor-Mounted I/O Cabinets
These I/O cabinet models are available:
D
D
2X5 -- A cabinet that can contain two columns of five Multipoint
I/O termination panels.
4X5 -- A cabinet that can contain four columns of five Multipoint
I/O termination panels.
WARNING
I/O cabinets can fall over if they are not supported at all
times. Take care when removing the cabinet from the
shipping pallet. Installed cabinets must be fastened to a
wall or joined in a group back-to-back with other cabinets.
Properly sealed cabinets with louvered doors and top-mounted fan
pagoda have protection ratings of at least NEMA 1 and IP31.
Sealed I/O cabinets, without door louvers and fan pagoda top, have
protection ratings of NEMA 12 and IP55, provided the areas around
cable entry and unused mounting holes in the frame are properly
gasketed or sealed. Floor-mounted I/O cabinets are shipped from the
factory with the cabinets bolted to shipping pallets. Once a cabinet is
installed, unused mounting holes are to be plugged using “cap
stoppers” provided in the cabinet spares kit. It is not necessary to place
gasketing between the gland plates at the cabinet bottom to maintain
those protection ratings if the wire entry is through the top only.
Mounting dimensions for the 2X5 cabinet are shown in Figure 2.5.1 and
Figure 2.5.2.
RS3: System Cabinets
Floor-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-5-2
Door
Swing
600 (23.6)
1
264
(10.4)
26.5
(1.04)
400
(15.7)
.
.
.
.
.
.
402
(15.8)
972
(38.3)
57
(2.2)
Cable
Entry
Panel
Top
View Stabilizing
Bracket
614
(24.2)
535
(21.1)
65
(2.6)
405
(15.9)
2
26.5
(1.04)
Rear
Panel
90
(3.5)
10
(0.4)
dia
15
(.6)
30
(1.2)
dia
64
(2.5)
2367.5
(93.19)
2303.5
(90.69)
2332
(91.8)
100
(3.9)
Side
View
402
(15.8)
Rear
View
mm
(INCH)
Notes:
1 Allow minimum of 1016 mm (40 in.) between door side of cabinet and any permanent wall for
maintenance access.
2
Dimension of cabinet without side panels is 600 mm (23.6 in.).
Figure 2.5.1. 2X5 I/O Cabinet Dimensions
RS3: System Cabinets
Floor-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-5-3
Cable
Entry
Panel
264
(10.4)
475
(18.7)
600
(23.6)
4.0 (.55) Dia. 400
(15.7)
Plinth Base
Mounting Holes
1
275
(10.8)
350
(13.8)
62.5
(2.46)
37.5
(1.48)
Single-Bay
Foundation
134
(5.3)
Front
With
Back
Panels
125
(4.9)
1
Front
Multi-Bay
Foundation
(Back to Back)
mm
(INCH)
Notes:
1 Foundation dimensions do not include side panels.
Figure 2.5.2. 2X5 Cabinet Foundation Dimensions
RS3: System Cabinets
Floor-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-5-4
Mounting dimensions for the 4X5 cabinet are shown in Figure 2.5.3 and
Figure 2.5.4.
264
(10.4)
1
400
(15.7)
1135
(44.7)
Top Cable
Entry
Opening
65
(2.6)
1214
(47.8)
2
1005
(39.6)
90
(3.5)
1
972
(38.3)
402
(15,8)
10 (0.4)
dia
3
Top View
15
(.6)
30 (1.2)
dia
Stabilizing Bracket
64
(2.5)
2332
(91.8)
2367.5
(93.19)
2303.5
(90.69)
100
(3.9)
Side View (Doors Open)
Notes:
1 Allow minimum of 1016 mm (40 in.) between door side of cabinet and
any permanent wall for maintenance access.
2 Dimension of cabinet without side panels is 1200 mm (47.2 in.).
3
Rear View
mm
(INCH)
Dimension of cabinet without rear panel is 375.5 mm (14.75 in.).
Figure 2.5.3. 4X5 I/O Cabinet Dimensions
RS3: System Cabinets
Floor-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-5-5
134 With
(5.3) Back
Panels
350
(13.8)
275
(10.8)
4.0 (.55) Dia.
Plinth Base
Mounting Holes
37.5
(1.48)
Front
62.5
(2.46)
400
(15.7)
1
1200
(47.2)
1075
(42.3)
Front
125
(4.9)
Bottom
Cable
Entry
Opening
Front
Front
Single-Bay
Foundation
mm
(INCH)
Note:
1
Foundation dimensions do not include side panels.
Multi-Bay
Back to Back
Foundation
Figure 2.5.4. 4X5 Cabinet Foundation Dimensions
RS3: System Cabinets
Floor-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-5-6
Each cabinet comes with a mounting plate custom drilled for Multipoint
I/O termination panels. Termination panels can be mounted directly
against the mounting plate using M4 20 mm self-tapping screws
(G53405--1001--4020). Alternately, standard DIN rails can be installed
to mount termination panels equipped with the DIN foot. Either the
asymmetrical 32 mm “G” (1984--4297--000x) or the symmetrical 35 x
7.5 mm “hat” (1984--4309--000x) rail as shown in Figure 2.5.5 can be
used.
Symmetrical “Hat” Rail
Asymmetrical “G” Rail
Figure 2.5.5. DIN Rails
RS3: System Cabinets
Floor-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-5-7
Joining 2X5 or 4X5 I/O Cabinets Together
If 2X5 or 4X5 I/O cabinets are to be joined together side-by-side, they
should be joined before they are secured to the floor. Cabinets that are
to be joined to other cabinets do not have side panels on the mating
sides.
Use the 1984--4237--0001 Cabinet Joiner Kit to secure cabinets to each
other side-by-side. The kit consists of six threaded bushings and twelve
self-securing M6x12 cylinder-head screws. Figure 2.5.6 shows the
joining positions. Install gasket tape from the cabinet accessory kit on
one of the mating surfaces. Place a threaded bushing in each slot and
use a screw at each end of the bushing. Tighten the screws gradually
to bring the cabinets tightly together.
Bushing
Screw
Screw
Cabinet Wall
Figure 2.5.6. Joining I/O Cabinets
RS3: System Cabinets
Floor-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-5-8
Installing Vibration Protection
Vibration can damage electronic and mechanical assemblies. If a
system is to be located near equipment that can cause vibration,
cabinets should be isolated from the floor by installing a
vibration-damping medium, such as neoprene.
Neoprene can be cut to size and installed as shown in Figure 2.5.7.
Holes should be drilled in the mat to allow installation of the bolts. Nuts
should be installed loosely to minimize transmission of vibration to the
cabinet but still prevent the cabinet from tipping. The neoprene pad
must be sized carefully to match the cabinet surface area and load
factors. Neoprene is acceptable for high frequency, low amplitude
vibration.
Studs or Bolts
(Install Nuts Loosely)
Cabinet
Floor
Neoprene
Mat
Studs or Bolts
(Install Nuts Loosely)
Neoprene
Mat
Cabinet
Floor
Figure 2.5.7. Vibration Protection (Example)
RS3: System Cabinets
Floor-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-5-9
Stabilizing 2X5 and 4X5 I/O Cabinets
2X5 and 4X5 cabinets are unstable. Depending on the weight
distribution inside, they can tip over, even when joined side-to-side. To
prevent tipping they must be securely fastened to a wall, to the floor, or
be joined back-to-back.
Use the stabilizing bracket at the top rear of the cabinet to secure the
cabinet to a wall. There are two 10 mm (0.4 in.) holes in the stabilizing
bracket for this purpose.
The cabinets can be stabilized by joining them back-to-back. Bolt the
two stabilizing brackets together. Join only like-sized cabinets together
back-to-back.
The cabinets can be secured to the floor using the mounting holes in
the cabinet base.
WARNING
I/O cabinets can fall over if they are not supported at all
times. Take care when removing the cabinet from the
shipping pallet. Installed cabinets must be fastened to a
wall or joined in a group back-to-back with other cabinets.
RS3: System Cabinets
Floor-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-5-10
Grounding the Cabinets
All metalwork within the cabinet must be grounded to the rail structure
of the cabinet. This can be done by making bare metal to bare metal
electrical contact, by use of a bonding cable, or by using self tapping
screws in grounded metal. We recommend using more than one screw
to ground two metalwork assemblies together. The cabinet rail structure
must be connected to the building ground.
Use the ground block (55P0579x001) located on the center rail of the
cabinet to connect to the building ground.
When several cabinets are joined into a group, the ground jumpers
(1984--4237--0039) must be connected in daisy chain fashion between
the cabinets as shown in Figure 2.5.8. The ground block of the first and
last cabinet of the group must be connected to the building ground by a
heavy conductor 35 mm2 (2 AWG) or larger.
Ground
Jumper
Building Ground
Optional Ground
or Daisy Chain
Figure 2.5.8. Grounding a Group of 2X5 or 4X5 I/O Cabinets
RS3: System Cabinets
Floor-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-5-11
Wiring a 2X5 I/O Cabinet
Wires can enter the cabinet from the top or from the bottom.
Figure 2.5.9 shows wiring in the 2X5 I/O cabinet. System wiring is run
in the two 25X57 mm (1X2.25 in.) ducts (G60900--1022--0101) located
in the frame of the cabinet. Field wiring is run in the 102X102 mm (4X4
in.) duct (G6090--4040--0101) located in the center of the cabinet.
Field Wiring Duct
System Wiring Ducts
Figure 2.5.9. Field and System Wiring in a 2X5 I/O Cabinet
RS3: System Cabinets
Floor-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-5-12
Wiring a 4X5 I/O Cabinet
Wires can enter the cabinet from the top or bottom. System wiring for
the outer columns of termination panels is run in two 25X57 mm
(1X2.25 in.) ducts (G60900--1022--0101) located in the frame of the
cabinet. System wiring for the inner termination panels is run in the
central duct between the two columns.
Field wiring is run in the two 102X102 mm (4X4 in.) ducts
(G6090--4040--0101) between column pairs.
Figure 2.5.10 shows the locations of the termination panels and wiring
ducts on the mounting panel.
System Wiring Duct
System Wiring Duct
System Wiring Duct
Field Wiring Ducts
Figure 2.5.10. Field and System Wiring in a 4X5 I/O Cabinet
RS3: System Cabinets
Floor-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-5-13
Installing Multipoint I/O Termination Panels
Figure 2.5.11 shows a typical Multipoint I/O termination panel
installation.
Communications
Connectors
Field Wiring
System Wiring
FIM Power
Connector
Figure 2.5.11. Typical Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Installation
RS3: System Cabinets
Floor-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-5-14
Installing a Remote Power Supply
Figure 2.5.12 shows a typical Remote I/O Power supply installation.
See Section 6 for details of installing the supply.
Termination Panel
DC Distribution Block
Remote Power Supply
AC Distribution Block
Figure 2.5.12. Typical Installation in a 2X5 I/O Cabinet
RS3: System Cabinets
Floor-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-6-1
Section 6:
Wall-Mounted I/O Cabinets
The wall-mounted I/O cabinet is known as a 2X2 since it can hold two
columns of two Multipoint I/O termination panels.
The wall-mounted cabinet will meet IP66 and NEMA 4.
WARNING
The cabinet can fall over if it is not supported at all times.
Take care when removing the cabinet from the shipping
pallet. Installed cabinets must be fastened to a wall.
The cabinet can be mounted flush with the wall by using the four 8 mm
(0.3 in.) holes in the back of the cabinet.
The cabinet can be offset 40 mm (1.5 in.) from the wall by use of the
optional 1984--4237--0024 wall-mounting brackets. These brackets
extend 27 mm (1.1 in.) beyond the cabinet on each side.
Each cabinet comes with a mounting plate custom drilled for Multipoint
I/O termination panels. Termination panels can be mounted directly
against the mounting plate using M4 20 mm self-tapping screws
(G53405--1001--4020). Alternately, standard DIN rails can be installed
to mount termination panels equipped with the DIN foot. Either the
asymmetrical 32 mm “G” (1984--4297--000x) or the symmetrical 35x7.5
mm “hat” (1984--4309--000x) rail shown in Figure 2.6.1 can be used.
Symmetrical “Hat” Rail
Asymmetrical “G” Rail
Figure 2.6.1. DIN Rails
Figure 2.6.2 shows the dimensions of the 2X2 I/O cabinet.
RS3: System Cabinets
Wall-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-6-2
800
(31.5)
2
300
(11.8)
1080
(42.5)
Door
Swing
800 (31.5)
760
(30)
Mounting
Plate
on inside
back wall
8.0 (.31) Dia. Hole
16 (.63) Dia. Dimple
960
(37.8)
20
(.79)
20
(.78)
Top View
Door Latch
Handles
View A--A (Front View)
Door Hinge Side
A
Mounting
Plate
on inside
back wall
Cable Entry
Area
1000
(39.4)
M8 Grounding Studs
Left Side View (Door Open)
A
Bottom View
(inside cabinet)
Notes:
1 Allow minimum of 1016 mm (40 in.) between
cabinet and any permanent wall for maintenance
access.
2 Mounting plate has a custom hole pattern for
mounting Distributed I/O components.
Figure 2.6.2. 2X2 Wall-Mounted I/O Cabinet Dimensions
RS3: System Cabinets
mm
(INCH)
Wall-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-6-3
Grounding the Cabinet
All metalwork within the cabinet must be grounded to the rail structure
of the cabinet. This can be done by making bare metal to bare metal
electrical contact, by use of a bonding cable, or by using self-tapping
screws in grounded metal. We recommend using more than one screw
to ground two metalwork assemblies together. The cabinet rail structure
must be connected to the building ground.
There is a grounding lug (55P0579x001) near the bottom of the cabinet.
Use this lug to connect the cabinet to the building ground.
RS3: System Cabinets
Wall-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-6-4
Field Wiring
All wiring enters the cabinet from the bottom.
The 2X2 cabinet has all ducts for the system and field wiring fastened to
the mounting panel, as shown in Figure 2.6.3. The outside 25X57 mm
(1X2.25 in.) ducts (G60900--1022--0101) are for system wires. The
inside 102X102 mm (4X4 in.) duct (G6090--4040--0101) is for field
wires.
System Wiring Duct
Field Wiring Duct
Termination Panel
Figure 2.6.3. Field and System Wiring in a 2X2 I/O Cabinet
RS3: System Cabinets
Wall-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-6-5
Figure 2.6.4 shows a typical Multipoint I/O termination panel installation.
Communications
Connectors
System Wiring
Field Wiring
FIM Power
Connector
Figure 2.6.4. Typical Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Installation
RS3: System Cabinets
Wall-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-6-6
A Remote I/O Power Supply can be mounted as shown in Figure 2.6.5.
See Section 6 for information on installing the Remote I/O Power
Supply.
System Wiring Duct
Field Wiring Duct
Termination Panel
Remote Power Supply
AC Distribution Block
DC Distribution Block
Figure 2.6.5. Installing a Remote I/O Power Supply in a 2X2 I/O Cabinet
RS3: System Cabinets
Wall-Mounted I/O Cabinets
SP: 2-7-1
Section 7:
Remote I/O Power
The DIN rail mounted Remote I/O Power Supply can be used to supply
DC power to Multipoint I/O termination panels. The supply is
assembled as required from these components:
D
D
RS3: System Cabinets
AC Distribution Block (1984--4329--0001)
Remote I/O Power Supply (10P57010001, 10P55030001 and
10P55030002)
D
DC Distribution Block (1984--4329--000x)
D
AC/DC Distribution Block (1984--4329--0004)
D
DIN Rail, 396 mm (15.67 in.) long (1984--4309--0004)
D
DC I/O Power Cable(s) (1984--4337--xxxx and 1984--4433--xxxx)
D
Fuse Label (1984--4350--0001)
Remote I/O Power
SP: 2-7-2
Remote I/O Power Supply Assembly
Figure 2.7.1 shows a typical assembly. This assembly uses the same
space as a Multipoint I/O termination panel. It mounts on a 400 mm
(15.75 in.) DIN rail and is 118 mm (4.6 in.) wide. Figure 2.7.2 shows a
typical assembly.
DC Distribution Block
AC Distribution Block
Power Supply
Figure 2.7.1. Typical Remote I/O Power Supply Assembly
RS3: System Cabinets
Remote I/O Power
SP: 2-7-3
Jumpers
VDC1
VDC1
R1
R1
VDC1
VDC1
R1
R1
To DC Load 1
To DC Load 2
VDC1
VDC1
R1
R1
VDC1
VDC1
R1
R1
To DC Load 3
DC Distribution Block
Brown
Orange
Power Supply
Green
Black
L
AC
Supply
N/L2
Gnd
Terminal
Bridge
Jumper
I L1 1
L1 1
N/L2
N/L2
I L1 2
L1 2
N/L2
N/L2
White
AC Distribution Block
To Cabinet Fan
Figure 2.7.2. Typical Remote I/O Power Supply Wiring
RS3: System Cabinets
Remote I/O Power
SP: 2-7-4
AC Distribution Block
The AC distribution Block (1984--4329--0001) provides two fused
switched circuits to feed two AC devices, normally the power supply and
the cabinet fan. The AC Distribution Block consists of grey blocks for
the line and neutral connections and a yellow-green block for the
ground. It requires approximately 30 mm (1.2 in.) of space on the DIN
rail. Figure 2.7.3 shows the block. Figure 2.7.4 shows typical wiring.
The AC/DC Distribution Block (1984--4329--0004) provides ten DC
circuits (numbered 1--10) with a 1.0 amp fuse for each circuit and two
fused switched AC circuits to feed two AC devices. This block requires
approximately 115 mm (3.5 in.) of space on the DIN rail.
The neutral terminals are connected by a built-in jumper. The line
terminals are connected by an external jumper bar that must remain in
place. The terminals will accept up to 4 mm2 (10 AWG) solid or
stranded wire.
NOTE: Always bring power into the side with the jumpers or one fuse
will control both circuits.
The circuit is opened by removing the fuse module from the top of the
block. Each module has a replaceable fuse and a fuse-blown indicator
light.
RS3: System Cabinets
Remote I/O Power
SP: 2-7-5
DIN Rail
Top View
Fuse Module
IL11
IL12
N/L2
N/L2
Front View
Figure 2.7.3. AC Distribution Block
RS3: System Cabinets
Remote I/O Power
SP: 2-7-6
Terminal Blocks
IL1
L1
To Power Supply
Black
Black
AC Feed
White
N/L2
N/L2
Green
IL1
L1
N/L2
N/L2
External Jumper
White
To Fan
Black
White
Green
Figure 2.7.4. Typical AC Distribution Block Wiring
RS3: System Cabinets
Remote I/O Power
SP: 2-7-7
Remote I/O Power Supply
The Remote I/O Power Supply is available in the following models:
D
10P57010001 for 115--230 VAC and NRTL and CSA applications
D
10P55030001 for 115 VAC and CE applications
D
10P55030002 for 230 VAC and CE applications
10P57010001 DC output Is 5.0 amp (maximum) at 24V. The supply is
rated to deliver 120 watts.
10P5503000x DC output Is 6.0 amp (maximum) at 24V. The supply is
rated to deliver 150 watts.
The supply requires approximately 230 mm (9.1 in.) of space on the
DIN rail. Figure 2.7.5 shows the supply.
L1
N/L2
Black
White
Green
DC Output
Brown
Orange
AC Input
VDC RTN
VDC +
Figure 2.7.5. Remote I/O Power Supply
RS3: System Cabinets
Remote I/O Power
SP: 2-7-8
DC Distribution Block
The DC Distribution Block provides for either one or ten individually
switched and fused DC circuits. The available assemblies are:
D
D
D
1984--4329--0002 for ten DC circuits with a 1.0-amp fuse for each
circuit. This block requires approximately 85 mm (2.3 in.) of
space on the DIN rail.
1984--4329--0003 for one DC circuit with a 3.0-amp fuse. This
block requires approximately 24 mm (0.9 in.) of space on the DIN
rail.
1984--4329--0004 (AC/DC Distribution Block) for ten DC
circuits with a 1.0 amp fuse for each circuit and two fused
switched AC circuits to feed two AC devices. This block requires
approximately 115 mm (3.5 in.) of space on the DIN rail.
Figure 2.7.6 shows the --0002 and --0003 blocks. The neutral terminals
of the ten circuit block are jumpered together by an internal jumper bar.
The VDC terminals are jumpered by an external jumper bar.
Figure 2.7.7 shows typical wiring.
NOTE: You must bring power to the side with the jumpers or one fuse
will control all circuits.
The terminals will accept up to 4 mm2 (10 AWG) solid or stranded wire.
Always supply power to the center of the block on the side with the
jumpers.
The circuit is opened by removing the fuse module from the block.
Each module has a replaceable fuse and a fuse-blown indicator light.
AC distribution Block (1984--4329--0001) provides two fused switched
circuits to feed two AC devices, normally the power supply and the
cabinet fan. The AC Distribution Block consists of grey blocks for the
line and neutral connections and a yellow-green block for the ground. It
requires approximately 30 mm (1.2 in.)
RS3: System Cabinets
Remote I/O Power
SP: 2-7-9
Top View
VDC
1
VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
N
N N N N N N N N N N
Ten Circuit DC Distribution Block
1984--4329--0002
One Circuit DC Distribution Block
1984--4329--0003
Front View
Figure 2.7.6. DC Distribution Blocks
RS3: System Cabinets
Remote I/O Power
SP: 2-7-10
VDC 1
N
VDC 2
N
VDC 3
To DC Power Supply
N
VDC 4
Orange
VDC 1
DC Load 1
Brown
N
DC Load 2
VDC 2
Orange
N
Brown
VDC 3
N
Fuse
VDC 4
Orange
N
DC Load 4
N
Brown
Orange
VDC 5
N
VDC 5
N
Brown
VDC 6
N
VDC 6
N
Internal Jumper
VDC 9
N
VDC 9
N
External Jumper Bar
VDC 10
N
VDC 10
N
Figure 2.7.7. Typical DC Distribution Block Wiring
RS3: System Cabinets
Remote I/O Power
SP: 2-7-11
DC Power Cables
From one to ten DC power cables are supplied to connect the DC
distribution block to the Multipoint I/O termination panel. The cables
have stripped wire ends for connection to the power distribution
termination block on the termination panel.
The cable for A bus use is 1984--4337--xxxx (Cable, Local DC Power
supply, A Bus). For the B bus, use 1984--4433--xxxx (Cable, Local DC
Power supply, B Bus).
The last four digits of the part number indicate the length.
D
--0xxx is the length in meters
D
--9xxx is the length in millimeters
The standard color code is used: orange for VDC and brown for return.
DIN Rail
The optional symmetrical DIN rail is 396 mm (15.67 in.) long. It can be
mounted on the I/O cabinet mounting plate with the same holes and
mounting screws used for a Multipoint I/O termination panel.
The DIN rail must be grounded to the cabinet ground, The mounting
screws will normally provide an adequate ground connection.
Fuse Label
A label (1984--4350--000x) is provided to record the actual fuse sizes
installed in the AC and DC distribution blocks. Install the label inside
the I/O cabinet door or as close to the power supply as practical.
Standard fuse sizes are listed on the label; be sure to record any
changes from the standard. Figure 2.7.8 shows the label.
RS3: System Cabinets
Remote I/O Power
SP: 2-7-12
Power Distribution
Location: ___________________
Unless otherwise noted, the following fuse
sizes have been installed at the factory.
Blocks of AC:
3 Amp/circuit
Blocks of 10 DC:
1 Amp/circuit
Block of 1 DC:
3 Amp/circuit
DC CKT #
Fuse Size
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
AC CKT #
Fuse Size
1
2
Figure 2.7.8. Remote I/O Power Supply Fuse Label
RS3: System Cabinets
Remote I/O Power
SP: 2-7-13
Installing a Remote I/O Power Supply in an I/O Cabinet
The Remote I/O Power supply and distribution blocks can be mounted
on existing DIN rail or on the optional rail. The optional DIN rail fits on
the cabinet mounting panel. The supply assembly takes the same
amount of space as a distributed I/O termination panel.
Figure 2.7.9 shows typical mounting for a 2X5 I/O cabinet, the 4X5 is
similar. Figure 2.7.10 shows the assembly in a 2X2 I/O cabinet.
NOTE: The DIN rail must have an adequate ground connection to the
cabinet chassis.
RS3: System Cabinets
Remote I/O Power
SP: 2-7-14
Wiring Duct
(Field Wiring)
Termination Panel
DC Distribution Block
Remote Power Supply
AC Distribution Block
Figure 2.7.9. Installing a Remote I/O Power Supply in a 2X5 I/O Cabinet
RS3: System Cabinets
Remote I/O Power
SP: 2-7-15
Wiring Duct
System Wiring
Wiring Duct
Field Wiring
Termination Panel
Remote Power Supply
AC Distribution Block
DC Distribution Block
Figure 2.7.10. Installing a Remote I/O Power Supply in a 2X2 I/O Cabinet
RS3: System Cabinets
Remote I/O Power
SP: 2-7-16
RS3: System Cabinets
Remote I/O Power
RS3t
Site Preparation and Installation
Chapter 3:
Consoles
Section 1:
Section 2:
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1
Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1200 mm Deep Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zero Level Front-Facing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
--1 Level Rear-Facing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+1 Level Rear-Facing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fastening the Tables to the Floor (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leveling the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Table Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronics Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard System Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspended Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Other Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Interface Card Cage Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE-Compliant Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for Power and PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for SCSI and Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling from the OI Card Cage to the Keyboard/Video Interface . . . . . . .
Cabling the Keyboard/Video Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2
3-1-2
3-1-3
3-1-3
3-1-4
3-1-4
3-1-5
3-1-8
3-1-10
3-1-11
3-1-11
3-1-12
3-1-12
3-1-12
3-1-13
3-1-13
3-1-13
3-1-14
3-1-18
3-1-19
3-1-21
3-1-21
3-1-22
3-1-23
3-1-24
3-1-25
Series 1 Console Furniture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1
Console Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tabletops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronics Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Electronics Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tower Electronics Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard System Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-2
3-2-3
3-2-5
3-2-5
3-2-6
3-2-7
3-2-8
Contents
SP: ii
Section 3:
Section 4:
Section 5:
RS3: Consoles
Securing Tabletops to Each Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Connecting Modesty Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leveling the Table Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Distribution Box Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-EMC Operator Interface Card Cage Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CE-Compliant Operator Interface Card Cage Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE-Compliant Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for Power and PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for SCSI and Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling from the OI Card Cage to the Keyboard/Video Interface . . . . . . .
Cabling the Keyboard/Video Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-9
3-2-10
3-2-10
3-2-11
3-2-13
3-2-14
3-2-20
3-2-24
3-2-25
3-2-27
3-2-27
3-2-28
3-2-29
3-2-30
3-2-31
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1
Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Keyboard Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Labels in the Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing an Articulating-base CRT to the Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Modem Connection to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-2
3-3-5
3-3-10
3-3-12
3-3-14
3-3-15
3-3-16
3-3-16
Hardened Command Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1
Installing Vibration Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing the Console to the Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Keyboard Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-3
3-4-5
3-4-5
3-4-11
System Manager Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1
Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape Drive and Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard/Video Interface (KVI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Interface Card Cage Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE-Compliant Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for Power and PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Extender Tap Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for SCSI and Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling from the OI Card Cage to the Keyboard/Video Interface . . . . . . .
Cabling the Keyboard/Video Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-2
3-5-3
3-5-4
3-5-4
3-5-5
3-5-5
3-5-6
3-5-10
3-5-11
3-5-11
3-5-12
3-5-12
3-5-13
3-5-14
3-5-15
Contents
SP: iii
Section 6:
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-1
Planning a Process Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Process Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expanded Process Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection to a Plant Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process Network Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Process Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Router-Connected Process Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the RNI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS CRTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS CRT: Hitachi HM--4721--D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS CRT: ViewSonic P810 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS CRT: Iiyama Vision Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS Operator Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Circuit Board (10P56910001) . . . . . . .
Connecting the ROS Operator Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UPS Software Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-2
3-6-3
3-6-4
3-6-5
3-6-7
3-6-8
3-6-8
3-6-9
3-6-10
3-6-11
3-6-12
3-6-14
3-6-14
3-6-14
3-6-14
3-6-15
3-6-17
3-6-18
3-6-19
3-6-20
3-6-21
Contents
SP: iv
List of Figures
Figure
RS3: Consoles
Page
3.1.1
Typical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1
3.1.2
1200 mm Deep Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3
3.1.3
Zero Level Front-Facing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3
3.1.4
--1 Level Rear-Facing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-4
3.1.5
+1 Level Rear-Facing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-4
3.1.6
Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-5
3.1.7
750 mm Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-6
3.1.8
1275 mm Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-7
3.1.9
Suspended Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-12
3.1.10
OI Card Cage Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-14
3.1.11
Card Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-15
3.1.12
Rear View of Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-16
3.1.13
SCSI Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-19
3.1.14
Power Supply Mounting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-20
3.1.15
Power and Peerway Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-21
3.1.16
SCSI and Printer Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-22
3.1.17
Alarm Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-23
3.1.18
Keyboard Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-24
3.1.19
Keyboard/Video Interface Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-25
3.2.1
Series 1 Console Furniture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1
3.2.2
Rectangular Tabletop Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-3
3.2.3
Angle Tabletop Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-4
3.2.4
Standard Electronics Cabinet Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . .
3-2-5
3.2.5
Tower Electronics Cabinet Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . .
3-2-6
3.2.6
Series 1 Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-9
3.2.7
Keyboard/Video Interface Card, AC Distribution Box, and Monitor
Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-12
3.2.8
Typical Non-EMC Electronics Cabinet Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-15
3.2.9
Connecting Peerway Cables to Tap Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-16
3.2.10
Card Cage Numbering Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-17
3.2.11
Console Alarm Output Board External Alarm Installation . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-19
3.2.12
OI Card Cage Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-20
3.2.13
Card Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-21
Contents
SP: v
RS3: Consoles
3.2.14
Rear View of Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-22
3.2.15
SCSI Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-25
3.2.16
Power Supply Mounting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-26
3.2.17
Power and Peerway Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-27
3.2.18
SCSI and Printer Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-28
3.2.19
Alarm Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-29
3.2.20
Keyboard Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-30
3.2.21
Keyboard/Video Interface Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-31
3.3.1
Elevated Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . .
3-3-2
3.3.2
Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-3
3.3.3
Trackball Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-3
3.3.4
Configuration Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . .
3-3-4
3.3.5
Removing the Console Keyboard Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-5
3.3.6
Keyboard Interface Card Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-6
3.3.7
Free-Standing (tabletop) CRT Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-7
3.3.8
Barco CRT (Back View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-8
3.3.9
Installing Labels in Callup Buttons Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-10
3.3.10
Installing Labels in Operator Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-11
3.3.11
Free-standing CRT and Base Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . .
3-3-12
3.3.12
Turret-base CRT Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-13
3.3.13
Articulating-base CRT Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-13
3.3.14
Securing Articulating-base CRT to Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-14
3.3.15
Fujitsu Printer Model M3389 (DL3800) Dimensions in
Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-15
3.3.16
Printer Stand Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-15
3.3.17
Modem Connection to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-17
3.4.1
Hardened Command Console Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . .
3-4-1
3.4.2
Hardened Command Console Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . .
3-4-2
3.4.3
Vibration Protection Using Neoprene Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-3
3.4.4
Vibration Protection Using Shell With Resilient Material . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-4
3.4.5
Hardened Command Console (Doors Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-6
3.4.6
AC Distribution Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-7
3.4.7
Connecting PeerWay and Drop Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-9
3.4.8
Configuration Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-10
3.4.9
Installing Labels in Callup Buttons Keyboard and Operator Keyboards
3-4-12
3.5.1
System Manager Station: Front Door Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1
3.5.2
System Manager Station Electronics Cabinet Dimensions in
Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-2
Contents
SP: vi
RS3: Consoles
3.5.3
Internal Tower Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-4
3.5.4
OI Card Cage Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-6
3.5.5
Card Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-7
3.5.6
Rear View of Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-8
3.5.7
Power and Peerway Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-11
3.5.8
SCSI and Printer Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-12
3.5.9
Alarm Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-13
3.5.10
Keyboard Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-14
3.5.11
Keyboard/Video Interface Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-15
3.6.1
Basic Process Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-3
3.6.2
Expanded Process Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-4
3.6.3
Connection to a Plant Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-5
3.6.4
Network Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-6
3.6.5
RNI Write-on Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-11
3.6.6
Elevated Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . .
3-6-15
3.6.7
Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-16
3.6.8
ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-17
3.6.9
ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-18
Contents
SP: vii
List of Tables
Table
RS3: Consoles
Page
3.1.1
Tabletops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2
3.1.2
OI Card Cage Connectors and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-17
3.1.3
CE-Compliant Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-18
3.2.1
OI Card Cage Connectors and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-23
3.2.2
CE-Compliant Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-24
3.3.1
Racal-Vadic Communication Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-17
3.3.2
Multitech Modem DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-18
3.5.1
OI Card Cage Connectors and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-9
3.5.2
CE-Compliant Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-10
3.6.1
Typical Power Consumption Examples
3-6-20
.........................
Contents
SP: viii
RS3: Consoles
Contents
SP: 3-1-1
Section 1:
Series 2 Console Furniture
Series 2 furniture is modular, allowing the construction of single and
multi-level tables as required. See the Design Considerations section
for a listing of all available components. A typical installation is shown
in Figure 3.1.1.
Figure 3.1.1. Typical Installation
NOTE: Rear access is required for any table where the Operator
Interface (OI) Card Cage is installed.
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-2
Design Considerations
Series 2 tables are available in several configurations as shown below
in Table 3.1.1. Tabletops are available in full depth (1200 mm [47.2 in.])
or half depth (600 mm [23.6 in.]) and three widths (600, 1200, 1800 mm
[23.6, 47.2, 70.9 in.]). Half-depth tables are used to make multi-level
assemblies. The rear tabletop can be at the --1 level (depressed
102 mm [4 in.]), 0 level (even with the front), or the +1 level (elevated
560 mm [22 in.]). You can have rear tables mounted at --1 and +1 or at
0 and +1. Corner assemblies allow 45_ or 90_ bends.
Table 3.1.1. Tabletops
Position
Depth
Width
Capacity
0 Level
1200 mm
600, 1200, 1800 mm,
45_ Corner, 90_ Corner
800 kg (1800 pounds)
Front facing, 0 Level
600 mm
600, 1200, 1800 mm,
45_ Corner, 90_ Corner
400 kg (900 pounds)
Rear facing, --1 Level
600 mm
600, 1200, 1800 mm,
45_ Corner, 90_ Corner
400 kg (900 pounds)
Rear facing, +1 Level
670 mm
600, 1200, 1800 mm,
45_ Corner, 90_ Corner
400 kg (900 pounds)
Capacity
The capacity includes equipment on the top of the table and the weight
of suspended cabinets beneath the table.
CAUTION
Keep the center of gravity of heavy loads within 355 mm
(14 in.) of the table centerline. This prevents tipping.
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-3
1200 mm Deep Tables
Full-depth tables mount only at the zero level. A +1 level rear-facing
table can be used with a full-depth table. These tables have a rounded
front edge. There is a cable tray along the centerline. Covered cable
access holes are provided at the rear of the table. Figure 3.1.2 shows
the tabletops.
NOTE: Use of the 1200 mm deep table is recommended when access
keys are used. Placing the Keyboard/Video Interface (KVI) on a --1
level table can make access to the key difficult.
Figure 3.1.2. 1200 mm Deep Tables
Zero Level Front-Facing Tables
These tables can be used with +1 and --1 level tables. The front edge is
rounded. There is a cable tray on the rear underside. These tables are
normally used as the operator’s work surface. Figure 3.1.3 shows the
tabletops.
Figure 3.1.3. Zero Level Front-Facing Tables
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-4
- 1 Level Rear-Facing Tables
These tables can be used with 0 and +1 level tables. There is a cable
tray on the rear front side. Covered cable access holes are provided.
These tables are usually used to hold CRTs and KVI assemblies.
Figure 3.1.4 shows these tabletops.
NOTE: Consider using the 1200 mm deep table when access keys are
used. Placing the KVI on a --1 level table can make access to the key
difficult. The --1 level table is preferred when the password keyboard is
used.
Figure 3.1.4. --1 Level Rear-Facing Tables
+1 Level Rear-Facing Tables
These tables can be used with 0 and --1 level tables. The +1 table is
constructed of welded steel with integral cable ducts underneath. The
front edge is rounded. The table is 670 mm (26.4 in.) deep. There are
no cable access holes in the tabletop. These tables are usually used
for double-stacking CRTs. Figure 3.1.5 shows the tables.
Figure 3.1.5. +1 Level Rear-Facing Tables
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-5
Legs
Legs are available in two heights and eight configurations. The front
view, Figure 3.1.6, shows all combinations.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
No.
Leg
9
11
No.
Leg
1
+1 level table
7
Connecting, 1275 mm
2
0 level table
8
Right side connecting, 1275 mm
3
--1 level table
9
Right end, 750 mm
4
Left end, 750 mm (28.1 in.)
10
Left end, 1275 mm
5
Connecting, 750 mm
11
Right end, 1275 mm
6
Left side connecting, 1275 mm (50.2 in.)
Figure 3.1.6. Legs
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-6
The 750 mm (29.5 in.) legs support 0 and --1 level tables. The legs are
available for left end, right end, and connecting positions. Legs are
shipped with stop nuts at the 0 and --1 positions. Figure 3.1.7 shows
details of the 750 mm leg.
10
6
11
7
9
2
1
No.
12
8
5
13
3
4
Description
14
No.
Description
1
750 mm leg, outside view
8
Stopnut for --1 level tabletop
2
750 mm full panel
9
Stopnut for 0 level tabletop
3
750 mm leg, front view
10
0 level stopnut: 150 mm (5.9 in.)
4
750 mm leg, inside view
11
--1 level stopnut: 335 mm (13.2 in.)
5
Lower partial panel
12
Height of leg: 750 mm (29.5 in.)
6
Cable entry opening at front side of leg
13
Mounting holes: 660 mm (26.0 in.)
7
Fixed panel at rear side of leg
14
Width of foot: 720 mm (28.3 in.)
Figure 3.1.7. 750 mm Leg
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-7
The 1275 mm (50.2 in.) legs support 0, --1, and +1 level tables. The
legs are available in right end, left end, connecting, right connecting,
and left connecting configurations. Legs are shipped with stop nuts at
the 0, --1,and +1 positions. Figure 3.1.8 shows details.
14
9
13
8
12
15
2
7
6
11
5
16
10
1
No.
17
4
3
Description
18
No.
Description
1
1275 mm Leg, outside view
10
Stopnut for --1 level tabletop
2
Full panel
11
Stopnut for 0 level tabletop
3
1275 mm Leg, front view
12
Stopnut for +1 level tabletop
4
1275 mm Leg, inside view
13
0 level stopnut: 675 mm (26.6 in.)
5
Lower partial panel
14
+1 level stopnut: 150 mm (5.9 in.)
6
Cable entry opening at front side of leg
15
--1 level stopnut: 860 mm (33.9 in.)
7
Fixed panel at rear side of leg
16
Height of leg: 1275 mm (50.2 in.)
8
Upper partial panel
17
Mounting holes: 660 mm (26.0 in.)
9
Cable entry opening at center of leg
18
Width of foot: 720 mm (28.3 in.)
Figure 3.1.8. 1275 mm Leg
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-8
Assembly
The tables can be delivered partially set up or as a group of
subassemblies. This manual covers assembly and adjustment of the
tables.
-
Tools required:
D
Screwdriver, flat blade
D
4 and 5 mm hex wrenches
D
Power wrench or screwdriver
D
Strapping tape or masking tape
Recommended:
D
Panel jack or other means of supporting and lowering tabletops
D
Spirit level
Torque the setscrews to 7 NSm (63 in-lb). Torque screws in the
composition tabletop material to no more than 5 NSm (45 in-lb) to avoid
stripping the threads.
NOTE: It is sometimes easier to install the cable tray first and then put
the tabletops on. This works well if there is no mechanical lift available
to hold the tabletops during assembly.
-
General assembly instructions for tabletops with cable trays
installed:
1. Position the legs, making sure that the 0-level stop nuts and the
lower cable openings are at the front.
2. Remove all caps and side panels. Use a screwdriver placed
about 150 mm (6 in.) below the top of the panel to pry out the
panel.
3. Assemble 4 square nuts and M8x10 screws. The square nut has
one smooth side and one machined side. Be sure that the set
screw enters the square nut from the machined side (with 4 small
points at the corners).
4. Support the tabletop over the legs. Use of a jack or other device
to support the tabletop is highly recommended.
CAUTION
Have two people lift the tabletops.
5. Insert a square nut into the two slots at each end of the table
mounting brackets. Use tape to hold the nut in place.
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-9
6. Lower the table, inserting the mounting brackets into the leg
channels. Remove the tape before it enters the leg channel.
7. Lower the table until the brackets are against the stop nuts.
8. Tighten the set screws into the 4 square nuts. Use a 4 mm hex
wrench.
9. Leave the side panels and caps off until the table is leveled and
the cables are installed.
-
General assembly instructions to install the cable tray and then
the tabletop:
1. Remove the cable tray from the tabletop.
2. Remove all caps and side panels. Use a screwdriver placed
about 150 mm (6 in.) below the top of the panel to pry out the
panel.
3. Assemble 4 square nuts and M8x10 screws. The square nut has
one smooth side and one machined side. Be sure that the set
screw enters the square nut from the machined side (with 4 small
points at the corners).
4. Insert a square nut into the two slots at each end of the table
mounting brackets. Use tape to hold the nut in place.
5. Position the cable tray over the legs and insert the mounting
brackets into the leg channels. Remove the tape before it enters
the leg channel.
6. Lower the tray until the brackets are against the stop nuts.
7. Tighten the hex bolts into the 4 square nuts. Use a 4 mm hex
wrench.
8. Position the tabletop on the cable tray. Screw the tabletop to the
cable tray. Have someone hold it in position until several screws
are installed.
9. Leave the side panels and caps off until the table is leveled and
the cables are installed.
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-10
-
To assemble a zero-level (1200 mm deep) table:
1. Reposition the --1 level stop nuts to the 0 level position and follow
the general instructions.
-
To assemble a (0, - 1) level table:
1. Follow the general instructions. Install the --1 level table first.
-
To assemble a (0, +1, - 1) level table:
1. Remove the +1 level stop nuts.
2. Follow the general instructions to install the 0 and --1 level tables.
3. Replace the +1 level stopnuts.
4. Follow the general instructions to install the +1 level table.
Fastening the Tables to the Floor (Optional)
The tables can be fastened to the floor by bolts and washers inserted in
the holes in the feet.
-
To fasten the legs to the floor:
1. Remove the plastic caps on the bottoms of the legs. Use a
screwdriver from the front bottom of the cap.
2. Mark the positions of the holes and install 8 mm (5/16 in.)
threaded anchors in the floor.
3. Position the legs over the anchors.
4. Bolt the legs to the floor. Use 8 mm (5/16 in.) bolts and washers.
5. Replace the end caps.
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-11
Leveling the Table
Use a long spirit level to check the tabletops for level.
-
To level the table front to rear:
1. Loosen the 8 hex set screws at the bottom of the leg. Use a 4
mm hex wrench.
2. Use a 5 mm hex wrench to adjust the leveling screws at the top
of the leg. There is ¦25 mm (¦1 in.) adjustment available.
3. Turn the low side screw clockwise or the high side screw
counter-clockwise to adjust the tilt.
4. Tighten the 8 hex set screws at the bottom of the leg.
-
To level the table left to right:
1. Loosen the 8 hex set screws at the bottom of each leg.
2. Use a 5 mm hex wrench to adjust the leveling screws at the top
of the legs.
3. Turn both the low end screws clockwise or the high end screws
counter-clockwise to adjust the tilt. Turn both screws the same
amount.
4. Tighten the hex set screws at the bottom of the legs.
Adjusting Table Height
-
To adjust table height:
1. Loosen the 8 hex set screws at the bottom of each leg.
2. Use a 5 mm hex wrench to adjust the leveling screws at the top
of the legs.
3. Turn all screws clockwise to lower the tables or
counter-clockwise to raise the tables. Turn all screws the same
number of turns.
4. Tighten the hex set screws at the bottom of the legs.
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-12
Electronics Cabinets
The OI Card Cage can be housed in:
D
Standard System Cabinet
D
Suspended Cabinet
Standard System Cabinet
The rail space required in a standard system cabinet depends on the
number of tubes supported.
Suspended Cabinet
The console electronics (OI Card Cage, hard disk, and tape drive) can
be installed in a Suspended Cabinet under the rear half of the table
(--1 level or 0 level). The Suspended Cabinet (10P5264000x) mounts to
a “V” bracket that is screwed to the underside of the --1 level table.
Pre-drilled holes provide for mounting one cabinet for every 600 mm of
table length. A 600 mm wide table can hold one cabinet, a 1800 mm
table can hold three. Standard access to the tape drives and the
electronics cards in the OI Card Cage is from the rear of the table.
Front access is available on request. Figure 3.1.9 shows front and side
views of three Suspended Cabinets installed on a 1800 mm wide table.
Figure 3.1.9. Suspended Cabinet
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-13
-
To install a Suspended Cabinet:
1. Mount the “V” Bracket on the underside of the --1 level table (rear
half). Be sure that the open end of the “V” faces the rear of the
table. Use the supplied M5.5 x 38 mm screws in the pre-drilled
holes. Torque the screws in the tabletop to no more than 5 NSm
(45 in-lb).
2. Open the rear door of the cabinet and leave it open when
installing the cabinet. Remove the ground screw and washer
from the weld nut on the upper right side of the cabinet.
CAUTION
Have two people lift the cabinet.
3. Slide the cabinet onto the “V” Bracket . Secure the cabinet with
the supplied cap screw through the “V” Bracket.
4. Close the rear door. The fasteners pass through the cable tray.
5. Ground the cabinet to the cable tray with the ground screw and
paint-cutting washer from step 2.
Installing Power
55P0547x001 AC power receptacle strips are installed on the face of
the cable trays beneath the tables. The receptacles mount onto the
cable trays with two M4.8 x 13 mm self-drilling screws and paint-cutting
washers 1984-4327-0007.
1984-1657-000x AC power receptacles are installed on the underside of
the table surface.
Installing Cabling
You can route cables from the floor to the underside of the tabletop by
running them inside the side panel to the cable entry opening. The wire
channel is approximately 180 x 7 mm (7 x 1 in.). The centerline of the
inside channel is 14 mm (.55 in.) from the table edge. There is a wire
channel on each side of the leg.
Installing Other Equipment
Position the KVIs, CRTs, keyboards, and other equipment on the tables.
Use the built-in cable troughs, cable access holes, and space in the
legs to route cables out of sight as much as possible.
NOTE: Use the tie points provided on the cable trays to securely tie
down all cables.
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-14
Operator Interface Card Cage Connections
The Operator Interface (OI) Card Cages are typically located in a
Suspended Cabinet. They can also be located in a nearby standard
system cabinet. An OI Card Cage is included in the RS3 Millennium
Package (RMP).
The OI (Operator Interface) Card Cage (10P52820001) is an enclosed,
shielded redesign of the OI Card Cage (1984--0660--000x). It is
required for CE compliant installations but can be used in any
installation.
The functions of the Alarm Output Panel and Alarm Output Board
(1984--0744--000x) are included in the CE Card Cage Filterboard. The
card cage can be powered from the standard system bus or from an
optional remote power supply (10P54090003 or 0004 for CE
compliance or 10P56450001 for NRTL/CSA compliance).
Figure 3.1.10 shows the dimensions of the CE OI Card Cage in mm (in.).
181.5
(7.1 in.)
4
173
(6.8 in.)
440
(17.3 in.)
237
(9.3 in.)
No.
1
3
2
Description
No.
Description
1
Front view, door closed
3
Rear view
2
Side view
4
Top view
Figure 3.1.10. OI Card Cage Views
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-15
The position of the cards is shown in Figure 3.1.11.
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
1
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
OI Card Cage, front view
5
PeerWay Interface
2
Power Switch
6
Printer Interface
3
Power Regulator
7
SCSI Card
4
Video Generator
8
OI Processor
Figure 3.1.11. Card Positions
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-16
Figure 3.1.12 shows the OI Card Cage connectors and fuses. Several
connectors are used only when this cage replaces an earlier cage.
Table 3.1.2 lists the OI Card Cage connectors and fuses.
8
9
10
KEYBOARD/SCSI POWER
11
7
12
6
13
5
14
4
15
3
16
17
18
2
19
20
21
1
Figure 3.1.12. Rear View of Card Cage
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-17
Table 3.1.2. OI Card Cage Connectors and Fuses
No.
Description
No.
1
RS-422 Keyboard Interface cable connection
(J086)
12
DC power A cable connection (J907)
2
SCSI cable (J088)
13
SCSI power cable connection (J933)
3
RS-232 printer cable connection (J085)
14
Power Switch cable connection (J906)
4
Process Alarm cable connection (TB2)
15
PeerWay A Drop Cable connection (J084)
5
Hardware Alarm cable connection (TB1)
16
Video BNC Output RED (J646)
6
Alarm Circuit fuses (F1, F2) 1.5 A max
17
Video Output cable connection to the BNC
Breakout Panel (replacement use only)
(J082)
7
Process Alarm Opto-2 (RL2)
18
Video BNC Output GRN (J647)
8
Hardware Alarm Opto-1 (RL1)
19
Video BNC Output BLU (J648)
9
Alarm Output cable connection to Alarm
Output Panel (replacement use only) (J284)
20
PeerWay B Drop Cable connection (J083)
10
Keyboard/SCSI power cable connection
(J920)
21
Fan cable connection (J919)
11
DC power B cable connection (optional)
(J908)
RS3: Consoles
Description
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-18
Checklist for CE-Compliant Installations
These rules must be followed to ensure CE compliance:
1. Use cables listed in Table 3.1.3, as required.
2. The Keyboard/Video Interface-to-CRT coaxial cable
(1984--1691--0003) is approximately 1 meter (39 in.) long. Do
not use a longer cable between the KVI and the CRT.
3. Use Keyboard/Video Interface (KVI) 10P50840004 or 2004.
4. Use keyboards, trackball, printer, and CRT bearing the CE mark
and install them in a control room environment.
5. Power the cage from a CE-approved power supply such as the
system DC bus or a remote power supply (10P54090003 or
0004).
Table 3.1.3. CE-Compliant Cables
Cable
P/N
Maximum Length
PeerWay Drop Cable
1984--0473--00xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
DC Power Cable, bus to product
1984--0158--0xxx
61 meters (200 feet)
DC Power Cable, remote power supply to product
1984--1083--00xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
DC Power Cable, local power supply to product
10P54100001
Standard
Fan Power Cable (for use with remote power supply)
1984--1605--0009
Standard
Fan Power “Y” Cable (for use with local power supply)
10P54190001
Standard
Power Cable, disk and tape drive
10P56840001
Standard
I/O Cable, disk and tape drive
1984--1895--9901
Standard
Keyboard/Video Interface (KVI) Power Cable
1984--1628--0xxx
152.4 meters (500 feet)
RGB Video Cable, coaxial, console to KVI
1984--1691--0xxx
152.4 meters (500 feet)
RGB Video Cable, shielded, KVI to CRT
1984--1691--0003
1 meters (3 feet)
KVI Communication Cable, shielded, OI Card Cage to KVI
10P52890xxx
152.4 meters (500 feet)
Printer Communication Cable, shielded
10P530800xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
System Power Supply Unit DCD feeder cable
10P5827xxxx
3 meters (10 feet)
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-19
Mounting
The OI Card Cage mounts in a “7U” Mounting Bracket (10P52650001 or
0003) or a “13U” Mounting Bracket (10P52650002), which bolts to
standard 483 mm (19 in.) rails. The “7U” holds one card cage with tape
drive and disk and can be installed in a standard system cabinet or in a
Suspended Cabinet (10P52640001). The “13U” holds two cages and
peripherals in a stack. It can be installed only in a standard system
cabinet.
1. Mount the CE OI Card Cage (10P52820001) in a properly
grounded system cabinet or suspended cabinet. Use a “7U”
(10P52650001 or 0003) or “13U” (10P52650002) Mounting
Bracket.
2. Mount the OI Card Cage on the left with tape drive and hard disk
on the right as viewed from the front. Mounting the tape drive or
hard disk either above or below the OI Card Cage is not allowed.
3. Put the tape drive housing in electrical contact with the mounting
bracket (10P53270001).
4. Insulate the hard disk housing from the mounting bracket
(10P53270001).
5. Route the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) data and
power cables along the metal of the drive mounting bracket.
Place the excess portion of the SCSI cable in the area between
the card cage and the drive mount bracket to act as a service
loop. Do not route other cables with the SCSI cables or near the
drives. Figure 3.1.13 shows routing detail.
3
1
2
No.
Description
1
OI Card Cage (top view)
2
SCSI cable
No.
3
Description
Disk and tape drives
Figure 3.1.13. SCSI Cable Routing
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-20
6. Ground the KVI Enclosure (1984--1626--0004) and the KVI
(10P50840004 or 2004) to the CRT protective ground point.
7. If a remote power supply is required, mount a remote power
supply (10P54090003 or 0004 for CE compliance or
10P56450001 for CSA and NRTL compliance) onto the drive
mounting bracket. The power supply slides into rails on the
bracket and fastens in place with two screws as shown in
Figure 3.1.14. A cooling fan assembly (1984--3282--0001) is
required under the power supply. Route the AC power cord to
the AC distribution receptacle provided. Securely tie wrap the
cord to prevent movement or strain.
1
2
No.
3
Description
1
Mounting bracket
2
Power supply
No.
3
Description
OI Card Cage (rear or cable end)
Figure 3.1.14. Power Supply Mounting Components
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-21
System Cabling
Cable part numbers often use the last four digits to show cable length.
This varies among cables; some are in inches, feet, decimeters, or
meters; others use codes in place of a length. The variable is shown as
xxxx.
Cabling for Power and PeerWay
The DC power can be supplied from the system bus in a system cabinet
or from the optional remote power supply in a suspended cabinet.
Figure 3.1.15 shows power and PeerWay cabling.
1
2
3
4
5
6
No.
Connector
1
J908
PWRB
1984--0158--1xxx (B Bus)
DC power B (optional)
2
J907
PWRA
1984--0158--0xxx (A Bus)
1984--0158--1xxx (B Bus)
DC Bus to System Device (A Bus)
3
J906
POWER
SWITCH
10P53110001
Power switch and cable
4
J084
PEERWAY A
1984--0473--0xxx
PeerWay A Drop Cable
5
J083
PEERWAY B
1984--0473--0xxx
PeerWay B Drop Cable
6
J919
FAN
10P54190001
or 1984--1605--0009
“Y” cable, OI Card Cage to DC Fans,
or single fan cable
Cable
Comments
Figure 3.1.15. Power and Peerway Cabling
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-22
Cabling for SCSI and Printer
Figure 3.1.16 shows SCSI and printer cable connections.
1
2
3
No.
Connector
Cable
Comments
1
J933
SCSI POWER
10P56840001
Disk and Tape Drive Power (SCSI)
2
J085
RS-232
10P5308--xxxx
OI Card Cage to printer (RS-232)
3
J088
SCSI
1984--1895--9901
or --9909
Disk and tape communication cable (SCSI ribbon cable)
Use 1984--1895--0009 with disk-only console
Figure 3.1.16. SCSI and Printer Cable Connections
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-23
Cabling for Alarms
Optically isolated outputs are provided for Hardware and Process
Alarms. TB1 and TB2 have normally open circuits that close when an
associated alarm is active. A source of DC voltage between 5 and 40
volts is required. Maximum current is 1.0 amp. Use a diode across the
load if the load is inductive (Figure 3.1.17).
Use connector J284 (labeled ALARM OUTPUT) to connect an external
Alarm Output Panel (1984--1625--000x) and Alarm Output Board
(1984--0744--000x). This is normally only for replacement installations.
Figure 3.1.17 shows alarm connections.
1
2
+
LOAD
3
--
No.
Connector
1
J284
ALARM
OUTPUT
2
3
Cable
Comments
1984--0744--000x Pigtail
Alarm output (used for replacements only)
TB1
HARDWARE
ALARM
Customer supplied; connects to
screw terminals on TB1
Normally open hardware alarm
TB2
PROCESS
ALARM
Customer supplied; connects to
screw terminals on TB2
Normally open process alarm
Figure 3.1.17. Alarm Connectors
CAUTION
Do not power the alarm circuit with AC. Use of AC and
AC-rated optical isolators can result in problems that are
very hard to locate.
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-24
Cabling from the OI Card Cage to the Keyboard/Video Interface
RGB Video Cable (1984--1691--0xxx) connects the RED--GRN--BLU
(J646, J647, J648) connectors on the filterboard to the Keyboard/Video
Interface Card. This cable can be up to 152 meters (500 feet) long.
Connector J082 (labeled VIDEO) is used to bring video signals to an
external Alarm Output Panel (1984--1625--000x). This will normally be
used only for replacement installations.
The KVI Power Cable (1984--1628--xxxx) goes from P979 of the
10P54180001 cable to J942 on the KVI.
Use the shielded Keyboard Interface Cable 10P52890xxx to connect
J086 on the filterboard to J407 on the KVI Card.
Figure 3.1.18 shows keyboard cabling.
1
2
3
No.
Connector
Cable
Comments
1
P979
(on SCSI cable)
1984--1628--xxxx
KVI power to KVI Card
2
J646 RED
J647 GRN
J648 BLU
1984--1691--0xxx
RGB video cable to KVI Card
3
J086
RS-422
10P52890xxx
Keyboard interface cable to KVI Card
Figure 3.1.18. Keyboard Cabling
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-25
Cabling the Keyboard/Video Interface Card
Figure 3.1.19 shows keyboard/video interface cabling.
6
5
4
7
8
3
2
J942
J407
J491--3 J494 J495--7
9
1
(8 or 9, as applicable)
J410
J408
J409
10
11
12
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
KVI card 10P50840001 or --004
7
CRT AC power cord
2
KVI card DC power cable 1984--1628--0xxx to
J942
8
Monitor-supplied (D-sub connector) RGB
Video cable to J494 (if applicable, or use #9)
3
RS-422 keyboard communications cable
10P52890xxx to J407
9
RGB video CRT cable (BNC connector)
1984--1691--0003 to J495, J496, and J497
4
Ground wire to CRT ground point
10
Trackball and cable
5
RGB video input cable
1984--1691--0xxx to J491, J492, and J493
11
Operator keyboard and cable
6
CRT
12
Configuror’s keyboard and cable
D-sub = D-shell subminiature connector
Figure 3.1.19. Keyboard/Video Interface Cabling
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-1-26
RS3: Consoles
Series 2 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-1
Section 2:
Series 1 Console Furniture
Series 1 Console Furniture provides table surfaces in a variety of
shapes. Figure 3.2.1 shows a typical installation. This section gives the
dimensions of Series 1 console components, tells how to assemble the
console, and how to wire it.
Figure 3.2.1. Series 1 Console Furniture
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-2
Console Dimensions
Console furniture is made up of:
D
Tabletop(s) and Legs
D
Electronics Cabinet (optional)
D
Turret-mounted CRT(s) (optional)
The tabletop holds:
RS3: Consoles
D
Keyboard(s)
D
Free-standing CRT(s) (optional)
D
Printer (optional)
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-3
Tabletops
Series 1 tables consist of one or more of the rectangular tabletops
shown in Figure 3.2.2 and angled tops shown in Figure 3.2.3. The
tabletops are a light gray in color. All table configurations contain the
appropriate number of legs and modesty panels.
1245
(49.0)
1245
(49.0)
1219
(48.0)
1829
(72.0)
4 Foot Rectangle
Top
Views
6 Foot Rectangle
1245
(49.0)
51
(2.0)
2438
(96.0)
Side View
8 Foot Rectangle
Figure 3.2.2. Rectangular Tabletop Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-4
1152
(45.4)
1660
(65.4)
1194
(47.0)
1194
(47.0)
1245
(49.0)
1245
w(49.0)
508
(20.0)
1016
(40.0)
4 Foot Angle
2 Foot Angle
1245
(49.0)
1245
(49.0)
1245
(49.0)
1219
(48.0)
1245
(49.0)
1219
(48.0)
15 Degree Wing
Modesty Panel on Left
15 Degree Wing
Modesty Panel on
Right
3207
(126.3)
Top
Views
1245
(49.0)
8 Foot Angle
Figure 3.2.3. Angle Tabletop Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-5
Electronics Cabinets
Multitube Command Console electronics can be housed in:
D
Standard Electronics Cabinet
D
Tower Electronics Cabinet
D
Standard System Cabinet
The standard electronics cabinet or the tower electronics cabinet are
often used as a leg to support the tabletop.
Standard Electronics Cabinet
The standard electronics cabinet can hold up to three Operator
Interface (OI) Card Cages, and can support up to three CRTs.
Figure 3.2.4 shows the standard electronics cabinet dimensions.
566
(22.3)
Front
View
812
(32.0)
Top
View
673
(26.5)
762
(30.0)
566
(22.3)
589
(23.2)
Figure 3.2.4. Standard Electronics Cabinet Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-6
Tower Electronics Cabinet
The tower cabinet can hold one OI Card Cage, supporting one CRT.
Figure 3.2.5 shows the tower electronics cabinet dimensions.
332
(13.1)
812
(32.0)
Top
View
762
(30.0)
Front
View
673
(26.5)
332
(13.1)
348
(13.7)
Figure 3.2.5. Tower Electronics Cabinet Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-7
Standard System Cabinet
The rail space required in a standard system cabinet depends on the
number of tubes supported.
A single tube requires one OI Card Cage and takes 356 mm (14 in.) of
rail space. The hard disk and tape drive are mounted beside the OI
Card Cage.
A dual tube installation requires two OI Card Cages and takes 533 mm
(21 in.) of rail space. The card cages are mounted side by side with the
hard disks and tape drive that are mounted above the OI Card Cages.
A triple-tube installation requires three OI Card Cages and takes
762 mm (30 in.) of rail space. Two card cages are mounted side by
side. The hard disks and tape drive are mounted beside the third card
cage.
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-8
Console Installation
Series 1 tables are typically shipped already assembled. If the table is
delivered unassembled, see the drawing provided with the table for
assembly instructions.
WARNING
Series 1 tables can be very heavy and can be awkward to
lift or move. Tables that use an electronics cabinet as a
table leg and tables with a CRT mounted on the table can
be especially heavy. Use care when lifting or moving
tables to prevent personal injury or equipment damage.
Installation of the Multitube Command Console consists of adding
connecting modesty panels (if required), securing tabletops to each
other (if required), leveling the table surface, securing articulating CRTs
to the CRT bases (if required), making electrical connections, installing
labels in the console keyboards, and installing the printer. Figure 3.2.6
shows a typical installation.
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-9
Clamp two
places between
adjacent tables
1
Description
No.
1
Adjustable Levelers
2
Connecting Modesty Panel
3
2
No.
3
Description
Side Panels
Figure 3.2.6. Series 1 Table
Securing Tabletops to Each Other
Secure table tops to each other using two clamps between each pair of
tables, as shown in Figure 3.2.6.
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-10
Installing Connecting Modesty Panels
Some Series 1 tables are shipped with connecting modesty panels.
-
To install a connecting modesty panel:
1. Gain access to the interior of the table legs by removing each of
the required side panels. First, lift the panel straight up. Then,
pull the panel off.
2. Secure the connecting panel to the required legs with the screws
provided.
3. Replace the side panels.
Leveling the Table Surface
Level the table surface using the adjustable levelers on the base of the
legs. Figure 3.2.6 shows the location of the adjustable levelers.
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-11
Making Electrical Connections
The following procedures describe how to make electrical connections
for the console. The exact locations of card cages, AC distribution
boxes, cable troughs, CRTs, and so on differ with each installation.
These instructions and associated figures are designed to provide
general installation procedures.
Cables can be routed through table legs, cable troughs attached to the
underside of tables, holes in tabletops, holes in CRT bases, cable
socks, and other throughways, depending on the individual installation.
Cables should be marked at the connectors to identify which card cage
and CRT (if applicable) they should be connected to.
Some installations might have different lengths of the same type of
cable for a console, depending on the distance from the CRTs to the
console card cages. Check to ensure that each CRT has the correct
length of cables before installation.
Figure 3.2.7 shows a typical example of Keyboard/Video Interface (KVI)
card, AC distribution box, CRT cable connections, and cable routing.
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-12
1
R
G
B
2
3
14
4
13
5
6
12
11
10
Route Cables
Through Leg
9
8
7
Other accessories
requiring AC power
Video cables, keyboard
communication, and
30 VDC to card cages
To AC power source
1984-1657-000x: permanently wired
Rear panel of table shown
55P0547x001: IEC320 plug and cord connect
removed for clarity
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
Monitor (Rear)
8
Cable Through
2
Base
9
Tie Wrap
3
Keyboard Power cable
10
Ground Studs
4
AC Distribution Box
11
Keyboard Communications Cable
5
Ground Stud
12
KVI Card
6
Tabletop
13
Cable Stock
7
Monitor AC Power Cord
14
Video Cables
Figure 3.2.7. Keyboard/Video Interface Card, AC Distribution Box, and Monitor Cable Routing
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-13
AC Distribution Box Connections
An AC distribution box is typically mounted on the underside of a table
to provide AC and grounding connections for one or more CRTs.
-
To make AC distribution box connections:
1. Connect the ground wire from the CRT base to the grounding
screw on the AC distribution box. See Figure 3.2.7 for the
location of the AC distribution box grounding screw.
NOTE: On the 55P0547x001 distribution box, use the mounting screw
to bond to ground.
2. Route the AC power wiring through a table leg or other means
and connect to the AC distribution box.
NOTE: The 1984-1657-000x distribution box is permanently wired. The
wiring must be installed with proper strain relief.
NOTE: On the 1984-1657-000x distribution box, the user-supplied AC
power circuit must conform to local codes on wire size, routing, and
protection. Conduit can be used if required by local ordinance. A size
of 4 mm2 (12 AWG) wire is recommended for power wiring. The
maximum branch current rating is 15 amps. AC power wiring insulation
must have a voltage rating that is double that of the supply voltage.
NOTE: The maximum branch current rating for the 55P0547x001
distribution box is 10 amps.
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-14
Non-EMC Operator Interface Card Cage Connections
Operator Interface (OI) Card Cage 1984--0660--000x is typically located
in an Electronics Cabinet or on a Tower Electronics Cabinet. It can also
be located in a nearby standard system cabinet.
Figure 3.2.8 shows a typical installation.
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-15
Rear View
Alarm Output Panel
Alarm Output Card(s)
Top Panel
Left Side
Panel
3
PeerWay
Taps
2
RED GREEN BLUE
1
To External
Alarms
RGB Video
Cables
12 VDC Power Cable
to Tape and Disk if
the Card Cage is the
SCSI Master
PeerWay
Cables
Console Card Cage
PeerWay Drop
Cables
30 VDC
Power
A
B
30 VDC
Switch
36 VDC
30A
Keyboard
Communications
Cable
A Bus DC Input
B Bus DC Input
RS-232 Printer Cable
Keyboard 30 VDC Power Cable
also +5 Power Cable to Tape and Disk
if the Card Cage is the SCSI Master
PeerWay Cables
OR
Drop Cables
(Remote PeerWay Taps Only)
30 VDC Power
Supply
Figure 3.2.8. Typical Non-EMC Electronics Cabinet Wiring
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-16
-
To make OI Card Cage connections:
1. Connect the PeerWay cables to the PeerWay taps.
NOTE: If the PeerWay taps are mounted in the electronics cabinet, it is
necessary to remove the top and left side panels of the electronics
cabinet to gain access to the taps. Remove the four screws in each
corner of the top panel and lift it off. Remove the two screws securing
the side panel and lift it up and out. See Figure 3.2.9 for locations.
1
6
2
3
A
B
7
4
5
No.
8
Description
No.
Description
1
Tap Boxes
5
Left Side Panel
2
PeerWay Cables
6
Top Panel
3
Screws (2 Places)
7
Screws (4 Places)
4
Drop Cables to Card Cage
8
Electronics Cabinet
Figure 3.2.9. Connecting Peerway Cables to Tap Boxes
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-17
2. Connect the PeerWay drop cables (1984--0473--xxxx) from the
tap boxes to the card cage. The drop cables might have been
installed at the factory. If the PeerWay tap boxes are remotely
located, the drop cables must still be connected directly from the
tap boxes to the card cage.
Console card cages are assigned numbers according to their
location in the electronics cabinet. The card cage number is
used to connect the video RGB cables and external alarms.
Figure 3.2.10 shows the electronics cabinet numbering scheme.
The figure shows a typical electronics cabinet with three console
card cages. It does not show all of the equipment that can reside
in the cabinet. Wiring can be brought into the electronics cabinet
through the top of either side, the bottom, or the rear of the
cabinet.
Alarm Output
Panel
Card 0
Card 1
Card 2
3
2
1
RGB Video
Cable
Connections
Card Cage 2
Alarm Output
Cards
Rear View
Card Cage 0
Card Cage 1
Figure 3.2.10. Card Cage Numbering Scheme
3. Connect the RS-422 keyboard communication cable
(1984--1627--xxxx) from the console Keyboard/Video Interface
(KVI) Card to the console card cage at J086.
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-18
4. Connect the KVI card power cable (1984--1628--xxxx) from the
console KVI Card to the console card cage at the connector
(J920) directly below J907 and J908.
5. Connect the video RGB cables (1984--1691--xxxx) from the CRT
to the alarm output board at P140, P141, and P142.
Information about installing external console alarms is given later
in this section.
6. The 30 V DC switch box has cables (1984--0158--xxxx) coming
out of it for each console card cage. Connect one of the cables
to J907. If a dual DC distribution system is used, connect the
second power cable to J908.
7. Connect the 30 VDC cable to the 30 VDC switch box. The other
end of the cable will be connected to the DC distribution bus.
The console alarm output board can be used to trigger external alarm
devices based on the occurrence of either hardware or process alarms.
Two optically isolated circuits allow 5--40 VDC loads of up to 1 A.
Figure 3.2.11 shows a general diagram for external alarm installation.
See the Console Configuration Manual (CC) for details of alarm
configuration.
CAUTION
Do not power the alarm circuit with AC. Use of AC and
AC-rated optical isolators can result in problems that are
very hard to locate.
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-19
DC Power Supply
(5--40 VDC)
Ó ROSEMOUNT INC, 1984
ÅTB1
ALARM OUTPUT BOARD
+
OPTO 1 HARDWARE ALARM
--
F1 1.5A
+
OPTO 2 PROCESS ALARM
2
External Hardware
Alarm Enunciator or
Alarm Relay
Output
Å
O O O O
1 2 3 4
--
1
--
.
F2 1 5A
+
+
--
J289
External Process
Alarm Enunciator or
Alarm Relay
+
A commutating diode must be
added across the load when an
inductive device is used.
Output
--
User-supplied equipment
Figure 3.2.11. Console Alarm Output Board External Alarm Installation
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-20
CE-Compliant Operator Interface Card Cage Connections
The Operator Interface (OI) Card Cages are typically located in a
nearby standard system cabinet. An OI Card Cage is also included in
the RS3 Millennium Package (RMP).
The OI Card Cage (10P52820001) is an enclosed, shielded redesign of
the OI Card Cage (1984--0660--000x). It is required for CE-compliant
installations but can be used in any installation.
The functions of the Alarm Output Panel and Alarm Output Board
(1984--0744--000x) are included in the CE Card Cage Filterboard. The
cage can be powered from the standard system bus or from an optional
remote power supply (10P54090003 or 0004 for CE compliance or
10P56450003 for CSA and NRTL compliance).
Figure 3.2.12 shows the dimensions of the CE OI Card Cage in mm (in.).
181.5
(7.1 in.)
4
173
(6.8 in.)
440
(17.3 in.)
237
(9.3 in.)
No.
1
3
2
Description
No.
Description
1
Front view, door closed
3
Rear view
2
Side view
4
Top view
Figure 3.2.12. OI Card Cage Views
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-21
The position of the cards is shown in Figure 3.2.13.
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
1
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
OI Card Cage, front view
5
PeerWay Interface
2
Power Switch
6
Printer Interface
3
Power Regulator
7
SCSI Card
4
Video Generator
8
OI Processor
Figure 3.2.13. Card Positions
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-22
Figure 3.2.14 shows the OI Card Cage connectors and fuses. Several
connectors are used only when this cage replaces an earlier cage.
Table 3.2.1 lists the OI Card Cage connectors and fuses.
8
9
10
KEYBOARD/SCSI POWER
11
7
12
6
13
5
14
4
15
3
16
17
18
2
19
20
21
1
Figure 3.2.14. Rear View of Card Cage
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-23
Table 3.2.1. OI Card Cage Connectors and Fuses
No.
Description
No.
1
RS-422 Keyboard Interface cable connection
(J086)
12
DC power A cable connection (J907)
2
SCSI cable (J088)
13
SCSI power cable connection (J933)
3
RS-232 printer cable connection (J085)
14
Power Switch cable connection (J906)
4
Process Alarm cable connection (TB2)
15
PeerWay A Drop Cable connection (J084)
5
Hardware Alarm cable connection (TB1)
16
Video BNC Output RED (J646)
6
Alarm Circuit fuses (F1, F2) 1.5 A max
17
Video Output cable connection to the BNC
Breakout Panel (replacement use only)
(J082)
7
Process Alarm Opto--2 (RL2)
18
Video BNC Output GRN (J647)
8
Hardware Alarm Opto--1 (RL1)
19
Video BNC Output BLU (J648)
9
Alarm Output cable connection to Alarm
Output Panel (replacement use only) (J284)
20
PeerWay B Drop Cable connection (J083)
10
Keyboard/SCSI power cable connection
(J920)
21
Fan cable connection (J919)
11
DC power B cable connection (optional)
(J908)
RS3: Consoles
Description
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-24
Checklist for CE-Compliant Installations
These rules must be followed to ensure CE compliance:
1. Use cables listed in Table 3.2.2, as required.
2. The Keyboard/Video Interface to CRT coaxial cable
(1984--1691--0003) is approximately 1 meter (39 in.) long. Do
not use a longer cable between the KVI and the CRT.
3. Use Keyboard/Video Interface 10P50840004 or 2004.
4. Use keyboards, trackball, printer, and CRT bearing the CE mark
and install them in a control room environment.
5. Power the cage from a CE-approved power supply such as the
system DC bus or a remote power supply (10P54090003 or
0004).
Table 3.2.2. CE-Compliant Cables
Cable
P/N
Maximum Length
PeerWay Drop Cable
1984--0473--00xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
DC Power Cable, bus to product
1984--0158--0xxx
61 meters (200 feet)
DC Power Cable, remote power supply to product
1984--1083--00xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
DC Power Cable, local power supply to product
10P54100001
Standard
Fan Power Cable (for use with remote power supply)
1984--1605--0009
Standard
Fan Power “Y” Cable (for use with local power supply)
10P54190001
Standard
Power Cable, disk and tape drive
10P56840001
Standard
I/O Cable, disk and tape drive
1984--1895--9901
Standard
Keyboard/Video Interface (KVI) Power Cable
1984--1628--0xxx
152.4 meters (500 feet)
RGB Video Cable, coax, console to KVI
1984--1691--0xxx
152.4 meters (500 feet)
RGB Video Cable, shielded, KVI to CRT
1984--1691--0003
1 meters (3 feet)
KVI Communication Cable, shielded, OI Card Cage to KVI
10P52890xxx
152.4 merters (500 feet)
Printer Communication Cable, shielded
10P530800xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
System Power Supply Unit DCD feeder cable
10P5827xxxx
3 meters (10 feet)
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-25
Mounting
The OI Card Cage mounts in a “7U” Mounting Bracket (10P52650001)
or a “13U” Mounting Bracket (10P52650002), which bolts to standard
483 mm (19 in.) rails. The “7U” holds one card cage with tape drive and
disk and can be installed in a standard system cabinet. The “13U”
holds two cages and peripherals in a stack. It can be installed only in a
standard system cabinet.
1. Mount the CE OI Card Cage (10P52820001) in a properly
grounded system cabinet. Use a “7U” (10P52650001) or “13U”
(10P52650002) Mounting Bracket.
2. Mount the OI Card Cage on the left with tape drive and hard disk
on the right as viewed from the front. Mounting the tape drive or
hard disk either above or below the OI Card Cage is not allowed.
3. Put the tape drive housing in electrical contact with the mounting
bracket (10P53270001).
4. Insulate the hard disk housing from the mounting bracket
(10P53270001).
5. Route the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) data and
power cables along the metal of the drive mounting bracket.
Place the excess portion of the SCSI cable in the area between
the card cage and the drive mount bracket to act as a service
loop. Do not route other cables with the SCSI cables or near the
drives. Figure 3.2.15 shows routing detail.
3
1
2
No.
Description
1
OI Card Cage (top view)
2
SCSI cable
No.
3
Description
Disk and tape drives
Figure 3.2.15. SCSI Cable Routing
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-26
6. Ground the KVI Enclosure (1984--1626--0004) and the KVI
(10P50840004 or --2004) to the CRT protective ground point.
7. If a remote power supply is required, mount a remote power
supply (10P54090003 or 0004 for CE compliance or
10P56450003 for CSA and NRTL compliance) onto the drive
mounting bracket. The power supply slides into rails on the
bracket and fastens in place with two screws as shown in
Figure 3.2.16. A cooling fan assembly (1984--3282--0001) is
required under the power supply. Route the AC power cord to
the desired AC receptacle. Securely tie wrap the cord to prevent
movement or strain.
1
2
No.
3
Description
1
Mounting bracket
2
Power supply
No.
3
Description
OI Card Cage (rear or cable end)
Figure 3.2.16. Power Supply Mounting Components
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-27
System Cabling
Cable part numbers often use the last four digits to show cable length.
This varies among cables; some are in inches, feet, decimeters, or
meters; others use codes in place of a length. The variable is shown as
xxxx.
Cabling for Power and PeerWay
The DC power can be supplied from the system bus in a system cabinet
or from the optional remote power supply. Figure 3.2.17 shows power
and PeerWay cabling.
1
2
3
4
5
6
No.
Connector
1
J908
PWRB
1984--0158--1xxx (B Bus)
DC power B (optional)
2
J907
PWRA
1984--0158--0xxx (A Bus)
1984--0158--1xxx (B Bus)
DC bus to system device (A Bus)
3
J906
POWER
SWITCH
10P53110001
Power switch and cable
4
J084
PEERWAY A
1984--0473--0xxx
PeerWay A Drop Cable
5
J083
PEERWAY B
1984--0473--0xxx
PeerWay B Drop Cable
6
J919
FAN
10P54190001
or 1984--1605--0009
“Y” cable, OI Card Cage to DC fans
or single fan cable
Cable
Comments
Figure 3.2.17. Power and Peerway Cabling
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-28
Cabling for SCSI and Printer
Figure 3.2.18 shows SCSI and printer cable connections.
1
2
3
No.
Connector
Cable
Comments
1
J933
SCSI POWER
10P56840001
Disk and Tape Drive Power (SCSI)
2
J085
RS-232
10P5308--xxxx
OI Card Cage to printer (RS-232)
3
J088
SCSI
1984--1895--9901
or --9909
Disk and tape communication cable (SCSI ribbon cable)
Use 1984--1895--0009 with disk-only console
Figure 3.2.18. SCSI and Printer Cable Connections
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-29
Cabling for Alarms
Optically isolated outputs are provided for Hardware and Process
Alarms. TB1 and TB2 have normally open circuits that close when an
associated alarm is active. A source of DC voltage between 5 and 40
volts is required. Maximum current is 1.0 amp. Use a diode across the
load if the load is inductive (Figure 3.2.19 ).
Use connector J284 (labeled ALARM OUTPUT) to connect an external
Alarm Output Panel (1984--1625--000x) and Alarm Output Board
(1984--0744--000x). This is normally only for replacement installations.
Figure 3.2.19 shows alarm connections.
1
2
+
LOAD
3
--
No.
Connector
1
J284
ALARM
OUTPUT
2
3
Cable
Comments
1984--0744--000x Pigtail
Alarm Output (used for replacements only)
TB1
HARDWARE
ALARM
Customer supplied; connects to
screw terminals on TB1
Normally open hardware alarm
TB2
PROCESS
ALARM
Customer supplied; connects to
screw terminals on TB2
Normally open process alarm
Figure 3.2.19. Alarm Connectors
CAUTION
Do not power the alarm circuit with AC. Use of AC and
AC-rated optical isolators can result in problems that are
very hard to locate.
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-30
Cabling from the OI Card Cage to the Keyboard/Video Interface
RGB Video Cable (1984--1691--0xxx) connects the RED--GRN--BLU
(J646, J647, J648) connectors on the filterboard to the Keyboard/Video
Interface Card. This cable can be up to 152 meters (500 feet) long.
Connector J082 (labeled VIDEO) is used to bring video signals to an
external Alarm Output Panel (1984--1625--000x). This will normally be
used only for replacement installations.
The KVI Power Cable (1984--1628--xxxx) goes from P979 of the
10P54180001 cable to J942 on the KVI.
Use the shielded Keyboard Interface Cable 10P52890xxx to connect
J086 on the filterboard to J407 on the KVI Card.
Figure 3.2.20 shows keyboard cabling.
1
2
3
No.
Connector
Cable
1
P979
(on SCSI cable)
1984--1628--xxxx
KVI power to KVI Card
2
J646 RED
J647 GRN
J648 BLU
1984--1691--0xxx
RGB Video cable to KVI Card
3
J086
RS-422
10P52890xxx
Comments
Keyboard Interface cable to KVI Card
Figure 3.2.20. Keyboard Cabling
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-31
Cabling the Keyboard/Video Interface Card
Figure 3.2.21 shows keyboard/Video Interface cabling.
6
5
4
7
8
3
2
J942
J407
J491--3 J494 J495--7
9
1
(8 or 9, as applicable)
J410
J408
J409
10
11
12
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
KVI Card 10P50840001 or --004
7
CRT AC power cord
2
KVI Card DC power cable 1984--1628--0xxx to
J942
8
Monitor-supplied (dsub connector) RGB Video
cable to J494 (if applicable, or use #9)
3
RS-422 Keyboard Communications cable
10P52890xxx to J407
9
RGB Video CRT cable (BNC connector)
1984--1691--0003 to J495, J496, and J497
4
Ground wire to CRT ground point
10
Trackball and cable
5
RGB Video Input cable
1984--1691--0xxx to J491, J492, and J493
11
Operator Keyboard and cable
6
CRT
12
Configuror’s Keyboard and cable
Figure 3.2.21. Keyboard/Video Interface Cabling
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-2-32
RS3: Consoles
Series 1 Console Furniture
SP: 3-3-1
Section 3:
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
This section covers:
RS3: Consoles
D
Keyboards and Keyboard Interfaces
D
CRTs
D
Printers
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-3-2
Keyboards
The Multitube Command Console has a variety of keyboard options.
Figure 3.3.1 shows the dimensions of the elevated operator keyboard
with callup buttons.
OPTIONS
368
(14.5)
Top View
490
(19.3)
97
(3.8)
56
(2.1)
Side View
Figure 3.3.1. Elevated Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
RS3: Consoles
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-3-3
Figure 3.3.2 shows the dimensions of the operator keyboard with
trackball. The optional Trackball can be mounted at the left or the right
side.
181
(7.1)
Top View
490
(19.3)
Side View
With Trackball
66
(2.6)
56
(2.1)
46
(1.8)
25
(1.0)
Side View
w/o Trackball
Figure 3.3.2. Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
Figure 3.3.3 shows the dimensions of the trackball keyboard.
117
(4.6)
181
(7.1)
66
(2.6)
41
(1.6 )
Top View
Side View
Figure 3.3.3. Trackball Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
RS3: Consoles
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-3-4
Figure 3.3.4 shows the dimensions of the configuration keyboard.
498
(19.6)
210
(8.3)
32
(1.3)
Top View
Side View
Figure 3.3.4. Configuration Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
RS3: Consoles
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-3-5
Installing the Keyboard Interface Card
The Keyboard Interface Card (KBI) provides the electronic interface
between the Operator Interface Card Cage (OI Card Cage), the
keyboard(s), and the CRT. It is housed in the monitor base of a CRT.
There are several variations available to support standard keyswitches,
remote keyswitches, and the password security option.
-
To make electrical connections to the Keyboard Interface Card:
CAUTION
The console Keyboard Interface Card contains
electrostatic sensitive devices. Use a grounding wrist
strap while installing cards.
1. A portion of the connection cabling is typically routed through the
legs of the table. To access the interior of the table legs, the
table side panels must be removed. To remove a side panel, lift
the panel up an inch or two, and then pull out.
2. Remove the console Keyboard Interface Card from the monitor
base by removing the two screws at the front of the console base
and pulling out the assembly. Figure 3.3.5 shows the screw
locations.
Tabletop
Remove screws and pull out
keyboard interface card
Figure 3.3.5. Removing the Console Keyboard Interface Card
RS3: Consoles
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-3-6
3. Route the keyboard communications cable and the keyboard
30 VDC power cable through the table leg, cable trough,
tabletop, and the base to the Keyboard Interface Card. The
other ends of the cables will be connected to the console card
cage.
4. Connect the keyboard communications cable to the Keyboard
Interface Card at J407. The Keyboard Interface Card is shown in
Figure 3.3.6.
Ground
Wire
Keyboard
Keyboard Communications
Cable
Power Cable
J942
J407
Isolated Video
Output
RGB Cables
(Coax)
Isolated Video
Video Input
Output
RGB Cables RGB Cables
(Twisted Pairs)
GND
J491 J492 J493
J408 J409
J494
J495 J496 J497
J411
J410
Keyswitch
Configuror Keyboard
Trackball Keyboard
Operator Keyboard
Figure 3.3.6. Keyboard Interface Card Connections
5. Connect the keyboard 30 VDC power cable to the Keyboard
Interface Card at J942.
6. Connect a ground wire from the ground stud on the Keyboard
Interface Card to the ground stud on the CRT base. The ground
stud on the CRT base is located just inside the rectangular
opening at the rear of the base.
7. Connect a second ground wire to the ground stud on the CRT
base. This ground wire will be connected to the AC distribution
box later in this procedure.
8. Route the ground wire through the tabletop and cable sock.
RS3: Consoles
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-3-7
9. Connect the longer video RGB cables from the Alarm Output
Board to J491, J492, and J493. The video RGB cables
(1984--1691--xxxx) are three cables that are tie-wrapped
together. Route one end of the cables through the table leg,
cable trough, tabletop, CRT base, and cable sock. Then connect
the cables to the RGB receptacles in the Keyboard Interface
Card.
10. To install a free-standing (tabletop) CRT:
a. The CRT power cord has different connectors on each end.
Route the end that connects to the CRT (the rectangular plug)
through the table top, CRT base, and cable sock. Plug the
power cord into the CRT. Plug the other end of the cord into
the AC distribution box.
b. Connect the output RGB cable from the Keyboard Interface
Card (J494) to the connector on the back of the CRT as
shown in Figure 3.3.7.
c. Verify that the CRT power switch is on.
Rear View
Output RGB Cable
Power Cord
Cable Sock
Figure 3.3.7. Free-Standing (tabletop) CRT Connections
RS3: Consoles
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-3-8
11. To install a Barco (or other large) Monitor:
a. The CRT power cord has different connectors on each end.
Route the end that connects to the CRT (the rectangular plug)
through the tabletop, CRT base, and cable sock. Plug the
power cord into the CRT. Plug the other end of the cord into
the AC distribution box.
b. The three short video RGB cables (1984--1691--xxxx) are
tie-wrapped together. Connect the cables to the right-hand
set of RGB receptacles in the back of the CRT as shown in
Figure 3.3.8. The other end of the cables is connected to
J495, J496, and J497 on the keyboard Interface Card.
c. Verify that the termination switches are on 75 ohm and the
SYNC switch is on INT.
Label
Label
×
×
AC
POWER
Figure 3.3.8. Barco CRT (Back View)
RS3: Consoles
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-3-9
12. For a Remote Keyswitch application, connect the remote
keyswitch cable (1984--3267--xxxx) to J415.
13. For a Dual keyswitch application, connect the dual keyswitch
cable (1984--3223--xxxx) to J414.
14. Reinstall the console Keyboard Interface Card to the base with
the two screws.
15. Connect the configuration, operator, and trackball keyboards (if
available) to the base.
RS3: Consoles
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-3-10
Installing Labels in the Keyboards
The console callup buttons keyboard and operator keyboard contain
buttons that you can configure to perform certain functions.
-
To install labels in the callup buttons keyboard:
1. Prepare the label strips on a typewriter or with a pen.
2. Unplug the callup buttons keyboard from the keyboard interface
connector. Turn the keyboard upside down and remove the four
screws securing the base. See Figure 3.3.9 for screw locations.
Remove the base from the keyboard.
3. Do not attempt to put new labels on top of existing labels.
Remove any label strips that are being replaced. Remove the
label strips from the label backing and insert the strips into the
slots in the keyboard. Check the front of keyboard for proper
placement of strips.
4. Secure the base to the keyboard with the four screws. Do not
over-tighten screws — snug only. Plug the callup buttons
keyboard into the keyboard interface connector.
J393
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
J394
J395
Slot
Label Strip
Screw
4 Places
Base
Figure 3.3.9. Installing Labels in Callup Buttons Keyboard
RS3: Consoles
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-3-11
-
To install labels in the operator keyboard:
1. Prepare the label strips on a typewriter or with a pen.
2. Unplug the operator keyboard from the keyboard interface
connector. Turn the keyboard upside down and remove the six
screws securing the base to the keyboard. See Figure 3.3.10 for
screw locations. Remove the base from the keyboard.
3. Do not attempt to put new labels on top of existing labels.
Remove any label strips that are being replaced.
4. Remove the label backing from the label strips and insert the
strips into the slots in the keyboard. Check the front of keyboard
for proper placement of strips.
5. Secure the base to the keyboard with the six screws. Do not
over-tighten screws — snug only. Plug the operator keyboard
into the keyboard interface connector.
Operator Keyboard (Bottom View)
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Screws
(6 Places)
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Slot
Label Strip
Figure 3.3.10. Installing Labels in Operator Keyboard
RS3: Consoles
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-3-12
CRTs
Multitube Command Console CRTs are available as:
D
Free standing CRT
D
Turret base CRT
D
Articulating base CRT
Monitors are available in 14- to 21-inch models. Dimensions,
specifications, setup, cabling, and controls are described in the user
manual that accompanies the unit.
Turret-base CRTs are typically shipped secured to the tabletop. If the
table is not supplied, then no monitor-securing hardware is shipped with
the monitor. The user must provide the hardware necessary to fasten
the articulating base or turret base to the user supplied table. Use care
to insure stable mounting for the monitor.
Figure 3.3.11 shows the dimensions of a typical 15-inch free-standing
CRT.
358
(14)
441
(17.4)
381
(15)
354
(14)
Front View
Side View
51 (2.0)
381
(15.0)
381
(15.0)
Figure 3.3.11. Free-standing CRT and Base Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
RS3: Consoles
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-3-13
Figure 3.3.12 shows the dimensions of the turret-base CRT.
686
(27.0)
561
(22.1)
489
(19.3)
508
(20)
Side View
Front View
Figure 3.3.12. Turret-base CRT Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
Figure 3.3.13 shows dimensions of the articulating-base CRT.
502
(19.75)
521
(20.5)
12° Max tilt up
533
(21)
521 max
(20.5)
5° Max tilt down
Front View
Side View
Figure 3.3.13. Articulating-base CRT Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
RS3: Consoles
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-3-14
Securing an Articulating-base CRT to the Base
Articulating-base CRTs are typically shipped with the base secured to
the tabletop and the CRT packaged separately. The CRT must then be
secured to the base during installation.
-
To secure an articulating-base CRT to the articulating base:
1. Remove the plastic feet from the monitor (if present) and discard.
2. Secure the monitor to the base using the four screws provided,
as shown in Figure 3.3.14.
Monitor
Plastic Cap
4 Places
Screws (4 Places)
Monitor Base
Screws
(4 Places)
Tabletop
Cable entrance hole in tabletop
and cutout in monitor base
Figure 3.3.14. Securing Articulating-base CRT to Base
RS3: Consoles
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-3-15
Printer
Figure 3.3.15 shows the dimensions of the Fujitsu printer model M3389
(DL3800). Figure 3.3.16 shows the printer stand.
570
(22.4)
330
(13.0)
130
(5.1)
Top View
Side View
Figure 3.3.15. Fujitsu Printer Model M3389 (DL3800) Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
723
(29.5)
610
(24.0)
680
(28.0)
723
(29.5)
833
(34.0)
Side View
Top View
Figure 3.3.16. Printer Stand Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
RS3: Consoles
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-3-16
Installing a Printer
The RS-232 printer cable connects to the Printer Interface card in the
console card cage. A source of AC power is required for the printer.
Printer options must be set for the printer to communicate with the RS3
control system. See the manufacturer’s user manual (packed with the
printer), the Service Manual (SV: 3--5), or the Service Quick Reference
Guide for the settings of your printer.
Installing a Modem Connection to a Printer
You can use a modem to print console information at a remote location.
The modem connects to the console printer port. Figure 3.3.17 shows
equipment for a modem connection to a printer.
To use a modem, you must make some settings:
D
D
D
RS3: Consoles
You must configure the Racal-Vadic modem communication
options. Table 3.3.1 lists the recommended settings. For
information about how to make the settings, see the modem
manual.
You must set DIP switches on the Multitech modem. Table 3.3.2
lists the recommended settings. For information about how to
make the settings, see the modem manual.
Jumpers HD1 through HD6 on the Printer Interface card must be
set to the T position. For more information about the Printer
Interface card jumpers, see the Service Manual (SV: 3--5) or the
Service Quick Reference Guide.
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-3-17
7900--0164--000x
Console Card
Cage
Communication Line
Racal-Vadic
1200PA
Modem
7900--0165--000x
Multitech
MT212AH3
Modem
Printer
Figure 3.3.17. Modem Connection to a Printer
Table 3.3.1. Racal-Vadic Communication Option Settings
Option
Setting
Option
Setting
1 Standard options
2 Disabled
12
2 DSR control
2 DSR always on
13 Clock source
1 Internal
3 CXR control
1 CXR normal
14 Sync/async
1 Asynchronous
4 Auto answer
1 Enabled
15 Automatic Redial
1 No redial
5 Local copy
2 Disabled
16
6 Dial mode
1 Automatic selection
17 Flow control
2 XON/XOFF
7 Blind dial
1 Disabled
18 Speed conversion
1 Disabled
8 Call progress
2 Disabled
19 Error control mode
3 Disabled
9 Response mode
1 Full words
20 Error control
protocol
1 Originate side initiates
10 Character length
1 10 bits
21 CTS control
1 CTS follows RTS
11 Disconnect control
2 Disabled
22 DTR control
1 Terminal control
RS3: Consoles
not used
not used
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-3-18
Table 3.3.2. Multitech Modem DIP Switch Settings
8-Position
Switch
Setting
4-Position
Switch
Setting
1
Down
1
Up
2
Up
2
Up
3
Up
3
Down
4
Up
4
Down
5
Up
6
Up
7
Up
8
Down
RS3: Consoles
Keyboards, CRTs, and Printers
SP: 3-4-1
Section 4:
Hardened Command Console
The Hardened Command Console is used when environmental
conditions are harsh. Figure 3.4.1 and Figure 3.4.2 show the mounting
dimensions of the Hardened Command Console.
Optional
Removable
Lifting Eyes
Front View with
Doors Open
1830
(72.1)
1930
(76.0)
Figure 3.4.1. Hardened Command Console Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
RS3: Consoles
Hardened Command Console
SP: 3-4-2
610 (24)
Minimum Rear
Clearance for
Servicing
254
(10.0)
510
(20.1)
Top View with
Doors Open
787
(31.0)
775
(30.5)
787
(31.0)
Figure 3.4.2. Hardened Command Console Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
Installation of the Hardened Command Console consists of installing
vibration protection (if desired), securing the console to the floor, making
electrical connections, and installing labels in the keyboards.
RS3: Consoles
Hardened Command Console
SP: 3-4-3
Installing Vibration Protection
Vibration can damage electronic and mechanical assemblies. If a
Hardened Command Console is to be located near equipment that can
cause vibration, it should be isolated from the floor by installing a
vibration-damping medium.
Figure 3.4.3 shows use of a neoprene pad. Neoprene is acceptable for
high-frequency, low-amplitude vibration. Holes should be drilled in the
pad to allow installation of the console mounting studs. Nuts should be
installed loosely to minimize transmission of vibration to the console but
still prevent the console from tipping. The neoprene pad must be sized
carefully to match the console surface area and load factors.
Console
Flange
Hardened
Command
Console
Steel
Washer
Neoprene
Washer
Studs or Bolts
(4 Places)
Install Nuts
Loosely
Neoprene
Pad
Figure 3.4.3. Vibration Protection Using Neoprene Pad
RS3: Consoles
Hardened Command Console
SP: 3-4-4
Figure 3.4.4 shows use of a shell filled with resilient material to provide
vibration protection. This type of installation is acceptable for
low-frequency, high-amplitude vibration.
Mounting
Stud
Hardened
Command
Console
Shell
Vibration and
Shock Isolator
Resilient
Material
Shell retains mounting stud if
resilient material fails
Figure 3.4.4. Vibration Protection Using Shell With Resilient Material
RS3: Consoles
Hardened Command Console
SP: 3-4-5
Securing the Console to the Floor
Secure the console to the floor using the four bolt holes in the console
flange. Install the nuts loosely to minimize transmission of vibration to
the cabinet but still prevent the cabinet from tipping. The two optional
lift eye bolts can be removed and stored in the console.
Making Electrical Connections
Figure 3.4.5 shows the arrangement of the main electronic components
in the Hardened Command Console cabinet. Procedures for making
the electrical connections begin on the following page.
RS3: Consoles
Hardened Command Console
SP: 3-4-6
Monitor
Base
Console
Keyboard
Interface
Callup Buttons
Keyboards
Operator
Keyboard
To
Configuration
Keyboard
Joy Stick
Hard Disk
Drive (Rear)
Tape Drive
(Front)
PeerWay
Taps A & B
Alarm Output
Board
Card Cage
AC/DC Power
Supply
(Optional)
AC Distribution Box*
Figure 3.4.5. Hardened Command Console (Doors Open)
* The AC distribution box for the optional air conditioner must be
supplied separately by the customer and must be on a different circuit
than the circuit powering the CRT and card cage electronics.
RS3: Consoles
Hardened Command Console
SP: 3-4-7
-
To make electrical connections for the Hardened Command
Console:
NOTE: The AC power wiring must conform to local codes on wire size,
routing, and protection. Conduit and watertight connectors that meet
NEMA 4 specifications must be used. 4 mm2 (12 AWG) wire is
recommended for AC power wiring.
1. Prepare a suitable watertight opening in the cabinet.
2. Route the AC power wiring through the watertight opening.
3. Connect the AC power wiring to the AC distribution box located in
the lower right hand corner of cabinet. For the AC distribution
box location, see Figure 3.4.5. For an illustration of the AC
distribution box, see Figure 3.4.6.
1984-1657-000x
AC Distribution Box
(Cover Removed)
J1
AC Power
1
GR
L
N
2
3
Cooling Unit
AC/DC Power Supply
Monitor
Figure 3.4.6. AC Distribution Box
RS3: Consoles
Hardened Command Console
SP: 3-4-8
4. Plug the cooling unit, DC power supply, and monitor power cords
into the AC distribution box.
5. A termination board for external alarm connections is located in
the Hardened Command Console. If external alarm connections
will be made, route the external alarm wires through the
watertight opening in the cabinet to the alarm output board.
6. Route the PeerWay cables through the watertight opening to the
PeerWay taps.
7. Connect the PeerWay drop cables (1984--0473--xxxx) to the
PeerWay taps and to the card cage (see Figure 3.4.7).
8. Connect the 30 VDC cable(s) from the DC power supply to the
card cage (see Figure 3.4.7).
RS3: Consoles
Hardened Command Console
SP: 3-4-9
Card Cage
(Rear View)
PeerWay
Taps A & B
PeerWay
Cables
A
Drop Cables
B
DC Cables
Ground Lug
(If remote power supply is used,
negative side of power supply
must be connected to chassis.)
Figure 3.4.7. Connecting PeerWay and Drop Cables
RS3: Consoles
Hardened Command Console
SP: 3-4-10
9. Connect the cooling unit according to the manufacturer’s
instructions provided with the console.
10. Connect the configuration keyboard to the monitor base, as
shown in Figure 3.4.8.
Monitor
Key Switch
Configuration Keyboard
Operator Keyboard
Callup Buttons Keyboard
Figure 3.4.8. Configuration Keyboard
RS3: Consoles
Hardened Command Console
SP: 3-4-11
Installing Keyboard Labels
The Hardened Command Console callup buttons keyboard and
operator keyboards contain buttons that you can configure to perform
certain functions. The callup keyboard ships from the factory without
labels in the keyboard. The operator keyboard ships with default label
strips in the keyboard.
The console ships with blank callup keyboard label strips and blank
operator keyboard label strips that you can fill out and install in the
keyboards.
-
To install labels for the callup buttons keyboard and the
operator keyboard:
1. Prepare the callup keyboard label strips and the operator
keyboard label strips on a typewriter or with a pen.
2. Open the upper door of the Hardened Command Console.
3. Do not attempt to put new labels on top of existing labels.
Remove any label strips that are being replaced.
4. Remove the new label strips from the label backing and insert
them into the callup buttons and operator keyboards, as shown in
Figure 3.4.9. Check the front of the keyboard for proper
placement of strips.
5. Close the upper door to the Hardened Command Console.
RS3: Consoles
Hardened Command Console
SP: 3-4-12
Ä
Ä
Slot
Callup Buttons Keyboard
Label Strip
Operator Keyboard
Figure 3.4.9. Installing Labels in Callup Buttons Keyboard and Operator Keyboards
RS3: Consoles
Hardened Command Console
SP: 3-5-1
Section 5:
System Manager Station
The System Manager Station (SMS) is a stand-alone, upright
arrangement of the RS3 Operator Interface Console. Install it as close
to the console configuration work surface as the length of the Operator
keyboard cabling permits. The System Manager Station is
CE-compliant when system-powered or powered with the 10P54090003
or 0004 power supply. The SMS is shown in Figure 3.5.1.
3
2
4
1
6
5
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
PeerWay Tap
4
Ventilation slots
2
Tape drive
5
Fan assembly
3
Disk drive
6
OI Card Cage (door closed)
Figure 3.5.1. System Manager Station: Front Door Removed
RS3: Consoles
System Manager Station
SP: 3-5-2
Cabinet Dimensions
The System Manager Station cabinet can hold one Operator Interface
(OI) card cage, supporting one CRT. Figure 3.5.2 shows the System
Manager Station electronics cabinet dimensions.
534
(21.0)
Top
View
603
(23.75)
Front
View
590
(23.25)
297
(11.7)
Figure 3.5.2. System Manager Station Electronics Cabinet Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
Cooling the SMS requires consideration of space at the side for the
ventilation slots at the base and top of the enclosure. Leave at least 5
cm (2 in.) of unobstructed space for airflow through the assembly.
RS3: Consoles
System Manager Station
SP: 3-5-3
Making Electrical Connections
The following procedures describe how to make electrical connections
for the console. The exact locations of card cages, AC distribution
boxes, cable troughs, CRTs, and so on differ with each installation.
These instructions and associated figures are designed to provide
general installation procedures.
Cables can be routed through table legs, cable troughs attached to the
underside of tables, holes in tabletops, holes in CRT bases, cable
socks, and other throughways, depending on the individual installation.
Cables should be marked at the connectors to identify which card cage
and CRT (if applicable) they should be connected to.
Some installations might have different lengths of the same type of
cable for a console, depending on the distance from the CRT to the
console card cage. Check to ensure that the CRT has the correct
cables before installation.
Figure 3.5.1 and Figure 3.5.3 show SMS components.
1
5
3
2
4
6
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
PeerWay Tap
4
Keyboard/Video Interface (if internal mount)
2
Tape drive
5
Power supply (if present)
3
Disk drive
6
OI Card Cage (door closed)
RS3: Consoles
System Manager Station
SP: 3-5-4
Figure 3.5.3. Internal Tower Chassis
Power Supply
Power options include direct power from the RS3 DC bus or a local
AC/DC power supply option. The direct DC bus power input connection
is the standard RS3 18 to 36 VDC A and or B power bus. The AC/DC
power supply assembly is a 10P54090003 or 0004 for CE compliance
or 10P56450001 for CSA and NRTL compliance.
If a local AC/DC power supply is used, it is mounted on the back of the
disk drive mounting bracket using the power supply mounting bracket.
Grounding
Internal Power Supply
When an internal power supply is present, DC return and system
chassis grounds must be bonded to the protective conductor terminal of
the power supply.
If all grounding is through the power supply, the ground prong on the AC
plug is the only necessary system ground.
The tabletop-mounted Keyboard/Video Interface (KVI) chassis
connection must be grounded to the monitor safety ground using a 12
AWG (4 mm2) grounding wire.
Remote DC Power
When the DC supply is remote to the System Manager, ensure that the
DC return is bonded to the protective conductor terminal at the power
supply.
The SMS enclosure-mounted KVI chassis connection must be tied to
the system chassis, which in turn must be grounded to the monitor
safety ground using a 12 AWG (4 mm2) grounding wire.
The tabletop-mounted KVI chassis connection must be grounded to the
monitor safety ground using a 12 AWG (4 mm2) grounding wire.
RS3: Consoles
System Manager Station
SP: 3-5-5
Tape Drive and Disk Drive
The tape drive and disk drive are mounted above the OI card cage.
This assembly allows service access to the drives and power supply.
The drives are mounted on slot and tab brackets. These brackets can
be pulled out by removing 2 mounting screws on the side of the panel.
Lift and remove the mating tab from the slot in the U frame.
Keyboard/Video Interface (KVI)
The KVI can be mounted on a tabletop or in the SMS enclosure.
For tabletop mounting, use the CRT base KVI enclosure and install the
KVI by tightening the faceplate screws and connecting a ground wire
between the back of the circuit board and the ground stud on the
enclosure.
When the KVI is mounted on the right side of the SMS chassis
assembly, an access hole in the back allows access for keyboard
cables and the operator key.
Connect the monitor to the internal KVI using coaxial cables 3.05
meters (10 feet) or less. Monitors with dsub connectors must be used
with the tabletop-mounted KVI.
RS3: Consoles
System Manager Station
SP: 3-5-6
Operator Interface Card Cage Connections
The Operator Interface (OI) Card Cage (10P52820001) is the only card
cage allowed for use in the System Manager Station.
The functions of the Alarm Output Panel and Alarm Output Board
(1984--0744--000x) are included in the CE Card Cage Filterboard. The
cage can be powered from the standard system bus or from an optional
remote power supply (10P54090003 or 0004 for CE compliance or
10P56450001 for NRTL/CSA compliance).
Figure 3.5.4 shows the dimensions of the CE OI Card Cage in mm (in.).
181.5
(7.1 in.)
4
173
(6.8 in.)
440
(17.3 in.)
237
(9.3 in.)
No.
1
3
2
Description
No.
Description
1
Front view, door closed
3
Rear view
2
Side view
4
Top view
Figure 3.5.4. OI Card Cage Views
RS3: Consoles
System Manager Station
SP: 3-5-7
The position of the cards is shown in Figure 3.5.5.
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
1
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
OI Card Cage, front view
5
PeerWay Interface
2
Power Switch
6
Printer Interface
3
Power Regulator
7
SCSI Card
4
Video Generator
8
OI Processor
Figure 3.5.5. Card Positions
RS3: Consoles
System Manager Station
SP: 3-5-8
Figure 3.5.6 shows the OI Card Cage connectors and fuses. Several
connectors are used only when this cage replaces an earlier cage.
Table 3.5.1 lists the OI Card Cage connectors and fuses.
8
9
10
KEYBOARD/SCSI POWER
11
7
12
6
13
5
14
4
15
3
16
17
18
2
19
20
21
1
Figure 3.5.6. Rear View of Card Cage
RS3: Consoles
System Manager Station
SP: 3-5-9
Table 3.5.1. OI Card Cage Connectors and Fuses
No.
Description
No.
1
RS-422 Keyboard Interface cable connection
(J086)
12
DC power A cable connection (J907)
2
SCSI cable (J088)
13
SCSI power cable connection (J933)
3
RS-232 printer cable connection (J085)
14
Power Switch cable connection (J906)
4
Process Alarm cable connection (TB2)
15
PeerWay A Drop Cable connection (J084)
5
Hardware Alarm cable connection (TB1)
16
Video BNC Output RED (J646)
6
Alarm Circuit fuses (F1, F2) 1.5 A max
17
Video Output cable connection to the BNC
Breakout Panel (replacement use only)
(J082)
7
Process Alarm Opto-2 (RL2)
18
Video BNC Output GRN (J647)
8
Hardware Alarm Opto-1 (RL1)
19
Video BNC Output BLU (J648)
9
Alarm Output cable connection to Alarm
Output Panel (replacement use only) (J284)
20
PeerWay B Drop Cable connection (J083)
10
Keyboard/SCSI power cable connection
(J920)
21
Fan cable connection (J919)
11
DC power B cable connection (optional)
(J908)
RS3: Consoles
Description
System Manager Station
SP: 3-5-10
Checklist for CE-Compliant Installations
These rules must be followed to ensure CE compliance:
1. Use cables listed in Table 3.5.2, as required.
2. The KVI-to-CRT coaxial cable for a tabletop-mounted KVI
(1984--1691--0003) is approximately 1 meter (39 inches) long.
The KVI-to-CRT coaxial cable for an SMS enclosure-mounted
KVI (1984--1691--0010) is approximately 3 meters (10 feet) long.
Do not use a longer cable between the KVI and the CRT.
3. Use Keyboard/Video Interface 10P50840004 or 2004.
4. Use keyboards, trackball, printer, and CRT bearing the CE mark
and install them in a control room environment.
5. Power the cage from a CE-approved power supply such as the
system DC bus or a remote power supply (10P54090003 or
0004).
Table 3.5.2. CE-Compliant Cables
Cable
P/N
Maximum Length
PeerWay Drop Cable
1984--0473--00xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
DC Power Cable, bus to product
1984--0158--0xxx
61 meters (200 feet)
DC Power Cable, remote power supply to product
1984--1083--00xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
DC Power Cable, local power supply to product
10P54100001
Standard
Fan Power Cable (for use with remote power supply)
1984--1605--0009
Standard
Fan Power “Y” Cable (for use with local power supply)
10P54190001
Standard
Power Cable, disk and tape drive
10P56840001
Standard
I/O Cable, disk and tape drive
1984--1895--9901
Standard
Keyboard/Video Interface (KVI) Power Cable
1984--1628--0xxx
152.4 meters (500 feet)
RGB Video Cable, coax, console to KVI (tabletop mount KVI)
1984--1691--0xxx
152.4 meters (500 feet)
RGB Video Cable, shielded, KVI to CRT (tabletop mount KVI)
1984--1691--0003
1 meters (3 feet)
RGB Video Cable, shielded, KVI to CRT (internal mount KVI)
1984--1691--0010
3.05 meters (10 feet)
KVI Communication Cable, shielded, OI Card Cage to KVI
10P52890xxx
152.4 meters (500 feet)
Printer Communication Cable, shielded
10P530800xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
RS3: Consoles
System Manager Station
SP: 3-5-11
System Cabling
Cable part numbers often use the last four digits to show cable length.
This varies among cables; some are in inches, feet, decimeters, or
meters; others use codes in place of a length. The variable is shown as
xxxx.
Cabling for Power and PeerWay
The DC power can be supplied from the system bus in a system cabinet
or from the power supply. Figure 3.5.7 shows power and PeerWay
cabling.
1
2
3
4
5
6
No.
Connector
1
J908
PWRB
1984--0158--1xxx (Bus B)
DC power B (optional)
2
J907
PWRA
1984--0158--0xxx (Bus A)
1984--0158--1xxx (Bus B)
DC Bus to System Device (Bus A)
3
J906
POWER
SWITCH
10P53110001
Power switch and cable
4
J084
PEERWAY A
1984--0473--0xxx
PeerWay A Drop Cable
5
J083
PEERWAY B
1984--0473--0xxx
PeerWay B Drop Cable
6
J919
FAN
10P54190001
or 1984--1605--0009
“Y” cable, OI Card Cage to DC Fans
or single fan cable
Cable
Comments
Figure 3.5.7. Power and Peerway Cabling
RS3: Consoles
System Manager Station
SP: 3-5-12
PeerWay Extender Tap Usage
An SMS enclosure-mounted PeerWay Extender (PX) tap set should
serve only the SMS node, although another node may be connected via
PeerWay drop cables to the PX tap set. Do not connect a twin-axial
PeerWay cable to the PX tap set. Otherwise, the PeerWay would be
broken whenever the SMS is powered off.
When the PX tap set serves multiple nodes, the tap set must be
mounted externally and provided with a backed-up power source. The
SMS would then connect to the PX tap or a standard twin axial tap via a
PeerWay drop cable.
Cabling for SCSI and Printer
Figure 3.5.8 shows SCSI and printer cable connections.
1
2
3
No.
Connector
Cable
Comments
1
J933
SCSI POWER
10P56840001
Disk and tape drive power (SCSI)
2
J085
RS-232
10P5308xxxx
OI Card Cage to printer (RS-232)
3
J088
SCSI
1984--1895--9901
Disk and tape communication cable
(SCSI ribbon cable)
Figure 3.5.8. SCSI and Printer Cable Connections
RS3: Consoles
System Manager Station
SP: 3-5-13
Cabling for Alarms
Optically isolated outputs are provided for Hardware and Process
Alarms. TB1 and TB2 have normally-open circuits that close when an
associated alarm is active. A source of DC voltage between 5 and 40
volts is required. Maximum current is 1.0 amp. Use a diode across the
load if the load is inductive (Figure 3.5.9).
Figure 3.5.9 shows alarm connections.
1
+
LOAD
2
--
No.
Connector
Cable
Comments
1
TB1
HARDWARE
ALARM
Customer supplied; connects to
screw terminals on TB1
Normally open hardware alarm
2
TB2
PROCESS
ALARM
Customer supplied; connects to
screw terminals on TB2
Normally open process alarm
Figure 3.5.9. Alarm Connectors
CAUTION
Do not power the alarm circuit with AC. Use of AC and
AC-rated optical isolators can result in problems that are
very hard to locate.
RS3: Consoles
System Manager Station
SP: 3-5-14
Cabling from the OI Card Cage to the Keyboard/Video Interface
The Keyboard/Video Interface card may be installed in the SMS cabinet
or in a KVI enclosure, at the CRT.
RGB Video Cable (1984--1691--0xxx) connects the RED--GRN--BLU
(J646, J647, J648) connectors on the filterboard to the KVI Card. This
cable can be up to 152 meters (500 feet) long (for a tabletop mounted
KVI).
The KVI Power Cable (1984--1628--xxxx) goes from P979 of the
10P54180001 cable to J942 on the KVI.
Use the shielded Keyboard Interface Cable 10P52890xxx to connect
J086 on the filterboard to J407 on the KVI Card.
Figure 3.5.10 shows keyboard cabling.
1
2
3
No.
Connector
Cable
1
P979
(on SCSI cable)
1984--1628--xxxx
KVI power to KVI Card
2
J646 RED
J647 GRN
J648 BLU
1984--1691--0xxx
RGB Video cable to KVI Card
3
J086
RS-422
10P52890xxx
Comments
Keyboard Interface cable to KVI Card
Figure 3.5.10. Keyboard Cabling
RS3: Consoles
System Manager Station
SP: 3-5-15
Cabling the Keyboard/Video Interface Card
Figure 3.5.11 shows keyboard/Video Interface cabling.
6
5
4
7
8
3
2
J942
J407
J491--3 J494 J495--7
9
1
(8 or 9, as applicable)
J410
J408
J409
10
11
12
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
KVI Card 10P50840001 or --004
7
CRT AC power cord
2
KVI Card DC power cable 1984--1628--0xxx to
J942
8
Monitor-supplied (dsub connector) RGB Video
cable to J494 (if applicable, or use #9)
3
RS-422 Keyboard Communications cable
10P52890xxx to J407
9
RGB Video CRT cable (BNC connector)
1984--1691--0003 to J495, J496, and J497
4
Ground wire to CRT ground point
10
Trackball and cable
5
RGB Video Input cable
1984--1691--0xxx to J491, J492, and J493
11
Operator Keyboard and cable
6
CRT
12
Configuror’s Keyboard and cable
Figure 3.5.11. Keyboard/Video Interface Cabling
RS3: Consoles
System Manager Station
SP: 3-5-16
RS3: Consoles
System Manager Station
SP: 3-6-1
Section 6:
RS3 Operator Station
You must complete these tasks to install the network. This section
covers installation of:
RS3: Consoles
D
Ethernet equipment
D
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
D
Workstation
D
Operator Keyboard
D
Router
D
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-2
Planning a Process Network
The RS3 Operations Suite is a set of native 32-bit applications that run
under the Windows NTä operating system. The RS3 Operations Suite
allows for the operation, observation, and control of an RS3 PeerWay
system from a PC workstation on a process network.
A process network is an Ethernet network dedicated to process control
traffic. It must always be isolated from other networks in the plant so
that network traffic in other areas does not interfere with control and
data traffic on the process network. A router must be used to isolate the
process network from the plant network. The choice depends on the
size, design, and use of the plant network.
The only equipment installed in the process network should be
workstation(s), RNI(s), and a hub. The RNI provides the bridge
between the RS3 PeerWay and the process network. The hub
connects all equipment in the process network and supports connection
to the plant network through a router. The workstations and hub should
be connected to a reliable power supply, preferably an uninterruptible
power supply (UPS).
The RS3 process network uses Category 5 10BaseT cables that can be
up to 100 meters (328 feet) long. You should consider having the
network installed by an organization skilled in the installation of Ethernet
networks. Cabling problems are the most common forms of trouble with
Ethernet installations. Experienced installers minimize these problems.
Each workstation must have a Hardware Keylock to authorize use of the
software. At least one workstation on the process network should have:
D
D
A tape drive for backup of all workstations on the process
network.
A printer. The printer should be configured as a shared printer so
it can be used by any workstation on the process network.
NOTE: Alarm logging should be done on a printer attached to an RS3
PeerWay command console.
There is a one-to-one relationship between a workstation and RNI.
Each workstation is set up to work with a particular RNI. The RNI
should have no other responsibilities.
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-3
Basic Process Network
The simplest and most basic process network (Figure 3.6.1) consists of
an RNI, a workstation, and a 10BaseT crossover cable (10P5562xxxx).
The crossover cable has the transmit and receive connections reversed,
similar to a “null modem” cable. This places the workstation on a
dedicated Ethernet network, providing a stand-alone workstation with no
communication to any other workstation except through the RS3
PeerWay. There is no communication path to a plant network.
To be able to back up the hard disk, the workstation must have a tape
drive. A printer is optional.
Workstation
“Crossover” Cable
RNI
PeerWay
Figure 3.6.1. Basic Process Network
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-4
Expanded Process Network
The next step up is to add a hub between the RNI and the workstation.
The hub has multiple ports, so several RNIs and several workstations
can be connected to the hub with 10BaseT Ethernet cable
(10P5560xxxx). The hub is at the center of a star configuration with a
cable running from it to each piece of equipment on the process
network (Figure 3.6.2). There is no communication path to a plant
network. There remains a one-to-one relationship between a
workstation and the RNI assigned to it.
Workstations
Hub
RNI
PeerWay
Figure 3.6.2. Expanded Process Network
Hubs are available in several sizes and can be stacked to provide a
large number of ports. See the Service Manual for more information.
We suggest use of the TP/8 8-port unmanaged hub for small process
networks and the FMS II 12- or 24-port hubs for larger networks.
You can connect a printer to one of the workstations and configure it as
a shared printer. Any workstation can then use the printer.
To be able to back up the hard disks of all workstations, at least one
workstation must have a tape drive. The workstation with the tape drive
becomes the backup server workstation. It must also have the
appropriate backup software loaded.
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-5
Connection to a Plant Network
Connecting the process network to a plant network (Figure 3.6.3)
requires special consideration. A router is required. The equipment
required depends on the size, design, and usage of the plant network,
so only general guidelines can be given here. Isolation is essential, so
that a malfunctioning device somewhere in the plant does not affect the
process network.
The system administrator of the plant network will specify the required
equipment and might also specify the addresses to be used for the
process network. A large plant network might be using network
management software. If so, the system administrator may require a
network management module in the process network hub.
Router
A plant network will have one or more routers to provide protected entry
points for the process network. The router provides conversion
between various types of Ethernet (10BaseT, 10Base2, etc.) and
isolates traffic among networks. A router can be connected via the
attachment unit interface (AUI) connector on the FMS II hubs or via the
baby “N” connector (BNC) on the TP/8 hub. A transceiver module might
be required to connect to the router.
Workstations
AUI Cable
Router
To Plant Network
Hub
RNI
PeerWay
Figure 3.6.3. Connection to a Plant Network
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-6
Network
Management
A large plant network may use network management software and
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) to monitor performance
of the various networks (Figure 3.6.4). A network management module
can be installed in any of the FMS II hubs.
Workstations
AUI Cable
Router
To Plant Network
Hub with Network
Management Module
RNI
PeerWay
Figure 3.6.4. Network Management
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-7
Process Network Addressing
Each node on a network has three addresses:
D
Media Access Control (MAC) address (hardware address)
D
Internet Protocol (IP) address (network address)
D
Name
All three addresses point to the same item of hardware.
MAC Address
The MAC address is a unique number that is assigned by the device
manufacturer. This address, like a serial number, belongs to the
specific piece of hardware. It never changes. The address is normally
written as 12 hex digits such as 08003E132409. Hyphens (--) or colons
(:) may optionally be used to separate the bytes. This address is used
by the Ethernet hardware to reach a specific node.
IP Address
The IP address is assigned by the system administrator at your site. An
IP address is a 32-bit value assigned by the system administrator. It is
normally written as a set of four decimal numbers separated by periods
(w.x.y.z). The numbers are from 0 to 255 and represent the value of an
octet or group of eight bits in the address. This address identifies the
location of the node in the network. Much can be done with the IP
address to isolate your process network from other networks in the
plant.
Name
The name is assigned by the system administrator for human
convenience. It is much easier to talk about a node as “RNI1” than it is
to use the IP address or the MAC address. Software translates the
name into the IP or MAC address as required.
The name can be up to 16 characters long. The only punctuation
allowed is the underscore ( _ ). In offices, it is common to give the
nodes fanciful names such as “Gumby”, “Hotrod”, or “George”. In a
plant, it is better to use functional names such as ”RNI3”, “Console6”, or
“Control2”. The name will be used in forming RS3 tag addresses.
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-8
Isolated Process Network
An isolated process network is not connected to a higher level network
such as a plant network. The only requirement for IP addresses within
an isolated network is that they all belong to the same subnetwork. All
nodes on the network will then be able to talk with each other.
You should use IP addresses chosen from the public address set. You
can use the class A public network 10.xxx.yyy.zzz, with a subnetwork
mask of 255.0.0.0. All addresses on a subnet must have the same
value (1 -- 254) for xxx and yyy. The last octet (zzz) can be used to
number nodes from 1 to 254. Each node must have a unique value for
zzz. Values 0 and 255 are reserved.
If there is a possibility that you will make the connection in the future,
you should use IP addresses specified by the plant network system
administrator. If you connect to a plant network by a router, you can
choose to renumber the nodes or to continue use of the current
addresses.
Router-Connected Process Network
A process network that is connected to a plant network via a router can
either use IP addresses as specified by the plant network or addresses
from the public address set. Each node must have a unique name and
IP address.
There is a security advantage in using public IP addresses. This makes
it more difficult for a person somewhere on the Internet to gain access
to the process network. The Internet routers do not pass messages
addressed to the public IP address set.
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-9
Ethernet Equipment
Whenever possible, use personnel experienced in the installation
of Ethernet cables and equipment.
A hub provides the common connection point for devices on the
process network and a connection to the plant local area network
(LAN). Fisher-Rosemount supports use of these hubs from the 3Com
LinkBuilderT series:
D
D
D
TP/8 8-port Unmanaged TP Hub (10P55200001 -- 115V)
FMS II 12-Port TP Hub
(10P55200002 -- Autosensing power supply)
FMS II 24-port TP Hub
(10P55200003 -- Autosensing power supply)
Install the hub as directed by the instructions included in the package.
The hub requires:
D
A source of AC power
D
10BaseT cables to the process network equipment
The hub should be plugged into a reliable power source, such as a
UPS. The hub can be mounted inside a system cabinet. FMS II hubs
require an additional power strip, which must be connected to the AC
Entrance Panel.
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-10
Ethernet Cable
The RS3 process network uses 10BaseT cable. 10BaseT cable uses
two pairs of 0.14 -- 0.34 mm2 (22 -- 26 AWG) wires, one pair to transmit
and one to receive data signals. The wires in each pair are twisted
together along the length of the cable. This allows segment lengths of
up to 100 meters (328 feet). There are two additional pairs of wires in
the cable that can be used for telephone or other use. The cable has
an eight-pin RJ-45 connector at each end.
D
D
Use Category 5 cable in plenum grades
Route the cables away from power lines or other sources of
interference
NOTE: For CE-compliant applications, shielded 10BaseT cable is
required.
Stranded-wire cable is suitable only for short runs where flexibility is
required. Cable is available with color-coded jackets, with or without
connectors.
Standard cable (for use with a hub) has the connection wired straight
through. Crossed cable is available with the transmit and receive
cables crossed over for “null modem” connections. Crossover cable is
used only when a workstation is connected directly to an RNI without a
hub.
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-11
Installing the RNI
The RS3 Network Interface (RNI) (10P53330001) is a node on the
PeerWay and a host on the process network. It serves as a bridge
between the networks. The RNI gets its boot code and PeerWay
identity from its dedicated workstation.
Locate the RNI on the PeerWay system where you would locate a
console. The RNI can be physically installed whenever convenient
although it cannot boot up until the workstation BOOTP server is
operating. The RNI sends a boot request on the Ethernet once a
minute until a BOOTP server responds. The RNI will not affect the
PeerWay until it is booted, because it gets the PeerWay software and
PeerWay address in the boot code.
Install the RNI as directed in Chapter 8 of this manual.
The RNI requires:
D
A source of DC power
D
A pair of PeerWay drop cables to a PeerWay Tap Box set
D
A 10BaseT cable to the hub or workstation
D
A configured BOOTP server on the process network
The RNI can be installed in a system cabinet and be powered from the
RS3 DC bus.
The write-on label (Figure 3.6.5) provides space to record the PeerWay
Node address of the RNI, the Ethernet host name of the RNI, and which
Ethernet port is in use. The MAC Address (machine address) will be
filled out at the factory. This is the unique Ethernet address of the RNI.
PEERWAY NODE
E-NET HOST
MAC ADDRESS
E-NET 10 BASE T
NUMBER
E-NET 10 BASE 2
Figure 3.6.5. RNI Write-on Label
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-12
Installing the Workstation
The workstation consists of a computer, keyboard, mouse, CRT, and
speakers. The workstation (10P5627xxxx -- 166 MHz and 10P5693xxxx
--200 MHz) can also have a tape drive, a printer, and an optional
operator keyboard.
The workstation personal computer is shipped with installation
and service manuals provided by the PC manufacturer.
The workstation requires:
D
A source of AC power
D
A 10BaseT cable to the process network hub/RNI
D
A hardware keylock
D
An appropriate computer operating environment
D
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
Two suitable uninterruptible power supplies are:
—
Liebert Power Sure PS600--60 (NRTL)
—
Liebert Power Sure PS600--50 (CE)
CAUTION
The computer has an operating temperature range of 10 to
35 degrees C. Operating the computer in temperatures
above or below this range will cause damage to the
computer. Install the computer in an environment that
maintains temperatures within this range.
At least one workstation on the process network should have these
peripheral devices:
D
D
A tape drive for backup of all workstations on the process
network
A printer that can be used by any workstation on the process
network
The optional tape drive is a 3200 MB Travan. Refer to the tape drive
user’s manual.
The optional printer is a HP870Cxi Color Printer (10P55800004). This
printer has an auto-sensing universal power supply for 100--240VAC,
50/60Hz. The software printer driver is the HP560 driver in Windows
NT. The printer cable number is 10P55800003. Refer to the printer
user’s manual.
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-13
To install a workstation:
1. Connect the workstation cables as directed by the installation
document included in the computer box.
CAUTION
Check the voltage select switch on the computer to be sure
that it matches the supply voltage. If it does not match, set
the switch to match the supply voltage. Using the wrong
setting will destroy the power supply.
2. Plug the keyboard cable into the keyboard jack.
3. Plug the mouse cable into the mouse jack.
4. Plug the CRT power cable into the CRT power jack.
5. Plug the CRT video cable into the video jack.
6. Connect the speaker to the speaker jack.
7. If applicable, connect the speaker power adapter to the same AC
source as the computer. If you use a UPS, be sure to plug the
power adapter into the UPS.
8. Attach the hardware keylock to the parallel port.
NOTE: Save the packing slip that comes with the hardware keylock.
The codes on the slip will be required if the keylock is damaged.
9. Plug the computer into the AC source and turn the computer on.
It should boot up to a RS3 Operations Suite View screen.
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-14
ROS CRTs
The color CRT monitors that can be used with the RS3 Operator Station
include:
D
21-inch Hitachi HM--4721--D CRT
D
17-inch Iiyama Vision Master CRT
ROS CRT: Hitachi HM--4721--D
The Hitachi HM--4721--D CRT (12P0373x032) is a 21-inch color unit.
The unit runs on either 115 or 220 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz (100--120 /
200--240 VAC auto selecting).
Setup and controls are described in the user manual that accompanies
the unit.
ROS CRT: ViewSonic P810
The ViewSonic P810 CRT (55P0675x012) is a 21-inch color unit.
The unit runs on either 115 or 220 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz (100--240 VAC
auto selecting).
Setup and controls are described in the user manual that accompanies
the unit.
ROS CRT: Iiyama Vision Master
The Iiyama Vision Master CRT (55P0144x022) is a 17-inch color unit.
The unit runs on either 115 or 220 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz (108--132 /
198--264 VAC auto selecting).
Setup and controls are described in the user manual that accompanies
the unit.
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-15
ROS Operator Keyboard
The RS3 Operator Station (ROS) has a variety of keyboard options.
Figure 3.6.6 shows the dimensions of the optional operator keyboard
with a single option button panel. Up to three option button panels may
be provided.
OPTIONS
368
(14.5)
Top View
490
(19.3)
97
(3.8)
56
(2.1)
Side View
Figure 3.6.6. Elevated Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-16
Figure 3.6.7 shows the dimensions of the operator keyboard with
trackball.
181
(7.1)
Top View
490
(19.3)
56
(2.1)
25
(1.0)
66
(2.6)
46
(1.8)
Side View
With Trackball
Side View
w/o Trackball
Figure 3.6.7. Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-17
ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Circuit Board (10P56910001)
CAUTION
Observe normal electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions
when handling the keyboard interface circuit board.
Observe the safety precautions and instructions in your
computer manual when installing the board in the
computer.
To install the keyboard interface card:
1. Unpack the interface card. Make sure that the dip switches are
set as shown in Figure 3.6.8.
2. Following the safety precautions and instructions in your PC
user’s manual, remove the PC cover to gain access to the
expansion card slots.
3. Select an open expansion card slot in your PC.
4. Remove the blank filler bracket at that slot and install the board
by pressing it firmly into the slot connector. Check that the circuit
board’s bracket is mated with the appropriate slot on the PC
chassis, and install the bracket screw to hold the board in place.
5. Following the safety precautions and instructions in your PC
user’s manual, reinstall the PC cover.
SW4
SW1
SW3 SW2
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
Switch SW1
7
8
1
2
3
4
Switch SW4
ON
ON
OFF
6
OFF
1
2
3
4
Switch SW3
1
2
3
4
5
Switch SW2
6
7
8
Figure 3.6.8. ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Card
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-18
Connecting the ROS Operator Keyboard
To connect the Operator Keyboard to the PC:
1. Connect the 9-pin D-sub connector end of interface cable
10P56700015 (Figure 3.6.9) to the keyboard interface card serial
port on the back of the PC.
2. Using the 8-pin connector, connect the interface cable to the
standard keyboard cable.
ROS PC
Interface Cable
10P56700015
Keyboard and
Standard Cable
P262: 9-Pin D-sub Connector
(Connects to serial port of
interface card on back of PC)
P261: 8-Pin Connector
(Connects interface cable to
standard keyboard cable)
Figure 3.6.9. ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Connection
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-19
Router
When connecting to a plant network, a router must be used to isolate
your process network. Which to chose depends heavily on the nature
of the plant network. Consult with your plant network administration or
a knowledgeable networking service to select the proper connection
mechanism for your installation.
Consult Fisher-Rosemount Systems for the recommended router.
CAUTION
The process network must be isolated from the plant
network with a router. If it is not isolated, a misbehaving
device on the plant network could cause loss of control on
the process network.
Be sure to use the router’s controlled access list
functionality to provide isolation from network traffic.
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-20
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
The workstation must be powered from an uninterruptible power supply
(UPS). Two suitable systems are the Liebert Power Sure PS600--60
(55P0566x012 -- NRTL) and the Liebert Power Sure PS600--50
(55P0567x012 -- CE).
The UPS should be able to signal when primary power fails and when
the battery is getting low. This signal is carried by cable to a dedicated
serial port on a workstation computer. The NT operating system can be
configured to warn users of power failure and to shut down the system
when the UPS batteries are low. With the Liebert Power Sure
PS600--60 (NRTL) or the Liebert Power Sure PS600--50, cable
10P56820001 (WIN--NEG--48A) is connected from COM2 on the PC to
the communications port on the UPS.
The UPS should be sized to operate the equipment for at least five
minutes to allow for an orderly shutdown. The minimum volt-ampere
rating for a UPS on a single workstation is 600 VA. Table 3.6.1 lists
typical power consumption examples.
Table 3.6.1. Typical Power Consumption Examples
RS3: Consoles
Item
Typical Power Consumption (Watts)
PC
200
17” CRT
130
21” CRT
250
Printer
12
TP/8 Hub
10
FMS II 12-Port Hub
28
FMS II 24-Port Hub
36
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-21
UPS Software Setup
Windows NT (under Control Panel) provides the UPS configuration
software. In order to make changes to the UPS configuration you must
be logged in as an NT Administrator.
With the Liebert Power Sure PS600-- 60 (NRTL) or the Liebert Power
Sure PS600-- 50, the following configuration should be set:
D
Select Uninterruptible Power Supply is installed on: COM2
Under UPS Configuration:
D
D
D
Select Power failure signal (select Negative for UPS Interface
Voltages).
Select Low battery signal: at least 2 minutes (select Negative for
UPS Interface Voltages).
Select Remote UPS Shutdown (select Positive for UPS Interface
Voltages).
Under UPS Service:
D
RS3: Consoles
Set Time between power failure and initial warning message to 0
seconds.
D
Set Delay between warning messages to 30 seconds.
D
Click on OK.
RS3 Operator Station
SP: 3-6-22
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Station
RS3t
Site Preparation and Installation
Chapter 4:
ControlFiles
Section 1:
RS3: ControlFiles
ControlFiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting System Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to an I/O Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM NV Memory Jumpers
........................................
Installing Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for EMC-Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-3
4-1-5
4-1-6
4-1-7
4-1-7
4-1-8
4-1-9
4-1-10
4-1-11
Contents
SP: ii
List of Figures
Figure
Page
4.1.1
ControlFile Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1
4.1.2
ControlFile Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-4
4.1.3
ControlFile Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-5
4.1.4
RAM NV Memory Fuse, Jumper, and Test Point Locations . . . . . . . . .
4-1-9
List of Tables
Table
4.1.1
RS3: ControlFiles
Page
RAM NV Memory Battery Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-9
Contents
SP: 4-1-1
Section 1:
ControlFiles
This section describes installation and system cabling for the
10P52960001 ControlFile with built-in plenum and blower. The
ControlFile mounts in a standard system cabinet and in the RS3
Millennium Package (RMP) where it takes 489 mm (19.25 in.) of rail
space. The unit is 610 mm (24 in.) deep. Figure 4.1.1 shows a front
view of the ControlFile.
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
2
1
Support Section
Description
No.
Controller Section
No.
Description
1
PeerWay B Buffer
5
Coordinator Processor
2
PeerWay A Buffer
6
Optional Redundant Coordinator Processor
3
Power Regulator
7
Nonvolatile Memory
4
Optional Redundant Power Regulator
8
Controller Processors in slots A--H
Figure 4.1.1. ControlFile Front View
RS3: ControlFiles
ControlFiles
SP: 4-1-2
The ControlFile has a support section and a controller section. The
support section holds two PeerWay Buffer Cards, one or two Power
Regulator Cards, one or two Coordinator Processor Cards, and one
Nonvolatile Memory Card. The controller section can hold up to eight
Controller Processor Cards. ControlFiles are shipped with all cards
installed and with the ControlFile address jumpers set to the address as
ordered. Refer to the Service Manual, Chapter 4, for detailed
information on the cards.
The ControlFile (10P52960001) is suitable for all installations, including
those requiring CE compliance. This ControlFile cannot support the
MultiLoop Controller Processor (MLC) (1984--1439--000x) or the
Multi-Strategy Processor (1984--1249--000x), since the motherboard
shield prohibits access to the bottom row of communication connectors
which are needed by these processors for certain applications.
RS3: ControlFiles
ControlFiles
SP: 4-1-3
Mounting
The ControlFile card cage mounts on 483 mm (19 in.) rails in a
standard system cabinet and the RS3 Millennium cabinet. Both front
and rear access is required. The cabinet must be grounded.
CAUTION
The ControlFile Card Cage with cards installed is heavy.
Take care when installing or removing the assembly. Two
people should lift and install the assembly.
1. The ControlFile Card Cage assembly must be mounted to the
plated (unpainted) rails of a 19-inch rack enclosure as shown in
Figure 4.1.2.
2. Attach the slide rails (1984--1436--0004) to the four upright rails
using the hardware provided with the slide rails.
a. Mount the ControlFile Card Cage assembly to the front rails
of the cabinet using four M5 screws (G12215--2005--0116)
and M5 metal cage nuts (G53426--0501--0716).
b. The ControlFile Card Cage assembly is provided with a safety
ground wire for attachment to the cabinet rails. The ground
wire is to be attached to any upright plated (unpainted)
cabinet rail using an M6 screw (G12215--2006--0116) and M6
metal cage nut (G53426--0601--0716). The only restriction is
that you must be able to pull the ControlFile card cage
assembly out on the slide rails without straining the ground
wire or cables.
3. The door to the ControlFile card cage must be latched and the
captive screw securely tightened. The door should be opened
only for maintenance operations.
RS3: ControlFiles
ControlFiles
SP: 4-1-4
2
1
3
3
4
5
5
4
3
3
Front View
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
Cabinet rail
4
Captive screw on each card assembly
2
ControlFile
5
Slide rail screws fastened to rail (2 places)
3
M5 screws and metal cage nuts (4)
Figure 4.1.2. ControlFile Mounting
RS3: ControlFiles
ControlFiles
SP: 4-1-5
Connecting System Cables
The rear of the ControlFile provides connections for DC power,
PeerWays A and B, and up to eight input/output devices. Figure 4.1.3
shows the cable connections.
1
2
3
4
7
6
5
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
B Bus Power Cable (Optional) J966 to the DC
output card
5
Fan power jumper J967 to fan assembly
2
A Bus Power Cable J965 to the DC output
card
6
Control Cables from Slots A--H (J532--J546)
to Communication Termination Panel II
3
PeerWay Drop Cable J516 to PeerWay Tap
Box A
7
Tie-wrap here to ensure strain relief
4
PeerWay Drop Cable J517 to PeerWay Tap
Box B
Figure 4.1.3. ControlFile Rear View
RS3: ControlFiles
ControlFiles
SP: 4-1-6
Connecting DC Power
CAUTION
Do not connect DC power to the ControlFile with the Power
Regulator Card(s) installed. Arcing at the DC connector
can result in equipment damage. Remove the Power
Regulator Card(s), connect the DC power, and then install
the cards according to the instructions given below.
The ControlFile is normally connected to DC distribution bus A by a
1984--0158--00xx power cable (Cable: DC Bus to System Device
(Bus A)). Two wires in parallel are required to carry the current from the
DC Distribution Card to the ControlFile. A 20 ampere fuse is required in
the DC Distribution Card.
When redundant A and B buses are used, a second power cable is
required (1984--0158--10xx, Cable: DC Bus to System Device (Bus B))
to connect to DC bus B.
CAUTION
Follow the procedure below when installing the Power
Regulator Cards when DC power to the ControlFile is on.
The input capacitors must be allowed to charge up before
the power regulators turn on. Failure to do so can result in
damage to the Power Regulator Card and to other cards in
the ControlFile.
1. Disable all cards in the ControlFile.
2. Slowly insert the Power Regulator Card into the card cage. The
input capacitor edge connectors will make contact with the
motherboard edge connectors first. Red LEDs will blink once.
3. When the LEDs are off, slowly push the card all the way in.
4. All yellow LEDs and the green LED should be ON. No red LED
should be ON. If any red LED is ON, stop and troubleshoot the
Power Regulator Card.
5. Repeat for the optional second card.
6. Leave all cards disabled until the installation is complete.
RS3: ControlFiles
ControlFiles
SP: 4-1-7
Connecting to the PeerWay
The ControlFile connects to The PeerWay Tap boxes with a pair of
PeerWay Drop Cables (1984--0473--xxxx, Cable: Tap Box to Device,
PeerWay Drop).
The cables are polarized so that incorrect connections cannot be made.
Connecting to an I/O Device
The ControlFile connects to:
D
Analog Card Cage (Flexterm)
D
Communication Termination Panel II
D
Multiplexer FlexTerm (MUX) -- (non-EMC)
D
PLC or RBL FlexTerm -- (EMC only via Comm Term Panel II)
See the section on the I/O device for installation instructions.
1. Shielded control cable 10P5651xxxx, maximum length:
60 meters (≈200 feet) or control cable 1984--2783--xxxx is used
to connect the ControlFile to other equipment. Tie-wrap to cable
tie points on the back panel to ensure strain relief.
a. For EMC-compliant installations use shielded control cable
10P5651xxxx, maximum length: 60 meters (≈200 feet) or
1984--2783--9045 control cable, which is approximately 1
meter (39 inches) long.
Terminate 10P5651xxxx cable shield pigtail at ControlFile
chassis screw for EMC-compliant installations.
You may also use a Remote Communication Termination
Panel II and shielded communication lines (1984--4188--xxxx),
maximum length 1372 meters (≈4500 feet), to connect
equipment that the 1984--2783--9045 and 10P5651xxxx
control cables cannot reach. The panel must be at Revision
E/E or higher.
b. For all other installations (non-EMC) use a 10P5651xxxx,
maximum length: 60 meters (≈200 feet) or 1984--2783--0xxx,
maximum length of 61 meters (200 feet). Use a Remote
Communication Termination Panel II and Communication Lines
for longer runs.
2. Keep I/O cables under 1370 meters (4500 feet). The total length
from the back of the ControlFile to the farthest I/O device cannot
exceed 1370 meters (≈4500 feet).
RS3: ControlFiles
ControlFiles
SP: 4-1-8
Jumpers
There is one pair of jumpers located on the inside of the motherboard.
Jumpers HAA and HAB define the PeerWay address of the ControlFile.
These jumpers are factory set. You will rarely have to change them.
Do not change these jumpers with power applied to the ControlFile.
You must remove the Power Regulator, Coordinator Processor,
Memory, and at least Controller Processors A and B to gain access to
the jumpers.
A jumper at the “H” position has the value marked on the board.
Jumper 4 has the value 8 when set to “H”. A jumper at the “L” position
has the value 0. The address is the sum of the jumper values plus 1.
An example of address 29 is shown below. HAA and HAB must always
be set to the same address.
HAB
HAA
H=16
5
4
H=8
4
H=4 3
3
H=4
3
2
H=2 2
2
H=2
2
1
H=1 1
H L
+1
1
H=1
+1
1
5
4
H=16 5
H=8 4
3
5
RS3: ControlFiles
HAB
HAA
H L
H
L
16
8
4
0
-----+1
H
L
=29
ControlFiles
SP: 4-1-9
RAM NV Memory Jumpers
RAM NV memory circuit cards are shipped with the memory
backup batteries disabled. Reposition the battery jumpers if battery
backup is desired. Figure 4.1.4 shows the location of the jumpers on
the NV RAM card. Table 4.1.1 gives the battery jumper settings. All
RAM NV memory jumpers, fuses, LEDs, and test points are covered in
the Service Manual.
Battery Jumpers
HD6 and HD7
Batteries
Figure 4.1.4. RAM NV Memory Fuse, Jumper, and Test Point Locations
Table 4.1.1. RAM NV Memory Battery Jumper Positions
Jumper
Position
Action
HD6
1--2
Battery 2 enabled
2--3
Battery 2 disabled
1--2
Battery 1 enabled
2--3
Battery 1 disabled
HD7
RS3: ControlFiles
ControlFiles
SP: 4-1-10
Installing Cards
Use these cards in the ControlFile:
D
PeerWay Buffer
1984--1502--0001
D
5 VDC Only Power Regulator
1984--3505--0001
D
Coordinator Processor CP-IV+
1984--4164--0004
or 10P50870004
D
RAM NV Memory
1984--2347--0011 (1 meg),
1984--2347--0021 (2 meg),
or 1984--2347--0041 (4 meg)
D
MPC II Controller Processor
10P50400006
D
MPC5 Controller Processor
10P57520007
NOTE: You must tighten the captive screw on each card to ensure that
the card is properly seated and grounded.
-
To install cards in a non-powered ControlFile:
1. If the ControlFile is not powered, you can install the cards in any
order.
2. Pull the Power Regulator Card(s) before applying power to the
ControlFile. Follow the CAUTION note below when applying power.
3. ENABLE the Coordinator Processor, the NV Memory, and then
the primary and secondary Controller Processors.
4. Latch the door closed and securely tighten the captive screw.
The door should only be opened for maintenance.
-
To install cards in a powered ControlFile:
1. Install the PeerWay Buffer Cards. The LEDs will light.
2. Install all cards EXCEPT the Power Regulator Card(s). Set all
switches to DISABLE.
3. Install the Power Regulator Card(s).
CAUTION
When inserting a Power Regulator Card into a powered
ControlFile, push it part of the way and pause to allow the
capacitors to charge. The LED will blink once. Then seat
the card firmly. Failure to allow the capacitors to charge
can result in burned edge connector contacts.
4. ENABLE the Coordinator Processor, the NV Memory, and then
the primary and secondary Controller Processors.
5. Latch the door closed and securely tighten the captive screw.
The door should only be opened for maintenance.
RS3: ControlFiles
ControlFiles
SP: 4-1-11
Checklist for EMC-Compliant Installation
Follow these rules to ensure EMC compliance:
1. Mount the ControlFile in a properly grounded system cabinet
following the instructions under “Mounting.”
2. Attach the safety ground wire as directed under “Mounting.”
3. Use only the MPC II (10P50400006) or MPC5 (10P57520007)
Controller Processors.
4. Securely tighten the captive screws on all the electrical
assemblies, the door, and the PeerWay Drop Cables.
5. Attach cables following the instructions under “Connecting
System Cables.”
6. Connect the ControlFile to I/O with one of the following:
a. Shielded control cable 10P5651xxxx, maximum length:
60 meters (≈200 feet) to Communications Termination Panel
II (1984--4205--0001) <or> to Analog (Serial) I/O
Communications Connect Card V.
Terminate 10P5651xxxx cable shield by clamping the ferrule
to the ControlFile metalwork strain relief.
b. Control cable 1984--2783--9045 to Communications
Termination Panel II.
7. Open the door only for maintenance operations.
RS3: ControlFiles
ControlFiles
SP: 4-1-12
RS3: ControlFiles
ControlFiles
RS3t
Site Preparation and Installation
Chapter 5:
System Cables and Power Distribution
Section 1:
Standard System Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1
Section 2:
AC Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1
Installing a Single-feed AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Dual-feed AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking AC Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2
5-2-4
5-2-6
AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-1
Rack Mounting the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing an AC/DC Power Supply With Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Alarm Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) LEDs and Controls . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring Output Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the AC/DC Power Supply to AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5409 for Operator Interface Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5409 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5409 Remote Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5409 Remote Power Supply Checking and Adjusting Output . . . . . . .
10P5409 Remote Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5756 for Operator Interface Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5503 for I/O Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for EMC-Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5503 Remote Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Checking and Adjusting Output . . . . . . .
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5701 for I/O Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-3
5-3-5
5-3-7
5-3-8
5-3-10
5-3-10
5-3-10
5-3-12
5-3-13
5-3-14
5-3-15
5-3-16
5-3-16
5-3-16
5-3-17
5-3-18
5-3-19
5-3-22
5-3-22
5-3-22
5-3-22
5-3-23
5-3-24
System Power Supply Units
..............................
5-4-1
Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-1
5-4-3
5-4-5
Section 3:
Section 4:
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Contents
SP: ii
Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabinet and AC Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabinet DC Power Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Housing in a Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Power Supply in a Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Auxiliary AC Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-6
5-4-7
5-4-7
5-4-8
5-4-11
5-4-12
5-4-13
5-4-13
5-4-13
5-4-14
5-4-15
Section 5:
DC Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-1
DC Power Distribution Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Output Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Output Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard DC Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant DC Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heavy Load Redundant DC Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking DC Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-3
5-5-5
5-5-7
5-5-8
5-5-8
5-5-9
5-5-10
5-5-11
Electrical (Twinax) PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-1
Twinax PeerWay Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routing and Installing Twinax PeerWay Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Twinax PeerWay Tap Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting Twinax PeerWay Tap Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Twinax PeerWay Cables to Tap Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding Twinax PeerWay Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminating Twinax PeerWay Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE-Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Twinax Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-2
5-6-4
5-6-6
5-6-7
5-6-7
5-6-9
5-6-9
5-6-10
5-6-11
Optical PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-1
Installing an Optical Tap Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Cables to an Optical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing an Electrical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding Optical and Electrical Tap Box Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Fixed Optical Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing an Optical Repeater/Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Star Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-5
5-7-7
5-7-9
5-7-10
5-7-13
5-7-14
5-7-16
PeerWay Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-1
Checklist for CE Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-4
5-8-5
5-8-6
Section 6:
Section 7:
Section 8:
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Contents
SP: iii
Section 9:
Section 10:
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding the Twinax PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal/Test Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic Link in a Twinax PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hybrid Fiber Optic and Twinax PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Twinax Segment Added to a Fiber Optic PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic “Star” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hybrid PeerWay Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Twinax Segment Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic Segment Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hybrid PeerWay Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-8
5-8-9
5-8-10
5-8-10
5-8-11
5-8-12
5-8-12
5-8-12
5-8-13
5-8-14
5-8-15
5-8-15
5-8-16
5-8-17
5-8-20
Field Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-1
Connecting Multipoint I/O to a ControlFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Distant Card Cage to a ControlFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Communications Connect Card V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Remote Communications Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CE Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Optical Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-2
5-9-5
5-9-6
5-9-8
5-9-10
5-9-11
5-9-12
5-9-13
5-9-14
5-9-15
5-9-16
5-9-17
5-9-20
5-9-21
5-9-22
Fiber Optic Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10-1
Installing Fiber Optic Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing the Optical PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loss Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing the Attenuation of a Test Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Transmitter and Receiver Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repeater Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting an Optical PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10-3
5-10-4
5-10-6
5-10-7
5-10-8
5-10-10
5-10-13
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Contents
SP: iv
List of Figures
Figure
Page
5.2.1
Single Feed AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2
5.2.2
Dual-Feed AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-4
5.2.3
AC Distribution Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-6
5.3.1
AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-1
5.3.2
Typical Power Supply Cabinet Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-3
5.3.3
Power Supply Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-4
5.3.4
Accessing the Battery Charger Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-6
5.3.5
Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Alarm Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-7
5.3.6
Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-8
5.3.7
Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Panel Indicators . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-11
5.3.8
AC/DC Power Supply Electrical Connections and Panel Features . . .
5-3-13
5.3.9
10P5409 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-15
5.3.10
10P5756 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-18
5.3.11
10P5503 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-19
5.3.12
Typical Remote I/O Power Supply Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-20
5.3.13
10P5409 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-24
5.4.1
System Power Supply Unit with Two Power Modules Installed . . . . . .
5-4-2
5.4.2
System Power Supply Unit with (Housing Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-3
5.4.3
DC Output and Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-3
5.4.4
Input and Output Connectors and Auxiliary Output Circuit Breakers . .
5-4-4
5.4.5
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-5
5.4.6
System Cabinet DC Output Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-8
5.4.7
Standard DC Power Distribution for System Power Supply Units . . . .
5-4-10
5.4.8
Redundant DC Power Distribution System for System Power
Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-10
5.4.9
Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-11
5.4.10
Alarm Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-12
5.4.11
Input and Auxiliary Output Connectors and Auxiliary Output
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-15
5.4.12
Power Supply Housing AC Input and Auxiliary AC Output
Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-16
5.5.1
Standard DC Power Distribution System for AC/DC Power Supplies .
5-5-1
5.5.2
Redundant DC Power Distribution System for AC/DC Power Supplies
5-5-2
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Contents
SP: v
5.5.3
DC Power Distribution Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-4
5.5.4
Standard (Non-redundant) DC Distribution Bus and DC Output Card .
5-5-6
5.5.5
Non-redundant DC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-8
5.5.6
Redundant DC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-9
5.5.7
Dual DC Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-10
5.5.8
AC/DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-11
5.5.9
DC Bus and DC Output Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-11
5.6.1
PeerWay Tap Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-1
5.6.2
PeerWay Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-4
5.6.3
Twinax PeerWay Tap Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-6
5.6.4
PeerWay Tap Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-8
5.6.5
PeerWay Taps at PeerWay Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-9
5.6.6
Crimp-Type Twinaxial Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-11
5.6.7
Solder-Type Twinaxial Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-13
5.7.1
Optical PeerWay (Side A or Side B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-1
5.7.2
Optical PeerWay Maximum Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-3
5.7.3
Direct Connection of Optical Tap Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-4
5.7.4
Optical PeerWay Tap and Cable Tie Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-6
5.7.5
Cable Connection to Optical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-8
5.7.6
PeerWay Electrical Tap Box Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-9
5.7.7
Example of Optical PeerWay Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-10
5.7.8
Grounding an Optical or Electrical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-12
5.7.9
Fiber Optic Splice/Repeater/Attenuator Box Dimensions in
Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-14
5.7.10
Optical Repeater/Attenuator LED and Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-15
5.7.11
Star Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-16
5.8.1
PeerWay Extender Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-1
5.8.2
PeerWay Extender Tap Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-2
5.8.3
PeerWay Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-3
5.8.4
PeerWay Extender Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-6
5.8.5
Fiber Optic Link in a Twinax PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-12
5.8.6
Hybrid Fiber Optic and Twinax PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-12
5.8.7
Twinax Segment Added to a Fiber Optic PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-13
5.8.8
Fiber Optic “Star” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-14
5.8.9
Twinax PeerWay: Propagation Delay Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-18
5.8.10
Three Twinax PeerWay Segments: Propagation Delay Example . . . .
5-8-19
5.9.1
Remote Communications Termination Panel II Used With
Multipoint I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-3
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Contents
SP: vi
5.9.2
Communications Connect Card Used With Multipoint I/O . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-4
5.9.3
Connecting a Distant Card Cage Using a Remote Communications
Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-5
5.9.4
Analog Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-8
5.9.5
Communications Connect Card V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-9
5.9.6
Remote Communications Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-10
5.9.7
Communications Terminal Panel II DIN Rail Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-12
5.9.8
Single Communications Termination Panel II Installation . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-14
5.9.9
Dual Communications Termination Panel II Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-15
5.9.10
Fiber Optic I/O Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-17
5.9.11
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-18
5.9.12
Fiber Optic Link in a Communications Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-19
5.9.13
Power and Ground Wiring: Using Power Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-20
5.9.14
Power and Ground Wiring: Using the Power Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-21
5.9.15
Communication Line Connector Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-21
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Contents
SP: vii
List of Tables
Table
Page
5.1.1
Standard System Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1
5.2.1
AC Input Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-3
5.2.2
AC Input Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-5
5.3.1
Battery Charger Card Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-5
5.3.2
Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Indicators and Controls . . . . . . .
5-3-9
5.3.3
Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-11
5.3.4
10P5409 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out
..............
5-3-16
5.3.5
10P5409 Remote Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-17
5.3.6
Distribution Block Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-21
5.3.7
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out
..............
5-3-22
5.3.8
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-23
5.5.1
DC Output Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-7
5.5.2
Power Cable Plugs and Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-9
5.6.1
Twinax PeerWay Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-3
5.6.2
Twinax Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-11
5.7.1
Optical Repeater/Attenuator Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-15
5.8.1
PeerWay Extender Cabling Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-7
5.8.2
PeerWay Extender LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-8
5.8.3
Switch S3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-10
5.8.4
Switch S1 and S2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-11
5.8.5
Cable Length Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-15
5.8.6
Cable Propagation Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-18
5.8.7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-20
5.9.1
Recommended Communication Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-7
5.9.2
Cage Address Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-9
5.9.3
Controller Redundancy Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-9
5.9.4
Location Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-9
5.9.5
Communications Termination Panel II Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-16
5.9.6
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-22
5.10.1
Optical PeerWay Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10-5
5.10.2
Optical PeerWay Power Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10-14
5.10.3
Optical PeerWay Repeater Power Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10-15
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Contents
SP: viii
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Contents
SP: 5-1-1
Section 1:
Standard System Cables
Table 5.1.1 shows data on standard system cables. The cable’s outside
diameter, the largest dimension of the connector, and the maximum
allowable length are shown.
Table 5.1.1. Standard System Cables
Cable
Part Number
Connector
Outside
(maximum
Dimension
dimension)
mm
mm
(in.)
(in.)
Maximum
Length
m
(ft)
CE
Compliant
Maximum
Length
m
(ft)
DC Power Distribution
DC Bus to System Device
1984--0158--xxxx
22
(.85)
69
(2.7)
61
(200)
61
(200)
DC Power Cable, Remote Power
Supply-to-Product
1984--1083--00xx
22
(.85)
69
(2.7)
15.2
(50)
15.2
(50)
Local DC Power Supply, A Bus
1984--4337--xxxx
9.27
(.365)
None
61
(200)
61
(200)
Local DC Power Supply, B Bus
1984--4433--xxxx
9.27
(.365)
None
61
(200)
61
(200)
10P5289xxxx
7.85
(.309)
39.14
(1.541)
152.4
(500)
152.4
(500)
Non-CE applications
1984--1627--xxxx
6
(.22)
41
(1.6)
152.4
(500)
—
Keyboard Interface Card
DC Power
1984--1628--xxxx
13
(.5)
36
(1.4)
152.4
(500)
152.4
(500)
RGB Video
Console to KVI
1984--1691--xxxx
19
(.75)
15
(.58)
152.4
(500)
152.4
(500)
10P5308xxxx
7.32
(.288)
53.04
(2.088)
15.2
(50)
15.2
(50)
7900--0164--xxxx
7
(.26)
56
(2.2)
30.5
(100)
—
Console
RS-422 Keyboard Communication
Shielded CE compliant
OI Card Cage to Printer
Shielded CE compliant
Non-CE applications
CENELEC = European Electrotechnical Committee for Standardization
CSA = Canadian Standards Association
PLC = Programmable Logic Controller
FEM = Front End Module
RBL = Rosemount Basic Language
HIA = Highway Interface Adapter
RGB = Red, Green, Blue
KVI = Keyboard/Video Interface
RNI = RS3 Network Interface
MIO = Multipoint Input/Output
RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector
MUX = Multiplexer
SCI = Supervisory Computer Interface
NEC = National Electric Code
(continued on next page)
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Standard System Cables
SP: 5-1-2
Table 5.1.1. Standard System Cables (continued)
Cable
Part Number
Connector
Outside
(maximum
Dimension
dimension)
mm
mm
(in.)
(in.)
Maximum
Length
m
(ft)
CE
Compliant
Maximum
Length
m
(ft)
ControlFile
Control Cable, from ControlFile to:
Analog Card Cage
Contact FlexTerm
PLC/RBL FlexTerm
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel
Communication Termination Panel
1984--2783--xxxx
8
(.318)
36
(1.4)
61
(200)
—
FIM Communication Cable
to/from:
Communication Connect Card
Communication Termination Panel
1984--4188--xxxx
5
(.178)
20
(.79)
1370
(4500)
1370
(4500)
10P5651xxxx)
(10P5590xxxx)
10.88
(.425)
36
(1.4)
60
(200)
60
(200)
1984--0498--xxxx
13
(.5)
69
(2.7)
609
(2000)
—
Multipoint Analog I/O Termination
Panel to MIO Marshaling Panel
10P5065xxxx
16.74
(.659)
96
(3.78)
1000
(3280)
1000
(3280)
Multipoint Analog I/O Termination
Panel flying lead
10P5611xxxx
16.74
(.659)
96
(3.78)
1 end only
60
(200)
60
(200)
Analog Card Cage-to-Marshaling
Panel, Shielded
10P5552xxxx
15
(.59)
69
(2.7)
60
(200)
60
(200)
Control Cable, Shielded, Comm
Term Panel
Marshaling Panel
Analog/Contact FlexTerm to
Marshaling Panel
CENELEC = European Electrotechnical Committee for Standardization
CSA = Canadian Standards Association
PLC = Programmable Logic Controller
FEM = Front End Module
RBL = Rosemount Basic Language
HIA = Highway Interface Adapter
RGB = Red, Green, Blue
KVI = Keyboard/Video Interface
RNI = RS3 Network Interface
MIO = Multipoint Input/Output
RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector
MUX = Multiplexer
SCI = Supervisory Computer Interface
NEC = National Electric Code
(continued on next page)
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Standard System Cables
SP: 5-1-3
Table 5.1.1. Standard System Cables (continued)
Cable
Part Number
Connector
Outside
(maximum
Dimension
dimension)
mm
mm
(in.)
(in.)
Maximum
Length
m
(ft)
CE
Compliant
Maximum
Length
m
(ft)
Multiplexer
MUX to Remote FEM
1984--0635--xxxx
5
(.206)
40
(1.57)
914
(3,000)
—
MUX to Remote CENELEC FEM
1984--0641--xxxx
5
(.206)
40
(.157)
30.5
(100)
—
4--20mA FEM to Marshaling Panel
1984--0499--xxxx
13
(.5)
69
(2.7)
305
(1,000)
—
RTD or Voltage FEM to
Marshaling Panel
1984--0500--xxxx
13
(.5)
69
(2.7)
305
(1,000)
—
MUX FlexTerm Assembly,
200 Points
1984--3062--00xx
6.5
(.25)
30.81
(1.213)
60.96
(200)
—
PeerWay Drop Cable
1984--0473--xxxx
11
(.43)
39
(1.52)
15.2
(50)
15.2
(50)
Twinax PeerWay -- 100 Ohm
1984--0474--xxxx
8
(.33)
15
(.58)
610
(2,000)
610
(2000)
Twinax PeerWay -- 124 Ohm
1984--0494--xxxx
11
(.44)
19
(.75)
1,006
(3,300)
1006
(3300)
Depends
on
application
3,000
(10,000)
absolute
maximum
PeerWay
Depends on
application
Depends
on
application
Attached
after cable
is pulled
Depends
on
application
3,000
(10,000)
absolute
maximum
Optical Tap Box A to Electrical
Tap Box A
1984--1195--xxxx
9
(.360)
69
(2.73)
30
(100)
—
Optical Tap Box B to Electrical
Tap Box B
1984--1196--xxxx
9
(.360)
69
(2.73)
30
(100)
—
Fiber Optic PeerWay
(with repeaters)
CENELEC = European Electrotechnical Committee for Standardization
CSA = Canadian Standards Association
PLC = Programmable Logic Controller
FEM = Front End Module
RBL = Rosemount Basic Language
HIA = Highway Interface Adapter
RGB = Red, Green, Blue
KVI = Keyboard/Video Interface
RNI = RS3 Network Interface
MIO = Multipoint Input/Output
RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector
MUX = Multiplexer
SCI = Supervisory Computer Interface
NEC = National Electric Code
(continued on next page)
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Standard System Cables
SP: 5-1-4
Table 5.1.1. Standard System Cables (continued)
Cable
Part Number
Maximum
Length
m
(ft)
CE
Compliant
Maximum
Length
m
(ft)
39.14
(1.541)
15.0
(49.21)
15.0
(49.21)
96
(3.78)
609.6
(2000)
609.6
(2000)
Connector
Outside
(maximum
Dimension
dimension)
mm
mm
(in.)
(in.)
RNI
Ethernet cable
1984--4475--xxxx
10.80
(.425)
Input/Output
Marshaling Panel
1984--4298--xxxx
High Density Isolated Discrete
Termination Panel, NEC/CSA
1984--4345--xxxx
19.30
(.760)
96
(3.78)
999
(3278)
999
(3278)
SCI-to-PC RS-232, Shielded
10P54340xxx
6.68
(.263)
53.04
(2.088)
15.2
(50)
15.2
(50)
X.25/SCI RS-422, Shielded
10P54390xxx
10.9
(.43)
39.14
(1.541)
15.2
(50)
15.2
(50)
HIA-to-Black Box RS-422,
Shielded (CE compliant)
10P54400xxx
10.9
(.43)
39.14
(1.541)
15.2
(50)
15.2
(50)
1984--2859--00xx
6.5
Z(.25)
63.50
(2.5)
60.96
(200)
60.96
(200)
Isolated RS-422 Communications
1984--2629--xxxx
6.5
(.25)
63.50
(2.5)
60.96
(200)
—
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination
Panel to Standard Remote
Termination Panel
(non-redundant)
1984--4299--xxxx
11.17
(.440)
96
(3.78)
999
(3278)
999
(3278)
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination
Panel to Standard Remote
Termination Panel (redundant)
1984--4319--xxxx
11.17
(.440)
96
(3.78)
999
(3278)
999
(3278)
SCI/HIA
HIA/Black Box
(non CE compliant)
Other
CENELEC = European Electrotechnical Committee for Standardization
CSA = Canadian Standards Association
PLC = Programmable Logic Controller
FEM = Front End Module
RBL = Rosemount Basic Language
HIA = Highway Interface Adapter
RGB = Red, Green, Blue
KVI = Keyboard/Video Interface
RNI = RS3 Network Interface
MIO = Multipoint Input/Output
RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector
MUX = Multiplexer
SCI = Supervisory Computer Interface
NEC = National Electric Code
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Standard System Cables
SP: 5-2-1
Section 2:
AC Distribution System
The RS3 distributed control system can be equipped with either a
single-feed or a dual-feed AC distribution system.
NOTE: This is a distributed power system. Therefore, the secondary
power servicing the various parts of the building must be grounded to
the building service entrance with an impedance of less than 1 ohm at
60 Hz. In addition, all electrical equipment cabinets must be grounded
with no more than 1 ohm impedance at 60 Hz between the cabinet
ground and the building service entrance ground.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC Distribution System
SP: 5-2-2
Installing a Single-feed AC Entrance Panel
The Single-feed AC Entrance Panel (10P5662000x) mounts in a system
cabinet where it uses 89 mm (3.5 in.) of panel space.Figure 5.2.1 It
includes an internal filter to reduce incoming AC line noise. Three
output circuit breakers (10-amp for 230 VAC and 15-amp for 115 VAC)
protect up to three AC/DC power supplies, AC cooling fans, or other AC
loads. See Figure 5.2.1. There are two versions:
D
115 VAC 50/60 Hz
(10P56620001)
D
230 VAC 50/60 Hz
(10P56620006)
CAUTION
If the input current exceeds 20 amperes, use supply wire
suitable for 115° C above ambient.
Input Lamp
Ä Ä
Ä Ä
Ä Ä
Ä Ä
ON
ON
L1
AC Input
AC Breaker
Plastic
Guard
Output Lamp
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
ON
L2/N
Ä Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä Ä
Ä Ä
Input Terminal Block
AC Output
AC Output
AC Output
Figure 5.2.1. Single Feed AC Entrance Panel
WARNING
For personal safety, use a circuit breaker lockout device to
ensure that an opened breaker is not accidentally closed
while you are working on the line.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC Distribution System
SP: 5-2-3
-
To connect AC power to a single-feed AC distribution panel:
1. Remove the plastic guard covering the AC input terminal block.
2. Connect the AC entrance cable to the terminal block according to
Table 5.2.1.
NOTE: Input wiring must be terminated with a locking lug.
3. Replace the plastic guard on the terminal block.
Table 5.2.1. AC Input Wiring Connections
AC Panel Terminal
115 VAC Wiring
230 VAC Wiring
L1
Hot
Line 1
L2/N
Neutral
Line 2
Ground (equipment protective
conductor terminal)
Ground (equipment protective
conductor terminal)
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC Distribution System
SP: 5-2-4
Installing a Dual-feed AC Entrance Panel
The Dual-Feed AC Entrance Panel (10P5662000x) mounts in a system
cabinet where it uses 89 mm (3.5 in.) of panel space. It includes an
internal filter to reduce incoming AC line noise. Three output circuit
breakers (10-amp for 230 VAC and 15-amp for 115 VAC) protect up to
three AC/DC power supplies, AC cooling fans, or other AC loads.
Figure 5.2.2 shows a Dual-Feed AC Entrance Panel. There are two
versions:
D
115 VAC 50/60 Hz
(10P56620002)
D
230 VAC 50/60 Hz
(10P56620005)
CAUTION
If the input current exceeds 20 amperes, use supply wire
suitable for 115° C above ambient.
Primary
AC Input
Secondary
AC Input
Output Lamp
Input Lamps
AC Input
TerminaL Block
ÄÄ
Ä Ä
Ä Ä
ON
ÄÄ
Ä Ä
Plastic Guard
Ä Ä
ON
Alarm Output
Terminal Block
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
ON
Ä Ä
Ä Ä
Input Fuses
Common
AC Output AC Breaker
Normally Closed
Normally Open
Figure 5.2.2. Dual-Feed AC Entrance Panel
The state of the Alarm Output is determined by which power input is
being applied. The state of the Alarm Output under primary or
secondary power is:
Power
Normally Open Contacts
Normally Closed Contacts
Primary
Closed
Open
Secondary
Open
Closed
WARNING
For personal safety, it is wise to use a circuit breaker
lockout device to ensure that an opened breaker is not
accidentally closed while you are working on the line.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC Distribution System
SP: 5-2-5
The Dual-Feed AC Entrance Panel accepts AC from two independent
sources. If the primary (upper) AC line drops out, the secondary (lower)
AC line automatically switches in approximately 500 milliseconds. The
500 millisecond delay prevents arcing during switching if the two AC
lines are out of phase. If primary AC power is restored, the relay
switches back automatically from the secondary AC source to the
primary AC source. Alarm output relay contacts indicate which AC line
is being used.
NOTE: This provides a dual feed for the AC source. The remainder of
the entrance equipment is common and could be a single point of
failure.
The lamps labeled “OUTPUT” indicate AC out of each of the three
circuit breakers. If fuse F1 or F2 is blown, the “INPUT” indicator lamp
goes out, which indicates that power cannot be switched over from one
AC line to the other.
WARNING
Dangerous AC voltage can be present even if the “AC IN”
indicator is not lit. If the input fuse is blown, AC can still
be present at the input terminal block.
-
To connect AC power to a dual-feed AC distribution panel:
1. Remove the plastic guard covering the AC input terminal block.
2. Connect the primary and secondary AC input cables to the
terminal block according to Table 5.2.2.
NOTE: Input wiring must be terminated with a locking lug.
Table 5.2.2. AC Input Wiring Connections
AC Panel Terminal
115 VAC Wiring
230 VAC Wiring
L1
Hot
Line 1
L2/N
Neutral
Line 2
Ground (equipment protective
conductor terminal)
Ground (equipment protective
conductor terminal)
3. Replace the plastic guard on the terminal block.
4. An alarm output relay is provided with the dual AC feed system.
The contacts are rated at 1 amp (30 volts). An external alarm
can be connected to either the normally open (N.O.) or normally
closed (N.C.) contacts by means of the terminal block located on
the AC distribution panel. The alarm signals the loss of the
primary AC input. The relay contacts are not powered.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC Distribution System
SP: 5-2-6
Checking AC Distribution
-
To check out the AC distribution system:
1. Complete the mechanical and electrical installation.
CAUTION
Make sure that the consoles that are cabled to the DC
power system are turned off. Make sure that all Field
Interface Cards (FICs) are fully inserted into their
respective slots.
2. Make sure that the AC INPUT (orange) lamps on the AC
Distribution Panel are on. If the system has redundant AC
power, both AC INPUT lamps must be on. See Figure 5.2.3.
3. Turn on all AC circuit breakers on the AC Distribution Panel(s)
that have wiring attached.
4. Make sure that each AC output (orange) lamp goes on as each
AC circuit breaker is turned on.
AC Input
Lamp
AC Circuit
Breaker
AC Output
Lamp
Ä
AC
Input
Ä
AC Distribution Panel, Single Feed
AC Input
Lamps
AC Circuit
Breaker
AC Output
Lamp
Primary
Ä
AC
Input
Ä
Secondary
Input Fuses
AC Distribution Panel, Dual Feed
Figure 5.2.3. AC Distribution Panels
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC Distribution System
SP: 5-3-1
Section 3:
AC/DC Power Supplies
The AC/DC Power Supply converts AC power to 30 VDC for the DC
bus. The supply mounts in a system cabinet on a mounting rack that
holds two supplies side-by-side.
AC/DC Power Supplies are available for 115 volt or 220 volt service with
or without built-in battery backup. Figure 5.3.1 shows the two supplies.
Chapter 1, Section 2 covers design of the system and selection of the
power supplies.
OUTPUT
Ä
TEST
CURRENT
30
BATT
FAULT
NORM
FAULT
PS
3
BATT
ON
BATT
FAULT
Ä
OFF
PS
Ä
FAULT
MEASURED OUTPUT
VOLTAGE CURRENT
(Volts)
(Amps)
.01
3
.02
6
.03
9
.04
12
.05
.06
.07
15
18
POWER
+
--
MEASURED
VOLTAGE
PS
FAULT
21
LINE
RTN
POS
Ä
LINE
RTN
NEUT
AC IN
PS OUTPUT
With battery backup
(10P5658000x)
GND
POS
Ä
NEUT
AC IN
GND
PS OUTPUT
Without battery backup
(10P5664000x)
Figure 5.3.1. AC/DC Power Supplies
The supplies are designed to share the load automatically (up to a
maximum of six supplies). The required number of supplies can be
connected to the DC distribution bus. Many users add one additional
supply as a backup. In normal operation, all supplies on the bus share
the load. If one fails, the additional supply provides enough power to
keep the system going. The A and B DC distribution buses are
normally tied together if one set of power supplies is used.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-2
For a fully redundant DC power supply system, a complete set of
AC/DC power supplies is connected to each DC distribution bus (A and
B). Each set of supplies should be fed from an independent AC source.
The A and B sets will share the load, but both sets must be sized to
support the entire system alone.
Installation of an AC/DC power supply consists of:
D
Setting the Battery Charger Card jumpers (if battery backup is
used)
D
Rack mounting the power supply
D
Connecting the supply to AC power
D
Connecting the supply to the DC distribution system.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-3
Rack Mounting the Power Supply
DC power supplies are mounted in standard equipment cabinets on a
power supply shelf as shown in Figure 5.3.2.
Power
Supply
Shelf
OUTPUT
Ä
TEST
CURRENT
30
BATT
FAULT
NORM
FAULT
3
PS
BATT
ON
BATT
Ä
FAULT
OFF
Ä
PS
FAULT
LINE
RTN
POS
Retaining
Bracket
NEUT
AC IN
GND
PS OUTPUT
Figure 5.3.2. Typical Power Supply Cabinet Mounting
WARNING
Each power supply unit weighs approximately 32 kg
(70 lb). Have two people lift the unit into place to prevent
injury or equipment damage.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-4
The shelf (Figure 5.3.3) holds two supplies side-by-side. Secure the
shelf to the cabinet uprights with the four bolts, lock washers, and nuts
provided. Install the power supply and secure it with a retaining
bracket.
NOTE: Set the jumpers of an AC/DC Power Supply with battery backup
before mounting it in the cabinet.
Figure 5.3.3. Power Supply Shelf
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-5
Installing an AC/DC Power Supply With Battery Backup
The Battery Charger Card jumpers of the AC/DC Power Supply must be
set before the power supply is installed.
WARNING
Do not attempt this on an installed power supply. Remove
power from the supply and take the supply out of the rack.
-
To access the Battery Charger Card:
1. Remove the four screws securing the cover A and remove cover
A as shown in Figure 5.3.4.
2. Remove the single screw securing cover B and open cover B.
3. Push the upper edge of the battery charger circuit card C toward
the rear of the power supply just enough to free it from the
standoff.
4. Pull up the card slightly to free it from the card connector.
5. Disconnect cable D from connector J193.
6. Lift the card out of the power supply far enough to note the
orientation of connectors J0 and J192 (E). On connector J0 the
orange wire is nearest the large heat sink, and on connector
J192 the yellow wire is nearest T1.
7. Disconnect the cables.
8. Separate the two cards (F).
9. Position the jumpers as indicated in Table 5.3.1.
Table 5.3.1. Battery Charger Card Jumper Positions
Jumper
Purpose
Position
HD1
Specifies alarm contact for power supply fault.
(Factory set at 1--2)
1--2 normally open
2--3 normally closed
HD2
Specifies alarm contact for battery fault.
(Factory set at 1--2)
1--2 normally open
2--3 normally closed
HD3
Provides support for battery backup.
(Factory set at 1--2)
1--2 battery connected
2--3 battery not connected
10. Replace the card in the power supply by performing the steps in
Table 5.3.1 in reverse order.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-6
Jumpers
J0
J192
T1
Battery Charger
Circuit Card
C
E
D
B
F
Batteries
A
F1 F2
Figure 5.3.4. Accessing the Battery Charger Card
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-7
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Alarm Contacts
The front panel provides two sets of terminals for battery fault and
power supply fault alarm contacts. The cards are shipped with the
contacts set to be normally open (N.O.). They can be changed to be
normally closed (N.C.) by changing jumper positions on the Battery
Charger Card. The appropriate contact will be closed (or opened) if the
red BATT FAULT or PS FAULT LED is lighted. The supply will continue
delivering power while the alarm condition is present. Figure 5.3.5
shows the alarm contacts.
The alarm contacts are rated for switching a resistive load:
D
Maximum switching voltage: 100 VDC
D
Maximum switching current:
250 mA
D
Maximum current:
500 mA
OUTPUT
Ä
TEST
CURRENT
30
BATT
FAULT
NORM
FAULT
PS
3
BATT
Battery Fault
Alarm Circuit
ON
BATT
Ä
FAULT
OFF
Ä
PS
FAULT
RTN
POS
NEUT
AC IN
GND
Power Supply Fault
Alarm Circuit
Cable From AC
Distribution
System
PS OUTPUT
DC Output Cables
(Orange and Brown)
Figure 5.3.5. Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Alarm Contacts
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-8
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) LEDs and Controls
The AC/DC power supply has power indicators and controls on the front
panel. Figure 5.3.6 shows the location of the LEDs and controls.
Table 5.3.2 shows the significance of each.
WARNING
Under certain failure conditions 30 VDC can be present
even though both LED indicators are off.
Check all AC/DC power supplies both for red LED fault indications and
equal output current indication. All the supplies on the same DC
distribution system should show approximately the same current flow
indications within 3 to 6 amps (1 to 2 segments on the LED indicator).
Check each DC distribution system individually.
OUTPUT
CURRENT
30
Ä
TEST
Battery Fault (Red LED)
BATT
Battery Test Pushbutton
FAULT
NORM
FAULT
Power Supply Normal Indicator
(Green LED)
PS
3
BATT
ON
BATT
Output Current
Indicator
(LED Bar Graph)
FAULT
Ä
Ä
Power Supply Fault Indicator
(Red LED)
OFF
PS
FAULT
Battery ON/OFF Toggle Switch
LINE
RTN
POS
NEUT
AC IN
GND
PS OUTPUT
AC Input
Indicator(Orange)
Figure 5.3.6. Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Panel Features
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-9
Table 5.3.2. Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Indicators and Controls
Function
Item
BATT ON/OFF
Toggle Switch
BATT TEST
Pushbutton
AC IN Indicator (Orange)
OUTPUT CURRENT LED
(Bar Graph)
(Red)
Removes the battery backup circuit from the system when in OFF position.
The Battery Test Pushbutton is used to enable the 16-amp, 5-second battery
test manually. If battery voltage falls below 20V during the test, the BATT
FAULT LED lights and the battery alarm activates.
NOTE: The battery cannot be tested until the system has been running for
at least five minutes or until five minutes after the last battery test.
Indicates that AC input is present.
This is a series of LEDs indicating the relative current being delivered to the
DC distribution system by the AC/DC power supply. It indicates the load
share provided by the power supply with a readout in 3-amp intervals. Power
supplies should be within 1 to 2 LEDs of the others on the same DC
distribution system for proper load sharing.
PS FAULT LED (DS1)
(Red)
The 30 VDC output has dropped below 26 volts. The power supply alarm is
actuated when this LED is on.
PS NORM LED (DS2)
(Green)
The DC output voltage and battery status (if the battery is used with the
header jumper enabled) is in normal working condition.
BATT FAULT LED (DS3)
(Red)
The battery has failed the periodic load test. Approximately once every 24
hours the unit automatically tests the batteries under a 16-amp load for five
seconds. If battery voltage drops below 20 VDC (24 volts nominal), the
BATT FAULT LED will light, the PS NORM LED will go out, and the battery
fault alarm will activate. The battery fault alarm will also activate if the
battery test fails.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-10
Installing the AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery
Backup)
The power supply has no jumpers to set.
Alarm Contacts
The front panel provides a set of terminals for power supply fault alarm
contacts (PS FAULT). These are normally closed (N.C.). The contact
will be opened if the green PS NORM LED goes out. The supply
continues to supply power when the alarm condition is active. The
contacts are rated for switching a resistive load:
D
100 VDC
D
500 mA
D
10 Watts
NOTE: The PS FAULT contacts of the 10P5658000x power supply are
normally closed (N.C.). The contacts of the 10P5664000x power supply
(with battery backup) can be jumpered to be either normally closed
(N.C.) or normally open (N.O.).
LEDs
The AC/DC power supply (without battery backup) has two indicators on
the front to indicate status. Figure 5.3.7 shows the location of the lights.
Table 5.3.3 shows the significance of each.
WARNING
Under certain failure conditions 30 VDC can be present
even though both LED indicators are off.
Check all AC/DC power supplies both for green LED normal indications
and equal output current. All the supplies on the same DC distribution
system should supply approximately the same current within 3 to 6
amps. Check each DC distribution system individually.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-11
MEASURED OUTPUT
VOLTAGE CURRENT
(Volts)
(Amps)
.01
3
6
.02
.03
9
.04
12
.05
.06
.07
15
18
POWER
Power Supply Normal Indicator
(Green LED)
+
--
MEASURED
VOLTAGE
AC Input Indicator
(Orange)
PS
FAULT
21
LINE
RTN
POS
NEUT
AC IN
GND
PS OUTPUT
Figure 5.3.7. Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Panel Indicators
Table 5.3.3. Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Indicators
Function
Item
AC IN
(Orange)
Indicates that AC input is present.
POWER
(Green)
Indicates that the DC output voltage is in normal working range. The power
supply alarm is activated when this LED is off.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-12
Measuring Output Current
Output current is measured by measuring the voltage drop across a
.0033 ohm precision resistor that is in series with the output. Contacts
TB2 1 and TB2 2 provide access to the resistor. A table is provided on
the front panel to assist in converting the measured voltage drop to
output current. Steps in the table correspond to LED segments on the
10P5658000x power supply.
The precise current output can be found by measuring the voltage
across TB2 1 -- 2 and then using Ohm’s Law:
I= E/R
= (Volts)/(0.0033)
= 303 x Volts
The current is thus 303 x Volts (as measured across TB2 -- TB1).
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-13
Connecting the AC/DC Power Supply to AC Power
WARNING
Electrical shock hazard. Be sure that the AC distribution
breakers and the battery switches are OFF before making
any electrical connections.
-
To connect a DC power supply to AC power:
(Figure 5.3.8 shows the electrical connections)
1. Turn off all battery switches and AC distribution breakers before
making any electrical connections.
2. Remove the clear plastic guard from the AC input terminal block.
Connect the AC input wiring cable (10P5667xxxx) from the AC
distribution system as shown. Replace the clear plastic guard.
3. Connect the DC output cable (1984--0283--xxxx) connector to the
PS OUTPUT jack. The connector is keyed to prevent improper
insertion. The other end of the cable connects to a DC
distribution bus.
OUTPUT
Ä
TEST
CURRENT
30
BATT
FAULT
NORM
FAULT
Clear
Plastic
Guard
PS
3
BATT
External Alarms
ON
BATT
FAULT
Ä
OFF
Ä
PS
FAULT
LINE
RTN
POS
NEUT
AC IN
GND
Cable from AC
Distribution
System
PS OUTPUT
DC Output
Figure 5.3.8. AC/DC Power Supply Electrical Connections and Panel Features
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-14
Remote Power Supply
The remote power supply is available in these versions:
D
D
For Operator Interface (OI) products:
—
230 VAC input
10P54090003
—
115 VAC input
10P54090004
—
110--230 VAC input
10P57560001
For Input/Output products:
—
230 VAC input
10P55030001
—
115 VAC input
10P55030002
—
110--230 VAC input
10P57010001
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-15
10P5409 for Operator Interface Applications
This configuration supplies power to OI card cages located away from
the main system DC bus. Figure 5.3.9 shows the unit.
1
7
5
6
∆U1
P846--1
+ --
P846--2
P846--3
2
3
No.
4
8
Description
No.
Description
1
Front view
5
Top view
2
Green LED
6
Connector
3
Test socket for output voltage measurement
7
DC output cable (connector P981 goes to
J907 PWRA on the OI Card Cage)
4
Potentiometer for output voltage adjustment
8
AC input:
P846--1 (Black)
P846--2 (White)
P846--3 (Green)
L1
L2/N
Ground
Figure 5.3.9. 10P5409 Power Supply
The power supply can be mounted in a Suspended Cabinet (“7U”), a
“11U”, or a “13U” enclosure using the power supply mounting bracket
(10P53760001), which is part of the assembly. The bracket attaches to
the drive mounting bracket.
NOTE: A cooling fan assembly is required under the slot that holds the
power supply.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-16
10P5409 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out
A connector is used to mount the cables on the power supply. The
pin-out of the connector is shown in Table 5.3.4.
Table 5.3.4. 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out
Description
Pin
6
DC + output
14
DC return
16
Jumper to pin 32 (connects DC return to AC safety ground)
28
L1 AC line 1
30
L2/N AC line 2 (230 V) or neutral (115 V)
32
AC safety ground
10P5409 Remote Power Supply LEDs
The power supply has one green LED that lights when the unit is
operating normally.
10P5409 Remote Power Supply Checking and Adjusting Output
Adjustment should not be required. Attach a voltmeter to the test jack
to monitor the output voltage. Adjust the voltage (¦ 1 Volt) with the
adjustment potentiometer (∆U1).
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-17
10P5409 Remote Power Supply Specifications
Table 5.3.5 lists specifications for the remote power supply.
Table 5.3.5. 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Specifications
Specification
Item
Input Voltage
Input Voltage Range
Input Frequency
Output Voltage
--0001
--0002
230 VAC 1.5 Amp
115 VAC 3.0 Amp
Comment
Selected by factory-set internal jumper
+15%, --20%
45--440 Hz
24 VDC
Nominal
Output Adjustment
Range
+1 V
Adjustment is by front-panel potentiometer.
Output Current
6A
Maximum rated
Continuous short-circuit proof backed by a
thermal shutdown for overheating. Delivers
rated current into a short circuit.
Overload Protection
Internal Fuse
Size
Weight
3.15 A, 250 V
Wickman 19372K,
Schurter Series MST 250,
or equivalent
118 mm x 56 mm x 168.5 mm
(4.6 in. x 2.2 in. x 6.6 in.)
1 kg (.45 lb)
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-18
10P5756 for Operator Interface Applications
This configuration supplies power to OI card cages located away from
the main system DC bus. Figure 5.3.10 shows the unit.
1
2
No.
1
Description
DC output cable (connector P981 goes to
J907 PWRA on the OI Card Cage)
No.
2
Description
AC input:
P850--1 (Black)
P850--2 (White)
P850--3 (Green)
L1
L2/N
Ground
Figure 5.3.10. 10P5756 Power Supply
The power supply can be mounted in a Suspended Cabinet (“7U”), a
“11U”, or a “13U” enclosure using the power supply mounting bracket,
which is part of the assembly. The bracket attaches to the drive
mounting bracket.
NOTE: A cooling fan assembly is required under the slot that holds the
power supply.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-19
10P5503 for I/O Applications
This configuration supplies power to I/O panels located away from the
main system DC bus. Figure 5.3.11 shows the unit.
P837
P838
1
6
5
∆U1
P835
+ --
P834
P836
2
3
No.
7
4
Description
No.
Description
1
Front view
5
Top view
2
Green LED
6
DC output: P837 (Orange)
P838 (Brown)
3
Test socket for output voltage measurement
7
4
Potentiometer for output voltage adjustment
AC input:
P834 (Black)
P835 (White)
P836 (Green)
+24 V
Return
L1
L2/N
Ground
Figure 5.3.11. 10P5503 Power Supply
NOTE: A cooling fan assembly is required for the cabinet holding the
power supply.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-20
The power supply is normally mounted on a DIN rail and used with an
AC and a DC distribution block as shown in Figure 5.3.12.
D
AC Distribution Block
1984--4329--0001
(2 circuits)
D
DC Distribution Block
1984--4329--0002
(10 circuits)
1984--4329--0003
(1 circuit)
D
Fuse Label
1984--4350--0001
D
DIN Rail
1984--4309--0004
DC Distribution Block
DC Output
Power Supply
AC Input
AC Distribution Block
Figure 5.3.12. Typical Remote I/O Power Supply Assembly
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-21
The AC and DC distribution blocks have all like terminals jumpered
together on the input side. Jumper the neutrals with an internal bar.
The active terminals are jumpered with an external bridging jumper
which must not be removed. The input side is marked with an “I”.
CAUTION
Input power must be connected to the input side of the
distribution block. All circuits will be controlled by a single
fuse if this is not done.
Distribution block fuses are mounted inside the black fuse module at the
top of the block. Each fuse module has a bulb that lights if the fuse is
blown. The fuse module also acts as a disconnect switch, remove the
fuse module to open the circuit. The fuse is reached by prying the fuse
module cover open. Table 5.3.6 shows the factory installed fuse values.
Table 5.3.6. Distribution Block Fuses
Block
Wickman P/N
Littlefuse P/N
FRSI P/N
Characteristics
AC Distribution
Series 19197
Series 235
G53394--3000--1
3.0 A, 250 V
CSA approved
DC Distribution
10 Circuits
Series 19197
Series 235
G53394--1000--1
1.0 A, 250 V
CSA approved
DC Distribution
1 Circuit
Series 19197
Series 235
G53394--3000--1
3.0 A, 250 V
CSA approved
A label (1984--4350--000x) is provided to record the actual fuse sizes
installed in the AC and DC distribution blocks. The label should be
installed inside the I/O cabinet door or as close to the power supply as
practical. Standard fuse sizes are listed on the label; be sure to record
any changes from the standard.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-22
Checklist for EMC-Compliant Installation
Follow these rules to ensure EMC compliance.
1. Use the cables and brackets provided with the unit.
2. Mount the unit as described.
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out
A connector is used to mount the cables on the power supply. The
pin-out of the connector is shown in Table 5.3.7.
Table 5.3.7. 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out
Description
Pin
6
DC + output
14
DC return
16
Jumper to pin 32 (connects DC return to AC safety ground)
28
L1 AC line 1
30
L2/N AC line 2 (230 V) or neutral (115 V)
32
AC safety ground
10P5503 Remote Power Supply LEDs
The power supply has one green LED that lights when the unit is
operating normally.
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Checking and Adjusting Output
Adjustment should not be required. Attach a voltmeter to the test jack
to monitor the output voltage. Adjust the voltage (¦ 1 Volt) with the
adjustment potentiometer (∆U1).
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-23
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Specifications
Table 5.3.8 lists specifications for the remote power supply.
Table 5.3.8. 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Specifications
Specification
Item
Input Voltage
Input Voltage Range
Input Frequency
Output Voltage
--0001
--0002
230 VAC 1.5 Amp
115 VAC 3.0 Amp
Comment
Selected by factory-set internal jumper
+15%, --20%
45--440 Hz
24 VDC
Nominal
Output Adjustment
Range
+1 V
Adjustment is by front-panel potentiometer.
Output Current
6A
Maximum rated
Continuous short-circuit proof backed by a
thermal shutdown for overheating. Delivers
rated current into a short circuit.
Overload Protection
Internal Fuse
Size
Weight
3.15 A, 250 V
Wickman 19372K,
Schurter Series MST 250,
or equivalent
118 mm x 56 mm x 168.5 mm
(4.6 in. x 2.2 in. x 6.6 in.)
1 kg (.45 lb)
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-3-24
10P5701 for I/O Applications
This configuration supplies power to I/O panels located away from the
main system DC bus. Figure 5.3.13 shows the unit.
1
2
No.
1
Description
DC output
(Orange)
(Brown)
+24 V
Return
No.
2
Description
AC input:
(Black)
(White)
(Green)
L1
L2/N
Ground
Figure 5.3.13. 10P5409 Power Supply
NOTE: A cooling fan assembly is required for the cabinet holding the
power supply.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
AC/DC Power Supplies
SP: 5-4-1
Section 4:
System Power Supply Units
The RS3 System Power Supply Unit is standard equipment in an RS3
Millennium Package (RMP). It is also standard equipment in most
newer RS3 system cabinets. The RS3 System Power Supply Unit
normally consists of two power supply modules (12P0238X012) and a
housing (12P0236X012).
This section describes physical and electrical descriptions of the System
Power Supply Unit, along with installation instructions and
specifications.
NOTE: The 12P0238X012 power supplies cannot be mixed with
10P5658-XXXX, 1984-2298-XXXX, 1984-0298-XXXX, 10P5664-XXXX,
or 1984-0390-XXXX AC/DC power supplies on the same DC bus.
Physical Description
The RS3 System Power Supply Unit is installed in an RS3 system
cabinet or an RMP cabinet, providing regulated DC power for
equipment installed in the cabinets.
The System Power Supply Unit does not require an AC entrance panel.
The System Power Supply Unit with two power supply modules has a
2400-watt capacity, with 74 amperes available, at 80% loading. A
housing can contain either one or two 1200-watt power supply modules
that provide DC power. If a housing contains only one power supply
module, it should be installed in the right side of the housing (PS1
position).
The housing contains input and output connectors, alarm connectors,
and circuit breakers for the auxiliary outputs. All connections are on the
front of the housing. Rear and side access to the housing are not
required.
Figure 5.4.1 shows a housing with two power supply modules installed.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
System Power Supply Units
SP: 5-4-2
Blind-Mate
Connector
446 mm
(17.55 in.)
Power Supply
Housing
343 mm
(13.50 in.)
38.1 mm.
(1.5 in.)
(Max)
Current Monitor
Test Points
483 mm
(19.00 in.)
Power Supply
Fan Connector
DC Outputs
Fan
AC Input
(PS1)
AUX AC
Output 1
5.22 in.
(133 mm)
AC Input
(PS2)
Interlock and
Alarm Contact
Outputs
Lock
Power
Supply 2
Power
Switch
Power
Supply 1
LED Indicators
and Current
Monitor Test
Points
Auxiliary
Output
Circuit
Breaker
AUX AC
Output 2
Figure 5.4.1. System Power Supply Unit with Two Power Modules Installed
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
System Power Supply Units
SP: 5-4-3
Housing
Figure 5.4.2 shows the System Power Supply Unit housing
(12P0236X012). The housing mounts on standard 483 mm (19-in.) EIA
rails in an RS3 system cabinet. Rack height is 133 mm (5.25 in.) with a
depth of 343 mm (13.5 in.) from the mounting flange. The housing
supports two power supply modules and contains separate DC output
terminals for each power supply.
DC Output and
Alarm Connections
Blind-Mate Connectors
Guide Rails
AC Input and Auxiliary AC
Output Connectors, Auxiliary
AC Output Circuit Breakers
Figure 5.4.2. System Power Supply Unit with (Housing Only)
Figure 5.4.3 shows the DC output block on the housing. The housing
contains separate DC output terminals for each power supply module.
The figure also shows the alarm connections on the housing. The
alarm connections do not require wire terminating lugs.
DC Output Block
PS1
(RIGHT)
+
26 VDC
OUTPUT
--
+
26 VDC
OUTPUT
-PS2
(LEFT)
Alarm Connections
PS2
PS1
Figure 5.4.3. DC Output and Alarm Connections
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
System Power Supply Units
SP: 5-4-4
Figure 5.4.4 shows the AC input connectors and the auxiliary AC output
connectors and circuit breakers.
CAUTION
European installations require external switches or circuit
breakers that break both the line and neutral connections
of the AC inputs. (The circuit breakers provided for the
auxiliary AC outputs are single-pole and break only the line
side.)
The housing includes terminal blocks for two AC input sources. This
enables each power supply in a housing to be connected to a seperate
AC source. The chassis of the power supply housing is internally
bonded to the ground terminal of each AC input terminal block.
INPUT 1 is routed directly to PS1 (the power supply module on the right
side of the housing), and is routed to AUXILIARY OUTPUT 1 through
the AUX OUT 1 circuit breaker. INPUT 2 is routed directly to PS2 (the
power supply module on the left side of the housing), and is routed to
AUXILIARY OUTPUT 2 through the AUX OUT circuit breaker.
Separate 5-position terminal blocks are provided on the front of the
housing to access the alarm relay contacts and interlock for each power
supply.
Terminal blocks, circuit breakers, and all wiring connections are on the
front of the housing. The housing does not require side or rear access.
Auxiliary
Output 1
Circuit
Breaker
AC Input (PS1)
AUX. OUT. 1
ON
OFF
Auxiliary
Output 2
Circuit
Breaker
15 AMPS
AUX. OUT. 2
ON
PS1
(RIGHT)
INPUT 1
85--264 VAC
50/60 Hz
L
N
INPUT 1
L
AUXILIARY
OUTPUT 1
N
PS2
(LEFT)
INPUT 2
85--264 VAC
50/60 Hz
N
AUXILIARY
OUTPUT 1
L
INPUT 2
L
OFF
15 AMPS
AUXILIARY
OUTPUT 2
N
Auxiliary AC
Output 1
AUXILIARY
OUTPUT 2
AC Input
(PS2)
Auxiliary AC
Output 2
Figure 5.4.4. Input and Output Connectors and Auxiliary Output Circuit Breakers
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
System Power Supply Units
SP: 5-4-5
Power Supply Modules
Each power supply module (12P0238X012) has a brushless DC fan to
provide cooling. Air flow is front to rear, and the rear of the power
supply module and the housing are slotted to exhaust heat.
Figure 5.4.5 shows a front view of a power supply module and a detail
view of the label. The upper right corner of the label shows the rated
output wattage of the power supply module. The additional information
on the label includes the part number and the serial number.
FRS
1200W
CP6103X1-CA1
12P0238X012A
S/N:1094--2327C
Power Supply
Fan Connector
Label (Typical)
Fan
FAN
LED Indicators
and Current
Monitor Test
Points
Power
Switch
DC
AC
-+
1 VDC = 100% LOAD
Lock
Locking
Pawl
I
O
P
O
W
E
R
L
O
C
K
Figure 5.4.5. Power Supply
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
System Power Supply Units
SP: 5-4-6
Electrical Description
Each power supply module converts AC line voltage to the DC voltage
required by the equipment and field instruments. The power supply
module output is rated at 1200 watts. The switching power supplies
have universal AC inputs with power factor correction and can operate
over an input range of 85--264 VAC, 47--63 Hz without reconfiguration.
However, this supply voltage will be passed through auxiliary output, so
AC voltage ranges for auxiliary devices (cabinet fans) must be properly
defined. The power supply module outputs are provided with
overvoltage, overcurrent, and short circuit protection.
A pair of isolated test jacks on the front of each power supply module
enable monitoring of output current.
Each power supply module has two front-mounted LEDs:
D
D
The amber LED indicates that the power supply module’s AC
input is energized.
The green LED indicates that the DC output voltage is within
tolerances.
Each power supply module has an alarm relay that connects to a
terminal block on the power supply housing. Alarm relays are
energized during normal operation and de-energized if the DC output is
out of tolerance or if the cooling fan fails. The alarm relay contacts are
rated to 5 amperes at 250 VAC, or 5 amperes at 30 VDC, for a resistive
load. A current-limited interlock loop (limited to 100 mA) is provided to
allow connection of other external alarm circuits. See Alarm Wiring for
more information.
The power supply housing includes separate AC input terminal blocks
for each power supply module, enabling each power supply module in a
housing to be connected to a separate AC source.
Inputs from each terminal block are routed through a single-pole,
15-ampere circuit breaker to an auxiliary AC output terminal block that
can be used to power auxiliary equipment such as cabinet fans.
Individual power supply modules can be removed from the power
supply housing and replaced without interrupting power to equipment
that is redundantly powered.
You must power up multiple power supply modules connected to the
same DC distribution bus consecutively, all within approximately 2--3
seconds. If too much time elapses between the power-up of the first
and last power supply modules, one or more of the modules may go
into over-current mode, until together they are able to supply the load.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
System Power Supply Units
SP: 5-4-7
Planning
The System Power Supply Unit housing fits on standard 483 mm
(19 in.) EIA rails in front-access system cabinet assemblies and
occupies three units of vertical rack space. Outline dimensions of the
housing are shown in Figure 5.4.1.
This section provides information on using System Power Supply Units
in a typical RS3 system cabinet installation.
System Cabinet and AC Wiring
You will need to provide AC power to RS3 system cabinets from an
external circuit breaker panel, and wire the power leads to the AC input
terminal blocks on the power supply housing. Use wire with insulation
rated at least twice the working voltage of the circuit.
Fisher-Rosemount Systems recommends that each 1200-watt power
supply module be powered from a 30-ampere circuit breaker. In no
case should a power supply module be powered from a circuit breaker
larger than 30 amperes.
Each power supply housing contains one or two power supply modules
as shown in Figure 5.4.6. Terminal blocks are provided for two AC input
sources. This enables each power supply module in the housing to be
connected to a separate AC source. The chassis of the power supply
housing is internally bonded to the ground terminal of each AC input
terminal block.
Inputs from each terminal block are routed through a single-pole,
15-ampere circuit breaker to a terminal block for use by auxiliary
equipment such as fans.
NOTE: The cabinet fans used with the RS3 System Power Supply Units
are not autosensing. Depending on the AC input (110 VAC or 220
VAC), the correct fan must be specified according to the input voltage.
AC power is supplied to the AC fan in the RS3 system cabinet from the
auxiliary outputs on the RS3 System Power Supply Unit. (The system
cabinet uses an AC fan but the RMP cabinet does not.)
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
System Power Supply Units
SP: 5-4-8
2
Input 1
L
+
26 VDC (PS1 Output)
--
N
1
AUX
Output 1
AUX
Output 2
+
26 VDC (PS2 Output)
--
L
2
N
Input 2
Notes:
1
2
Rocker ON/OFF switch/circuit breaker for auxiliary AC outputs
Input 1 and Input 2 shall be supplied from separate dedicated circuit breakers
Figure 5.4.6. System Cabinet DC Output Terminals
System Cabinet DC Power Configurations
System Power Supply Units are intended to operate in an N+1
redundancy configuration. There should always be one extra power
supply module connected to a DC bus to provide redundancy. Separate
DC output terminals are provided for each power supply module on the
front of the housing, as shown in Figure 5.4.6.
Standard RS3 system cabinets are available with cable entry openings
in both the top and bottom panels. The System Power Supply Unit and
DC Distribution Bus can be mounted as appropriate for bottom cable
entry or top cable entry.
A typical system might have three cabinets, with three primary supplies
and one redundant supply. The redundant supply is normally load
sharing with the primary supplies. If a primary or redundant supply fails,
there will be no power loss at the load. No. 8 AWG insulated wire,
orange for 26V+ and brown for 26V--, is used to connect the System
Power Supply Unit DC outputs to the DC Distribution Bus. Use either
the 1-meter cable (10P58277001) or the 3-meter cable (10P58277003)
to make this connection. Do not exceed 2.15 + 0.12 NSm (19+1 lbfSin)
torque on the DC output terminals of the System Power Supply Unit.
Use separate wire channels for high-voltage (110/220 VAC) lines and
low-voltage (4--20 mA) signal lines to maintain as much separation as
possible between voltage and signal wiring. A minimum of 203 mm
(8 in.) is recommended.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
System Power Supply Units
SP: 5-4-9
Jumpers on the ControlFile Power Regulator and OI Power Regulator
must be set for 24 VDC, as follows:
Regulator
Header
Position
OI Power Regulator
HD1
2--3
ControlFile Power Regulator
HD1
1--2
For more information about system cabinet configurations, dimensions,
grounding, etc., refer to the RS3 SP and SV manuals.
The DC power distribution system consists of a DC Distribution Bus
(installed in the system cabinet), DC Output card (attached to the DC
Distribution Bus), and various cables.
Each DC Distribution Bus assembly within a system cabinet consists of
three copper bus bars with a current-carrying capacity of 200 amperes.
DC Distribution Bus assemblies can be daisy chained as required, using
a Jumper Cable DC bus to DC bus (1984--0373--xxxx). Bus A is
normally jumpered to bus B, giving a bus A/B.
A standard, non-redundant, DC power distribution system consists of
one or more System Power Supply Units feeding one or more DC
Distribution Bus assemblies. Figure 5.4.7 shows a standard bus A/B
operation.
A DC Distribution Bus should have no more than two System Power
Supply Units (four power supply modules) wired to it, redundant power
supplies included. This applies to both redundant and non-redundant
buses.
NOTE: If a single System Power Supply Unit is used, the configuration
should be the standard A/B distribution as shown in Figure 5.4.7.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
System Power Supply Units
SP: 5-4-10
Bus A/B Power Supplies (up to 4)
System Power
Supply Unit 2
PS2
--
+
System Power
Supply Unit 1
PS1
--
PS2
+
--
DC Bus to DC Bus
Jumper
PS1
+
--
+
Bus A
Bus A
Return Bus
Return Bus
Bus B
Bus B
Figure 5.4.7. Standard DC Power Distribution for System Power Supply Units
Figure 5.4.8 represents a redundant DC power distribution configuration
consisting of one System Power Supply Unit feeding bus A and another
System Power Supply Unit feeding bus B. Buses A and B are not
connected.
Bus A/B Power Supplies (up to 4)
System Power
Supply Unit 2
PS2
--
+
System Power
Supply Unit 1
PS1
--
+
PS2
--
+
DC Bus to DC Bus
Jumper
PS1
--
Bus A
+
Bus A
Return Bus
Return Bus
Bus B
Bus B
Figure 5.4.8. Redundant DC Power Distribution System for System Power Supply Units
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
System Power Supply Units
SP: 5-4-11
Each bus (A and B) needs to have a separate redundant power supply
module, so a total of two redundant power supply modules are needed
for a redundant DC power distribution. (This would be a redundant
bus/redundant power supply configuration, which meets the N+1
redundancy requirement.)
The redundant bus configuration must have the same number of power
supply modules on each bus. Four power supply modules (two System
Power Supply Units) is the maximum allowed for both buses.
Alarm Wiring
Figure 5.4.9 shows the alarm connections on the housing. The housing
contains separate alarm connections for each power supply module.
The alarm and interlock terminal blocks connect to alarm relay contacts
and interlocks in the power supply modules. The alarm terminal blocks
do not require wire terminating lugs.
ALARM
DC output block
PS1
(RIGHT)
INTL.
+
26 VDC
OUTPUT
--
+
26 VDC
OUTPUT
--
N.O.
COM.
N.C.
PS2
PS1
PS2
(LEFT)
Alarm connections
ALARM
INTL.
PS2
PS1
N.O.
COM.
N.C.
Alarm connection detail
Note: The connections
marked INTL are for
alarm interlocks
Figure 5.4.9. Alarm Connections
To cause either power supply module relay to function as a combined
alarms relay, connect any number of external alarm contacts that are
closed during normal equipment operation in series and wire them
across the interlock terminal connection of the power supply module.
Refer to Figure 5.4.10 for an example.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
System Power Supply Units
SP: 5-4-12
Internal to Power Supply
+26V
INTL
External to Power Supply
Ext. Alm. 1
Ext. Alm. 2
Connection made with
no external alarms
N.O.
Com.
N.C.
To Alarm Contacts/
Power Circuits
Alarm Relay Contacts
Figure 5.4.10. Alarm Connection Example
If the interlock connections of an installed power supply module are not
connected to external alarm contacts, jumper the connections to enable
the power supply module alarm relay to operate properly.
To use only one combined alarm for a cabinet, wire the output alarm
contacts for one power supply module into the interlock circuit of the
other power supply module.
Alarm relay contacts are rated to 250 VAC. Use wiring with insulation
rated at least 300 Volts or twice the working voltage used for these
circuits, whichever is higher. Use 2.07 [email protected] (14 AWG) to 0.812 [email protected]
(18 AWG) wire for the connection.
Special Conditions
Ensure that all other devices are mounted above the Operator Interface
(OI) electronics to ensure compliance with temperature requirements.
The OI must be the lowest device mounted in a system cabinet.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
System Power Supply Units
SP: 5-4-13
Installation
The typical factory-prepared cabinet installation is shipped with the
System Power Supply Unit mounted. However, this section provides
installation procedures in the event you need to install a System Power
Supply Unit.
Physical Installation
This subsection explains how to:
D
Install a power supply housing in a cabinet
D
Install a power supply module in a housing.
Installing a Housing in a Cabinet
Fisher-Rosemount Systems recommends that you install the housing
first, without power supply modules; then install the power supply
modules in the housing.
NOTE: The System Power Supply Unit can weigh as much
as 13.29 kg (29.3 lb) if two power supply modules are
installed.
The following procedure describes installation of a power supply
housing in a system cabinet.
1. Place all external circuit breakers that control AC power inputs to
the power supply housing in the OFF position.
CAUTION
The DC Distribution Bus and associated power
cables may have DC power still applied if the load is
backed up by a redundant power source located
elsewhere. Personal injury and equipment damage
can occur if a DC Distribution Bus or cable is
accidentally shorted. Turn off any backup power
sources.
2. Position the power supply housing on the EIA rails. Provide
sufficient support to hold the housing in place until the flange-lock
screws are installed and tightened.
3. Install the four M6 Phillips Screws with nylon splash
(G12215-2006-0116) and M6 cage nuts (G53426-0601-0716)
and tighten them until the housing is securely attached to the
cabinet rails.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
System Power Supply Units
SP: 5-4-14
4. Connect DC output and alarm wiring as required for your
installation.
5. Connect the AC inputs to the input terminal blocks on the right
side of the housing front panel.
6. Install power supply modules in the housing (see Installing a
Power Supply in a Housing, following).
7. After following appropriate procedures for energizing circuits,
place all circuit breakers that control cabinet AC power in the ON
position.
NOTE: Be sure to place the startup voltage jumpers on the OI and
ControlFile power regulators in the 24 Volt position when using a
System Power Supply Unit.
Installing a Power Supply in a Housing
The following procedure describes installation of a power supply module
in the housing.
1. Ensure that the AC power switch on the front of the power supply
module is in the off (O) position and that the locking pawl is in the
horizontal position.
2. Align the power supply module with the guide rails in the housing.
3. Slide the power supply module into the housing, making sure that
the bottom right edge of the power supply module engages the
plastic guide rail in the housing.
NOTE: If you are installing only one power supply module in
a housing, install it in the right side of the housing.
4. Continue inserting the power supply module until the locking pawl
reaches the stop.
5. Using a screwdriver, slowly turn the locking screw
counterclockwise one quarter turn while observing the pawl to
ensure that it freely rotates 90 degrees to the vertical position
and engages the slot in the bottom of the housing.
If the pawl does not rotate to the vertical position, move the
power supply module in or out of the housing slightly to align the
pawl with the slot in the housing.
6. Turn the locking screw approximately 10 additional turns
counterclockwise until it stops, to fully seat the blind-mate
connector. The remaining turns draw the power supply module
into the housing and seat the blind-mate electrical connector.
CAUTION
Do not apply power to the power supply module until
the blind-mate connector is fully seated. Failure to
fully seat the connector may result in damage to the
power supply module and power supply housing.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
System Power Supply Units
SP: 5-4-15
Using the Auxiliary AC Outputs
The power supply housing includes two auxiliary AC outputs that are
independent of the power supply modules. Figure 5.4.11 shows the
layout of the AC input and auxiliary output terminal blocks and circuit
breakers.
AC Input (PS1)
Auxiliary
Output 1
Circuit
Breaker
AUX. OUT. 1
ON
OFF
15 AMPS
Auxiliary
Output 2
Circuit
Breaker
AUX. OUT. 2
ON
PS1
(RIGHT)
INPUT 1
85--264 VAC
50/60 Hz
N
AUXILIARY
OUTPUT 1
N
PS2
(LEFT)
INPUT 2
85--264 VAC
50/60 Hz
N
L
INPUT 1
L
AUXILIARY
OUTPUT 1
L
INPUT 2
L
OFF
15 AMPS
AUXILIARY
OUTPUT 2
N
Auxiliary AC
Output 1
AUXILIARY
OUTPUT 2
AC Input
(PS2)
Auxiliary AC
Output 2
Figure 5.4.11. Input and Auxiliary Output Connectors and Auxiliary Output Circuit Breakers
Figure 5.4.12 shows a schematic diagram for one set of AC inputs and
auxiliary AC outputs. Each housing has two identical circuits, one for
each power supply module. Note that the circuit breakers on the
housing control only the auxiliary AC outputs and do not control power
to the power supply modules. Use wire with insulation rated for a
minimum of twice the rated mains supply voltage that feeds the auxiliary
circuit.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
System Power Supply Units
SP: 5-4-16
To Power
Supply
Note: Each Housing Contains Two Circuits.
Auxiliary
AC Circuit
Breaker
15A
Terminal Block
L
N
AC
Input
L
N
Auxiliary
AC
Output
Figure 5.4.12. Power Supply Housing AC Input and Auxiliary AC Output Schematic Diagram
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
System Power Supply Units
SP: 5-5-1
Section 5:
DC Distribution System
This section describes installation of the DC power distribution system
consisting of DC Distribution Bus (installed in the system cabinet), DC
Output card (attached to the DC Distribution Bus), and various cables.
A standard, non-redundant, DC power distribution system consists of
one or more AC/DC Power Supplies feeding one or more DC
Distribution Bus assemblies as shown in Figure 5.5.1.
Each DC Distribution Bus assembly within a system cabinet consists of
three copper bus bars with a current carrying capacity of 200 amps. DC
Distribution Bus assemblies can be daisy chained as required using a
Jumper Cable DC Bus to DC Bus (1984--0373--xxxx). Bus A is normally
jumpered to the bus B, giving a bus A/B.
Bus A/B Power Supplies
(Up to six)
3
2
--
DC Bus to DC Bus
Jumper
AC/DC
Supply
1
+
Bus A
Bus A
Copper
Bus Bars
Return Bus
Bus B
Return Bus
Bus B
Figure 5.5.1. Standard DC Power Distribution System for AC/DC Power Supplies
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
DC Distribution System
SP: 5-5-2
A redundant DC power distribution system consists of one set of AC/DC
Power Supplies feeding bus A and another set of AC/DC Power
Supplies feeding the bus B as shown in Figure 5.5.2. Buses A and B
are not connected.
A3
Bus A Power Supplies
(Up to six)
AC/DC
Supply
A1
A2
--
DC Bus to DC Bus Jumper
+
Bus A
Bus A
Return Bus
Return Bus
Bus B
Bus B
-B3
B2
+
AC/DC
Supply
B1
B Bus Power Supplies
(Up to six)
Figure 5.5.2. Redundant DC Power Distribution System for AC/DC Power Supplies
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
DC Distribution System
SP: 5-5-3
DC Power Distribution Bus
The DC power distribution bus distributes power within the system
cabinet. Figure 5.5.3 shows a functional diagram of the DC power
distribution bus.
Each AC/DC Power Supply is connected to the DC Power Distribution
Bus by an AC/DC Power Supply to DC Bus Cable (1984--0283--00xx).
NOTE: Each of the cables from the power supply to the bus should be
the same length. This allows optimum use of the load sharing capability
of the power supply.
The DC power distribution bus consists of heavy copper terminals
mounted directly on three bus bars, bus A, bus B, and the return bus.
bus A, bus B, and the return bus run parallel to each other in a plastic
channel. Bus B is intended for use with an optional redundant DC
distribution system. The return bus is used to connect the DC return
system to the chassis with a large wire connected from the bus bar to
the chassis ground lug. This is the only connection point of the DC
return system to ground.
DC power distribution bus assemblies can be daisy chained using the
DC Bus to DC Bus Jumper Cable (1984--0373--00xx) or 35 mm2
(2 AWG) wire. The current limit is 180 amps.
Each DC power distribution bus assembly can hold up to six DC Output
cards which are used to supply power to individual card cages and
devices.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
DC Distribution System
SP: 5-5-4
A3
A1
A2
--
Bus A
Power
Supplies
+
+
-+
--
DC Bus A to
System Device
Cable
A
Power
Device
Receiving
Power
B
Power
DC OUTPUT CARD
Bus A
F1
Orange
DS1
Brown
DC Bus B to
System Device
Cable
Brown
Return Bus
F2
Orange/Black
DS2
Bus B
10A 15A 20A
FUSE F1
X
X
REF F2
--
B3
B2
+
B1
B Bus
Power
Supplies
Figure 5.5.3. DC Power Distribution Bus
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
DC Distribution System
SP: 5-5-5
DC Output Card
Power for system devices is tapped from the bus bars by mounting DC
Output cards (1984--1264--000x) on the bus bars as shown in
Figure 5.5.4. Each DC Output card has a fuse and terminal for both bus
A and bus B. A LED in parallel with each fuse lights to indicate a blown
fuse. A fuse reference chart at the bottom of each output card indicates
the proper size of fuse to be used in each position.
A standard DC distribution system has bus A and B jumpered together
to give bus A/B. Devices can take power from either the bus A or the
bus B portion of the DC Output card. Up to 12 devices can be
connected to a single DC Distribution Bus in the standard configuration.
NOTE: The jumper between buses is normally connected at the far end
of the bus.
A redundant DC distribution system has separate buses A and B. Up to
six devices can be powered from a single DC Distribution Bus in the
redundant configuration. Each device draws power from the bus A and
the bus B portion of the DC Output card. The bus A and bus B fuses
must be identical.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
DC Distribution System
SP: 5-5-6
DC Distribution
Bus
From DC Power
Supplies
Jumper
Fuse 1
(Bus A)
Bus A Return (--)
PWA 01984--1264--0001
Bus A
To Additional DC
Distribution Buses
Bus A Power (+)
Bus B Power (+)
Bus B Return (--)
Fuse 2
(Bus B)
Bus B
DC Output
Card
Figure 5.5.4. Standard (Non-redundant) DC Distribution Bus and DC Output Card
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
DC Distribution System
SP: 5-5-7
DC Output Card Fuses
Table 5.5.1 shows the DC Output card fuses for various hardware
devices.
Table 5.5.1. DC Output Card Fuses
Device
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
Multitube Command Console:
1 Tube
G09140--0047
AGC 15
311015
15A 32V Regular
Multitube Command Console:
2 Tubes
G09140--0061
ABC 20
314020
20A 250V Regular
Multitube Command Console:
3 Tubes
G09140--0061
ABC 20
314020
20A 250V Regular
ControlFile
G09140--0061
ABC 20
314020
20A 250V Regular
ControlFile Fan
G09140--0046
AGC 10
311015
10A 32V Regular
I/O Card Cage
G09140--0047
AGC 15
311015
15A 32V Regular
FlexTerm
G09140--0046
AGC 10
311010
10A 32V Regular
Highway Interface Adapter
(HIA)
G09140--0047
AGC 15
311015
15A 32V Regular
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
G09140--0046
AGC 10
311015
10A 32V Regular
Supervisory Computer
Interface (SCI)
G09140--0047
AGC 15
311015
15A 32V Regular
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
DC Distribution System
SP: 5-5-8
DC Distribution Cabling
The DC power distribution system can be:
D
Standard, with bus A jumpered to bus B.
D
Redundant, with bus A and bus B independently powered.
Standard DC Distribution Cabling
The A/B Bus DC Power Distribution Cable (1984--0158--20xx) is used
on the Analog Card Cage, the Analog, Contact, MUX, and PLC
FlexTerms, and many other devices. This cable allows upgrade to
redundant DC power without adding another cable.
When using the A/B Bus DC Power Distribution Cable with a standard
DC power system, attach it to the DC Output card as shown in
Figure 5.5.5. Connection can be made to either the bus A or bus B
portion of the card. The other portion of the card can be used for
another device.
NOTE: The Pxxx tags on the cable will not match the Jxxx tags on the
DC Output card.
A/B DC Distribution Power Cable
Brown to Device Bus A Return (--)
To Device
Power Connectors
A&B
B
U
S
A
Orange
To Device Bus A Power (+)
Orange-Black
B
U
S
B
Figure 5.5.5. Non-redundant DC Power Cable
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
DC Distribution System
SP: 5-5-9
Redundant DC Distribution Cabling
When using the A/B Bus DC Power Distribution Cable
(1984--0158--20xx) with a redundant DC power system, attach it to the
DC Output card as shown in Figure 5.5.6. This applies to devices in
which a single power cable can carry the load. This configuration
provides full redundancy only if diode isolation is provided at the device.
NOTE: The fuses in the A and B bus sides of the output card must be
identical.
The Pxxx tags on the cable will not all match the Jxxx tags on the DC
Output card. See Table 5.5.2.
B
U
S
Brown
A
To Device
Power
Connector
B
U
S
ORANGE
B
Orange-Black
Figure 5.5.6. Redundant DC Power Cable
Table 5.5.2. Power Cable Plugs and Jacks
Cable Plug
Jack
P233/4
J234
P235/6
J236
P237/8
J237
P239/40
J240
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
DC Distribution System
SP: 5-5-10
Heavy Load Redundant DC Distribution Cabling
The standard A/B Bus DC Power Distribution Cable is not always
adequate to carry the load. The A Bus DC Power Distribution Cable
(1984--0158--00xx) and the B Bus DC Power Distribution Cable
(1984--0158--10xx) are then used as dual power cables. Two
conductors are provided for bus A and two for bus B. This is used to
supply redundant power to the ControlFile and Multitube.
They are connected to the DC Output card as shown in Figure 5.5.7.
NOTE: The fuses in the A and B bus sides of the output card must be
identical.
The Pxxx tags on the cable will match the Jxxx tags on the DC Output
card.
To
Device Power
Connector A
Brown
Bus A
Cable
Orange
B
U
S
A
B
U
S
Orange-Black
To
Device Power
Connector B
Bus B
Cable
B
Brown
Figure 5.5.7. Dual DC Power Cables
CAUTION
When connecting any device to a DC output card, make
sure the fuse installed in that position has the proper
rating for the device. Improper fusing can result in
equipment damage.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
DC Distribution System
SP: 5-5-11
Checking DC Distribution
-
To check out the DC distribution system:
1. Make sure that each AC/ DC Power Supply (see Figure 5.5.8)
has the following light indications:
D
PS NORM (green) LED on.
D
AC IN (orange) lamp on.
Battery Test Pushbutton
Test Fault LED
PS NORM LED
PS FAULT LED
Battery On /Off Switch
AC In Lamp
Figure 5.5.8. AC/DC Power Supply
2. If power supplies with battery backup are used, place the BATT
ON/OFF switch on each power supply to the OFF position.
3. Measure the 30 VDC power distribution system voltage at all of
the DC bus assemblies (see Figure 5.5.9). The voltage should
be 28 to 34 VDC. If the system has redundant DC power, both
the buses A and B must be measured.
DC Bus
DC Output
Card
A and B
System
Ground
A+
DVM
30.00
+
B+
--
Figure 5.5.9. DC Bus and DC Output Cards
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
DC Distribution System
SP: 5-5-12
4. Ensure that all installed Field Interface Cards (FIC) cards have
one or more LEDs on. The LEDs can be green, yellow, or red.
Some of the yellow LEDs can be blinking—this is normal.
5. If power supplies with battery backup are used, place the BATT
switch on each power supply to ON. If the PS FAULT LED lights,
wait for 1 hour. After the 1 hour wait, press and release the
BATT TEST pushbutton. The PS FAULT LED should go out. If
the PS FAULT LED does not go out, see the troubleshooting
advice in the Service Manual (SV: 10).
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
DC Distribution System
SP: 5-6-1
Section 6:
Electrical (Twinax) PeerWay
This section describes installation of the electrical PeerWay including
twinax PeerWay cables and PeerWay taps.
The PeerWay is fully redundant. Two sets of twinax PeerWay cables
and PeerWay Tap Boxes are used to provide independent
communication paths between the nodes. Figure 5.6.1 shows a
PeerWay with two Tap Boxes and five nodes. Each node is attached to
PeerWay A and PeerWay B through the Tap Box.
PeerWay A Twinax Cable
PeerWay B Twinax Cable
A
B
A
PeerWay Tap Box
B
PeerWay Drop Cable
Node
1
Node
2
Node
3
Node
4
Node
5
Figure 5.6.1. PeerWay Tap Box Connection
Up to 32 nodes can be attached to a PeerWay, but performance
requirements and numbering rules often limit the effective number.
Highway Interface Adaptors (HIA) can be used to connect multiple
PeerWays. PeerWays connected by HIAs are electrically independent.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Electrical (Twinax) PeerWay
SP: 5-6-2
Twinax PeerWay Cable
Twinax PeerWay cable provides the communication connection
between electrical PeerWay nodes. The twinax PeerWay transmits
messages serially at a rate of one million bits per second. As many as
32 system devices such as ControlFiles and consoles can be connected
to the twinax PeerWay.
Standard Twinax PeerWay cable (1984--0474--xxxx) has a characteristic
impedance of 100 ohms and can be used for PeerWay runs of up to
600 meters (2000 feet) end to end. Long Twinax PeerWay cable
(1984--0494--xxxx) has a characteristic impedance of 124 ohms and can
be used for PeerWay runs of up to 1000 meters (3300 feet) end to end.
Standard Twinax PeerWay cable (G50194--0001) and Long Twinax
PeerWay cable (G50194--0003) are available in bulk without
connectors.
G50194--0003 cable is Intercomp 12402 in North America and Kerpen
Kabel 07KS00175 in Europe. Both use G12885--0008 connectors.
Belden 9860 cable, now G50194--0004, was used previously for long
twinax PeerWay cable, and must use G12885--0006 connectors. These
124-ohm cables are all electrically compatible.
The two sides of the PeerWay must use the same type cable. Do not
mix 100-ohm and 124-ohm cable in the same PeerWay.
Twinax PeerWay cables are used in pairs for PeerWay A and
PeerWay B. In order to identify the cables, the A cable should be color
coded green and the B cable should be color coded blue. The cable
connectors can be marked with a felt-tip marker.
T-style connectors (G12885--0003) are used to connect the twinax cable
to the bulkhead connector on the PeerWay tap. Straight connectors
(G12885--0005) should be used when splicing two lengths of cable
together. Avoid splices where possible.
NOTE: Connector bodies must not be grounded. Be sure that there is
no contact between connector bodies and grounded metal. Grounding
a connector body can result in a ground loop that is very hard to locate.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Electrical (Twinax) PeerWay
SP: 5-6-3
When pulling cables do not exceed the pulling strength and minimum
bend radius listed in Table 5.6.1. Use pulling compound to lubricate the
cable and reduce stress when pulling the cables through conduit.
Table 5.6.1. Twinax PeerWay Cable Specifications
Twinax Cable
Maximum Safe Minimum Bend
Pull Strength
Radius
Kg (lb)
mm (in.)
Maximum
Length
m (ft)
Nominal Temperature Range
° F (° C)
100-Ohm PeerWay Cable
49.4 (109)
127 (5)
600 (2000)
--40 to +176
(--40 to +80)
124-Ohm PeerWay Cable
77.1
(170)
171.5
(6.75)
1000
(3300)
--40 to +140
(--40 to + 60)
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Electrical (Twinax) PeerWay
SP: 5-6-4
Routing and Installing Twinax PeerWay Cables
PeerWay cables must run between PeerWay taps, as shown in
Figure 5.6.2. Maximum cable length is defined as the length of the
cable from a terminated tap on one end to the terminated tap on the
other end.
Because of differences in routing, the cables for PeerWay A and
PeerWay B need not be exactly the same length. The total length of
PeerWay A and PeerWay B should not differ by more than 100 meters
(≈330 feet). PeerWay A and PeerWay B must connect to paired tap
boxes in the same order. Cable lengths between any two pairs of tap
boxes should not differ in length by more than 100 meters (≈330 feet).
CAUTION
PeerWay taps A and B must not be connected to each
other at any point. Make sure that PeerWay cable A is
connected only to A taps and PeerWay cable B is
connected only to B taps.
Termination
PeerWay Drop Cables
15 meters (50 feet)
Maximum
Termination
Figure 5.6.2. PeerWay Routing
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Electrical (Twinax) PeerWay
SP: 5-6-5
NOTE: Check local codes for restrictions on methods for routing and
protecting PeerWay cables.
Twinaxial PeerWay cables should be run through electrical conduit, in a
cable tray or some other type of cabling channel to protect the cables
from mechanical damage. If the cables must be routed together, there
is no risk of electrical interference between them. It is recommended,
however, that each PeerWay cable be routed through separate cable
paths to reduce the chances that both signal paths would be disrupted
by one incident. Further protection can be afforded by separating the
cable runs as far as possible; for example, on opposite sides of the
building or with a structural barrier between them (walls, beams, etc.).
Do not remove the cable connectors when running the cables through
electrical conduit. A 25 mm (1 in.) conduit will accommodate one
PeerWay cable with the connectors attached. A 32 mm (1.25 in.)
conduit will hold two PeerWay cables with the connectors attached.
Running both cables through the same conduit is discouraged.
PeerWay cables must not be allowed to lie in water or in direct sunlight.
Long-term exposure to water or sunlight can cause cable degradation.
Prolonged degradation can cause PeerWay errors that are difficult to
diagnose.
It is good practice to measure and record the actual length of the cable
when it is installed. The data will be useful for future rerouting or
additions.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Electrical (Twinax) PeerWay
SP: 5-6-6
Installing the Twinax PeerWay Tap Box Assembly
The Twinax PeerWay Tap Box Assembly (Figure 5.6.3 ) consists of a
PeerWay A Tap Box (10P52760001), a PeerWay B Tap Box
(10P52790001), and a mounting plate (1984--0484--0002). The
assembly allows connection of up to four devices to the PeerWay.
NOTE: Refer to the Service Manual (SV) for Tap Boxes
1984--0488--0001 and 1984--0489--0001.
Each PeerWay Tap Box has four identical circuits that connect to four
different nodes (system devices). The four circuits are isolated from
each other so that if one node fails, other nodes will not be affected.
There are four connections from the tap boxes to system device drop
cables. The A tap box uses male connectors; the B tap box uses
female connectors.
1
5
4
6
2
6
3
PEERWAY
DROP 1
PEERWAY PEERWAY
DROP 2
DROP 3
PEERWAY
DROP 4
PEERWAY
DROP 1
Description
PEERWAY PEERWAY
DROP 2
DROP 3
PEERWAY
DROP 4
7
7
No.
5
4
No.
Description
1
PeerWay Tap Box Assembly
5
PeerWay shield screw position: grounded
2
Tap Box A
6
PeerWay shield screw position:
non-grounded
3
Tap Box B
7
PeerWay Drop Cable connectors
4
Twinax PeerWay connector
Figure 5.6.3. Twinax PeerWay Tap Box Assembly
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Electrical (Twinax) PeerWay
SP: 5-6-7
Mounting Twinax PeerWay Tap Box Assembly
The PeerWay Tap Box set comes as an assembly consisting of a
mounting plate with A and B PeerWay Tap Boxes. The assembly can
be mounted in a standard 483 mm (19 in.) system cabinet or on a flat
surface.
The tap box assembly must be grounded. Mounting the assembly in a
properly grounded system cabinet grounds the boxes. If the assembly
is mounted on a non-grounded surface, a ground wire must be run to
the nearest system grounding point.
NOTE: Each tap box assembly must be grounded by having the metal
case connected to ground. The twinax PeerWay shield must be
connected to ground at only one tap box set. The shield is grounded by
having the screw at the “GROUND” position.
Connecting Twinax PeerWay Cables to Tap Boxes
Twinax cables are attached to the top of the unit by a “T” connector
(Figure 5.6.4). Use a terminator if this tap box is at the end of the
twinax run.
For power, an onboard 5 volt regulator is provided for each of the four
nodes, with unregulated 9 volts brought to each tap circuit from the
originating node. Thus, each of the four taps receives power from the
node to which it is cabled. The PeerWay Tap connects to a PeerWay
Buffer Card (in a ControlFile) or a PeerWay Interface Card (in a
console) through the PeerWay Drop Cable.
In a system with four nodes or less and in which a twinax is not needed
for long communication distance, all connections can be made through
a single PeerWay Tap with 100-ohm terminators installed on the twinax
connectors.
CAUTION
The barrel of each twinax connector and terminator must
be covered with an insulating sleeve to prevent inadvertent
grounding of the twinax cable.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Electrical (Twinax) PeerWay
SP: 5-6-8
Figure 5.6.4 shows the cable connections to PeerWay Tap Boxes.
Standard PeerWay Drop Cables (1984--0473--xxxx) are used to connect
devices to the tap box. Tighten the connector captive screws at both
ends of the cable run.
2
1
PEERWAY
DROP 1
PEERWAY
DROP 2
PEERWAY
DROP 3
PEERWAY
DROP 4
PEERWAY
DROP 1
PEERWAY
DROP 2
PEERWAY
DROP 3
PEERWAY
DROP 4
3
5
No.
Description
4
No.
Description
1
PeerWay A Twinax connector and cable
4
PeerWay B Drop Cable to device
2
PeerWay B Twinax connector and cable
5
Device connected to the PeerWay
3
PeerWay A Drop Cable to device
Figure 5.6.4. PeerWay Tap Box Connection
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Electrical (Twinax) PeerWay
SP: 5-6-9
Grounding Twinax PeerWay Shield
One tap box set (and only one tap box set) in each twinax PeerWay run
must have the twinax shield connected to chassis ground. To make the
connection at this tap box set, move the screw from the OPEN position
to the GROUND position. The screws are located on the top of the tap
boxes (Figure 5.6.3). Move the screws on both tap boxes. (Earlier tap
boxes had an internal jumper for this purpose.)
Terminating Twinax PeerWay Cable
Terminators must be installed at each end of the PeerWay, as shown in
Figure 5.6.5. The terminator eliminates reflections on the cable.
NOTE: There are different terminators for the 100-ohm and 124-ohm
twinax PeerWays. Be sure to use the correct terminator.
D
100-ohm PeerWay: use terminator 1984--1065--0001
D
124-ohm PeerWay: use terminator 1984--1065--0002
Terminators
PeerWay B
PeerWay A
PEERWAY
TAP
A
PEERWAY
TAP
B
Drop Cables
Figure 5.6.5. PeerWay Taps at PeerWay Ends
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Electrical (Twinax) PeerWay
SP: 5-6-10
Checklist for CE-Compliant Installation
Follow these rules for a CE-compliant installation.
1. Use only Tap Boxes 10P52760001 and 10P52790001 and
mounting plate 1984--0484--0002, or a built-in tap box mounting
plate in other CE-compliant RS3 components.
2. Keep the Tap Boxes on the metal mounting plate.
3. Mount the plate to grounded rails in a grounded system cabinet,
a grounded metal surface, or run a ground wire from the plate to
the nearest system ground point.
4. There must be an insulating sleeve over the metal barrel of all
Twinax connectors and terminators. Connectors on
factory-supplied cables will have the shield.
5. Use a terminator on any open twinax connector.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Electrical (Twinax) PeerWay
SP: 5-6-11
Installing Twinax Connectors
The connectors available for twinax PeerWay cable are listed in
Table 5.6.2.
Table 5.6.2. Twinax Connectors
Cable
Connector Type
Connector Part Number
100-Ohm Cable C50194--0001
Crimp Type
1167--0016--0001
100-Ohm Cable C50194--0001
Solder Type
G12885--0001
124-Ohm Cable C50194--0003
Solder Type
G12885--0008
124-Ohm Cable C50194--0004
Solder Type
G12885--0006
NOTE: An insulating sleeve should be placed over the metal barrel of
the connector to prevent inadvertent grounding of the twinax shield.
Installation instructions for both types are given below.
-
To install a crimp-type twinaxial connector:
1. Strip the cable as shown in Figure 5.6.6.
2. Refer to the crimping instructions (AS047401) shipped with the
connector for installation instructions.
NOTE: A Connector Crimp Tool (1167--0016--0002) is required.
A Crimp Tool Kit (1167--0016--0007) including a tool and 20
connectors is available.
15.08 ± 0.4 mm
(0.59 ± 0.016 in.)
9.53 ± 0.4 mm
(0.38 ± 0.016 in.)
4.76 ± 0.4 mm
(0.19 ± 0.016 in.)
7.14 ± 0.4 mm
(0.28 ± 0.016 in.)
24.61 mm (Ref)
(0.97 in.)
Figure 5.6.6. Crimp-Type Twinaxial Connector
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Electrical (Twinax) PeerWay
SP: 5-6-12
-
To install a solder-type twinaxial connector:
1. Place the wrench crimp nut onto the cable. Refer to step A of
Figure 5.6.7.
2. Strip the cable as shown and bend the braid outward to allow
free entry of the cone.
3. Push the cone under the braid until it is bottomed (step B).
4. Bend the long conductor outward and install the shield over the
copper conductor.
5. Position the pin and solder in place.
6. Wrap the conductor between the shield ridges and the solder
(step C). Do not allow the solder to extend above the ridges.
7. Bring the wrench crimp nut up onto the tapered portion of the
cone (step D).
8. Assemble the connector body over the cable assembly and
engage with the wrench crimp nut. Ensure that the cable and
connector body are held stationary while tightening the nut.
9. Wrench tighten the nut to 40--50 in-lb torque.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Electrical (Twinax) PeerWay
SP: 5-6-13
16.6 mm
(0.66 in.)
6.35 mm
(0.25 in.)
Wrench
Crimp Nut
A
6.35 mm
(0.25 in.)
Braid
Copper
Conductor
B
Shield
Cone
Pin
Solder
Cone
C
Solder
Turn
D
Conductor Body
Hold
Figure 5.6.7. Solder-Type Twinaxial Connector
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Electrical (Twinax) PeerWay
SP: 5-6-14
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Electrical (Twinax) PeerWay
SP: 5-7-1
Section 7:
Optical PeerWay
An optical PeerWay consists of the fiber optic cable, star coupler, optical
tap box, electrical tap box, interface box, and optical repeater. An
individual installation might not have all these components. Figure 5.7.1
shows an overview of one side of an optical PeerWay.
The optical PeerWay uses fiber optic cable and provides complete
electrical isolation between system components. An optical PeerWay
uses a passive star architecture with a star coupler feeding up to eight
optical fiber runs. Each optical fiber run terminates at an optical tap
box. The optical fiber run can include repeaters and/or attenuators to
adjust signal strength.
ControlFile
Electrical Tap
Optical Tap
Card Cages
ControlFile
Console
Card Cages
Optical Tap
ControlFile Card Cages
Opto/Electrical Cable
Drop Cable
Star Coupler
Optical Cable
Console
Console
Optical Cable
Optical Tap
Repeater
ControlFile
Card Cages
Optical Cable
Attenuator
Figure 5.7.1. Optical PeerWay (Side A or Side B)
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Optical PeerWay
SP: 5-7-2
Each side (A and B) of the optical PeerWay uses a dual fiber optic
cable, one fiber for transmission and one for reception. The fiber optic
cable carries messages serially at a rate of one million bits per second.
A maximum of 32 system devices can be connected to an optical
PeerWay. A Highway Interface Adaptor (HIA) can be used to connect
two optical PeerWays or an optical and an electrical PeerWay.
Figure 5.7.2 shows maximum distances for an optical PeerWay. The
optical PeerWay allows connection of devices up to 1 km (3300 feet)
without a repeater. If an optical repeater is used on a fiber run of less
than 1 km (3300 feet) in the direction of the optical tap box, an optical
attenuator must be used to keep the photo energy in the receiver
module within its dynamic range. A repeater/Attenuator or an inline
fixed attenuator can be used.
An optical tap box can support up to four directly connected devices.
Additional devices can be connected to the optical tap box by daisy
chaining up to three electrical tap boxes using special opto/electrical
cables. The maximum allowable distance of the chain is 30 meters
(100 feet). Each electrical tap box can support up to four devices,
which can be up to 23 meters (50 feet) from the tap box.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Optical PeerWay
SP: 5-7-3
3 km (10,000 ft)
1 km (3,300 ft)
2
1
Optical
Tap
3
4
5
Star
8
6
7
Optical
Tap
Attenuator
Optical
Tap
Electrical
Tap
30 m (100 ft)
Opto/Electrical Cable
Optical
Tap
Figure 5.7.2. Optical PeerWay Maximum Distances
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Optical PeerWay
SP: 5-7-4
Two groups of equipment can be connected by optical PeerWay as
shown in Figure 5.7.3. The optical PeerWay can be approximately 5 km
(3 miles) long depending on the fiber chosen. A fixed optical attenuator
will be required if the groups are close together. The electrical tap
boxes can be spread over 30 meters (100 feet) and equipment can be
up to 23 meters (50 feet) from the tap boxes.
30 m (100 ft)
30 m (100 ft)
Optical PeerWay
5 km (3 miles)
ETS
ETS
15 m (50 ft)
ETS
OTS
OTS
ETS
ETS = Electrical Tap Set
OTS = Optical Tap Set
ETS
ETS
15 m (50 ft)
Figure 5.7.3. Direct Connection of Optical Tap Sets
A standard two-fiber multimode 62.5/125 cable is used along with ST
connectors. The transmitters operate at 850 nm, producing a red light
that can be safely viewed. No special optical precautions are required.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Optical PeerWay
SP: 5-7-5
Installing an Optical Tap Set
The Optical PeerWay Tap Set mounts in a system cabinet or on a wall.
It requires 356 mm (14 in.) of space for mounting. It draws power from
each of the devices connected by the PeerWay Drop Cables. The tap
set consists of a mounting plate and two Optical Tap Boxes:
D
PeerWay A
(1984--3211--0001)
D
PeerWay B
(1984--3214--0001)
The Optical PeerWay Tap Set should always be used with a Fiber Optic
Cable Tie Panel Assembly (1984--2231--0001) to dress securely and tie
down the fiber optic cables. The cable tie assembly mounts at the top
of the Optical PeerWay Tap Figure 5.7.4 shows the Optical PeerWay
Tap Set and the Fiber Optic Cable Tie Panel Assembly.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Optical PeerWay
SP: 5-7-6
88 mm
(3.5 in.)
TR
Fiber Optic Tap A
TR
Fiber Optic Tap B
Optical Tap _X__
Electrical tap____
Ground
____
Optical Tap _X__
Electrical tap____
Ground
____
216 mm
(8.5 in.)
483 mm
(19.0 in.)
32 mm
(1.3 in.)
Figure 5.7.4. Optical PeerWay Tap and Cable Tie Panel Assembly
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Optical PeerWay
SP: 5-7-7
Connecting Cables to an Optical Tap Box
Figure 5.7.5 shows the fiber optic, opto/electric, and PeerWay drop
cable connections to an optical tap box.
NOTE: The cable tie panel assembly is not shown, but must be used to
secure the optical cables.
Use Opto/Electric Cable to daisy-chain from the Optical Tap Box to the
Electrical Tap Box. Opto/Electric cable is also used to daisy-chain
between Electrical Tap Boxes.
D
D
Optical Tap Box “A” to Electrical Tap Box “A”: use Opto/Electric
Cable 1984--1195--xxxx.
Optical Tap Box “B” to Electrical Tap Box “B”: use Opto/Electric
Cable 1984--1196--xxxx.
The Optical Tap Box can be in the middle of the daisy chain if desired.
Both electrical connectors can be used at the same time.
Standard PeerWay drop cables are used to connect devices to the
Optical Tap Box and to the Electrical Tap Box.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Optical PeerWay
SP: 5-7-8
Fiber Cable to
Star Coupler B
Fiber Cable to
Star Coupler A
Opto/Electrical Cable to
Electrical Tap Box A
Opto/Electrical Cable to
Electrical Tap Box B
TR
Fiber Optic Tap A
TR
Fiber Optic Tap B
Optical Tap _X__
Electrical tap____
Ground
____
Optical Tap _X__
Electrical tap____
Ground
____
Standard PeerWay Drop Cables
Figure 5.7.5. Cable Connection to Optical Tap Box
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Optical PeerWay
SP: 5-7-9
Installing an Electrical Tap Box
The Electrical Tap Box set mounts in a system cabinet or on a wall. The
set requires 267 mm (10.5 in.) of rail space. It draws power from the
devices connected by the PeerWay Drop Cables. The tap
(Figure 5.7.6) consists of a mounting plate and two Electrical Tap
Boxes:
D
PeerWay A (1984--3211--0002)
D
PeerWay B (1984--3214--0002)
Up to three Electrical Tap Boxes can be daisy chained to an Optical Tap
Box using special Opto/Electrical cables. Devices are connected to the
electrical tap box with normal PeerWay drop cables.
TR
Fiber Optic Tap A
TR
Fiber Optic Tap B
Optical Tap ___
Electrical Tap__X_
Ground
____
Optical Tap ___
Electrical Tap__X_
Ground
____
Figure 5.7.6. PeerWay Electrical Tap Box Set
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Optical PeerWay
SP: 5-7-10
Grounding Optical and Electrical Tap Box Groups
Each fiber optic tap box group must be grounded at one and only one
tap box (optical or electrical). The selected tap set must have low
resistance to earth ground (preferably less than one ohm). Both tap
box A and tap box B must be grounded. As an example, Figure 5.7.7
shows a fiber optic PeerWay. All of the shaded tap boxes are
grounded.
NOTE: A tap box group consists of the Optical Tap and any Electrical
Taps connected to the Optical Tap. One tap of each group must be
grounded.
Star Coupler
Shaded Taps Are
Grounded
Optical Tap
Optical Tap
Fiber Optic Cable
Opto / Electrical Cable
Optical Tap
Electrical Tap
Electrical Tap
Electrical Tap
Figure 5.7.7. Example of Optical PeerWay Grounding
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Optical PeerWay
SP: 5-7-11
-
To ground an optical or electrical tap box (see Figure 5.7.8):
1. Free fiber optic tap A by loosening the four captive screws that
secure it to the mounting plate.
CAUTION
This procedure should be done before connecting the fiber
optic cables to the tap boxes. However, if the fiber optic
cables are attached to the tap, do not turn the tap over.
Move the tap away from the mounting plate just enough to
move or check the position of the jumper.
2. Turn the tap over to expose the circuit board.
3. Place the jumper in the GND (ground) position.
4. Reinstall the tap on the mounting plate.
5. Repeat the procedure for fiber optic tap B.
6. To prevent multiple grounds, remove and check the other taps in
the tap box group to make sure that the jumpers are in the HOLD
position.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Optical PeerWay
SP: 5-7-12
TR
Fiber Optic Tap A
Ä
TR
Fiber Optic Tap B
Ä
Optical Tap ___
Electrical Tap__X_
Ground
____
Optical Tap ___
Electrical Tap__X_
Ground
____
Mounting Plate
Backside of Tap A
CAUTION: Do not turn the tap box over
if the fiber optic cables are attached.
NOTE: Set the jumpers in Tap
A and Tap B the same way.
HD 3
HD 3
HOLD
GND
Figure 5.7.8. Grounding an Optical or Electrical Tap Box
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Optical PeerWay
SP: 5-7-13
Installing a Fixed Optical Attenuator
The Fixed Optical Attenuator (G52931--000x) is an inline component
used to adjust signal levels in an optical PeerWay. It is most often used
in optical PeerWays that have only two optical tap boxes and so do not
require a star coupler. There are three models that give three levels of
attenuation:
D
--0001
5 dB
D
--0002
10 dB
D
--0003
15 dB
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Optical PeerWay
SP: 5-7-14
Installing an Optical Repeater/Attenuator
The Optical Repeater/Attenuator (1984--2350--100x) is used to adjust
signal levels in an optical PeerWay. It is marked “FIBER OPTIC
REPEATER” on the printed wiring board (PWA). Dash number 1001 is
a repeater and 1002 is a repeater with a built-in attenuator. It is in a
standard 20x20x10 cm (8x8x4 in.) electrical box that can be mounted
on a wall or on a plate in a system cabinet. Figure 5.7.9 shows the
mounting dimensions.
25
(1.0)
Typical knockout
hole pattern
25
(1.0)
203
(8.0)
7.1 (0.28)
diameter
203
(8.0)
Front View
102
(4.0)
23
(0.9)
Side View
Figure 5.7.9. Fiber Optic Splice/Repeater/Attenuator Box Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Optical PeerWay
SP: 5-7-15
Figure 5.7.10 shows the jumper and LED locations on the card within
the Optical Repeater/Attenuator box. Table 5.7.1 gives the jumper
settings for normal and for test operation.
LEDs
1
2
3
1
2
3
HD1
T1
R1
DS7
LEDs DS1 -- DS6
HD2
T2
R2
DS1
Hardware Good
DS2
Hardware Bad
DS3
+30V Fuse Blown
DS4
FO TX1 Failed *
DS5
FO TX2 Failed *
DS6
Data 1
DS7
Data 2
* FO = Fiber Optic
Figure 5.7.10. Optical Repeater/Attenuator LED and Jumper Locations
Table 5.7.1. Optical Repeater/Attenuator Jumper Settings
Jumper
Normal Position
Test Position
HD1
1--2
2--3
HD2
1--2
2--3
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Optical PeerWay
SP: 5-7-16
Installing a Star Coupler
The Star Coupler (1984--1198--000x) provides optical connection for up
to eight fiber optic cable pairs (transmit and receive). The coupler is a
passive device that connects the optical fibers to provide circuit
continuity. The Star Coupler mounts in a system cabinet or on a wall. It
requires 89 mm (3.5 in.) of rail space. Two Star Couplers must be used,
one for each PeerWay.
There is room within the Star Coupler to dress the fiber optic cables and
tie them down. Avoid sharp bends in the cables. A 76 mm (3 in.)
minimum bend radius is acceptable. Figure 5.7.11 shows the Star
Coupler label and the eight fiber optic connectors.
PEERWAY
STAR “A“
ROSEMOUNT INC. P/N 1984--1198--0002
Made in USA
REV _SER___
Front View
Front View (with cover removed)
Figure 5.7.11. Star Coupler
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Optical PeerWay
SP: 5-8-1
Section 8:
PeerWay Extender
The PeerWay Extender (PX) allows creation of a hybrid PeerWay with
both twinax and fiber optic segments. The PX transfers information
between the twinax and the fiber optic segments and acts as a
regenerative repeater. It also provides two standard PeerWay drops ,
which directly connect to the twinax segment. The PX is designed to be
fully compatible with both twinax PeerWay products and fiber optic
PeerWay products.
NOTE: Use a pair of Highway Interface Adapters (HIA) to connect two
PeerWays.
Figure 5.8.1 shows insertion of a fiber optic link in a twinax PeerWay.
The PXs are shown at the physical end of the twinax segments.
Actually they can be located anywhere along the twinax run. Several
other hybrid PeerWays are shown later in this section.
1
2
3
6
7
8
No.
5
4
Description
9
No.
Description
1
Twinax PeerWay cable
6
DC power cable (18--36 VDC)
2
PeerWay Extender (PX)
7
Fiber Optic PeerWay cable
3
DC power cable (18--36 VDC)
8
PeerWay Drop Cables to devices
4
PeerWay Extender (PX)
9
PeerWay Drop Cables to devices
5
Twinax PeerWay cable
Figure 5.8.1. PeerWay Extender Example
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-2
A PeerWay Extender Tap Box Assembly consists of a PeerWay A PX
(10P50930001), a PeerWay B PX (10P50960001), and a mounting
plate. Use of a Fiber Optic Cable Tie Assembly (1984--2231--0001) is
recommended. A typical unit is shown in Figure 5.8.2.
1
S1 S2
XMT
STATUS
S1 S2
S3
HIGH
LOW
POWER POWER
RECV
S1 S2
STATUS
S1 S2
NORMAL
GROUND OPEN
F.O.
DISABLE
F.O.
DISABLE
F.O.
XMT TEST
GND A B
18-- 36 VDC
BARCODE
2
PEERWAY
DROP 2
GND A B
RECV XMT
S3
HIGH
LOW
POWER POWER
RECV
NORMAL
F.O.
DISABLE
F.O.
DISABLE
F.O.
XMT TEST
PEERWAY A
PEERWAY
DROP 1
XMT
18-- 36 VDC
GROUND OPEN
BARCODE
PEERWAY B
3
PEERWAY
DROP 1
PEERWAY
DROP 2
RCV
XMT
4
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
Mounting Plate
3
PX for PeerWay B
2
PX for PeerWay A
4
Fiber Optic Cable Tie Assembly
Figure 5.8.2. PeerWay Extender Tap Box Assembly
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-3
Figure 5.8.3 shows the parts of a PeerWay Extender.
1
S1
2
S2
STATUS
S1
S3
XMT
3
RECV
HIGH
POWER
S2
LOW
POWER
4
NORMAL
GROUND
OPEN
F.O.
DISABLE
PEERWAY A
F.O.
DISABLE
5
6
BARCODE LABEL
F.O.
XMT TEST
7
8
GND
1 2
No.
A B
3 4
18-- 36 VDC
9
10
PEERWAY
DROP 1
Description
PEERWAY
DROP 2
11
RECV
12
XMT
No.
Description
1
Twinax PeerWay Connector
7
Label showing effect of Normal/Test switches
2
Normal/Test switches (S1 and S2)
8
DC power connector
3
LEDs
9
PeerWay Drop 1 connector
4
Fiber Optic output power switch (S3)
10
PeerWay Drop 2 connector
5
Tap Box grounding screw position
11
Fiber Optic receiver
6
Tap Box non-grounded screw position
12
Fiber Optic transmitter
Figure 5.8.3. PeerWay Extender
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-4
Checklist for CE Compliant Installation
These rules must be followed to ensure CE compliance:
1. Keep the PX tap boxes mounted on the metal mounting plate
(1984--0484--0002).
2. Properly ground the PX mounting plate. Installation in a
grounded System Cabinet will provide an adequate ground.
3. If you install the PX assembly on a non-conducting surface, you
must run a grounding wire from the mounting plate to the nearest
available system ground point.
4. There must be an insulating sleeve over the metal barrels of all
Twinax connectors and terminators. Connectors on factory
supplied cables will have the shield. Heat-shrinkable tubing is
adequate.
5. You must power the PX from a CE-approved source of DC.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-5
Mounting
The PeerWay Extender comes as an assembly consisting of a mounting
plate with A and B PeerWay Extender Tap Boxes. The assembly can be
mounted in a standard 483 mm (19 in.) system cabinet or on a flat
surface. You must provide strain relief for the fiber optic cables and the
DC power cable. Use of the Fiber Optic Cable Tie Assembly
(1984--2231--0001) is recommended.
The tap box assembly must be grounded. Mounting the assembly in a
properly grounded system cabinet grounds the boxes. If the assembly
is mounted on a non-conducting surface, a ground wire must be run to
the nearest system grounding point.
NOTE: Each tap box assembly must be grounded by having the metal
case connected to ground. The twinax PeerWay shield must be
connected to ground at only one tap box set. The shield is grounded by
having the screw at the “GROUND” position on a PX or new standard
tap box, or by setting the “SHIELD” jumper to “GND” on an original
standard tap box.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-6
System Cabling
The PeerWay Extender is cabled as shown in Figure 5.8.4. Table 5.8.1
identifies the parts.
2
5
1
S1 S2
XMT
STATUS
S1 S2
S1 S2
GND A B
18-- 36 VDC
GROUND OPEN
BARCODE
PEERWAY
DROP 2
4
GND A B
RECV XMT
S3
HIGH
LOW
POWER POWER
RECV
NORMAL
F.O.
DISABLE
F.O.
DISABLE
F.O.
XMT TEST
PEERWAY A
PEERWAY
DROP 1
XMT
STATUS
S1 S2
NORMAL
F.O.
DISABLE
F.O.
DISABLE
F.O.
XMT TEST
3
S3
HIGH
LOW
POWER POWER
RECV
18-- 36 VDC
GROUND OPEN
BARCODE
PEERWAY B
PEERWAY
DROP 1
PEERWAY
DROP 2
RECV XMT
6
5
7
9
8
Figure 5.8.4. PeerWay Extender Cabling
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-7
Table 5.8.1. PeerWay Extender Cabling Callouts
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
PeerWay A Twinax connector and cable
6
PeerWay B fiber optic cables and connectors
2
PeerWay B Twinax connector and cable
7
PeerWay A Drop Cable to device
3
DC power cable for PX A
8
PeerWay B Drop Cable to device
4
DC power cable for PX B
9
Device connected to the PeerWay
5
PeerWay A fiber optic cables and connectors
Twinax cables are attached to the top of the unit by a “T” connector.
Use a terminator if this tap box is at the end of the twinax run. If there
are no twinax cables attached, you must put a terminator on the single
twinax connector at the top of the unit. Use only one terminator.
CAUTION
The barrel of each twinax connector and terminator must
be covered with an insulating sleeve to prevent inadvertent
grounding of the twinax cable to the mounting plate.
Fiber optic cables require strain relief near the connector. It is
customary to leave about 3 meters (10 feet) of cable to allow
replacement of the connector. Use of the Fiber Optic Cable Tie
Assembly (1984--2231--0001) is recommended.
A standard DC Bus to System Device cable (1984--0158--xxxx) can be
used to connect system DC power to the tap box. Any other reliable
source of DC in the range of 18 to 36 V can be used. A Mate N LockT
connector (G11262--1004) is used.
CAUTION
The PX must be supplied with a reliable source of DC
power. If the PX loses power, the PeerWay is broken into
separate twinax segments at that point.
Standard PeerWay Drop Cables (1984--0473--xxxx) are used to connect
devices to the tap box. Tighten the connector captive screws at both
ends of the cable run.
NOTE: The PX can be powered through the Drop Cables but this
should be done only if turning the devices off will not break the PeerWay
by removing power from the PX.
CAUTION
A RS3 Network Interface (RNI) cannot power a PX via the
drop cables.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-8
LEDs
There are three LEDs. Table 5.8.2 lists and describes the LEDs.
Table 5.8.2. PeerWay Extender LEDs
LED
Meaning
STATUS
(Yellow)
The PX is running and has adequate power applied.
XMT
(Yellow)
Fiber Optic Transmit -- ON (flickering) when messages
are being transmitted on the fiber optic channel. ON
continuously indicates a stuck transmitter or transmitter
in test mode.
RECV
(Yellow)
Fiber Optic Receive -- ON (flickering) when messages
are being received on the fiber optic channel. ON
continuously indicates a stuck transmitter at the other
end of the fiber or transmitter in test mode.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-9
Grounding the Twinax PeerWay
One tap box set (and only one tap box set) in each twinax PeerWay
segment must have the twinax shield connected to chassis ground. To
make the connection at the PX tap box set, move the screw from the
OPEN position to the GROUND position. Move the screws on both tap
boxes A and B.
A zero length twinax segment (a PX with no twinax attached) must have
the screw set at GROUND on both A and B tap boxes.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-10
Switches
There are two sets of switches: S1 and S2 control the Normal/Test
mode of operation; S3 controls the output power of the fiber optic
transmitter. The switches are reached through holes in the faceplate.
Fiber Optic Power Switch
Switch S3 controls the power output of the fiber optic transmitter. At the
HIGH POWER setting full transmitter power is output. At the LOW
POWER setting the output is about 7 to 10 dB lower. This is used in
place of an external attenuator. Table 5.8.3 shows the effects of switch
S3 settings.
Table 5.8.3. Switch S3 Settings
S3 Position
Effect
HIGH POWER
Full power Mode
(Use with star or greater than 1 km fibre optic cable)
LOW POWER
Reduced power mode
(most common application)
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-11
Normal/Test Switches
The PeerWay Extender has three operating modes: normal, disabled,
and test. The modes are controlled by switches S1 and S2. You must
force PeerWay traffic to the other PeerWay before using either disable
or test mode.
Normal Mode: When S1 and S2 are both thrown to the right, normal
operation results.
Disabled Mode: When S1 and S2 differ, the twinax to fiber optic
connection is turned off.
Test Mode: When S1 and S2 are both thrown to the left, the fiber optic
transmitter sends a 50 percent duty cycle signal on the fiber. The
Receive LED on all tap boxes connected to this fiber should be ON.
This verifies that both transmitter and receiver are functioning within
specification. Table 5.8.4 shows the effects of switch S1 and S2
settings.
Table 5.8.4. Switch S1 and S2 Settings
S1 Position
S2 Position
Effect
Right
Right
Normal Mode
Right
Left
Disabled
Left
Right
Disabled
Left
Left
Fiber Optic Transmitter Test Mode
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-12
PeerWay Configurations
The PeerWay Extender (PX) allows creation of a large number of new
PeerWay configurations.
Fiber Optic Link in a Twinax PeerWay
Figure 5.8.5 shows an example of a fiber optic link in a twinax PeerWay.
Figure 5.8.5. Fiber Optic Link in a Twinax PeerWay
Hybrid Fiber Optic and Twinax PeerWay
Figure 5.8.6 shows an example of a hybrid fiber optic link and twinax
PeerWay.
PX
PX
TAP
PX
PX
Figure 5.8.6. Hybrid Fiber Optic and Twinax PeerWay
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-13
Twinax Segment Added to a Fiber Optic PeerWay
Figure 5.8.7 shows an example of a twinax segment added to a fiber
optic PeerWay.
FO
Tap
Fiber Optic
Star
FO
Tap
FO
Tap
PX
TAP
TAP
TAP
Figure 5.8.7. Twinax Segment Added to a Fiber Optic PeerWay
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-14
Fiber Optic “Star”
Figure 5.8.8 shows an example of a fiber optic “star.”
TAP
PX
PX
PX
PX
TAP
TAP
PX
PX
PX
PX
Figure 5.8.8. Fiber Optic “Star”
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-15
Hybrid PeerWay Design Guidelines
A hybrid PeerWay consists of both twinax and fiber optical segments.
The twinax segments must meet the design guidelines for twinax
PeerWays, the fiber optic segments must meet those for fiber optic
PeerWays, and the entire hybrid PeerWay must meet the hybrid
PeerWay guidelines.
A PeerWay can have a maximum of 32 nodes. Performance factors
often limit the practical number to something less than that.
Twinax Segment Design Guidelines
The hybrid PeerWay can have several twinax segments. Each twinax
segment is governed by these design guidelines:
Length: The length of a twinax segment is limited by the type of cable
used. There can be an additional limit due to Slot Width considerations
which are discussed later. Table 5.8.5 shows cable length limits.
Table 5.8.5. Cable Length Limits
Cable
Part Number
Maximum Length
Standard
(100 ohm)
1984--0474--xxxx
600 meters
(2000 feet)
Long
(124 ohm)
1984--0494--xxxx
1 kilometer
(3300 feet)
Termination: Each twinax segment must be properly terminated at
both ends. Use a “T” connector with a terminator appropriate to the
twinax cable. For Standard PeerWay cable (100 ohm), use Terminator
1984--1065--0001. For Long PeerWay cable (124 ohm), use
1984--1065--0002.
NOTE: A PX with no twinax cable attached (zero length twinax
segment) must have a terminator on the twinax connector.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-16
Grounding: One, and only one, tap box set in each twinax segment
MUST have the twinax shield grounded. On an original Twinax Tap box
set, an Optical Tap Box Set, or an Electrical Tap box set, move jumper
HD2 to GND. On a PX or new standard Tap Box set, move the
grounding screw from the OPEN to the GROUND side. Set both the A
and B tap box jumpers at the same tap box set. Be sure that the tap
box metal is grounded.
NOTE: A PX with no twinax cable attached (zero length twinax
segment) must have the twinax shield grounded.
Fiber Optic Segment Design Guidelines
The hybrid PeerWay can have several fiber optic segments. Each
segment is governed by the design guidelines given below. The
guidelines are stated for 62.5/125 mm cable with 4 dB/km attenuation.
Use of other cable requires recomputation.
D
Use the low-power setting for most fiber optic cable runs.
D
Use the high-power setting if the PX drives a star.
D
Use the high-power setting for cable runs over 1 km.
D
Calculate the flux budget only for runs over 1 km or those with
many splices.
D
Slot width, not transmitter power, is likely to be the limiting factor
for cable length.
Length: The point-to-point maximum cable length is 3 km. This
assumes use of 2 connectors and no splices. When a Star Coupler is
used, the limit is 1 km between nodes. The nodes can be a PX or an
Optical Tap Box. Slot Width requirements can further limit the maximum
cable length.
Segments: Slot Width considerations limit the number of fiber optic
segments that can be used. No message should travel through more
than four PXs.
Flux Budget: There must be enough signal to ensure reliable
operation. The flux budget calculation starts with the transmitter power,
subtracts all losses, and must result in a number greater than the
receiver sensitivity but less than the receiver overload value. Fiber optic
transmitters lose output power with age. To ensure proper operation
over time, a safety factor of 3 dB is added to all calculations.
The flux budget equation is:
Reserve Power = Received Power − Receiver Sensitivity
Received Power = Transmitter Power − Losses
Losses = Cable + Connectors + Star + 3
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-17
Example 1. A point-to-point connection with 3 km of cable and two
connectors:
Losses = (3km × 4dB∕km) + (2 × 1 dB) + 0 + 3 = 17 dB
Received Power = − 7.6 dBm − 17 dB = − 24.6 dBm
Reserve Power = − 24.6 − (− 31.7) = + 7.1 dBm
The Reserve Power (+6.6 dBm) is positive and the Received Power
(--25.1 dBm) is less than the maximum so the flux budget is OK.
Example 2. A Fiber Optic Star with a maximum of 1 km optical cable
between tap boxes and 4 connectors:
Losses = (1 km × 4 dB∕km) + (4 × 1) + 13 + 3 = 24 dB
Received Power = − 7.6 dBm − 24 = − 31.6 dBm
Reserve Power = − 31.6 dBm − (− 31.7 dBm) = + .1 dBm
The Reserve Power and Received Power are within limits.
Hybrid PeerWay Design Guidelines
A Hybrid PeerWay is one with both twinax and fiber optic segments.
Each segment must meet the appropriate design guidelines. The entire
hybrid PeerWay must meet the guidelines below.
PX Limit: A signal must not go through more than four PX taps.
Slot Width: Slot Width is an RS3 parameter which allows for the
transmit time of PeerWay messages down the twinax or fiber optic
cable. It sets the amount of dead time between messages. The Slot
Width minimum is 20, the default value is 30. The higher the Slot
Width, the greater amount of dead time between messages. The Slot
Width upper limit is 200. This number determines the absolute
maximum PeerWay length possible. However, setting the Slot Width to
200 may cause an unacceptable decrease in PeerWay performance.
A very heavily loaded PeerWay will pass about 500 messages a second
with a Slot Width of 30. Increasing the Slot Width to 200 (which
increases the dead time between messages) will cut capacity to about
125 messages per second. This may not be enough bandwidth for
effective control, especially during plant upset conditions. Slot Width
should be kept as small as possible. A system with Slot Width near 200
should have only a few nodes on it. Consult the factory for guidance
whenever the Slot Width is 100 or greater. Consider using a pair of
Highway Interface Adapters (HIAs) to break a very long PeerWay into
two shorter PeerWays.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-18
The propagation delay for the equipment normally used is shown in
Table 5.8.6.
Table 5.8.6. Cable Propagation Delay
Cable/Device
FRSI P/N
Propagation Delay
Twinax -- 100 ohm
1984--0474--xxxx
.00506 ms/meter
(.00155 ms/feet)
Twinax -- 124 ohm
1984--0494--xxxx
.00427 ms/meter
(.00131 ms/feet)
FO Cable
62.5/125 mm
G51769--xxxx
.00496 ms/meter
(.00152 ms/feet)
PX Tap Box
10P50930001
10P50960001
1.5 msecond
The formula for Slot Width is:
Slot Width = 2 × { 2 × ( Longest twinax delay )
+ 2 × ( Longest fiber optic delay )
+ 2 × 1.5 × ( Max number of PXs between nodes )
+ 6.4 }
All values are in mseconds. Any fractional result for Slot Width should
be rounded up to the next integer. The units for Slot Width are 0.5
mseconds. A Slot Width of 30 represents an allowed delay of 15
mseconds per PeerWay message. The 6.4 msecond constant is the time
required for each node to synchronize a PeerWay message.
Example 1. Twinax PeerWay with 1 km of 124 ohm cable
(Figure 5.8.9):
1 km (3,300 ft)
TAP
TAP
TAP
Figure 5.8.9. Twinax PeerWay: Propagation Delay Example
Slot Width = 2 × { 2 × 1000 m × .00427 ms∕m  + 6.4}
= 29.88
≅ 30
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-19
Example 2. Three twinax segments connected by two fiber optic
segments (Figure 5.8.10):
1 km (3,300 ft)
To Other
Nodes
1 km (3,300 ft)
PX
PX
TAP
550 m (1,800 ft)
PX
3 km (9,900 ft)
PX
To Other
Nodes
3 km (9,900 ft)
Figure 5.8.10. Three Twinax PeerWay Segments: Propagation Delay Example
The total twinax delay is:
twinax delay = (1000 m + 1000 m + 550 m) × .00427 msec∕m = 10.89 msec
fiber optic delay = (3000 m + 3000 m) × .00496 msec∕m = 29.76 msec
FX delay = 4 × 1.5 msec = 6 msec
Slot Width = 2 × [2 × 10.89 + 2 × 29.76 + 2 × 6 + 6.4]
= 199.4
≅ 200
This PeerWay is physically as long as possible since it requires a Slot
Width of 200. Such a PeerWay will have significantly lower capacity.
Highway Interface Adapters (HIAs) should be used to break a very long
PeerWay into shorter segments.
Node Count: Bandwidth of the PeerWay is the parameter limiting
performance. More nodes need more bandwidth to send messages.
Increasing the Slot Width decreases the available message bandwidth.
As a general guideline, use the relationship:
Number of nodes = 32 −
− 30 
 Slot Width
7
If the Slot Width is 100, there should be no more than


32 – 100 – 30 =
7
= 32–10
= 22 nodes
Node Numbering: It is a good idea to avoid using adjacent node
numbers (4,5 or 1,32). When possible, use only the even numbers.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-8-20
Specifications
Table 5.8.7 lists PeerWay Extender specifications.
Table 5.8.7. Specifications
Specification
Item
Source
Fiber Optic Transmitter
Power (into 62.5 mm cable)
Connector
Sensitivity (62.5 mm cable)
Allowed power
Fiber Optic Receiver
Connector
Edge emitting diode 830 nm (red)
High Power: --7.6 dBm (min.)
Low Power: 7 to 10 dB less
ST
--31.7 dBm (min.)
--15 dBm (max)
ST
24.1 dBm (High power setting)
Optical Flux Budget
For 62.5/125
62 5/125 mm
m cable
Loss in a Star
9 dB
Connector loss
1.25 dB
ST style connector
Cable loss
4 dB/km
62.5/125 mm cable
Aging allowance
3 dB
Jitter
Current Draw
Internal Power Consumption
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Approximately 14 dBm (low power setting)
Each output line will be 9 dB less than the
input line.
This allows for degradation of components.
6.25% (max)
95 mA @ 30 VDC (max)
8 Watts (max) with 2 drops active
PeerWay Extender
SP: 5-9-1
Section 9:
Field Communications
Field communication wiring is used to:
D
D
Connect Multipoint I/O panels to a ControlFile
Connect a card cage to a ControlFile when the distance between
them exceeds 95 meters (311 feet)
This section covers:
D
Connecting Multipoint I/O to a ControlFile
D
Connecting a distant card cage to a ControlFile
D
Communications cables
D
Communications Connect Card V
D
Remote Communications Terminal Panel II
D
Fiber Optic I/O Converter
Maximum length is 1500 meters (≈5000 feet) using the standard
shielded, twisted pair cable.
Shielded, twisted pair wires are normally used, but a fiber optic link is
available for special applications. The fiber optic link can be used for:
D
Long distances
D
Electrical isolation between buildings
D
Lightning protection
A fiber optic link requires the use of a Fiber Optic I/O Converter at both
ends of the link.
NOTE: Use odd-numbered communications lines to connect devices.
Reserve the even-numbered lines for redundancy. A redundant
connection requires an odd-numbered line (n) for the primary and the
next even-numbered line (n+1) for the secondary device.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-2
Connecting Multipoint I/O to a ControlFile
Multipoint I/O can be connected to a ControlFile in two ways:
D
D
Using a Remote Communications Termination Panel
Using an Analog Card Cage and a Communications Connect
Card
Figure 5.9.1 shows the Remote Communications Termination Panel II
used to connect Multipoint I/O Termination Panels to a ControlFile.
Figure 5.9.2 shows the Communications Connect Card in an Analog
Card Cage used to connect Multipoint I/O Termination Panels to a
ControlFile.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-3
PeerWay
A
A
B
B
ControlFile
Cable from
Controller Processor
Communication
Termination Panel II
Controller
Communications Lines
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel
Multipoint I/O
Termination Panel
Figure 5.9.1. Remote Communications Termination Panel II Used With Multipoint I/O
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-4
PeerWay
A
A
B
B
ControlFile
Communication
Connect Card
Cable from
Controller Processor
Controller
Analog Card Cage
Communication Cables
Multipoint I/O
Termination Panel Set
Multipoint I/O
Termination Panel
Figure 5.9.2. Communications Connect Card Used With Multipoint I/O
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-5
Connecting a Distant Card Cage to a ControlFile
The Controller to FlexTerm cable (10P5331xxxx), used to connect a
card cage to a ControlFile, is supplied in lengths up to 15 meters
(50 feet). Connecting equipment beyond that distance requires using
communications lines and termination panels.
Figure 5.9.3 shows the use of the Remote Communications Termination
Panel II to connect a remotely located card cage to a ControlFile. One
communications line is required for each active slot in the remote
Analog Card Cage.
PeerWay
A
A
B
B
ControlFile
Cable from
Controller Processor
Controller
Remote Communication Termination Panel II
Communication
Termination Panel II
Communications Cable
(eight lines)
Cable to
Card Cage
Remote Analog Card Cage
Figure 5.9.3. Connecting a Distant Card Cage Using a Remote Communications Termination Panel II
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-6
Communication Cables
Field Interface Module (FIM) Communication Cables (1984--4188--xxxx)
come in even meter lengths from 1 to 6 meters (3 to 20 feet), 8 meters
(26 feet), and 10 meters (32 feet). The cable is supplied with a connector
on one end and bare wires on the other. Longer lengths can be specially
ordered. The maximum length is 1500 meters (≈5000 feet).
A three-position connector (plug) (G53373--0103) is used.
The user typically provides the multi-pair cable used to connect a
distant card cage to a ControlFile. Table 5.9.1 lists recommended
cables for various applications. The cable you use must have the
following characteristics:
D
Individually shielded, twisted pairs with PVC insulation
D
2.5 -- .34 mm2 (14 -- 22 AWG) conductor
D
1.5 -- .25 mm2 (16 -- 24 AWG) drain wire for foil shield
The shields of individual twisted pair cable are landed at both ends on
the terminals, which reference system ground. The overall shield that
covers all shielded pairs must be grounded at the ControlFile end only.
Communication lines must be run in a conduit or tray. This conduit may
be shared with other signal cables such as PeerWay, 4--20 mA lines, or
other low voltage signal cables. The communication lines must not be
within 30 cm (12 in.) of any AC or high voltage lines.
NOTE: The transient suppression networks are sufficient for cables
within a building. For runs between buildings, provide lightning
arrestors where the cable enters the building. Use of metal conduit or a
copper ground wire is recommended. A fiber optic link can be used for
runs between buildings or where lightning transients are a problem.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-7
Table 5.9.1. Recommended Communication Cables
Cable
Use
Belden type 8774
Alpha type 6014
American type A24509
Normal
These cables have nine polypropylene insulated pairs with individual foil shields and
an overall PVC jacket. The ninth pair can be used as an overall drain wire connected
to the “Overall Shield” terminal block at the ControlFile end of the cable only.
The maximum length for these cables is 1500 meters (≈5000 feet).
CSA approval
Belden type 9332
Alpha type 6059
American type A36609
The maximum length for these cables is 1006 meters (≈3300 feet).
Noisy environment
Alpha type 5620B2008
American type A29008
The maximum length for these cables is 1006 meters (≈3300 feet).
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-8
Installing a Communications Connect Card V
The Communications Connect Card V (10P54560001 is marked
“COMMUNICATIONS CONNECT V” on the printed wiring assembly
(PWA). It is a standard part of the Analog Card Cage as shown in
Figure 5.9.4. It provides a physical connection to the Controller
Processor card and to the next Analog Card Cage (if more than one
card cage is used). This cabling is connected and the card jumpers are
set when the Analog Card Cage is installed.
Field Interface Card slots 1 through 8
Communications Connect Card
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Figure 5.9.4. Analog Card Cage
The Communications Connect card also provides transient voltage
protection for up to eight communications lines running from Field
Interface Modules (FIMs) or Field Interface Cards (FICs) to the
Controller Processor card. Each communications line has a transient
suppression diode between the signal lines and communications
ground. A transient suppression network ties communications ground
to chassis ground.
Figure 5.9.5 shows the card. Up to eight shielded, twisted pair
communication lines may be connected to TB--1 through TB--8. The
communication line connectors (G53373--0103) are removable plugs
identical to the connectors used in the Multipoint I/O termination panels.
Connect the shield (or drain) to “S”, the black wire to “--”, and the red
wire to “+”.
Table 5.9.2, Table 5.9.3, and Table 5.9.4 show the jumper settings.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-9
TB 1
Terminals for Communication Lines 1 -- 8
(Each of these connections has +, -- ,shield)
TB 2
Connector for Controller 1
TB 3
TB 4
TB 5
Connector for Controller 2
HD1, HD2
Card Cage Address
TB 6
HD5
Card Cage Location
HD4
Controller
Processor
Redundancy
TB 7
TB 8
Figure 5.9.5. Communications Connect Card V
Table 5.9.2. Cage Address Jumper Positions
Jumper
Card Cage
Address A
Card Cage
Address B
Card Cage
Address C
Card Cage
Address D
HD1
1--2 (ZERO)
2--3 (ONE)
1--2 (ZERO)
2--3 (ONE)
HD2
1--2 (ZERO)
1--2 (ZERO)
2--3 (ONE)
2--3 (ONE)
Table 5.9.3. Controller Redundancy Jumper Positions
Jumper
Controller Not Redundant
Controller Redundant
HD4 A
1--2 (NORMAL)
2--3 (REDUNDANT)
HD4 B
1--2 (NORMAL)
2--3 (REDUNDANT)
Table 5.9.4. Location Jumper Positions
Jumper
Card Cage
in ControlFile Area
Card Cage
in Remote Location
HD5
2--3
CONTROL FILE AREA
1--2
REMOTE I/O
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-10
Installing Remote Communications Termination Panel II
The Remote Communications Termination Panel II (1984--4205--000x)
is marked “COMM TERM PNL II” on the PWA. It is mounted on a DIN
rail and measures 77 x 200 mm (3 x 7.8 in.). It has plastic loops at each
corner of the panel for attaching strain relief ties. It requires no
connection to the power distribution system but does require a good
connection to ground. Figure 5.9.6 shows a Remote Communications
Termination Panel II.
2
40
J567
HD2A HD2B
1
NORM
2
3
REDUNDANT
39
J568
40
HD1
39
1
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
TB5
OVERALL
SHIELD
CONNECT
AT CONTROL
FILE AREA
TB6
TB7
TB8
Screw Terminals for Communication Lines 1--8
(Each of these connections has +, -- ,shield)
REMOTE I/O
CONT FILE
TB9
Ground Cable to
Chassis Ground
Figure 5.9.6. Remote Communications Termination Panel II
The Remote Communications Termination Panel provides termination
and transient suppression for up to eight communication lines between
a Controller Processor and a Multipoint termination panel, an analog
card cage, or a FlexTerm for long distance applications.
With Multipoint I/O, only one Remote Communications Termination
Panel is required. The Multipoint I/O termination panel has adequate
termination for the other end of the communication lines.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-11
To connect a distant card cage, a Remote Communications Termination
Panel must be installed at each end of the communication link. Mount
the panel in the same cabinet or set of cabinets as the ControlFile or
remote I/O to which it is attached.
Each panel has two connectors for a pair of redundant Controller
Processors, or for daisy chain cabling to a local card cage or FlexTerm.
Communication line connectors (G53373--0103) are removable plugs
identical to the connectors used in the Multipoint I/O termination panels.
Connect the shield (drain) to “S,” the black wire to “--” and the red wire
to “+”.
The panel features two transient suppression diodes for each
communications line to protect the Controller Processor.
NOTE: The panel is shipped with a ground wire attached to TB9. It
must be connected to chassis ground for proper operation of transient
protection. The other terminal of TB9 can be used to ground the
communications cable overall (external) shield. Ground the overall
shield only at the ControlFile end of the run.
CE Compliant Installation
Follow these steps to ensure CE compliance:
1. Use panels with minimum revision E/E or higher.
2. Use Control Cable 1984--2783--9045, which is approximately
1 meter (39 in.).
3. Fasten the panel ground wire to the nearest grounded rail. Use
an M6 screw and cage nut.
4. Set jumper HD1 to “CONT FILE AREA.”
5. Use FIM Communication Cable (1984--4188--xxxx) or equivalent.
Acceptable single twisted pair cables are Belden 9462 and Carol
C0720. Acceptable cables with nine twisted pairs and an overall
shield are Belden 8774, Alpha 6014, and American A24509.
CAUTION
The green chassis ground wire must be connected to a
good ground to maintain system transient immunity.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-12
Mounting
The Communications Terminal Panel II is mounted on a DIN rail (see
Figure 5.9.7), two panels can be mounted on a 483 mm (19 in.) rail.
The panel is approximately 77 x 200 mm (3 x 7.8 in.). There are plastic
loops at each corner of the panel for attaching strain relief ties.
Figure 5.9.7. Communications Terminal Panel II DIN Rail Mounting
NOTE: The chassis ground wire (green) must be connected to a good
ground (such as grounded cabinet rails) to maintain system transient
immunity. Terminal TB9 may be used to ground a communication line
overall cable shield (if any is present).
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-13
System Cabling
The Communications Termination Panel II has two connectors for
control cables to a ControlFile or to a local card cage or FlexTerm. One
control cable is always used, the second is normally used for
installations with redundant Controller Processors.
Eight terminals (TB1--TB8) are provided to connect individually shielded
twisted-pair communication lines. The communication line used
establishes the slot address of the device connected to the line. The
individual shields must be terminated at both ends of the cable. A
mating connector (50P05890103 or G53373--0103) is used on the
communication line. Connect the shield (or drain) of each twisted pair
to “S”, the black wire to “--”, and the red wire to “+”.
NOTE: If the communication lines are gathered into a shielded cable,
the overall cable shield must be grounded to terminal TB9 only at the
ControlFile end of the cable run.
Use FIM Communication Cable (1984--4188--xxxx) or equivalent cable
with specifications:
D
Individually shielded 0.34 mm2 (22 AWG) twisted pairs with PVC
insulation
D
100 percent shield coverage
D
Drain wire 0.34 mm2 (22 AWG) with foil shield
The maximum length for the I/O cable from the ControlFile to the device
is 1370 meters (≈4500 feet).
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-14
Single Panel Installation
A single panel (see Figure 5.9.8) is used when the remote device(s)
accept a communications line. The panel supports eight
communications lines. The maximum cable length from the ControlFile
to the device is 1370 meters (≈4500 feet).
PeerWay
A
B
A
1
B
2
3
4
5
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
ControlFile
4
Communication cables
2
Control cable
5
Remote devices attached to communications
lines (maximum four per line)
3
Communications Termination Panel II
(with HD1 set to “CONT FILE”)
Figure 5.9.8. Single Communications Termination Panel II Installation
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-15
Dual Panel Installation
Two panels (see Figure 5.9.9) can be used to effectively increase the
length of the control cable from the ControlFile to the device. The
maximum cable length from the ControlFile to the device is 1370 meters
(≈4500 feet). Eight communications lines are required between the
panels.
NOTE: This configuration is not allowed for CE compliant installations.
PeerWay
A
B
A
1
B
2
3
6
7
4
Description
No.
5
No.
Description
1
ControlFile
5
Communications Termination Panel II
(with HD1 set to “REMOTE I/O”)
2
Control cable
6
Control cable
3
Communications Termination Panel II
(with HD1 set to “CONT FILE”)
7
Remote device
4
Bundled communications cable
Figure 5.9.9. Dual Communications Termination Panel II Installation
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-16
Jumpers
Jumpers on each panel specify the location of the panel and whether
normal or redundant Controller Processor operation is being used (see
Table 5.9.5).
Table 5.9.5. Communications Termination Panel II Jumpers
Jumper
Position
Effect
HD1
REMOTE I/O
(1--2)
Used when the panel is at the remote end of the
communication line; at the card cage or FlexTerm.
CONT FILE
(2--3)
Used when the panel is at the ControlFile (source)
end of the communication line.
HD2A
HD2B
NORMAL
(1--2)
REDUNDANT
(2--3)
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Normal operation. One cable is used from the
ControlFile to the panel. The panel is connected
to one Controller Processor.
Redundant operation. Two cables are used
between the ControlFile and the panel. The panel
is connected to two Controller Processors.
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-17
Fiber Optic I/O Converter
The Fiber Optic I/O Converter (1984--3278--000x) allows you to insert a
fiber optic link in a twisted pair communications line between a
controller and an I/O device. Two converters are required, one to
convert from the RS-485 electrical format to fiber optic format and
another to convert back to electrical signaling.
NOTE: Revision Level C/D and higher includes the ground wire and
DIN clip.
The converter is mounted on a DIN rail and measures 77 x 200 mm
(3 x 7.8 in.). Two converters can be mounted side-by-side on a single
483 mm (19 in.) piece of DIN rail. The converter requires DC power
and a good connection to ground.
Figure 5.9.10 shows front and top views of the converter.
Top View
FIBER OPTIC I/O CONVERTER
5V POWER
CF NODE
RECEIVE DATA
CONTROLLER
TRANSMIT DATA
COMM LINE
TB1
F/O Receiver
R
TB2
TB3
J980 A B RTN
T
F/O Transmitter
Power Strip
Power Plug
Comm Ports
(three position)
Ground Wire
and DIN Clip
Front View
Figure 5.9.10. Fiber Optic I/O Converter
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-18
Figure 5.9.11 shows mounting on a DIN rail.
Fiber Optic I/O Converter
DIN Rail
Figure 5.9.11. Fiber Optic I/O Converter Mounting
NOTE: Only one fiber optic link may be used in a communication line
run.
The total length of the twisted pair communication line at either end of
the fiber optic link cannot exceed 75 meters (246 feet). The length of
the optical fiber run depends on losses in the cable, splices, and
connectors.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-19
Figure 5.9.12 shows a typical installation.
PeerWay
A
A
B
B
ControlFile
Controller to FlexTerm Cable
Communication
Termination Panel II
Fiber Optic I/O Converter
Controller
Communication Line
Fiber Optic Cable
Fiber Optic I/O Converter
Communication
Line
Figure 5.9.12. Fiber Optic Link in a Communications Line
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-20
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Power Wiring
The converter uses about 1.2 watts of DC power. It draws 48 mA at
24 VDC.
CAUTION
Connect the panel to a good earth ground. It is mounted to
the DIN rail by nonconducting plastic feet. Use one of the
ground terminals on the power strip.
The power plug (J980) is a four-position locking connector and is
compatible with the 30V bus cable used in other parts of the system. It
provides for 30V A and B connections allowing redundant power
connections. Figure 5.9.13 shows this usage.
NOTE: Use either the power plug or the power strip. Do not use both.
A B
RTN
A B
RTN
TB3
Power Strip
J980
Power Plug
A B RTN
B Return
A Return
Standard A and
B Power Supply
Cable
B Supply
A Supply
Figure 5.9.13. Power and Ground Wiring: Using Power Plug
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-21
The power strip (TB3) is a screw-down terminal block. Two inputs for
30V A and B allow easy daisy chaining of power. Maximum current
through these terminal blocks is 7 amps. Figure 5.9.14 shows this.
TB3
A B
RTN
A B
RTN
Power Strip
A+
A --
A -A+
B+
B --
B -B+
Daisy chain to
next device
NOTE: Maximum current (A + B) = 7 amps
Figure 5.9.14. Power and Ground Wiring: Using the Power Strip
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Communication Wiring
See “Communication Cables” (page 5-9-6) for information about the
communication cables used. Connect the communications line to TB1.
Use TB2 for daisy chaining of the communications line to other devices.
The communication line at either end of the fiber optic link must not
exceed 75 meters (246 feet) in length.
The communication line connectors (G53373--0103) are removable
three-position plugs. Connect the shield (or drain) to “S”, the black wire
to “--”, and the red wire to “+” as shown in Figure 5.9.15.
+
--
Red
Black
S
Shield
Figure 5.9.15. Communication Line Connector Wiring
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-9-22
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Optical Cables
The same fiber optic cable and connectors are used for fiber optic link
or fiber optic PeerWay. Table 5.9.6 shows component specifications.
See page SP:5-10-1 for details about installing and testing fiber optic
cable.
Table 5.9.6. Fiber Optic I/O Converter Specifications
Device
Output Power
Fiber Optic I/O Converter
Transmitter
--16 dbm
Fiber Optic I/O Converter
Receiver
Sensitivity
Attenuation
--24 dbm
ST Connector
.8 db (Typical)
Splice
.6 db (Typical)
Cable (62.5/125 mm)
4 db/km (Typical)
The following is an example, using 62.5/125 mm cable: The loss budget
from the transmit module to the receive module is 8 dbm (the difference
between transmitter power and receiver sensitivity). We lose 1.6 dbm
for the two ST connectors required, which leaves 6.4 dbm. The cable
loss is 4 db/km, so we have 6.4 4 = 1.6. This allows for a maximum
cable run of 1.6 km (≈1 mile). Any splices or additional connectors
required will reduce the maximum cable run.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Field Communications
SP: 5-10-1
Section 10:
Fiber Optic Cable
Each fiber optic cable has two separate fibers. One fiber is used to
transmit data and one fiber is used to receive data. Fiber optic
PeerWay cables are used in pairs, called A and B. The A cable should
be color coded green and the B cable should be color coded blue. The
cable connectors can be marked with a felt-tip marker. Corresponding
A and B tap boxes are marked with green and blue labels.
The fiber optic cable is terminated with ST connectors that have less
than 0.7 dB loss per connector.
D
D
D
D
D
PeerWay cables A and B should follow separate routes in
separate conduits throughout the plant. This reduces the
probability of both PeerWays being damaged from a single
mishap or failure.
Each fiber optic cable, which includes one transmit and one
receive fiber, should have its own dedicated 19 mm (3/4 in.)
minimum conduit. For protection of the fiber optic cable, conduit
must be used over the entire length of the PeerWay. Consult
with us for assistance on special applications that require the
fiber to be buried.
The conduit used can be a plastic inner liner that is pulled inside
larger steel conduits or wiring trays along with electrical signal or
voltage cable. The plastic inner liner provides segregation. The
inner liner should be placed first and then the fiber cable should
be installed.
Do not pull fiber optic cable through conduit with connectors
installed.
The safe minimum bend radius of fiber optic cable is typically ten
times the outer diameter. Running the fiber optic cable in 19 mm
(3/4 in.) conduit, which has a standard minimum bend radius of
152 mm (6 in.), will meet the minimum requirements. When
coiling the fiber optic cable, the minimum bend radius must be
strictly adhered to. As a conservative guideline, a 76 mm (3 in.)
minimum bend radius is acceptable. Fiber optic cables must
never be sharply kinked.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Fiber Optic Cable
SP: 5-10-2
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
If cable is to be pulled through more than four 90 degree bends,
intermediate pull points are necessary.
Maximum pull strengths are specified for each type of fiber optic
cable (for specifications, see manufacturer’s documentation).
Strict adherence to these limits is mandatory. Fiber optic cable
should be pulled using a smooth, steady motion. Never tug on a
fiber optic cable.
Avoid using petroleum based lubricants on fiber optic cable. Use
lubricants approved for use with Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
building cables, such as neutral soft soap, talc powder,
soapstone, or equivalents.
Wire mesh pulling grips of an appropriate size can be used.
Consult the manufacturer’s specifications for appropriate sizes.
When securing cables, use flat lacing tape or cable ties. Do not
tighten them so much that they impress the cable jacket.
Fiber optic cable should never be strung through ring supports or
allowed to sag between horizontal supports.
To prevent entangling the fiber, do not include a pull line for
future use.
Fiber optic cable must never be pulled around sharp corners.
Sharp corners usually lead to violating the minimum bend radius
and damaging the internal fibers.
When pulling fiber optic cable to the connection point, leave a
minimum of 1.5 meters (5 feet) of extra cable to allow room for
cable termination. During the cable termination process, the
cable must have sufficient length to be brought to a comfortable
working position in order to prepare and install the connectors.
Label each fiber optic cable as either PeerWay A or PeerWay B.
Indicate the destination of each cable end.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Fiber Optic Cable
SP: 5-10-3
Installing Fiber Optic Connectors
There are two common methods of terminating fiber optic cable:
D
By connector
D
By pigtail
A connector is installed directly on the end of the cable. There are
many varieties available, but all require a fair amount of labor and skill
to install.
A pigtail is a short length of cable with a factory-installed connector.
The pigtail is spliced onto the end of the fiber optic cable. Making the
splice is quick and fairly easy.
A connector requires more time and labor to install but gives a lower
loss termination. A splice is quicker to make but involves both the loss
due to the connector and the loss due to the splice.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Fiber Optic Cable
SP: 5-10-4
Testing the Optical PeerWay
After the PeerWay components are installed, check and record the
system performance for future reference.
It is important to realize that the optical transmitters have a rated output
intensity and the receivers have a specified range of sensitivity. To
ensure proper and efficient operation of the system, a loss budget must
be met. The sum of all losses must be less than the sensitivity of the
receiver.
A fiber optic power meter is required to test the optical PeerWay
system. The power meter should meet the following specifications:
D
Be capable of accepting ST style connector
D
Calibration wavelength 850 nm (nanometer)
D
Sensitivity range +3 to --60 dbm
D
Accuracy ±5 % or better
The following meters meet these specifications:
D
Photodyne 11XE or 18XT
D
Fotec M202 or M212A.
Many other meters are available that meet the specifications. No
optical power source is necessary for checkout other than the optical
transmitter modules on the optical tap boxes.
The specifications are shown in Table 5.10.1.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Fiber Optic Cable
SP: 5-10-5
Table 5.10.1. Optical PeerWay Component Specifications
Device
Output Power
Level
Optical Tap Box
Transmitter
--7.6 dbm
minimum
Optical Tap Box
Receiver
Sensitivity
--3.7 dbm
Star Coupler
Repeater/Attenuator
Transmitter
Repeater/Attenuator
Receiver
Fixed Optical
Attenuator
Attenuation
10.5 to 13 dbm
--7.6 dbm
minimum
--3.7 dbm
--0001
--0002
--0003
5 dbm
10 dbm
15 dbm
ST Connector
.8 dbm
Splice
.2 dbm
The loss budget from any transmit module to any receive module on the
PeerWay must be no more than 24.1 dbm.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Fiber Optic Cable
SP: 5-10-6
Loss Calculations
The following information can be used to determine the optical signal
losses expected on the optical PeerWay.
-
To calculate the loss in a line:
1. Add 0.8 dbm for each connector pair in the loop.
2. Add 0.2 dbm for each splice in the loop, both transmit and
receive.
3. Calculate the loss for the length of line in the loop (both transmit
and receive) and add in the loss for the star coupler. Subtract
this loss calculation from the transmitter power reading to get the
power available at the receiver. This loss can be measured and
verified for each optical loop.
4. Add an additional 3 dbm overall loss when performing initial loss
measurements and calculations to allow for degradation of the
transmitter modules due to aging and the effects of
environmental fluctuations on the fiber cables.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Fiber Optic Cable
SP: 5-10-7
Establishing the Attenuation of a Test Cable
You must use a test cable when making measurements in the optical
PeerWay to protect the fiber optic pigtails attached to the transmitter
and receiver modules. If the test equipment is connected directly to the
module pigtails, the potential of irreparable damage to the modules is
very high. It is, however, necessary to connect the test meter directly to
the pigtail in order to establish the known attenuation of the test cable.
The test cable is a short length of fiber, 1.5 to 2.1 meters (5 to 7 feet)
long, and is terminated on both ends.
-
To determine the loss of a test cable:
1. Remove the transmitter module pigtail from the bulkhead
connector on any tap box or repeater. Being extremely careful to
prevent stress on the pigtail fiber, connect the pigtail to the power
meter. Place the transmitter in the test mode, and read the
output of the transmitter. Record the value.
2. Reconnect the pigtail to the bulkhead connector and attach the
test cable to the transmit connector.
3. Connect the other end of the test cable to the power meter and
measure the output. Subtract the reading of step 1 from this
reading. The result is the attenuation of the test cable.
4. Place the transmitter module back in the normal mode and
connect any cables removed.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Fiber Optic Cable
SP: 5-10-8
Optical Transmitter and Receiver Testing
This procedure is intended to test all optical transmitters and receivers
connected directly to the star coupler. If any loops have optical
repeaters, the loops on the tap box side of the repeater are tested
independently from the loops on the star coupler side. Complete
Table 5.10.2 and Table 5.10.3 in the test procedures when you install
and check out the fiber optic PeerWay. The information can be helpful
when you are troubleshooting problems later. It might also allow the
detection of potential problems.
NOTE: When power measurements are referred to, they are given in
absolute terms. For example, --35 dbm is less than --33 dbm.
Conversely, --16 dbm is greater than --18 dbm.
-
To test all optical transmitters and receivers connected directly
to the star coupler:
1. From any console, configure the Peerway Overview screen to
include all nodes assigned on the PeerWay. The node numbers
should be entered in tap box groupings as they are installed in
the plant. This aids in future troubleshooting and problem
isolation.
2. Table 5.10.2 is a matrix that allows the power measurements to
be recorded for all eight legs in a star coupler. Indicate in the
table the destination location and the destination device type for
all star legs.
3. On the Peerway Overview screen enter a “Force Margin” field of
1000. This forces all communications to PeerWay B and allows
complete testing of PeerWay A.
4. Disconnect the receive cables at all the optical tap boxes and
optical repeaters connected to the star coupler on PeerWay A.
Cover the connector tips with the rubber boots provided with the
connectors. During the remainder of the testing procedure,
remove the rubber boot only when connecting the optical power
meter. Always replace the boot as soon as the optical power
meter is disconnected. This prevents damage to the connector
and keeps the tip free from contaminants.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Fiber Optic Cable
SP: 5-10-9
5. Remove the four captive screws that secure the first PeerWay A
optical tap box and gently tilt the box forward to gain access to
the internal jumpers. Move HD--2 to the TEST position. For a
repeater, place the appropriate jumper in the TEST position.
HD--1 is for the #1 side and HD--2 is for the #2 side. This cycles
the optical transmitter on for 6 seconds and off for 6 seconds.
6. Disconnect the transmit cable from the optical tap box used in
step 5. Connect the power meter to the transmit connector by
using a short test cable with a known attenuation (see the
“Establishing the Known Attenuation of a Test Cable” heading in
this section). Measure the output of the transmitter and subtract
the loss on the test cable. Remember, the transmitter only stays
on for 6 seconds at a time. The reading should be between --3
and --7.6 dbm. If it is not, replace the optical tap box and retest.
Record the net power reading on Table 5.10.2. Reconnect the
transmit cable to the tap box.
7. Remove the rubber boot from the receive cable and connect the
power meter. The reading must be between --18 and --31.7 dbm.
If it is not, see the “Troubleshooting” heading in this section.
Enter the power reading in Table 5.10.2. Remove the power
meter and replace the rubber boot.
8. Repeat step 7 on the remaining optical tap boxes and repeaters.
Record the value from each node in Table 5.10.2.
9. Move the jumpers placed in the test position in step 5 back to the
Normal position.
10. Repeat steps 4 through 9 for all remaining optical tap boxes and
repeaters on PeerWay A. When you are done, Table 5.10.2
should show the effective received power reading of each receive
line from each transmitter on PeerWay A.
11. Reconnect all the receive cables removed in step 4.
12. Set the “Force Margin” field on the Peerway Overview screen to
NONE.
13. When the Peerway Overview screen settles, and shows no errors
and a margin of about 500, enter a “Force Margin” field value of
0. This forces all PeerWay communications onto PeerWay A,
allowing PeerWay B to be tested.
14. Repeat steps 4 through 12 on PeerWay B.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Fiber Optic Cable
SP: 5-10-10
Repeater Testing
You test repeaters by measuring the power at the receiving ends of the
optical tap box and the repeater with the transmitters in the test mode.
It is important to know that the receiving end at the repeater is actually
coming from the transmitter in the optical tap box.
-
To test a repeater:
1. On the Peerway Overview screen enter a “Force Margin” field of
1000. This forces all communications to PeerWay B and allows
complete testing of PeerWay A. Disconnect the receive cables at
the optical tap box connected to the repeater being tested on
PeerWay A. Cover the connector tips with the rubber boots
provided with the connectors. During the remainder of the
testing procedure, remove the rubber boot only when connecting
the optical power meter. Always replace the boot as soon as the
optical power meter is disconnected. This prevents damage to
the connector and keeps the tip free from contaminants.
2. At the PeerWay A repeater, disconnect the transmit and receive
cables coming from the star coupler. Place protective rubber
boots over the ends of the connectors. This isolates the repeater
side of the PeerWay.
3. Remove the receive cable coming from the PeerWay A optical
tap box from its connector inside the repeater. Place a protective
rubber foot over the end of the connector.
4. Connect the power meter to the connector that the cable was
removed from in step 3 by using a short test cable with a known
attenuation (see the “Establishing the Known Attenuation of a
Test Cable” heading of this section).
5. Place the repeater in the TEST mode by moving the appropriate
jumper to the TEST position. HD--1 is for the #1 side and HD--2
is for the #2 side. This cycles the transmitter module on for 6
seconds and off for 6 seconds.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Fiber Optic Cable
SP: 5-10-11
6. Measure the output of the transmitter and subtract the loss of the
test cable. Remember, the transmitter only stays on for 6
seconds at a time. The reading should be between --3 dbm and
--7.6 dbm. If it is not, replace the repeater and retest. Record
the net power reading in Table 5.10.3.
7. Disconnect the power meter and reconnect the cable that was
removed in step 3.
8. At the PeerWay A optical tap box, remove the receive cable and
connect it to the power meter.
9. Measure the signal coming from the repeater. It should be
between --18 dbm and --31.7 dbm. If the measurement is more
than --18 dbm, the signal is too strong and an attenuator must be
installed in line with the receive cable. If the signal is less than
--31.7 dbm and the measurement in step 6 was good, there is too
much loss in the cable (for more information, see the
“Troubleshooting” heading of this section). Record the
measurement in Table 5.10.3.
10. Disconnect the power meter and reconnect the cable to the
optical tap box.
11. Place the repeater in the normal mode by placing the jumper that
was moved in step 5 in the Normal position.
12. Remove the four captive screws securing the PeerWay A optical
tap box and gently tilt the box forward to gain access to the
internal jumpers. Move HD-2 to TEST position.
13. Remove the transmit cable from the optical tap box and place a
protective rubber boot over the tip of the connector.
14. Connect the power meter to the transmit connector on the optical
tap box using a short test cable with a known attenuation.
15. Measure the output of the transmitter and subtract the loss of the
test cable. Remember, the transmitter only stays on for 6
seconds at a time. The reading should be between --3 dbm and
--7.6 dbm. If it is not, replace the optical tap box and retest.
Record the net power reading in Table 5.10.3.
16. Disconnect the power meter and reconnect the transmit cable to
the optical tap box.
17. At the PeerWay A repeater, remove the transmit cable coming
from the optical tap box.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Fiber Optic Cable
SP: 5-10-12
18. Measure the signal coming from the optical tap box. It should be
between --18 dbm and --31.7 dbm. If the measurement is more
than --18 dbm the signal is too strong and an attenuator must be
installed in the line with the receive cable. If the signal is less
than --31.7 dbm and the measurement in step 15 was good,
there is too much loss in the cable, the connectors, or the
splices. For more information, see the “Troubleshooting”
heading in this section. Record the measurement in
Table 5.10.3.
19. Disconnect the power meter and reconnect the transmit cable to
the repeater.
20. Reconnect the transmit and receiver cables removed in step 2.
21. Check the Peerway Overview screen and ensure that the
PeerWay is running with no errors and has a margin of about
500. Enter a “Force Margin” field value of 0.
22. Repeat steps 2 through 21 on the PeerWay B repeater.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Fiber Optic Cable
SP: 5-10-13
Troubleshooting an Optical PeerWay
Optical PeerWay troubleshooting is more a technique than a process.
The basic goal of the PeerWay cable is to carry photo energy from the
transmitting point to the receiving point with enough energy left over for
the receiver. Every element introduced into the optical path, such as
splices, connectors, attenuators, star couplers, and the length of the
fibers, reduces the amount of photo energy left for the receiver. The
general process is to start from the transmitter and ensure that the
output is within acceptable limits (between --18 and --31.7 dbm). From
the transmitter, work toward the receiver, taking measurements at each
point along the way. If at any point a reading is not within the
acceptable limits, take steps to remove the source of the problem.
Possible causes include:
D
Improperly installed or dirty terminations
D
Bends less than the minimum radius
D
Cable lengths that exceed specifications
D
A faulty star coupler, tap box, or repeater
As long as there is at least --31.7 dbm left at the receiver, the system
should work. If it does not, the problem could be the receiver itself.
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Fiber Optic Cable
SP: 5-10-14
Table 5.10.2. Optical PeerWay Power Measurements
Star Coupler
Leg #
Transmit
Output
Receiver Measurement
1
1[
[
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
] TAP
] REPEATER
_____
2[
[
] TAP
] REPEATER
_____
3[
[
] TAP
] REPEATER
_____
4[
[
] TAP
] REPEATER
_____
5[
[
] TAP
] REPEATER
_____
6[
[
] TAP
] REPEATER
_____
7[
[
] TAP
] REPEATER
_____
8[
[
] TAP
] REPEATER
_____
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Fiber Optic Cable
SP: 5-10-15
Table 5.10.3. Optical PeerWay Repeater Power Measurements
Repeater Location
Tap
TX
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Tap
RX
Repeater
TX
Repeater
RX
Fiber Optic Cable
SP: 5-10-16
RS3: System Cables and Power Distribution
Fiber Optic Cable
RS3t
Site Preparation and Installation
Chapter 6:
Analog Card Cages
Section 1:
Section 2:
Section 3:
Analog Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-1
Connecting to the ControlFile: Direct Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the ControlFile: Via Comm Term Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the Analog Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard (non-CE) Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CE Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to Multipoint I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Card Cage Address Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for EMC-Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting Analog Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Junction Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring to an Analog Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4--20 mA Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Electronics Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wire Routing to Marshaling Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-2
6-1-4
6-1-6
6-1-7
6-1-7
6-1-7
6-1-8
6-1-9
6-1-10
6-1-12
6-1-13
6-1-15
6-1-16
6-1-17
6-1-17
6-1-19
6-1-22
6-1-28
6-1-30
6-1-31
6-1-32
MUX Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1
Field Wiring to a Multiplexer FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Marshaling Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring to a Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring to a Current (4--20 mA) MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . .
RTD MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring to an RTD MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-5
6-2-8
6-2-8
6-2-9
6-2-10
6-2-11
6-2-13
6-2-13
Contact I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1
Installing a Contact Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage FIC Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-3
6-3-5
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contents
SP: ii
Contact Card Cage Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Contact FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Local Termination Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Termination Board Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Termination Board Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Isolator Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Contact Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Marshaling Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Marshaling Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Isolator Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS3: Analog Card Cages
6-3-6
6-3-8
6-3-8
6-3-9
6-3-10
6-3-10
6-3-10
6-3-11
6-3-14
6-3-14
6-3-15
Contents
SP: iii
List of Figures
Figure
Page
6.1.1
Analog Card Cage (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-1
6.1.2
Directly Connecting an Analog Card Cage to a ControlFile . . . . . . . . .
6-1-3
6.1.3
Connecting an Analog Card Cage to a ControlFile with Comm Term
Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-5
6.1.4
Connecting an Analog Card Cage to DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-6
6.1.5
Ferrite Cable Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-6
6.1.6
Connecting an Analog Card Cage to an Analog Marshaling Panel . . .
6-1-7
6.1.7
Typical Analog Card Cage Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-8
6.1.8
Analog Card Cage Address Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-9
6.1.9
Analog Marshaling Panel 1984--2415--0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-13
6.1.10
European Analog Marshaling Panel 10P54620001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-14
6.1.11
Standard Marshaling Panel Mounting (1984--2415--0001) Dimensions
6-1-15
6.1.12
European Marshaling Panel (10P54590001 / 10P54620001)
Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-15
6.1.13
Analog Marshaling Panel Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-16
6.1.14
Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-18
6.1.15
Auxiliary Terminal Block Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-18
6.1.16
Analog Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-19
6.1.17
CE Field Wiring Standard Marshaling Panel (1984--2415--0001) . . . . .
6-1-20
6.1.18
CE Field Wiring European Marshaling Panel
(10P54590001 / 10P54620001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-21
6.1.19
4--20 mA Inputs Without Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-23
6.1.20
4--20 mA Inputs With Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-24
6.1.21
4--20 mA 4-Wire Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-25
6.1.22
4--20 mA Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-26
6.1.23
4--20 mA Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-27
6.1.24
RTD Device Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-28
6.1.25
Thermocouple, Cold Junction Compensator, Millivolt Input, and
Resistance Input Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-29
6.1.26
Pulse I/O Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-30
6.1.27
1/1 Redundancy Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-31
6.1.28
Field Wire Routing To Marshaling Panels (Bottom Entry Shown) . . . .
6-1-32
6.2.1
Multiplexer (MUX) FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1
6.2.2
Multiplexer FlexTerm Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-2
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contents
SP: iv
6.2.3
Two MUX FlexTerms Connected to a Controller Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-3
6.2.4
Securing a FEM in the MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-4
6.2.5
Wire Routing in a Multiplexer FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-5
6.2.6
Labeling for RTD-type FEMs (1984--0607--0003, --0005, --0009) . . . . .
6-2-6
6.2.7
Labeling for Non-RTD type FEMs (1984--0607--0001, --0002, --0004,
--0007) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-7
6.2.8
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2457--000x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-9
6.2.9
4--20 mA MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2458--000x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-12
6.2.10
RTD MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2456--000x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-14
6.3.1
Contact Flexterm Cable Connections to ControlFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1
6.3.2
Contact Flexterm Field Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-2
6.3.3
Contact Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-4
6.3.4
FIC Addressing in a Contact Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-5
6.3.5
Contact Card Cage Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-6
6.3.6
Contact FIC 1984--1460--000x Fuse and Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . .
6-3-8
6.3.7
Local Termination Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-9
6.3.8
Contact Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-11
6.3.9
Contact Marshaling Panel Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-12
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contents
SP: v
List of Tables
Table
Page
6.1.1
Analog FIC Fuse Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-12
6.1.2
Analog Transfer Card Fuse Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-12
6.1.3
Output Bypass Card Fuse Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-12
6.1.4
Pulse I/O Field Interface Card Fuse Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-12
6.1.5
European Analog Marshaling Panel 10P54620001 Fuses . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-14
6.1.6
Device Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-22
6.2.1
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-8
6.2.2
4--20 mA MUX Marshaling Panel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-10
6.2.3
RTD MUX Marshaling Panel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-13
6.3.1
Contact Card Cage Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-7
6.3.2
Contact Field Interface Card Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-8
6.3.3
Local Termination Board Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-10
6.3.4
Contact Marshaling Panel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-13
6.3.5
Contact Marshaling Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-14
6.3.6
Optical Isolator Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-15
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contents
SP: vi
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contents
SP: 6-1-1
Section 1:
Analog Card Cage
The Analog Card Cage (1984--2526--0002) mounts in a standard
system cabinet, where it requires 178 mm (7 in.) of vertical space. It is
also known as the Analog FlexTerm. Figure 6.1.1 shows the unit.
Address Label
Marshaling Panel Connector
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
FIC (1--4)
DC Power Plugs
FIC (5--8)
Analog Transfer Card
or Output Bypass Card
(Optional)
Communications Connect Card
Figure 6.1.1. Analog Card Cage (Front)
The Analog Card Cage can hold up to eight Field Interface Cards (FIC).
The card cage has no field wire termination capability. Field wiring is
landed on a marshaling panel and then connected to the card cage via
cable.
The Communications Connect Card provides eight twisted pair
communications lines for connection of Multipoint I/O termination panels
or a remote Analog Card Cage.
Space at the right of the Analog Card Cage provides a vertical wiring
channel with anchors for attaching plastic wraps. Cabling can also be
routed from side panels.
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-2
Connecting to the ControlFile: Direct Connect
The Analog Card Cage can be connected directly to a ControlFile with
shielded control communications cable 10P5590xxxx. The shielded
control cable can be up to 60 meters (≈200 feet) long for
EMC-compliant (CE) installations. The Control Cable is landed on one
connector of the Communications Connect Card as shown in
Figure 6.1.2. Terminate the cable shield pigtail at the ControlFile
chassis screw (just above the connector).
The Analog Card Cage can be connected directly to a ControlFile with
control cable (1984--2783--xxxx), which can be up to 61 meters
(200 feet) long for non-EMC installations.
The second connector allows daisy chaining of up to four Analog Card
Cages. Use the appropriate (CE or non-CE) control communications
cable option to connect additional card cages. For EMC-compliant (CE)
daisy chain installations, use shielded control communications cable
10P5590xxxx or 1984--2783--9015 or --9045.
When redundant Controller Processors are used, two Control Cables
are required to connect the primary and secondary Controller
Processors to the two connectors of the Communications Connect
Card.
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-3
1
2
3
4
8
5
6
7
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
Cable Shield Pigtail (with 10P5590xxxx)
5
Communication Connect Card V
2
ControlFile
6
Daisy chain: Control Communications Cable
3
Control Communications Shielded Cable
10P5590xxxx (60 meters (≈200 feet)
maximum)
7
Analog Card Cages
4
Control Communications Standard Cable
1984--2783 xxxx (61 meters maximum for
non-EMC)
8
Dashed line is second cable for optional
redundant controller
Figure 6.1.2. Directly Connecting an Analog Card Cage to a ControlFile
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-4
Connecting to the ControlFile: Via Comm Term Panel II
The Analog Card Cage can be connected to the ControlFile with a
Communications Termination Panel II and individual twisted pair
communications lines as shown in Figure 6.1.3.
The ControlFile can be connected to a Communications Termination
Panel II with shielded control communications cable 10P5590xxxx,
which can be up to 60 meters (≈200 feet) long. Terminate the cable
shield pigtail at the ControlFile chassis screw (just above the connector)
for EMC-compliant (CE) installations.
The ControlFile can be connected to a Communications Termination
Panel II with control cable (1984--2783--xxxx). The control cable can be
up to 61 meters (200 feet) long for standard installations.
EMC-compliant installations restrict this cable length to 1 meter
(1984-- 2783-- 9045).
With this method, individually shielded twisted-pair wires are run from
each Communication Termination Panel II slot to the pluggable terminal
blocks on the edge of the Communication Connect Card V. Use eight
Communication Cables: 1984--4188--xxxx or a customer-supplied
equivalent. Maximum length is 1372 meters (≈4500 feet).
Use the appropriate (CE or non-CE) control communications cable
option to daisy chain up to four Analog Card Cages. For
EMC-compliant (CE) daisy chain installations, use shielded control
communications cable 10P5590xxxx or 1984--2783--9015 or --9045. To
daisy chain over longer distances, connect additional shielded
twisted-pair wires (cable 1984--4188--xxxx) to the pluggable terminal
blocks on the Communications Connect Card.
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-5
1
ControlFile
3
2
4
5
Analog Card Cage
6
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
Cable Shield Pigtail (with 10P5590xxxx)
4
Communication Terminal Panel II
2
Control Communications Shielded Cable
10P5590xxxx (60 meters maximum)
5
Eight Communication Cables
1984--4188--xxxx
(or equivalent)
3
Control Communications Standard Cable,
1984--2783 xxxx (1984--2783--9045 for EMC)
6
Communications Connect Card
Figure 6.1.3. Connecting an Analog Card Cage to a ControlFile with Comm Term Panel II
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-6
Connecting to DC Power
Use either of the two power connectors to connect DC power. Use
cable: DC Bus to System Device (A/B bus) (1984--0158--20xx). Refer
to Figure 6.1.4.
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
To System DC
Bus (A and B)
Figure 6.1.4. Connecting an Analog Card Cage to DC Power
EMC systems require the DC cable supplying system power to the
analog card cage to have a ferrite cable clamp (Figure 6.1.5) attached
within 100 mm of the connector.
Connector
55P0426x002
Ferrite Cable
Clamp
Figure 6.1.5. Ferrite Cable Clamp
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-7
Connecting to the Analog Marshaling Panel
The Analog Card Cage is cabled to an Analog Marshaling Panel as
shown in Figure 6.1.6. Field wiring to the marshaling panel is discussed
in detail latter in this section.
Field Wiring
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Analog Card Cage (Front)
Cable
Field Wiring
Analog Marshaling Panel
Figure 6.1.6. Connecting an Analog Card Cage to an Analog Marshaling Panel
Standard (non-CE) Installation
Use an Analog Marshaling Panel (1984--2512--000x), an Analog
Marshaling Panel II (1984--2415--0001), or a European Marshaling
Panel (10P54590001) or (10P54620001).
Use an analog card cage to marshaling panel cable (1984--0498--xxxx),
which can be up to 60 meters (≈200 feet) long.
CE Installation
Use Analog Marshaling Panel II (1984--2415--0001) or a European
Marshaling Panel (10P54590001) or (10P54620001).
Use the analog card cage to marshaling panel shielded cable
(10P55520xxx), which can be up to 60 meters (≈200 feet) long.
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-8
Connecting to Multipoint I/O
The Communications Connect Card provides eight communications
lines that can be used to connect Multipoint I/O termination panels or a
remotely located Analog Card Cage.
Figure 6.1.7 shows an Analog Card Cage wired to a ControlFile
Controller Processor and connected to an Analog Marshaling Panel.
The cage is also daisy chained to another Analog Card Cage, which is
then connected to a Multipoint I/O termination panel via the
Communications Connect Card and a communications line.
HGF E DCB A
Field Wiring
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Analog Card Cages
Field Wiring
ControlFile (Rear)
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Analog Marshaling Panel
Communications Line
To Next Card
Cage
Field Wiring
Field Wiring
Field Wiring
Multipoint I/O
Termination Panel
Analog Marshaling Panel
Figure 6.1.7. Typical Analog Card Cage Wiring
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-9
Analog Card Cage Address Label
A label on the front of the Analog Cage records the hardware address.
Figure 6.1.8 shows the Analog Card Cage label. Write the hardware
address in the blanks provided. The address includes the ControlFile
Node (numeric), the Controller slot (A--H), and the FlexTerm or Card
Cage (A--D). Use the box beside each point number to record a tag or
label. Locations for Output Bypass or Transfer cards and the Comm
Connect are shown on the label.
CONTROL FILE NODE
101
102
103
SLOT 1
201
202
203
SLOT 2
CONTROLLER SLOT
301
302
303
SLOT 3
401
402
403
SLOT 4
Output
bypass or
transfer
card
slots 1-- 4
501
502
503
SLOT 5
601
602
603
SLOT 6
FLEXTERM
701
702
703
SLOT 7
801
802
803
SLOT 8
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Output
bypass or
transfer
card
slots 5-- 8
Comm
connect card
Figure 6.1.8. Analog Card Cage Address Label
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-10
Checklist for EMC-Compliant Installation
Follow these rules to ensure EMC compliance:
1. Connect the card cage to the ControlFile with one of the
following:
a. Shielded control cable 10P5590xxxx, maximum length: 60
meters (≈200 feet)
b. Eight shielded communication lines (1984--4188--xxxx),
maximum length 1372 meters (≈4500 feet), to
Communications Termination Panel II 1984--4205--0001, and
then to the ControlFile with Control cable 1984--2783--9045 or
the shielded control cable 10P5590xxxx, maximum length:
60 meters (≈200 feet)
Connect the card cage to another card cage with one of the following:
c. Shielded control cable 10P5590xxxx, maximum length:
60 meters (≈200 feet)
d. Control cable 1984--2783--9045 or 1984--2783--9015.
2. Connect the card cage to field devices following these rules:
a. Cabling from the termination panel to the analog card cage
must be shielded, with the shield terminated through the drain
wire to an analog card cage mounting screw.
b. Field wiring: Use individually shielded twisted pairs having
100% shield coverage and a drain wire. Typical examples:
Single twisted pair -- Belden 9462, Carol C0720
Nine twisted pairs -- Belden 8774, Alpha 6014,
American A24509
c. Maintain a continuity of shields between the wiring from the
field device and the wiring to the analog card cage. Do not
break the shield continuity through a termination panel.
d. The maximum length of cable in which the shield does not
encase the twisted pair is 0.5 m. Wire gauge is not restricted,
and can be suited to the application.
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-11
Use these cards in the card cage:
e. Analog FIC (4--20 mA) (10P54440002)
f. Smart Transmitter Daughterboard (also called the HART
Option Board) (10P54500005) installed on Analog FIC
(4--20 mA)
g. Communications Connect Card V (10P54560001)
h. Analog Transfer Card (1984--2494--0001)
i.
Pulse I/O FIC (10P54470002)
3. Use these components:
a. Serial I/O Analog Marshaling Panel II (1984--2415--0001) or
European Marshaling Panel (10P54590001) or
(10P54620001)
b. Shielded cable (10P55520xxx) between the card cage and
the marshaling panel
c. Ferrite cable clamp (55P0426X002) installed on the DC cable
supplying system power to the Serial I/O card cage
4. DO NOT USE:
a. Pulse I/O FIC (1984--2546--000x)
b. Output Bypass Card (1984--2551--0001) except for short-term
maintenance operations
c. Resistance Temperature Detector/Thermocouple (RTD/TC)
FIC (1984--2731--xxxx)
d. Analog FIC (4--20 mA) (1984--2518--xxxx)
e. Smart Transmitter Daughterboard (1984--2483--xxxx)
f. Communications Connect Card II (1984--2491--0001)
g. Communications Connect Card III (1984--2543--0001)
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-12
Fuses
Table 6.1.1 lists Analog FIC fuse data.
Table 6.1.1. Analog FIC Fuse Data
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Schurter
Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G50382--0021
273002
MSF 034.4224
2 A 125 V Plug-In
F11
F12
F21
F22
F31
F32
G50382--0011
273.250
MSF 034.4213
1/4 A 125 V Plug-In
Table 6.1.2 lists Analog Transfer Card fuse data.
Table 6.1.2. Analog Transfer Card Fuse Data
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Littelfuse Part No.
Schurter Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G50382--0014
273.500
MSF 034.4216
1/2 A 125 V Plug-In
Table 6.1.3 lists Output Bypass Card fuse data.
Table 6.1.3. Output Bypass Card Fuse Data
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Schurter
Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G09140--0030
AGC 2
312002
-- --
2 A 250 V Quick
Acting
F2
G50382--0009
-- --
273.125
MSF 034.4210
1/8 A 125 V Plug-In
Table 6.1.4 lists Pulse I/O Field Interface Card fuse data.
Table 6.1.4. Pulse I/O Field Interface Card Fuse Data
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Schurter
Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G50382--0021
273002
MSF 034.4224
2.0 A 125 V Plug-In
F11
F12
F21
F22
F31
F32
G50382--0011
273.250
MSF 034.4213
1/4 A 125 V Plug-In
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-13
Analog Marshaling Panel
This section describes installation and field wiring to the:
D
D
Standard Analog Marshaling Panel: 1984--2415--0001
European Analog Marshaling Panel: 10P54590001 (no fuses)
and 10P54620001 (with fuses)
D
Cold Junction Compensator (1984--2616--0001)
D
Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block (1984--1543--000x)
Figure 6.1.9 shows Analog Marshaling Panel 1984--2415--0001.
Figure 6.1.9. Analog Marshaling Panel 1984--2415--0001
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-14
Figure 6.1.10 shows European Analog Marshaling Panel 10P54620001
(with fuses). Table 6.1.5 shows fuse data for European Analog
Marshaling Panel 10P54620001.
Fuses
Figure 6.1.10. European Analog Marshaling Panel 10P54620001
Table 6.1.5. European Analog Marshaling Panel 10P54620001 Fuses
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Characteristics
F1 to F24
G53394--0250--0005
0.25 A 125 V
IEC 127--2
Fast Acting 5 x 20 mm
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-15
Mounting Analog Marshaling Panel
The standard Analog Marshaling Panel (1984--2415--0001) mounts in a
standard system cabinet where it takes 179 mm (7 in.) of rail space. It
requires no DC system power. Figure 6.1.11 shows the mounting
dimensions.
483
(19.00)
465
(18.30)
9 (0.35)
22 (0.83)
All mounting holes are
7 mm (0.28 in.) in diameter.
178
(7.00)
133
(5.25)
Figure 6.1.11. Standard Marshaling Panel Mounting (1984--2415--0001) Dimensions
European Analog Marshaling Panels (10P54590001 and 10P54620001)
include universal DIN rail snap-in fittings.
Figure 6.1.12 shows the mounting dimensions.
Universal DIN Rail Snap-in Fittings
460
(18.1)
111
(4.37)
Figure 6.1.12. European Marshaling Panel (10P54590001 / 10P54620001) Mounting Dimensions
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-16
System Cabling
The panel is cabled to the Analog Card Cage as shown in
Figure 6.1.13. All eight Field Interface Cards (FIC) are connected to the
panel.
The Field Interface cards (FIC) that can be used are:
D
Analog FIC (4--20 mA)
D
Analog FIC with Smart Transmitter Daughterboard
D
Pulse I/O FIC
D
RTD/TC TEMP FIC
Each FIC can control three points on the panel (except the RTD/TC
TEMP FIC, which has two inputs). See the Service Manual (SV: 5--1)
or the Service Quick Reference Guide for more information on these
cards.
For a standard (non-CE) installation, use an Analog Marshaling Panel
(1984--2512--000x), an Analog Marshaling Panel II (1984--2415--0001),
or a European Marshaling Panel (10P54590001 or 10P54620001).
Use an analog card cage to marshaling panel cable (1984--0498--xxxx),
which can be up to 60 meters (≈200 feet) long, or use shielded cable
(10P55520xxx), which can be up to 60 meters (≈200 feet) long. If
shielded cable is used, terminate the shield as with CE installation.
For a CE compliant installation, use Analog Marshaling Panel II
(1984--2415--0001) or a European Marshaling Panel (10P54590001 or
10P54620001). Use the analog card cage to marshaling panel
shielded cable (10P55520xxx), which can be up to 60 meters
(≈200 feet).
Cabling from the termination panel to the analog card cage must be
shielded, with the shield terminated through the drain wire to an analog
card cage back panel mounting screw.
HGF E DCB A
Field Wiring
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Analog Card Cage
ControlFile (Rear)
Field Wiring
Analog Marshaling Panel
Figure 6.1.13. Analog Marshaling Panel Cable Connections
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-17
Cold Junction Compensator
Use a Cold Junction Compensator (1984--2616--000x) with
thermocouples. Its label shows the connections to use for various
applications. It mounts firmly against the metal in the center of the
marshaling panel to sense the ambient temperature at the marshaling
panel.
Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block
The Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block (1984--1543--000x)
provides a method to connect external components into the control
loop. Figure 6.1.14 shows the Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal
Block. Figure 6.1.15 shows the block wiring diagram.
The terminal block can be mounted to either the upper or lower row of
terminals on the marshaling panel. The block is marked with normal
and inverted letters; use the set that is right side up for your
connections.
If a Cold Junction Compensator is in place, remove the screw at the
bottom of the block to make clearance for the cold junction compensator
plate.
The Auxiliary Terminal Block has six field device or component
termination points and an A and B connection point for the marshaling
panel. The termination points are connected in pairs. The Auxiliary
Terminal block is CSA approved for 300V and accepts 2.5 mm2 (14
AWG) wire.
See the Service Manual (SV: 5--1) for field wiring examples using the
terminal block.
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-18
1
2
3
4
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
Clamp Screws (6 total)
3
Analog Marshaling Panel Terminal
2
Field device or component termination
panel (6 total)
4
Support Standoff
Figure 6.1.14. Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block
>
Field Device
or
Component
termination points
Marshaling Panel
Connection Fingers
>
NOTE: Observe the “A” and “B”
terminal labels when
connecting components.
Figure 6.1.15. Auxiliary Terminal Block Wiring Diagram
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-19
Field Wiring to an Analog Marshaling Panel
Field wiring can be brought to an Analog Marshaling Panel as shown in
Figure 6.1.16. Devices that can be served include:
D
4--20 mA Input and Output
D
Temperature Input
D
Pulse Input and Output
CAUTION
Always check field wiring for fault conditions or
inappropriate signals that could damage field interface
cards (FICs) or system wiring before making final
connections.
NOTE: A field device used with an isolated FIC can be grounded and
have a maximum of 150 volts DC common mode between either field
terminal and the system ground (chassis).
A B A B A B
FIELD
DEVICES
Field
valve
--
+
--
+
--
+
System powered
transmitter
Self powered
transmitter
Figure 6.1.16. Analog Marshaling Panel
CE compliant field wiring uses individually shielded twisted pairs having
100% shield coverage and a drain wire. Typical examples are:
D
Single twisted pair -- Belden 9462, Carol C0720
D
Nine twisted pairs -- Belden 8774, Alpha 6014, American A24509
Maintain continuity of shields between the wiring from the field device
and the wiring to the analog card cage. Do not break the shield
continuity through a termination panel.
The maximum length of cable in which the shield does not encase the
twisted pair is 0.5 meter. Wire gauge is not restricted, and can be
suited to the application.
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-20
Figure 6.1.17 shows CE field wiring to a standard (1984--2415--0001)
Marshaling Panel.
Marshaling Panel shield
pigtail must be tied to the
upper right back panel
mounting screw
Field
Device
Analog Card Cage
Shielded Field Wiring
Shielded Marshaling Panel
Cable 10P55520xxx
Field Wiring Shield
Termination
Marshaling Panel shield is terminated
through pins 1 and 50.
Pigtail termination is NOT necessary at
the Marshaling Panel.
Marshaling Panel
1984--2415--0001
Shield Jumper
must be installed
Figure 6.1.17. CE Field Wiring Standard Marshaling Panel (1984--2415--0001)
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-21
Figure 6.1.18 shows CE field wiring to a European (10P54590001 or
10P54620001) Marshaling Panel. The European Marshaling Panel is
DIN mounted with one row of pluggable screw terminals.
Jumper the headers to “External Power.” Do not use the terminals to
bring loop power onto the board.
A screw terminal detail is shown below. Terminals labeled “11A” “11B”
and “SHD” correspond to Analog Card Cage addresses 101A and
101B, and to the field wiring shield, respectively.
Marshaling Panel shield
pigtail must be tied to the
upper right back panel
mounting screw
Field
Device
Analog Card Cage
Shielded
Field Wiring
Shielded Marshaling Panel
Cable 10P55520xxx
Field Wiring Shield
Termination
Connect Marshaling Panel shield
termination pigtail to the shield terminal
block.
European Marshaling Panel
10P54590001 shown
Screw Terminal Detail
Figure 6.1.18. CE Field Wiring European Marshaling Panel (10P54590001 / 10P54620001)
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-22
4--20 mA Devices
Table 6.1.6 shows the devices that can be connected to an Analog
Marshaling Panel. The letters refer to diagrams in Figure 6.1.19 to
Figure 6.1.23. Device types include:
Table 6.1.6. Device Types
Letter
in
Figure
Input or
Output
2-wire or
4-wire
Transmitter
With or w/o
Positive Barriers
With or w/o
Other
Instruments
Power
Supply
A
input
2-wire
w/o barriers
w/o other inst.
system
B
input
2-wire
w/o barriers
w/o other inst.
separate
C
input
2-wire
w/o barriers
with other inst.
system
D
input
2-wire
w/o barriers
with other inst.
separate
E
input
2-wire
with barriers
w/o other inst.
separate
F
input
2-wire
with barriers
w/o other inst.
separate
G
input
2-wire
with barriers
w/o other inst.
system
H
input
2-wire
with barriers
w/o other inst.
system
I
input
4-wire
w/o barriers
w/o other inst.
self
J
input
4-wire
w/o barriers
with other inst.
self
K
output
------------
w/o barriers
w/o other inst.
system
L
output
------------
w/o barriers
with other inst.
system
M
output
------------
with barriers
w/o other inst.
system
N
output
------------
with barriers
w/o other inst.
system
O
output
------------
with barriers
with other inst.
system
P
output
------------
with barriers
with other inst.
system
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-23
A
B
Field Device
A
--
A
--
B
+
B
+
Field Device
Marshaling
Panel Field
Terminals
Marshaling
Panel Field
Terminals
+
--
FIC loop power jumper in “SYS” position
POWER
SUPPLY
FIC loop power jumper in “SELF” position
------
C
------
input
2-wire
w/o barriers
w/o other instruments
system powered
input
2-wire
w/o barriers
w/o other instruments
separate power supply
D
Marshaling
Panel Field
Terminals
Field Device
Field Device
A
--
A
--
B
+
B
+
This line may
be grounded
Marshaling
Panel Field
Terminals
-- +
+ --
OTHER
INSTRUMENT
OTHER
INSTRUMENT
+
--
This line may
be grounded
FIC loop power jumper in “SYS” position
------
input
2-wire
w/o barriers
with other instruments
system powered
POWER
SUPPLY
FIC loop power jumper in “SELF” position
------
input
2-wire
w/o barriers
with other instruments
separate power supply
Figure 6.1.19. 4--20 mA Inputs Without Barriers
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-24
E
F
CAUTION: This connection may not
provide enough loop voltage. Take
special care in selecting components.
POSITIVE
‘SUPPLY’
BARRIER
+
A
+
POSITIVE
‘RETURN’
BARRIER
+
-+
--
--
+
A
--
B
+
-+
B
Field Device
Marshaling
Panel Field
Terminals
POWER
SUPPLY
--
Marshaling
Panel Field
Terminals
--
--
+
+
Field Device
POSITIVE
‘SUPPLY’
BARRIER
+
--
--
POWER
SUPPLY
FIC loop power jumper in “SELF” position
------
FIC loop power jumper in “SELF” position
-- input
-- 2-wire
-- with barriers
-- w/o other instruments
-- separate power supply
input
2-wire
with barriers
w/o other instruments
separate power supply
G
H
POSITIVE
SUPPLY
BARRIER
+
A
+
B
--
--
Marshaling
Panel Field
Terminals
POSITIVE
SUPPLY
BARRIER
+
A
--
B
Field Device
+
Field Device
+
+
--
Marshaling
Panel Field
Terminals
--
--
+
+
--
--
POSITIVE
RETURN
BARRIER
FIC loop power jumper in “SYS” position
------
input
2-wire
with barriers
w/o other instruments
system powered
FIC loop power jumper in “SYS” position
------
input
2-wire
with barriers
w/o other instruments
system powered
Figure 6.1.20. 4--20 mA Inputs With Barriers
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-25
I
J
Field Device
Field Device
A
+
A
+
B
--
B
--
Marshaling
Panel Field
Terminals
Marshaling
Panel Field
Terminals
+ --
POWER TO
TRANSMITTER
POWER TO
TRANSMITTER
OTHER
INSTRUMENT
This line may
be grounded
FIC loop power jumper in “SELF” position
-- input
-- 4-wire
-- w/o barriers
-- w/o other instruments
-- self-powered
FIC loop power jumper in “SELF” position
-- input
-- 4-wire
-- w/o barriers
-- with other instruments
-- self-powered
Figure 6.1.21. 4--20 mA 4-Wire Inputs
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-26
K
L
A
--
A
--
B
+
B
+
Marshaling
Panel Field
Terminals
Marshaling
Panel Field
Terminals
Field Device
Field Device
-- +
This line may
be grounded
-----
OTHER
INSTRUMENT
-----
output
w/o barriers
with other instruments
system-powered
M
output
w/o barriers
w/o other instruments
system-powered
N
POSITIVE
‘SUPPLY’
BARRIER
+
A
+
B
--
Marshaling
Panel Field
Terminals
POSITIVE
‘RETURN’
BARRIER
+
A
--
B
+
Field Device
-+
--
--
+
Marshaling
Panel Field
Terminals
-Field Device
+
+
POSITIVE
‘SUPPLY’
BARRIER
--
-----
output
with barriers
w/o other instruments
system-powered
-----
--
output
with barriers
w/o other instruments
system-powered
Figure 6.1.22. 4--20 mA Outputs
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-27
O
P
POSITIVE
‘SUPPLY’
BARRIER
+
A
+
B
--
Marshaling
Panel Field
Terminals
POSITIVE
‘RETURN’
BARRIER
+
A
--
B
-Field Device
+
+
-+
--
Marshaling
Panel Field
Terminals
-Field Device
+
+ --
-- +
OTHER
INSTRUMENT
OTHER
INSTRUMENT
--
+
POSITIVE
‘SUPPLY’
BARRIER
--
This line may
be grounded
-----
output
with barriers
with other instruments
system-powered
-----
output
with barriers
with other instruments
system-powered
Figure 6.1.23. 4--20 mA Outputs
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-28
Temperature Input Devices
Temperature input devices can be terminated at analog marshaling
panels as shown in Figure 6.1.24 and Figure 6.1.25.
3-wire Resistance Temperature
Detector (RTD)
xx1
A
+
RED
xx2
B
--
A
+
-WHITE
xx1
xx2
C
C
B
--
--
WHITE
3-wire RTD with External Resistance
xx1
A
+
RED
xx2
B
--
A
+
-WHITE
3-WIRE RTD
xx1
xx2
C
C
B
--
--
WHITE
3-WIRE RTD
Figure 6.1.24. RTD Device Termination
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-29
Thermocouple
xx1
A
+
xx2
B
--
A
xx1
xx2
C
C
B
+
--
RS3
Cold Junction Compensator
--
--
xx1
A
+
xx2
B
--
A
+
+
B
--
A
+
--
MILLIVOLT
INPUT
--
--
COLD JUNCTION
COMPENSATOR
Resistance Input
xx1
xx2
C
C
B
--
C
RED
Millivolt Input
A
C
B
THERMOCOUPLE
xx2
xx2
RED
WHITE
xx1
xx1
--
--
xx1
A
+
xx2
B
--
A
+
xx1
xx2
C
C
B
--
--
--
RESISTANCE
INPUT
Figure 6.1.25. Thermocouple, Cold Junction Compensator, Millivolt Input, and Resistance Input
Terminations
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-30
Pulse I/O Devices
Termination of pulse I/O devices is shown in Figure 6.1.26.
Pulse Input-Voltage
A
Pulse Input-Contact
A
B
+
or
AC
B
--
RTN
+
Signal return
Recommended ground wire
Recommended
ground wire
Signal + for unipolar signals
(50% threshold)
AC signal for bipolar signals
(zero threshold)
Analog Output or Supply
Pulse Output
A
-or
Current RTN
Recommended
ground wire
B
A
+
or
Current Source
-or
Current RTN
or
0V
B
+
or
Current Source
OR
+24 V
Figure 6.1.26. Pulse I/O Terminations
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-31
I/O Electronics Redundancy
Figure 6.1.27 shows one-to-one redundancy for the electronics serving
a single I/O point. The single transmitter is served by two FICs, a
primary in an odd-numbered and a backup in the next higher-numbered
slot. External wiring is required only for one-to-one redundancy, and
must be accompanied by appropriate FIC jumper placement and RIOB
configuration.
(One-to-three and one-to-seven redundancy uses Analog Transfer
cards instead of external wiring.)
Termination
for primary FIC
Termination
for backup FIC
xx1
A
+
xx2
B
--
A
+
xx1
xx2
C
C
B
--
--
--
yy1
A
+
yy2
B
--
A
+
yy1
yy2
C
C
B
--
--
--
Transmitter
Figure 6.1.27. 1/1 Redundancy Termination
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-1-32
Field Wire Routing to Marshaling Panels
Figure 6.1.28 shows field wire routing to marshaling panels inside
standard system cabinets. This is a composite drawing and is not
intended to show the actual configuration of a cabinet.
Route field wires through
tiewraps and tiedowns.
Route cables from
marshaling panels to
FlexTerms down left side
of cabinet using tiewraps
and tiedowns.
Route field wires down
right side of cabinet
using tiedowns and
tiewraps.
Route all wiring through
bottom of cabinet.
Figure 6.1.28. Field Wire Routing To Marshaling Panels (Bottom Entry Shown)
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Analog Card Cage
SP: 6-2-1
Section 2:
MUX Hardware
This section describes field wiring to the Multiplexer FlexTerm and
Multiplexer Marshaling Panel:
D
Multiplexer (MUX) FlexTerm (1984--0620--000x)
D
4--20 mA (Current) MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2458--000x)
D
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2457--000x)
D
Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) MUX Marshaling Panel
(1984--2456--000x)
The MUX FlexTerm shown in Figure 6.2.1 mounts in a system cabinet
and requires standard system DC power. It takes 312 mm (12.25 in.) of
rail space. It contains a DC power supply, a communication card, and
Front End Modules (FEMs).
FEMs
81
61
41
21
1
100
80
60
40
20
Figure 6.2.1. Multiplexer (MUX) FlexTerm
RS3: Analog Card Cages
MUX Hardware
SP: 6-2-2
Up to five FEMs can be installed for a total of 100 input points. Signals
from the FEMs are fed to the Communication card, which takes 7
seconds to scan all 100 points. The individual readings are sent to a
Controller Processor in the ControlFile through an isolated RS-422
communications cable (Cable: ControlFile to MUX FlexTerm)
(1984--2629--xxxx) as shown in Figure 6.2.2. The cable is available in
lengths up to 15 meters (50 feet).
HGF E DCB A
30 VDC
Multiplexer FlexTerm
(Front)
Cable 1984--2629--xxxx
ControlFile (Rear)
Figure 6.2.2. Multiplexer FlexTerm Cable Connections
You may connect marshaling panels to the Multiplexer FlexTerm to
facilitate field terminations.
The type of FEM installed controls the type of field input that can be
used. The Multiplexer FlexTerm can support these FEMs:
RS3: Analog Card Cages
D
Thermocouple and Millivolt input
D
Current input (4 -- 20 mA)
D
RTD input
D
Universal input
MUX Hardware
SP: 6-2-3
An MPC II or MPC5 Controller Processor can control two MUX
FlexTerms by use of the “Y” cable “MUX Cable Assembly, 200 Points”
(1984--3062--00xx). Points in the first MUX FlexTerm have addresses
001 to 100. Those in the second MUX FlexTerm have addresses 101 to
200. Plug P106 defines the first FlexTerm, plug P107 is used on the
second.
The MPC II must be loaded with the MPC2+ image and have the MPC II
Image functionality jumpers set to MUX+. The MPC5 must be loaded
with the MPC5 image jumpers set to MUX5. In both cases, this allows
the use of up to 200 points. Figure 6.2.3 shows this configuration.
HGFEDCBA
Y Cable
1984--3062--xxxx
ControlFile (Rear)
Multiplexer FlexTerm
(Points 001--100)
Multiplexer FlexTerm
(Points 101--200)
Figure 6.2.3. Two MUX FlexTerms Connected to a Controller Card
RS3: Analog Card Cages
MUX Hardware
SP: 6-2-4
-
To install a FEM in the MUX FlexTerm:
CAUTION
TURN OFF MUX power when FEMs are removed or
inserted. The securing bar must be firmly in place to
ensure that all FEM contacts are engaged.
D
Install the securing bar with a washer under the head of the
screw to the FlexTerm and a washer between the securing bar
and the FEM as shown in Figure 6.2.4.
Securing Bar
FEM
Washers
Mounting Screws
FlexTerm Base
Figure 6.2.4. Securing a FEM in the MUX
RS3: Analog Card Cages
MUX Hardware
SP: 6-2-5
Field Wiring to a Multiplexer FlexTerm
Field wiring can be brought into Front End Modules (FEMs) in a
Multiplexer (MUX) FlexTerm (1984--0620--000x). Figure 6.2.5 shows
wire routing in a Multiplexer FlexTerm. The cover must be installed on
the Front End Module for proper operation. FEM terminals accept .128
to 2.5 mm2 (26 to 14 AWG) solid or stranded wire.
FEMs
81 61 41 21
Communications Card
Power Supply
1
100 80 60 40 20
Cable Routing
Strain Relief
Leave approximately 75 cm
(30 in.) to allow removal of
FEM
Figure 6.2.5. Wire Routing in a Multiplexer FlexTerm
RS3: Analog Card Cages
MUX Hardware
SP: 6-2-6
The following FEMs can be used in the Multiplexer FlexTerm:
—
1984--0607--0001 Solid state, low voltage, thermocouple
—
1984--0607--0002 Solid state, Cenelec approved
—
1984--0607--0003 Solid state, RTD
—
1984--0607--0004 Reed, 4--20 mA
—
1984--0607--0005 RTD, low voltage, Cenelec approved
—
1984--0607--0007 Reed, high/low voltage, thermocouple
—
1984--0607--0009 Reed, RTD
CAUTION
When connecting wires to the FEM, shut off power at the
FlexTerm and pull the affected FEM free of the card
connector. Then wire to the FEM.
Figure 6.2.6 shows the terminal labeling for RTD-type FEMs:
1984--0607--0003, --0005, and --0009.
5
4
3
2
1
I V I V I V I V I V I V I V I V I V I V
-- -- + + -- -- + + -- -- + + -- -- + + -- -- + +
10
9
8
7
6
15
14
13
12
11
I V I V I V I V I V I V I V I V I V I V
-- -- + + -- -- + + -- -- + + -- -- + + -- -- + +
20
19
18
17
16
Figure 6.2.6. Labeling for RTD-type FEMs (1984--0607--0003, --0005, --0009)
RS3: Analog Card Cages
MUX Hardware
SP: 6-2-7
Figure 6.2.7 shows the terminal labeling for non-RTD type FEMs:
1984--0607--0001, --0002, --0004, and --0007.
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
-- + -- + -- + -- + -- + -- + -- + -- + -- + -- +
-- + -- + -- + -- + -- + -- + -- + -- + -- + -- +
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
Figure 6.2.7. Labeling for Non-RTD type FEMs (1984--0607--0001, --0002, --0004, --0007)
RS3: Analog Card Cages
MUX Hardware
SP: 6-2-8
MUX Marshaling Panels
There are three MUX Marshaling Panels available to connect field
wiring to the MUX FlexTerm:
D
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2457--000x)
D
Current MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2458--000x)
D
RTD MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2456--000x)
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel
The Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2457--000x) mounts in a
system cabinet where it takes 179 mm (7 in.) of panel space. It requires
no system DC power. It is marked “ANALOG MARSHALLING PANEL”
on the printed wiring assembly (PWA) and “VOLTAGE MUX
MARSHALLING PANEL” on the label at the top. It accepts field inputs
for voltage input Front End Modules. Each Voltage MUX Marshaling
Panel has a total of 20 I/O points. Table 6.2.1 lists the Voltage MUX
Marshaling Panel specifications.
See the Service Manual (SV: 5) for field wiring details.
Table 6.2.1. Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel Specifications
Specification
Item
Voltage
CSA: 150 V rms
With a locally coated connector: 250V rms
Wire gauge
.5 to 4 mm2 (20--12 AWG) solid, stranded, lugged
Temperature
Maximum: 105° C
Connection to FlexTerm
50 conductor cable terminated to connector on FlexTerm motherboard.
RS3: Analog Card Cages
MUX Hardware
SP: 6-2-9
Field Wiring to a Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel
Field wiring can be brought to a voltage MUX marshaling panel
(1984--2457--000x). Figure 6.2.8 shows the voltage MUX marshaling
panel along with field wiring terminations.
The cable (RTD or Voltage FEM to Marshaling Panel)
(1984--0500--xxxx) connects the marshaling panel and the FlexTerm.
The system typically ships with the 1984--0500--xxxx cable wires
already connected to the FlexTerm. If the wires are to be connected by
the user, see the Service Manual (SV: 5) for details.
1
+ --
2
3
+ -- + --
4
5
6
7
8
+ -- + -- + -- + -- + --
9
10
+ -- + --
01984--2457--0001
VOLTAGE MUX
MARSHALLING PANEL
Å
TB3
TB1
SHIELDS
J946
Field
Device
+
Voltage
Source
--
SHIELDS
Å
TB2
TB4
+ --
+ -- + -- + -- + -- + -- + -- + -- + --
11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
+ --
C.F. NODE/SLOT _____
MUX SLOT/POINTS _____
Figure 6.2.8. Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2457--000x)
RS3: Analog Card Cages
MUX Hardware
SP: 6-2-10
Current MUX Marshaling Panel
The Current MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2458--000x) mounts in a
system cabinet where it takes 179 mm (7 in.) of panel space. It requires
no system DC power. It is marked “MUX MARSH PANEL” on the PWA
and “4--20 MUX MARSHALLING PANEL” on the label. It is designed to
terminate 4--20 mA signals for MUX inputs. The panel accepts field
inputs for three types of Front End Modules:
D
4--20 mA FEM with a self-powered transmitter
D
4--20 mA FEM with system bus power
D
4--20 mA FEM with remote power at the Marshaling panel.
The 4--20 mA Marshaling Panel has 20 inputs per panel and 60
terminals for field termination.
Table 6.2.2 lists the panel specifications.
See the Service Manual (SV: 5) for field wiring details.
Table 6.2.2. 4--20 mA MUX Marshaling Panel Specifications
Specification
Item
DC power isolation and fusing
1984--1321 fuse module with isolating diodes
Per point fusing
1/4 A
Temperature range
0--70° C
Maximum voltage
Transmitter powered: 250 V rms
150 V rms CSA
System and remote powered: 150 V rms
Wire gauges
0.5 to 4 mm2 (20--12 AWG) solid, stranded, lugged
Connection to FEM
50 conductor cable terminated directly to FEM terminals.
RS3: Analog Card Cages
MUX Hardware
SP: 6-2-11
Field Wiring to a Current (4--20 mA) MUX Marshaling Panel
Field wiring can be brought to a 4--20 mA MUX marshaling panel
(1984--2458--000x). Figure 6.2.9 shows the 4--20 mA MUX marshaling
panel along with field wiring terminations.
The cable (4--20 mA FEM to Marshaling Panel) (1984--0499--xxxx)
connects the marshaling panel and the FlexTerm. The system typically
ships with the cable already connected to the FlexTerm. If the wires are
to be connected by the user, see the Service Manual (SV: 5--1) for
details.
RS3: Analog Card Cages
MUX Hardware
SP: 6-2-12
Jumper Connected
for System-Powered
Transmitter
Self-Powered
Transmitter
System-Powered
Transmitter
1
+ --
2
V + --
3
V + --
4
V + --
Jumper
Disconnected
for Self-powered
Transmitter
5
6
V + --
V
+ --
7
V + --
8
V + --
9
V + --
10
V + --
V
J946
J1
T
TB2
TB1
-+
1/4
AMP
FUSE
TB3
J11
F12
F11
+ --
11
V + --
12
F13
V + --
13
+
T
--
14
F16
F15
F14
V + --
TB4
V + --
15
V
+ --
16
F17
V + --
17
F18
V + --
18
F19
V + --
19
F20
V + --
20
V
01984--2458--0001
4--20 MUX MARSHALLING PANEL
REMOTE
POWER
V+ V+ G
CONTROL FILE NODE_____
G
PWA 01984--1321--0001
TB5
SHIELDS
TB6
CONTROLLER _________
MUX SLOT/POINTS_______
Remote Power Supply #1
Equivalent Circuit
+
1/4 A Typical
-Voltage Source
for Transmitter
Power (Use one
or the other, not
both)
To System
DC Bus
Chassis or System Ground
To
Analog
Card
Cage
+
-Remote Power
Supply #2
(Redundant)
Jumper J1
F1
V
-+
Ground Voltage
Figure 6.2.9. 4--20 mA MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2458--000x)
RS3: Analog Card Cages
MUX Hardware
SP: 6-2-13
RTD MUX Marshaling Panel
The RTD MUX Marshalling Panel (1984--2456--000x) mounts in a
system cabinet where it takes 89 mm (3.5 in.) of space. It requires no
system DC power. It is marked “MULTI STRATEGY MARSHALLING
PANEL” on the PWA and “RTD MUX MARSHALLING PANEL” on the
label. It accepts field inputs for RTD Front End Modules. Each RTD
MUX Marshaling Panel has a total of 10 I/O points. Table 6.2.3 lists the
panel specifications.
See the Service Manual (SV: 5--1) for field wiring details.
Table 6.2.3. RTD MUX Marshaling Panel Specifications
Specification
Item
Voltage
CSA: 150 V RMS
With a locally coated connector: 250V RMS
Wire gauge
0.5 to 4 mm2 (20--12 AWG)
Solid, stranded, lugged
Temperature
Maximum: 105° C
Connection to FlexTerm
50 conductor cable terminated to connector on FlexTerm motherboard.
Field Wiring to an RTD MUX Marshaling Panel
Field wiring can be brought to an RTD MUX Marshaling Panel.
A cable (RTD or Voltage FEM to Marshaling Panel) (1984--0500--xxxx)
connects the marshaling panel and the FlexTerm. The system typically
ships with the cable wires already connected to the FlexTerm. If the
wires are to be connected by the user, see the Service Manual
(SV: 5--1) for details.
Figure 6.2.10 shows the RTD MUX marshaling panel along with field
wiring terminations.
RS3: Analog Card Cages
MUX Hardware
SP: 6-2-14
1
2
3
4
5
01984--2456--0001R
TD MUX MARSHALLING PANEL
V I V I V I V I V I V I V I V I V I V I
+ + -- -- + + -- -- + + -- -- + + -- -- + + -- --
Å
TB1
TB3
SHIELDS
J946
V
+
I
+
I
+
I
V
--
--
4 wire
Field
Devices
V
--
I
--
3 wire
SHIELDS
TB4
TB2
Å
V I V I V I V I V I V I V I V I V I V I
+ + -- -- + + -- -- + + -- -- + + -- -- + + -- --
6
7
8
9
10
C.F. NODE/SLOT
______
MUX SLOT/POINTS ______
1
I
--
V
--
I
V
+ +
Jumper
6
NOTE:
For 3-wire terminations on the marshaling panel,
the associated V+ and I+ pins on the FEM must
be jumpered. Leave all existing wires on FEM.
3-wire termination at FEM
Figure 6.2.10. RTD MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2456--000x)
RS3: Analog Card Cages
MUX Hardware
SP: 6-3-1
Section 3:
Contact I/O
The MultiPurpose Controller (MPC) Contact I/O uses:
D
D
D
D
MPC Processor Card in a ControlFile
Contact Card Cage (Contact FlexTerm) with up to eight Contact
Field Interface Cards (FICs)
Field wiring landed on up to two Local Termination Boards, two
Contact Marshaling Panels, or one of each
Optical Isolator Modules to interface field signals with control
signals
The Contact FlexTerm is cabled to a ControlFile as shown in
Figure 6.3.1. An MPC Processor Card can control up to 96 input/output
points on two interconnected Contact Card Cages.
Cable
1984--2783--xxxx
30 VDC
(J926)
J174
HGF E DCB A
Contact FlexTerm (Front)
ControlFile (Rear)
Cable
1984--1259--xxxx
Contact FlexTerm (Front)
Figure 6.3.1. Contact Flexterm Cable Connections to ControlFile
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contact I/O
SP: 6-3-2
Each Contact Card Cage can hold eight Contact Field Interface cards to
control 48 points. The field wiring can be landed on a Local Termination
Board or a Contact Marshaling Panel.
A Local Termination Board can hold 24 Optical Isolator Modules and
has field wiring terminals for 24 points. The Local Termination Board
mounts directly on the Contact Card Cage.
A Contact Marshaling Panel can hold 24 Optical Isolator Modules and
has field wiring terminals for 24 points. The Contact Marshaling Panel
is connected to the Contact Card Cage by cable. The Contact
Marshaling Panel mounts in a system cabinet.
The Contact Card Cage can hold two Local Termination Boards:
connect to two Contact Marshaling Panels, or use one of each.
Figure 6.3.2 shows use of one of each.
Contact FlexTerm
Contact Marshaling Panel
Cable
1984--0498--xxxx
Field Wiring
Local Termination Board
Field Wiring
Figure 6.3.2. Contact Flexterm Field Wiring Connections
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contact I/O
SP: 6-3-3
Installing a Contact Card Cage
The Contact Card Cage (1984--2576--000x) mounts in a system cabinet,
where it takes 312 mm (12.25 in.) of rail space. It requires standard
system DC power, and is cabled to a ControlFile MPC Controller card.
It is marked “MPC CONTACT FLEXTERM MOTHERBOARD” on the
printed wiring assembly (PWA).
Figure 6.3.3 shows a Contact Card Cage. The two 40 position
connectors at the top are used to connect to the Controller Processor
and to an optional redundant Controller Processor. If only one
Controller Processor is used, the other connector can be used to “daisy
chain” to another Contact Card Cage or to an Analog Card Cage. The
40-position connector at the bottom is not used.
The Contact Card Cage has connectors for two Field Termination
Boards and connectors for two remote Contact Marshaling Panels. You
can install one Field Termination Board and one Contact Marshaling
Panel if required.
Cage address jumpers select either Cage A or Cage B corresponding to
the MPC point addressing scheme. Controller redundancy jumpers are
used to specify normal or redundant connection to the ControlFile.
A fuse card protects the Contact Card Cage from overloads.
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contact I/O
SP: 6-3-4
Fuse card
Field Termination Board
Points 101 to 406
Cable connection to ControlFile
Redundancy jumpers
Power connector
Redundant
cable
connection
FICs
Points 101 to 406
FICs
Points 501 to 806
Address
jumpers
Marshaling Panel cable connection
Points 101 to 406
Field Termination
Board
Points 501 to 806
Marshaling Panel cable connection
Points 501 to 806
Figure 6.3.3. Contact Card Cage
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contact I/O
SP: 6-3-5
Contact Card Cage FIC Addressing
Figure 6.3.4 shows the addressing scheme for Contact Card Cage field
interface cards (FICs). The first slot FIC addresses points 101 through
106; the second slot FIC addresses points 201 through 206.
The left hand Local Termination Board and the left hand Contact
Marshaling Panel connector address points 101 through 406 (covered
by the upper set of FICs).
The right hand Local Termination Board and the right hand Contact
Marshaling Panel connector address points 501 through 806 (covered
by the lower set of FICs).
501
101
101 201 301 401
101 -- 406
501 -- 806
106 206 306 406
501 601 701 801
806
506 606 706 806
406
Figure 6.3.4. FIC Addressing in a Contact Card Cage
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contact I/O
SP: 6-3-6
Contact Card Cage Jumpers
The Contact Card Cage motherboard has address and redundancy
jumpers.
The address jumpers (HD3A--HD3H) set the Contact Card Cage
address as Card Cage A or Card Cage B. All eight jumpers must be in
the same position. Write an “X” in the appropriate box of the cage
address label to record the cage address.
The redundancy jumpers indicate whether or not redundant Controller
Processors are connected to the Contact Card Cage in the ControlFile.
Figure 6.3.5 shows the jumper locations on the motherboard.
Table 6.3.1 shows the jumper positions.
Cage Address
Label
Redundancy jumpers
HD1 and HD2
Address jumpers
HD3A to HD3D
Address jumpers
HD3E to HD3H
Figure 6.3.5. Contact Card Cage Jumpers
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contact I/O
SP: 6-3-7
Table 6.3.1. Contact Card Cage Jumper Positions
Jumper
Position
HD1, HD2
NORMAL:
HD1, HD2
REDUNDANT
HD3A
to
HD3H
Cage A
The Contact Card Cage is Card Cage A.
NOTE: The eight sets of jumpers correspond to the eight contact
FICs. All eight jumpers must be in the same position.
HD3A
to
HD3H
Cage B
The Contact Card Cage is Card Cage B.
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Purpose
One Controller Processor is used. (Normal case)
NOTE: Both jumpers must be in the same position.
Redundant Controller Processors are used.
Contact I/O
SP: 6-3-8
Installing Contact FICs
The Contact Field Interface Card (1984--1460--0003) interfaces with the
Controller Processor to turn optical Isolation input/output modules on
and off. The card is marked “CONTACT I/O” on the PWA.
Each Contact Field Interface card can control six modules in any
combination of input or output, AC or DC. The card plugs into a slot on
the Contact Card Cage.
Contact FIC Jumpers
Jumper HD1 must be set before the card is installed. This setting
controls the action of the card on communication failure (either hold the
previous condition or set the output to OFF). Figure 6.3.6 shows the
jumper location. Table 6.3.2 gives jumper values.
HD1
Status
LEDs
F1
Figure 6.3.6. Contact FIC 1984--1460--000x Fuse and Jumper Locations
Table 6.3.2. Contact Field Interface Card Jumper Positions
Jumper
Position
Effect
HD1
HOLD
Hold output value on communications failure
OFF
Drive output to zero on communications failure
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contact I/O
SP: 6-3-9
Installing a Local Termination Board
The Local Termination Board (1984--1288--000x) is marked “CONTACT
FIELD TERMINATION” on the PWA. The Local Termination Board
plugs directly into the connectors of a Contact Card Cage. It
accommodates 24 field I/O terminations. The Local Termination Board
provides optical isolation and fusing for each I/O point. Optical isolation
modules are installed only in active points.
The Local Termination Board is limited to 1 amp maximum output
current for the optical Isolation modules. The fuses on the Local
Termination Board are in line with the field wiring. Figure 6.3.7 shows
the Local Termination Board.
NOTE: When installing a Local Termination Board, be very careful to
insert both connectors in the receiving slots on the Contact Card Cage.
Optical Isolation Module
Fuse 101
Fuse 102
101
102
103
104
105
106
201
202
203
204
205
206
301
302
303
304
305
306
401
402
403
404
405
406
Equivalent circuit
Optical
Module
+
Field Wiring
Terminal Strip
—
Figure 6.3.7. Local Termination Board
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contact I/O
SP: 6-3-10
Local Termination Board Field Wiring
The Local Termination Board must have an optical isolation module for
each active input or output point. Different optical isolation modules are
required for different types of inputs and outputs. The maximum current
allowed is 1 amp.
NOTE: The field wiring terminals on the left terminal board have the
positive (+) terminal on the top. The field wiring terminals on the right
terminal board have the negative (--) terminal on the top.
WARNING
There must be no power on the input wiring while
connecting it to the Contact Card Cage. Serious injury and
equipment damage can result.
CAUTION
Two different phases of AC power must not be connected
to the same Local Termination Board. Damage to the
optical Isolation modules can result.
See the Service Manual (SV: 5--2) for details of field wiring.
Local Termination Board Fuses
The Local Termination Board provides a fuse in line with the field wiring
of each point. Figure 6.3.7 shows the fuse locations. Table 6.3.3 gives
fuse data.
NOTE: The factory installs 1.5 amp fuses. Size the fuses should to
match the load and the optical isolation module used.
Table 6.3.3. Local Termination Board Fuses
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
F1 to F24
G09140--0029
MDQ 1-1/2
Characteristics
NOTE:
1.5 A 250 V Slow Blow
Other fuses can be used
to match the applied load.
Optical Isolator Modules
See page 6-3-15 for a list of available Optical Isolator Modules.
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contact I/O
SP: 6-3-11
Installing a Contact Marshaling Panel
The Contact Marshaling Panel (1984--2459--000x) mounts in a system
cabinet with a cable to a Contact Card Cage. The panel requires 267
mm (10.5 in.) of rail space. It is marked “CONTACT MARSHALING
PANEL” on the PWA. Figure 6.3.8 shows the Contact Marshaling
Panel. Figure 6.3.9 shows the dimensions of the panel.
Opto 1
AC or DC input
voltage for modules
101--106
Fuse 1
VI+-- N
oooo
VI+-- N1 VI+-- N1 VI+-- N1
VI+-- N1
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
VI+-- N1 V2+-- N2 V2+-- N2 V2+-- N2 V2+-- N2 V2+-- N2 V2+-- N2
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
V1
N1
+
--
V2
N2
101
102
103
104
105
106
201
202
203
204
205
201--206
206
CONTACT MARSHALLING PANEL
Å
CONTROL FILE NODE_________CONTROLLER SLOT_______
301
302
303
304
305
306
401
402
403
404
405
406
V4
401--406
N4
V3
N3
oooo
oooo
oooo
V3+--N3 V3+--N3 V3+--N3
oooo
oooo
oooo
V3+--N3 V3+--N3 V3+--N3
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
V4+--N4 V4+--N4 V4+--N4 V4+--N4
oooo
301--306
oooo
V4+--N4 V4+--N4
ROSEMOUNT INC 1986 CONTACT MARSHALLING PANEL
PWA 01984--2459--0001 ___ SER____________
Figure 6.3.8. Contact Marshaling Panel
CAUTION
DO NOT connect 2 different phases of AC power to the
same Contact Marshaling Panel. Damage to the optical
isolator modules and/or the panel can result.
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contact I/O
SP: 6-3-12
483
(19.00)
465
(18.30)
9 (0.35)
44 (1.75)
44 (1.75)
267
(10.50)
89
(3.50)
All mounting holes are 7 mm
(0.28 in.) in diameter.
44 (1.75)
44 (1.75)
Figure 6.3.9. Contact Marshaling Panel Mounting Dimensions
The Contact Marshaling Panel provides field wiring termination strips,
optical isolators, fuses, and address labels for field wiring. Optical
isolator modules of up to 3 ampere capacity can be used with the
Contact Marshaling Panel. Different optical isolator modules are
required for different types of inputs and outputs.
Each group of 6 points is connected to a single contact FIC card, as
indicated by the highlighting in Figure 6.3.8. Each group of 6 points can
be system powered from the appropriate terminal strip at the right side,
as shown in the figure.
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contact I/O
SP: 6-3-13
Table 6.3.4 lists the Contact Marshaling Panel specifications.
Table 6.3.4. Contact Marshaling Panel Specifications
Term
Current Ratings/Temperature
Specification
DC Output: 2.3 amps at 25° C
1.8 amps at 40° C
1.0 amps at 60° C
AC Output: 3.0 amps at 25° C
2.3 amps at 40° C
1.2 amps at 60° C
Voltage
Maximum: 300 V rms
Fusing
4 amp slow blow per Optical Isolator Module
Cabling
50 conductor round cable
Maximum distance
Card Cage or FlexTerm to Marshaling Panel:
229 meters (750 feet)
Connection to Card Cage or FlexTerm
50 conductor cable terminated to connector on
motherboard.
Wire gauge
0.34--2.5 mm2 (14--22 AWG) solid or stranded
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contact I/O
SP: 6-3-14
Contact Marshaling Panel Field Wiring
The Contact Marshaling Panel accommodates 24 field I/O terminations,
with four contacts available at each point as shown in Figure 6.3.8. The
(+) and the (--) connections are used for devices powered in the field. A
jumper is required from Vx to + to provide system power to the point.
The fuse is in series with the Vx power supply to the point.
See the Service Manual (SV: 5--2) for field wiring details.
WARNING
TURN OFF POWER on the contact wiring while connecting
the Contact Marshaling Panel to the Contact Card Cage.
Serious personal injury and equipment damage can result.
Contact Marshaling Panel Fuses
Contact Marshaling Panel fuses are in line between the terminal block
and the individual point (V1, 2, 3, or 4), not in the field wiring.
Table 6.3.5 gives fuse data.
The factory installs fuses sized for the maximum allowable load on the
output Optical Isolator Module. A smaller fuse can be used if a smaller
load is applied or if the point is an input.
Table 6.3.5. Contact Marshaling Panel Fuses
Fuse
F1 to F24
FRSI
Part No.
G09140--0038
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Bussman
Part No.
MDL 4
Littelfuse
Part No.
313004
Characteristics
4 A 250 V Slow Blow
NOTE: Use smaller fuses if smaller
loads are applied.
Contact I/O
SP: 6-3-15
Optical Isolator Modules
Optical Isolator Modules (G12243--00xx) are solid-state, optically
isolated relays that define each contact point as an input or an output.
Each module has a fuse in series with the field pair. The modules are
used in Local Termination Boards and Contact Marshaling Panels.
Table 6.3.6 lists the available modules.
NOTE: Care must be taken to make sure the proper type of module is
installed because input and output modules are mechanically
interchangeable.
Table 6.3.6. Optical Isolator Modules
*
Part Number
C12243--
Model
Function
Output
Contact*
Voltage
Color
--0005
IAC5A
Input
None
180--280
VAC/DC
Yellow
--0006
IDC5
Input
None
10--32 VDC
White
--0007
IDC5B
IDC5F
Input
None
4--16 VDC
White
--0008
IAC5
Input
None
90--140
VAC/DC
Yellow
--0009
ODC5
Output
N.O.
5--60 VDC
Red
--0010
ODC5A
Output
N.O.
5--200 VDC
Red
--0011
OAC5A5
Output
N.C.
24--280 VAC
Black
--0012
OAC5
Output
N.O.
12--140 VAC
Black
--0013
OAC5--A
OAC5--1
Output
N.O.
24--280 VAC
Black
All output modules, except OAC5A5, have normally open (N.O.) outputs. The output contact is open
when the block output is false.
NOTE: AC inputs are yellow, outputs are black. DC inputs are white,
outputs are red.
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contact I/O
SP: 6-3-16
RS3: Analog Card Cages
Contact I/O
RS3t
Site Preparation and Installation
Chapter 7:
Multipoint I/O
Section 1:
Section 2:
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-1
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Address Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Scanning Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O FIM Redundancy and Online Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O FIM Online Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O FIM Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel FIM Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Online
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Redundancy . .
7-1-4
7-1-4
7-1-5
7-1-6
7-1-6
7-1-6
7-1-8
7-1-8
7-1-9
7-1-11
7-1-12
7-1-13
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-1
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDIOH High-Side Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDIOL Low-Side Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LVD Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field I/O Hazardous Voltage Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field I/O Voltage Applications with SELV Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Termination Panel to Termination Panel Field I/O Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-2
7-2-4
7-2-5
7-2-6
7-2-7
7-2-8
7-2-9
7-2-10
7-2-11
7-2-12
7-2-13
7-2-13
7-2-14
7-2-16
7-2-18
7-2-19
7-2-19
7-2-20
7-2-20
7-2-21
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Contents
SP: ii
Section 3:
Section 4:
Section 5:
I/O Wiring for All Isolated Discrete Termination Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Ambient Temperature Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solid State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LVD Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field I/O Hazardous Voltage Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field I/O Voltage Applications with SELV Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group-to-Group Field I/O Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring for High Density Termination Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Wiring for All Isolated Discrete Termination Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Ambient Temperature Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solid State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-21
7-2-21
7-2-23
7-2-24
7-2-25
7-2-26
7-2-27
7-2-28
7-2-29
7-2-31
7-2-33
7-2-33
7-2-34
7-2-34
7-2-35
7-2-35
7-2-35
7-2-36
7-2-36
7-2-36
7-2-37
7-2-38
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-1
MAIO16 Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Field Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-2
7-3-5
7-3-5
7-3-7
7-3-14
7-3-21
7-3-23
7-3-25
7-3-27
7-3-31
7-3-33
7-3-37
7-3-38
MIO Marshaling Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-1
Standard Remote Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-2
Intrinsic Safety (IS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-1
MTL IS Termination Panel for Discrete Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping I/O points to MTL Discrete Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-5
7-5-7
7-5-8
7-5-8
7-5-8
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Contents
SP: iii
Line Fault Detection (LFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL Discrete Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel A Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel B Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL IS Termination Panel for Analog Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL Analog Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS3: Multipoint I/O
7-5-9
7-5-10
7-5-12
7-5-13
7-5-13
7-5-13
7-5-14
7-5-18
7-5-21
7-5-21
7-5-21
7-5-21
7-5-21
7-5-21
7-5-22
7-5-22
7-5-23
Contents
SP: iv
List of Figures
Figure
Page
7.1.1
Multipoint I/O Using the Communication Termination Panel II . . . . . . .
7-1-2
7.1.2
Multipoint I/O Using the Analog Card Cage and Communication
Connect Card III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-3
7.1.3
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-4
7.1.4
Multipoint I/O Panel Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-8
7.1.5
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Power Wiring: Option 1 . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-9
7.1.6
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Power Wiring: Option 2 . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-10
7.1.7
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Online
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-12
7.1.8
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring:
Redundant Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-13
7.2.1
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-3
7.2.2
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Field Wiring Terminals . . . . . . . . .
7-2-4
7.2.3
Label, Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-5
7.2.4
Keying the Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-6
7.2.5
MDIOH High-Side Switch Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-8
7.2.6
MDIOL Low-Side Switch Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-9
7.2.7
Field Wiring to a Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-12
7.2.8
Isolated Discrete Termination Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-17
7.2.9
Field Wiring Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-22
7.2.10
Input Point Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-23
7.2.11
Output Point Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-24
7.2.12
Label, Isolated Discrete Termination Field Wiring Panel A . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-25
7.2.13
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-30
7.2.14
Field Wiring to a Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-31
7.3.1
MAIO16 Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-3
7.3.2
Loop Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-6
7.3.3
MAIO16 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-7
7.3.4
Field I/O Point Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-9
7.3.5
MAIO16 Output Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-10
7.3.6
MAIO16 System-Powered Input Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-11
7.3.7
MAIO16 Self-Powered Input Point with External Ground Reference . .
7-3-12
7.3.8
MAIO16 Self-Powered Input Point with Ground Reference at
Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-13
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Contents
SP: v
7.3.9
4--20 mA Inputs Without Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-16
7.3.10
4--20 mA Inputs With Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-17
7.3.11
4--20 mA 4--Wire Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-18
7.3.12
4--20 mA Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-19
7.3.13
4--20 mA Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-20
7.3.14
MAIO16 Termination Panel Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-22
7.3.15
MAI32 Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-29
7.3.16
MAI32 System Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-31
7.3.17
MAI32 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-33
7.3.18
System-Powered Input Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-34
7.3.19
Self-Powered Input Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-35
7.4.1
Standard Remote Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-2
7.5.1
Intrinsic Safety Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-1
7.5.2
MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-3
7.5.3
MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-4
7.5.4
Discrete I/O with MDIO MTL IS Termination Panel A and Panel B . . .
7-5-6
7.5.5
Line Fault Detection Jumper Settings for Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-12
7.5.6
Line Fault Detection Jumper Settings for Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-12
7.5.7
MTL Discrete IS Panel Rack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-14
7.5.8
MTL IS Panel I/O Cabinet Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-15
7.5.9
Panel Mounting Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-16
7.5.10
MTL IS Panel Mounting Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-17
7.5.11
MTL Analog IS Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-19
7.5.12
Analog I/O with MTL IS Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-20
7.5.13
MTL Analog Panel Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-23
7.5.14
Analog Panel Wiring Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-24
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Contents
SP: vi
List of Tables
Table
Page
7.1.1
I/O Point and Minimum Controller Scan Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-5
7.2.1
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-7
7.2.2
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-10
7.2.3
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-15
7.2.4
Solid state Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-26
7.2.5
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-27
7.2.6
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-28
7.2.7
Marshaling Panel Cable Pin-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-32
7.2.8
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Address Jumpers .
7-2-37
7.2.9
Solid State Relays
...........................................
7-2-38
7.3.1
MAIO16 Termination Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-4
7.3.2
Marshaling Cable Pin-Out
....................................
7-3-8
7.3.3
Device Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-15
7.3.4
MAIO Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-24
7.3.5
MAIO16 FIM LEDs
..........................................
7-3-25
7.3.6
LPM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-26
7.3.7
MAI32 Termination Panel Components
.........................
7-3-30
7.3.8
MAI32 Marshaling Panel Cable Pin-Out
........................
7-3-36
7.3.9
MAI32 FIM LEDs
............................................
7-3-37
7.3.10
MAIO Input “Status 2” LED Diagnostic Codes
...................
7-3-37
7.3.11
MAI32 Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-38
7.4.1
Standard Remote Termination Panel, Marshaling Panel Cable . . . . . .
7-4-3
7.5.1
Mapping of I/O Points to MTL Discrete Panel A Isolators . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-7
7.5.2
Mapping of I/O Points to MTL Discrete Panel B Isolators . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-7
7.5.3
MTL Discrete IS Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-11
7.5.4
MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-13
7.5.5
Mounting Hole Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-17
7.5.6
MTL Analog IS Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-21
7.5.7
MTL Analog Input and Output Isolators
7-5-22
RS3: Multipoint I/O
.........................
Contents
SP: 7-1-1
Section 1:
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
Multipoint I/O (MIO) is a family of I/O products that allow distribution of
the I/O electronics and marshaling panels close to the I/O devices
controlled. The devices share a common packaging format and system
cable connection method. Multipoint I/O is used to read and control
analog and discrete (contact) I/O points. A Multipoint I/O Termination
Panel provides connection of field wiring to/from I/O devices, one or two
Field Interface Modules (FIM), optional Loop Power Module (LPM), and
communication with the Controller Processor in a ControlFile.
NOTE: All FIMs and LPMs have keyed connectors to prevent incorrect
insertion into their respective termination panel receptacles. After
proper insertion, tighten the screw at each end of the FIM or LPM to
secure the module in place.
Most Multipoint I/O termination panels provide the option of online FIM
replacement or redundant FIM operation. For online replacement
operation, a single FIM is installed and a single communication line is
used. If this FIM fails, a replacement may be inserted in the empty
socket. The replacement will take over for the failed FIM. Redundant
operation requires two installed FIMs and two communication lines.
Both FIMs operate continuously, with one as primary and the other as
secondary. If the primary FIM fails, the secondary FIM takes over
immediately.
A Communication Connect Card III, Communication Termination Panel II,
or Remote Communication Termination Panel provides up to eight
communications lines between a MultiPurpose Controller (MPC) in a
ControlFile and the MIO termination panels. Up to four MIO termination
panels can be connected to each communication line, with each MIO
panel having a separate address. Configuration space and processor
time will limit the amount of hardware that can be connected and
serviced.
A pair of Fiber Optic I/O Converters can be used to insert a fiber optic
link in the communication line.
Additional information on installation of Multipoint I/O termination panels
can be found on:
RS3: Multipoint I/O
D
Page 2-5-1 for installation in floor mounted I/O cabinets.
D
Page 2-6-1 for installation in wall mounted I/O cabinets.
D
Page 2-7-1 for installation of a Remote I/O Power supply.
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SP: 7-1-2
Multipoint I/O termination panels can be connected directly to a
ControlFile by using a Communications Termination Panel II
(1984--4205--000x) or a Remote Communications Termination Panel
(1984--2552--000x). Figure 7.1.1 shows a typical installation.
PeerWay
A
A
B
B
ControlFile
Control Cable
Communication Termination Panel II
Controller
Communication Lines
Multipoint I/O
Termination Panel
Figure 7.1.1. Multipoint I/O Using the Communication Termination Panel II
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SP: 7-1-3
Multipoint I/O termination panels can be connected to an Analog Card
Cage using a Communications Connect Card III (1984--2543--000x).
Figure 7.1.2 shows a typical installation.
PeerWay
A
A
B
B
ControlFile
Communication
Connect Card III
Control Cable
Controller
Analog Card Cage
Communication Lines
Multipoint I/O
Termination Panel
Figure 7.1.2. Multipoint I/O Using the Analog Card Cage and Communication Connect Card III
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SP: 7-1-4
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Addressing
Figure 7.1.3 shows how I/O addresses are formed. The standard RS3
address format has been generalized to make the new hardware
configuration fit logically within the familiar RS3 address structure.
The ControlFile Node Address specifies which ControlFile is used.
The Controller Slot Address specifies which controller is used.
The “Cage Address” specifies which termination panel on the
communication line is used.
The communication line or “Card Cage Slot” specifies which
communication line is used.
The Point Address specifies which I/O point is used.
=2 G A 2 11
ControlFile Node Address
(1--992)
Controller Slot Address
(A--H)
Termination Panel Address
“Cage” Address (A--D)
Point Address
(01--32)
Communication Line Address
“Card Cage Slot” (1--8)
Figure 7.1.3. Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Addressing
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Address Jumpers
The termination panel address or “card cage address” is specified by a
jumper that is set to address A, B, C, or D. The isolated Discrete
Termination Panel pair has an address jumper on each of the two
panels. Both must be set to the same address. The MultiFIM discrete
Termination Panel has separate address jumpers for each FIM.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SP: 7-1-5
Multipoint I/O Scanning Rates
The rate at which I/O points are scanned depends on the highest card
cage address served by the communication line.
D
The maximum panel scanning rate of 32 per second is achieved
when only address “A” is used on the communication line; the
scanning pattern is “A A A A”.
D
Using address “B” halves the rate for all points to 16 scans per
second; the scanning pattern is “A B A B”.
D
Using address “C” gives 16 scans per second to A and 8 each to
B and C; the scanning pattern is “A B A C”.
D
Using address “D”, gives 8 scans per second to all; the scanning
pattern is “A B C D”.
The Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO) I/O point update rate is equal to the
panel scan rate.
The Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) I/O point update rate is one-fourth the
panel scan rate. Four messages are needed to update the points, so
the analog I/O point update rate is the panel scan rate divided by 4.
Thus a MAIO panel addressed as “A”, with a panel scan rate of 32
scans per second, gives 8 I/O point scans per second or a scan time of
.125 second. The minimum useable controller scan time is .25 second.
Table 7.1.1 shows the scan rates and minimum controller scan time for
various cage addresses.
NOTE: The controller scan time (1.0, .50, .25, .125 second), selected
from the ControlFile Status screen, must always be greater than the I/O
point scan time. The controller scan time applies to all card cages
served by the controller, so the scan time of the slowest cage must be
used.
Table 7.1.1. I/O Point and Minimum Controller Scan Rates
Highest
Card Cage
Address
Cage Scan Rate
Minimum Controller Scan Time
(Seconds)
Cage
Scan Pattern
(Scans
Per Second)
MDIO
MAIO
A
AAAA
32
.125
.25
B
ABAB
16
.125
.50
C
ABAC
.25
25
10
1.0
D
ABCD
.25
1.0
RS3: Multipoint I/O
A: 16
B, C: 8
8
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SP: 7-1-6
Multipoint I/O FIM Redundancy and Online Replacement
Most Multipoint I/O termination panels support FIM redundancy and FIM
online replacement.
Multipoint I/O FIM Online Replacement
Online replacement operation is provided when one FIM and one
communication line is used. The FIM can be installed in either the “A”
or the “B” socket. The other socket is available for an online
replacement. The redundancy jumper(s) must be set to normal to allow
online replacement operation.
If the FIM fails in any way, a good FIM can be plugged into the empty
socket. The failed FIM red LED will be ON. The new FIM will take over
from the installed FIM in a few seconds. The failed FIM can be
removed for repair as soon as the new FIM green LED is ON and the
yellow “Comm Active” LED flashes.
NOTE: The new FIM may be left in service in that socket; the failed FIM
should be removed. The empty socket will provide for another online
replacement. Do not leave two FIMs plugged into the panel.
Multipoint I/O FIM Redundancy
Full FIM redundancy is provided when two FIMs are used. Two
communication lines are required, one for an odd numbered slot and
one for the next even numbered slot. The primary FIM is in the “FIM A”
socket and the redundant FIM is in the “FIM B” socket. The redundancy
jumper(s) must be at redundant to allow redundant operation. A
Redundant I/O Block must be configured to control operations.
The odd numbered slot address must be wired to FIM A, the “primary”
FIM. The even numbered slot must be wired to FIM B, the “secondary”
FIM.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SP: 7-1-7
Primary (A) FIM Failure: If the primary FIM fails, the secondary FIM
will take over and assume the duties of the primary. The failed FIM red
LED will be ON and the green LED will flash. The failed FIM should be
removed and replaced. As soon as the new FIM A powers up, it will
assume the duties of the primary FIM and FIM B will return to
secondary operation.
Secondary (B) FIM Failure: If the secondary FIM B fails, the primary
FIM A will continue to operate. The failed FIM red LED will be ON and
the green LED will flash. The failed FIM B should be removed and
replaced. As soon as the new FIM B powers up, it will resume the
duties of secondary FIM.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SP: 7-1-8
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Installation
The termination panel must be mounted with the long dimension vertical
as shown in Figure 7.1.4. The panel can be installed in a rack, on DIN
rails, or against a flat surface. Ambient air temperature specifications
refer to the temperature of the air at the bottom of each terminal panel.
Wire tie-wrap anchor points are provided on the label bracket at each
end of the panel.
DIN Rail Mounting Holes (2)
148
(5.8)
400
(15.75)
Top View
Front View
381
(15)
Panel or Wall Mounting Holes (4).
Use M4x20 (8--32 x 3/4) Screws
76
(3)
161
(6.33)
Figure 7.1.4. Multipoint I/O Panel Dimensions
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Grounding
The termination panel must be connected to cabinet ground. If the
panel is mounted on a grounded DIN rail or mounted against a
grounded metal panel it will be adequately grounded. Otherwise you
must connect a ground wire to one of the ground terminals of the power
strip.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SP: 7-1-9
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel FIM Power Wiring
Removing power from a termination panel stops processing for all
points served by the panel.
Terminal panel (FIM) power is supplied either from the RS3 system DC
power supply bus or from a local DC source. Provision is made for
optional A and B redundant DC supplies.
There are two approved ways to supply FIM power. Option 1 uses the
standard RS3 4-pin power jack and a standard RS3 DC power cable as
shown in Figure 7.1.5.
Power Jack
Power Strip
Power Jack
A Supply
B Supply
A Return
Standard A and
B Power Supply
Cable
B Return
Figure 7.1.5. Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Power Wiring: Option 1
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SP: 7-1-10
Option 2 is more suitable if FIM power is supplied by a local source or if
additional panels are to be fed from the same source. Figure 7.1.6
shows option 2.
From A From B
Supply Supply
A & B power
to another unit
(7 amp max A+B)
A B
RTN
A B
Power Strip
RTN
A+
A --
A -A+
B+
B --
B -B+
Daisy chain to
next device
NOTE: Maximum current (A + B) 7 amps
Figure 7.1.6. Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Power Wiring: Option 2
CAUTION
Do not use both the power jack and the power strip at the
same time. This may result in damage to the panel.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SP: 7-1-11
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring
Port A and Port B provide for connecting two independent
communication lines. The communication line used determines the
panel slot address. One line is used for single FIM (online replacement)
applications. An odd-even pair is used for redundant FIM applications.
Each terminal is labeled +, --, and S for the plus and minus signal wires
and the shield. The terminals will accommodate one wire of 0.34 to
4 mm2 (22 to 12 AWG) size or two wires in the range 0.34 to 0.75 mm2
(22 to 18 AWG). This allows communication wires to be daisy chained
to other panels as required.
Shield grounding is supplied within the termination panel. An internal
spark gap transient suppressor is supplied on the communication lines
and within the FIM. A low impedance connection between the panel
and local ground is required for proper protection. No further transient
suppression should be required.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SP: 7-1-12
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Online Replacement
The communication line can be connected to Port A or Port B. The
other port can be used to daisy chain the communication line to another
panel.
NOTE: It is good practice to use an odd numbered line and to reserve
the next even numbered line for eventual redundant operation.
The redundancy jumpers connect the communication lines to allow
online replacement operation with a single line. These jumpers must be
at normal for online replacement operation.
Figure 7.1.7 shows communication wiring for the single FIM (online
replacement) application.
Communication line
slot N (odd)
Port A
NOTE: Redundancy jumpers must be on normal
Figure 7.1.7. Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Online Replacement
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SP: 7-1-13
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Redundancy
Use of redundant FIMs requires two independent communication lines
as shown in Figure 7.1.8. The odd numbered line must be wired to Port
A, for FIM A (the “primary” FIM). The even numbered line must be
wired to Port B for FIM B (the “secondary” FIM).
The redundancy jumpers must be at redundant to allow use of the two
independent communication lines.
Communication line
slot N+1 (even)
Communication line
slot N (odd)
Port A
Port B
NOTE: Redundancy jumpers must be on redundant
Figure 7.1.8. Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Redundant Operation
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SP: 7-1-14
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SP: 7-2-1
Section 2:
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
This section describes installing the:
D
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II (10P52700001)
D
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel (1984--4282--000x)
D
D
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel set
(1984--4121--000x and 1984--4124--000x)
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel
(1984--4167--000x)
Multipoint Discrete I/O is used to read and control discrete (contact) I/O
points. It allows location of the I/O electronics Field Interface Module
(FIM) at the field wiring termination panel. The discrete termination
panels can be mounted where the user desires (within communication
wiring length limits).
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-2
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II
The Direct Discrete Termination Panel II (10P52700001) is marked
“DIRECT DISCRETE TERMINATION PANEL II” on the printed wiring
assembly (PWA). The panel is CE approved for EMC emissions and
susceptibility.
FIMs
The panel can be used with either a high or a low-side switching FIM.
The high-side switch FIM (MDIOH) breaks the high (supply) side of the
circuit for outputs. This FIM should be used for all new installations.
The low-side switch FIM (MDIOL) breaks the low (return) side. This
FIM is used primarily for installations that are backward compatible with
the earlier MDIO FIM (1984--4080--0001). The termination panel can be
keyed so only the proper type FIM can be installed.
Keying
The FIM and panel are keyed to prevent installation of the wrong type of
FIM. Keying plugs are moveable so the panel can be field-converted
from MDIOL to MDIOH and back.
I/O Points
The panel supports 16 input/output points (1--16) and 16 input-only
points (17--32).
D
D
Points 1--16 can be configured as inputs or as outputs.
D
Points 17--32 can only be configured as inputs.
D
Loop Power
All points share a common return bus which is floating relative to
the panel chassis ground.
Point 1 must be configured (either as input or output) and the
transition voltage must be specified. The transition voltage
applies to all 32 points. See the I/O Block Configuration Manual
(IO: 10).
An independent source of loop power is required unless all points are
field-powered inputs.
D
D
Each group of 8 points can have an independent source of loop
power but all sources must share the common return bus. The
panel is normally shipped with all voltage terminals (V1--V4) and
their returns (N1--N4) jumpered together.
Field-powered inputs must have their returns connected to the
loop power return.
Figure 7.2.1 shows the Direct Discrete Termination Panel II.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-3
Figure 7.2.1. Direct Discrete Termination Panel II
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-4
Field Wiring
The panel supports 32 I/O points in four groups of eight points. Each
has a group supply bus (V). All groups share a common return bus (N).
The supplies (V1--V4) are isolated so that each group may be powered
independently (as long as the returns can be common). The terminals
will accommodate wire sized 4 to 0.34 mm2 (12 to 22 AWG).
Loop Power
The panel is normally shipped with all supply (V1--V4) terminals
jumpered together. Jumpers are also installed on all return (N1--N4)
terminals (N) to carry excess current between the terminals. The
jumpers on the return terminals (N) should not be removed.
NOTE: The loop power return bus is isolated from chassis ground. You
can supply a connection to the chassis ground terminal of TBA if it is
required for your installation.
Field Terminals
A pictorial representation of points 9--16 is shown in Figure 7.2.2. Note
that the group supply line terminates at each end of the group. This
makes it easy to daisy chain groups together.
Output points and contact-closure input points are wired between the
upper (odd) terminal and the corresponding lower (even) terminal.
Field-powered input points are wired between the lower (even) terminal
and the common return bus.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
V1
V2
N1 N2
V2
V3
N2 N3
Figure 7.2.2. Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Field Wiring Terminals
Strain Relief
RS3: Multipoint I/O
For strain relief, route the field wires through the fingers of the wire
manager assemblies (1984-4152-0003). To ease the task of routing
wires, the top pair of wire manager assemblies are factory-mounted and
the remaining assemblies are shipped loose. As you progress through
the wiring, mount the assemblies using the 1/4-inch fasteners provided.
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-5
Labels
A replaceable label (1984--4195--0001), Figure 7.2.3, is provided on the
panel label holder assembly. The label provides space at the end to
record the ControlFile Node address (1--32), Controller Slot Address
(A--H), Termination Panel FIM address (A--D), and Communication Line
(1--8). There is provision for recording both the primary and redundant
communication line number. The body of the label provides for
recording the group supply sources (V1--V4) and each point’s field
connection (1--32).
The underside of the label holder carries a label that shows a schematic
of the field wiring terminations and provides space for recording fuse
values.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
V1 V2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 V2 V3 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 V3 V4 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
CF NODE
CNTRLR
TP ADDR
COMM
PRIM RED
Figure 7.2.3. Label, Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Field Wiring
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-6
Keying
Panels and FIMs are keyed to prevent insertion of the wrong FIM type.
The FIM has a pair of keying pins that fit into matching holes in the
panel. The panel is set up by inserting plugs into the unused holes at
each end of the FIM. Figure 7.2.4 shows a panel set up for a MDIOH
FIM. Two spare plugs are provided with each panel.
FIM A
PLUG FOR MDIOH
PLUG FOR MDIOL
Figure 7.2.4. Keying the Panel
-
To remove a plug:
1. Insert a screwdriver under the lip of the plug. The small access
hole at the edge of the plug can be used to get the screwdriver
under the plug.
2. Pry the plug up until you can grip it with you fingers and pull it
out.
-
To insert a plug:
1. Press the plug into the hole until it clicks in place. Be sure to use
the marked hole rather than the nearby access hole.
2. Repeat for the other end of the FIM.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-7
Jumpers
There are three sets of jumpers on the panel. HD17 specifies the panel
(FIM) address. HD18 jumpers must be positioned correctly to support
normal (one-FIM) operation with online replacement, or optional
redundant (two-FIM) operation. Jumpers HD1--HD16 change
connections for points as shown on the following pages.
Table 7.2.1 shows jumper values.
Table 7.2.1. Direct Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Jumper
Value
HD1--HD16
Left
(One jumper per
point)
Right
Effect
MDIOL: Input or Output Point
MDIOH: Input Point
MDIOH: Output Point
A
Use Card Cage Address A
HD17
B
Use Card Cage Address B
(One jumper)
C
Use Card Cage Address C
D
Use Card Cage Address D
E
Not used
F
Not used
HD18
NORM
Normal single-FIM operation
(Two jumpers)
REDUN
Redundant operation with two FIMs
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-8
MDIOH High-Side Switch
Put the jumper at the left for inputs and at the right for outputs as shown
in Figure 7.2.5.
Contact Closure
Input Point
5
V+
2
1
NOTE: Input only points 17--32 are wired the same
way for contact closure type inputs.
V--
1
2
No.
Field-powered
Input Point
1
V+ (Loop power supply)
2
Field terminal block (Odd number, upper
row)
3
Input contact
4
Field terminal block (Next even number,
lower row)
5
FIM input
4
3
1
V+
NOTE: Input only points 17--32 are wired the same
way for externally sourced inputs.
V--
No.
2 2
-+
Output Point
Description
1
FIM input
2
Field terminal block (Even number, lower
row)
3
Voltage source (+)
4
Voltage source return (--) (Connected to any
point on the common return bus)
No.
Description
4
1
Description
3
1
V+
2
V-- 5
1
2
4
3
1
FIM output (Switched V+)
2
Field terminal block (Odd number, upper
row)
3
Load
4
Field terminal block (Next even number,
lower row)
5
V-- (Common return)
Figure 7.2.5. MDIOH High-Side Switch Jumpers
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-9
MDIOL Low-Side Switch
Put the jumper at the left for all points as shown in Figure 7.2.6.
Contact Closure
input Point
5
1
V+
V--
1
2
NOTE: Input only points 17--32 are wired the same
way for contact closure type inputs.
2
No.
Voltage Input Point
1
V+ (Loop power supply)
2
Field terminal block (Odd number, upper
row)
3
Input contact
4
Field terminal block (Next even number,
lower row)
5
FIM input
4
3
1
V+
NOTE: Input only points 17--32 are wired the same
way for externally sourced inputs.
V--
No.
2 2
--
Description
1
FIM input
2
Field terminal block (Next even number,
lower row)
3
Voltage source (+)
4
Voltage source return (--) (Connected to any
point on the common return bus)
No.
Description
4
1
Description
+
3
Output Point
5
V+
1
2
V--
1
2
4
3
1
V+ (Loop power supply)
2
Field terminal block (Odd number, upper
row)
3
Load
4
Field terminal block (Next even number,
lower row)
5
FIM output signal (V-- switched return)
Figure 7.2.6. MDIOL Low-Side Switch Jumpers
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-10
Fuses
There are 32 fuses protecting signal circuits powered through this
panel. The factory installs 1 amp fuses in all positions. Other fuses
appropriate for the load protected can be installed but must not exceed
a 1.0 amp rating (IEC) or 1.6 amp rating (UL/CSA). (Characteristics:
250 V, quick acting, 5x20 mm, ceramic.) If other fuses are installed, the
fuse rating should be marked on the point’s data label. Table 7.2.2
shows fuse data.
For externally powered inputs, a fuse with the same maximum rating or
equivalent current limiting must be provided where the circuit receives
its power.
Table 7.2.2. Direct Discrete Termination Panel Fuses
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Wickmann
Part No.
Characteristics
F1
to
F32
G53394--1000--0005
216 001
19 194
1A
1 A 250 V (IEC)
Quick acting
5x20 mm Ceramic
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-11
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel
The Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel (1984--4282--000x) holds
three Discrete FIMs and provides marshaling panel connections for
three sets of 32 I/O points. It is marked “MULTI-FIM TERMINATION
PANEL” on the PWA.
The panel can be used in three ways:
1. Three independent (non-redundant) FIMs
2. FIM A and FIM B as a redundant pair and FIM C as a
stand-alone (non-redundant) FIM. FIM A is primary, FIM B
secondary.
3. FIM A and FIM B as an online replacement pair and FIM C as a
stand-alone (non-redundant) FIM. One FIM is required in either
the A or the B position. The other position is then available for
an online replacement. One FIM is installed in the C position.
CAUTION
You should provide overcurrent protection or current
limiting for field wires. Neither the termination panel nor
the FIM provides this protection. The current should be
limited to 1.6 amp per point. A 1.6 amp (1.0 amp IEC) fuse
can be used.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-12
Field Wiring
The Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel can be connected to up to six
Standard Remote Termination Panels by marshaling panel cables. Use
cable 1984--4299--xxxx for single FIM applications and cable
1984--4319--xxxx for redundant FIM applications. Figure 7.2.7 shows
connections for an application using FIMs A and B as a redundant pair
and FIM C as a single FIM.
Field wiring is landed on a Standard Remote Termination Panel. Wiring
methods are identical to those used for the Direct Discrete Termination
Panel. See the Service Manual (SV) writeup on that panel for details.
1984--4299--xxxx single FIM cables
FIM C Points 1--16
(Input and Output)
FIM C Points 17--32
(Input Only)
Redundant FIM A/B Points
1--16
(Input and Output)
1984--4319--xxxx redundant FIM cables
Redundant FIM A/B Points
17--32
(Input Only)
Figure 7.2.7. Field Wiring to a Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel
Strain Relief
RS3: Multipoint I/O
For strain relief, route the field wires through the fingers of the wire
manager assemblies (1984-4152-0003). To ease the task of routing
wires, the top pair of wire manager assemblies are factory-mounted and
the remaining assemblies are shipped loose. As you progress through
the wiring, mount the assemblies using the 1/4-inch fasteners provided.
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-13
Communication Wiring
One communication line is connected to a communication port for each
FIM. Port A (J581) supports FIM A, Port B (J582) supports FIM B, and
Port C (J583) supports FIM C. The communication line used
determines the panel slot address. Connector J587 is reserved for
future use.
When redundant operation of FIMs A and B is required, FIM A (primary)
must have an odd-numbered communication line and FIM B
(secondary) must have the next higher even numbered line.
When online replacement operation of FIMs A and B is required, one
communication line is connected to Port A or Port B. Jumper HD12
must be ON to connect Port A and Port B.
In either case, a communication line is connected to Port C for FIM C.
Label
Label holders are provided to record the address of FIMs A, B, and C.
Write the FIM address on the label next to the FIM.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-14
Jumpers
Jumpers HD1, HD2, and HD3 specify the termination panel address (A,
B, C, or D) for FIMs A, B, and C. The address should be set to A when
possible to get the highest scan rate. The factory sets each FIM for
address A. Only one jumper is allowed in positions A--D. There is also
a jumper in position F, which is reserved for a future application.
Jumpers HD4 through HD8 control redundancy or online replacement
operation of FIMs A and B. They can be “parked” at 1--2 for normal
operation or moved to 2--3 for redundant FIM operation.
Jumpers HD9, HD10, and HD11 provide a return path for the loop or
supply power for intrinsically safe barriers. Only two configurations are
allowed; any other configuration can cause damage to the FIM.
WARNING
Remove power from the panel before moving jumpers on
HD9, 10, or 11. The FIM can be damaged if 1-- 8 is ON when
any of the other positions are ON.
For normal loop operation, install the three jumpers in positions 2--7,
3--6, and 4--5 (1--8 is open). For intrinsically safe barriers, only 1--8 is
installed. The other two jumpers can be parked by placing them
horizontally across the other pins as shown on the PWA.
Jumper HD12 allows connection of communication ports A and B to
support online replacement of FIMs A and B. For normal operation, all
jumpers are removed from HD12. For online replacement of FIMs A
and B, jumpers are placed on 1--12, 3--10, and 5--6.
Table 7.2.3 shows jumper values.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-15
Table 7.2.3. Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers
Jumper
Value
Effect
HD1, 2, 3
A ON
FIM address A (factory setting)
NOTE: Only one jumper is allowed in positions A--D
B ON
FIM address B
C ON
FIM address C
D ON
FIM address D
E OFF
Not used
F ON
Factory setting, do not move
1--2
Normal individual FIM operation
2--3
Redundant operation of FIMs A and B
HD4--8
HD9, 10, 11
1--8 OFF
2--7 ON
3--6 ON
Normal loop operation
4--5 ON
1--8 ON
2--7 OFF
4--5 OFF
Remove power from the panel before moving jumpers on HD9, 10, or
11. The FIM can be damaged if 1--8 is ON when any of the other
positions are ON.
OFF
No jumpers)
Communication Ports A and B are independent (Normal case)
(stand-alone or redundant operation of FIMs A and B)
3--6 OFF
HD12
1--12 ON
3--10 ON
5--6 ON
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Used with Intrinsically Safe barriers
CAUTION
Communication Ports A and B are connected
(for online replacement operation of FIMs A and B)
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-16
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel
The Isolated Discrete Termination Panel set consists of two panels
connected by a short cable. The pair supports 32 discrete I/O points.
The “A” panel supports 16 input/output points (1--16). The “B” panel
supports 16 input-only points (17--32). Solid state relay modules are
used for input and output control. The panels are CE approved when
used with the MDIOL FIM.
The “A” panel (1984--4121--000x) is marked “ISOLATED DISCRETE
TERMINATION PANEL A” on the PWA.
The “B” panel (1984--4124--000x) is marked “ISOLATED DISCRETE
TERMINATION PANEL B” on the PWA.
The panels use the MDIOL Low-side switching Field Interface Module
(FIM) (10P53520006) which is CE approved. The termination panel is
keyed so only a low-side switching FIM can be installed.
An “A” panel can be used alone if no more than 16 points are required
and the online replacement or redundant FIM feature are not required.
The “B” panel must always be used in conjunction with an “A” panel
because there is no provision for connecting a communication line to
the “B” panel.
The panels are normally connected by a (1984--4186--00xx) flat cable.
The panels can also be mounted side by side using a round cable no
more than 152 cm (5 feet) long. Cable 1984--0498--0005 can be used.
Each panel has a socket for one MDIOL FIM. Either socket can be
used for a single FIM. The socket on the other panel is then available
for an online replacement if needed.
For redundant operation, the primary FIM is inserted in the “FIM A”
socket (“A” panel) and the redundant FIM is inserted in the “FIM B”
socket (“B” panel).
Figure 7.2.8 shows the Isolated Discrete Termination Panels.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-17
STATUS LEDS
FIM A
THIS END
SSR2
SSR4
SSR6
SSR8
SSR10
SSR12
SSR14
SSR16
J564
SSR1
F1
F2
SSR3
F3
F4
SSR5
F5
TB1
F6
SSR7
F7
SSR9
F9
F8
TB3
SSR11
SSR13
F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16
TB5
TBA
TBB
TBC
TB7
TB4
TB2
SSR15
TB6
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel A
HD1
STATUS LEDS
FIM B
THIS END
SSR2
SSR4
SSR6
SSR8
SSR10
SSR12
SSR14
SSR16
SSR1
SSR3
SSR5
SSR7
SSR9
SSR11
SSR13
SSR15
J565
J969
F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28 F29 F30 F31 F32
TB8
TB10
TB9
TB12
TB11
TBC
TB14
1
2
TB13
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel B
NOTE: SSR = Solid State Relay
Figure 7.2.8. Isolated Discrete Termination Panels
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-18
Field Wiring
Each panel supports 16 points in four groups of four points. Each group
has a group supply line and a group return line. The groups may be
entirely isolated so that each group may be used as desired. The
terminals will accommodate one wire sized 4 to 0.34 mm2 (12 to 22
AWG).
A pictorial representation and a circuit diagram of a typical group is
shown in Figure 7.2.9. The group supplies and returns are on the
four-position terminal blocks (TB 2, 4, 6 on panel A; TB 9, 11, 13 on
panel B). Note that the group supply and group return lines terminate at
the ends of the group. This makes it easy to daisy chain groups
together.
Field wiring goes to the 16-position terminal blocks:
D
Group supply and fuse (1, 5, 9, 13)
D
Solid-State Relay + (3, 7, 11, 15)
D
Solid-State Relay -- (2, 6, 10, 14)
D
Group return (4, 8, 12, 16)
The panels are shipped with all of the group supplies (1--2) jumpered
together and the group returns (3--4) jumpered together. The A panel is
shipped with All SSR “+” terminals jumpered to the group supply (1--3,
5--7, 9--11, 13--15) to make the SSRs available as output devices. The
B panel is shipped with all SSR “--” terminals jumpered to the group
return (2--4, 6--8, 10--12, 14--16) to make the SSRs available as input
devices.
Strain Relief
RS3: Multipoint I/O
For strain relief, route the field wires through the fingers of the wire
manager assemblies (1984-4152-0003). To ease the task of routing
wires, the top pair of wire manager assemblies are factory-mounted and
the remaining assemblies are shipped loose. As you progress through
the wiring, mount the assemblies using the 1/4-inch fasteners provided.
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-19
LVD Wiring Guidelines
The MDIO Isolated Discrete Termination Panels A and B (part numbers
01984--4121--0002 and 01984--4124--0002) are designed to provide a
certain level of isolation between field and system, between other points
on the same individual term panels and between field points of the two
term panels. The following is a guideline for using these termination
panels in compliance with the Low Voltage Directive (LVD).
Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) is no more than 30 volts rms, 42.4
volts peak and 60 volts DC. Hazardous voltage is any voltage above
SELV levels.
Use the following of rules to guide the installation of the MDIO Isolated
Termination Panels A and B to ensure that termination panel installation
and application result in safe operation.
These rules apply to Term Panel A and Term Panel B independently of
each other. When considering these rules, remember that different
types of voltages will result in different relationships to each other. That
is, AC versus DC, opposite polarities of DC, and different phases of AC.
Field I/O Hazardous Voltage Applications
The applications at hazardous voltages described below are commonly
for AC circuits. However, they also include DC circuits of hazardous
levels.
Application with
Hazardous Voltage
150 to 300 Volts
Applications where any field I/O termination point is a hazardous
voltage above 150 volts but not more than 300 volts:
You may:
D
Mix only hazardous voltage I/O circuits in this range if they are all
AC or all DC voltages and the same phase or polarity,
respectively.
You must not:
D
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Mix any SELV I/O circuit on the same term panel that has
hazardous voltage I/O circuits above 150 volts.
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-20
Applications with
Hazardous Voltage
150 Volts or Less
Applications where any field I/O termination point is a hazardous
voltage of 150 volts or less:
You may:
D
D
D
D
Mix SELV I/O circuits with hazardous voltage I/O circuits where
the numerical sum of the highest SELV voltage (AC or DC) and
highest hazardous voltage (AC or DC) does not exceed 150 volts
(Vrms + VDC £ 150 V).
Mix hazardous AC voltage I/O circuits of different phases,
including 180° (split phase).
Mix hazardous DC voltage I/O circuits of opposite polarities.
Mix hazardous AC and DC voltage I/O circuits, provided the sum
of the worst case potential difference between the two voltages is
less than 300 volts.
You must not:
D
Connect SELV I/O circuits to the same term panel that has
hazardous voltage I/O circuits connected if the numerical sum of
the highest SELV (AC or DC) and highest hazardous voltages
(AC or DC) is greater than 150 volts, regardless of phase or
polarity.
Field I/O Voltage Applications with SELV Only
Applications where all field I/O circuits are SELV levels:
You may:
D
D
Mix any variety of SELV I/O circuits using separate power feed
for each point.
Mix SELV I/O circuits in four groups of 4 points each, with each
group having a common power feed.
Maximum Current
NOTE: Loop power feed terminals (TB2, TB4, and TB6 on Term Panel
A and TB9, TB11, and TB13 on Term Panel B) are used to feed the bus
that provides the fused power available on each group of 4 point sets.
1. Maximum current through any single I/O point set:
RS3: Multipoint I/O
—
3.0 amps at 25°C ambient temperature.
—
2.0 amps at 40°C ambient temperature.
—
1.2 amps at 70°C ambient temperature.
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-21
2. 20 amps is the maximum current permitted through a single
power Loop Power feed terminal.
3. Current limit through any group of 4 I/O points is 10 amps when
using a common loop power feed terminal.
—
If 2 groups of 4 I/O points use the same power feed, the loop
power feed terminal should be between the two groups
sharing the feed. This permits 10 amps to each group to the
left and to the right of the feed point.
—
If 3 groups of 4 I/O points use the same power feed, the total
current feeding the adjacent groups to the left or to the right of
the loop power feed terminal shall not exceed 10 amps in
each direction.
—
If all I/O termination points are sharing a common loop power
feed terminal, the field power must be supplied to the centermost loop power feed terminal set. The total current to the
left and to the right of the feed terminal shall not exceed 10
amps for either direction.
4. Field I/O points are rated for 3 amperes or less, depending on
the solid state relay used.
Termination Panel to Termination Panel Field I/O Points
Termination Panel A and Termination Panel B are treated independently
from each other in the rules listed above. Therefore, where Termination
Panel A and Termination Panel B are both used as a set, one of the
termination panels may contain SELV field I/O circuits while the other
contains only hazardous voltage field I/O circuits up to 300 volts.
I/O Wiring for All Isolated Discrete Termination Panels
Field wiring used for field I/O circuits of hazardous voltage must have a
minimum insulation rating twice that of the working voltage of the circuit.
Extended Ambient Temperature Environments
Contact the Fisher-Rosemount Systems factory for assistance with
thermal loading requirements when installing the Isolated Discrete
Termination Panels A and B and High Density Isolated Discrete
Termination Panels in I/O cabinets with extended ambient temperatures.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-22
TB3
TB4
TB2
Top View
1
1
2
3
3
5
7
9
11 13 15
4
1
2 4
6
2
3
4
8 10 12 14 16
Side View
Group Supply
F6
2
1
F7
3
5
F8
+
4
6
8
SS82
-10
12
2
+
SSR7
--
1
15
+
SSR6
-2
13
11
+
SSR5
3 4
9
7
F9
-14
16
3
4
Group Return
Figure 7.2.9. Field Wiring Terminals
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-23
Input Points
Input points are available on both panels as shown in Figure 7.2.10.
The input Solid-State Relay acts as a sensor.
Contact-Closure
Input Point
1
3
5
--
+
2
4
No
Description
No
Description
1
Fuse and group supply (terminals 1, 5, 9, 13)
4
Group return (terminals 4, 8, 12, 16)
2
Solid-State Relay -- (terminals 2, 6, 10, 14)
5
Input contact closure
3
Solid-State Relay + (terminals 3, 7, 11, 15)
Field-Powered
Input Point
1
3
--
+
2
5
No
4
Description
No
Description
1
Fuse and group supply (unused)
4
Group return (unused)
2
Solid-State Relay -- (terminals 2, 6, 10, 14)
5
Input contact closure including power source
3
Solid-State Relay + (terminals 3, 7, 11, 15)
Figure 7.2.10. Input Point Wiring
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-24
Output Points
Output points are available only on panel A. They can be system or
field powered as shown in Figure 7.2.11. The output Solid-State Relay
acts as a switch.
System-Powered
Output Point
1
3
--
+
2
5
No
4
Description
No
Description
1
Fuse and group supply (terminals 1, 5, 9, 13)
4
Group return (terminals 4, 8, 12, 16)
2
Solid-State Relay -- (terminals 2, 6, 10, 14)
5
Output load
3
Solid-State Relay + (terminals 3, 7, 11, 15)
Field-Powered
Output Point
1
3
--
+
2
5
No
4
Description
No
Description
1
Fuse and group supply (unused)
4
Group return (unused)
2
Solid-State Relay -- (terminals 2, 6, 10, 14)
5
Output load including power source
3
Solid-State Relay + (terminals 3, 7, 11, 15)
Figure 7.2.11. Output Point Wiring
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-25
Labels
A replaceable label is provided on each Isolated Termination Panel
assembly (1984--4195--0002 for panel “A”, 1984--4195--0003 for panel
“B”). Figure 7.2.12 shows the panel “A” label. The label provides space
at the end to record the panel ControlFile Node address (1--32),
Controller Slot Address (A--H), Termination Panel (Card Cage) address
(A--D), and Communication Line (1--8). There is provision for recording
both the Primary and Redundant communication line addresses. The
body of the label provides for recording the group supply sources
(V1--V4) and each point’s field connection (1--16, or 17--32). The
underside of the label holder carries a schematic of the field wiring
terminations.
1
2
3 4
V1 V2 5
6
7
8 V2 V3 9 10 11 12 V3 V4 13 14 15 16
CF NODE
CNTRLR
TP ADDR
COMM
PRIM RED
Figure 7.2.12. Label, Isolated Discrete Termination Field Wiring Panel A
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-26
Solid State Relays
Solid State Relays, also called Optical Isolator Modules, (55P0427xxxx
or G12243--00xx) are solid-state, optically isolated relays that define
each contact point as an input or an output. Care must be taken to
make sure the proper type of module is installed because input and
output modules are mechanically interchangeable. Table 7.2.4 shows a
list of available modules.
Table 7.2.4. Solid state Relays
*
Part
Number
55P--0427--
Model
Function
Output
Contact*
Voltage
Color
--0005
IAC5A
AC Input
None
180--280 VAC/DC
Yellow
--0006
IDC5
DC Input
None
10--32 VDC
White
--0008
IAC5
AC Input
None
90--140 VAC/DC
Yellow
--0009
ODC5
DC Output
N.O.
5--60 VDC
Red
--0010
ODC5A
DC Output
N.O.
5--200 VDC
Red
--0011
OAC5A5
AC Output
N.C.
24--280 VAC
Black
--0013
OAC5--A
OAC5--1
AC Output
N.O.
24--280 VAC
Black
--0014
IDC5G
IDC5N
DC Input
None
35--60 VAC/DC
White
Normally open (N.O.) contacts are open when the block output is FALSE (or 1). Normally closed (N.C.)
contacts are closed when the block output is FALSE (or 0).
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-27
Jumpers
Jumper HD1 specifies the card cage address (A--D) of the termination
panel. The slot address is specified by the communication line. The
factory sets HD1 for card cage A.
Positions E and F specify the communication rate used. Position F
specifies the standard RS3 rate of 10.4 kb. This jumper should not be
moved.
NOTE: Both jumpers on HD1 must be set the same on panels “A” and
“B”.
Jumper HD2 on panel “A” specifies normal or redundant operation of
both the “A” and “B” panels. Both jumpers at HD2 must be removed to
allow FIM redundancy. Table 7.2.5 shows jumper values.
Table 7.2.5. Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers
A
Card cage A (factory setting)
B
Card cage B
HD1
C
Card cage C
(Panels “A” & “B”)
D
Card cage D
E
Not used
F
Factory setting, do not move
HD2
Both Jumpers ON
Normal single FIM operation
with online replacement capability
(Panel “A” only)
Both Jumpers OFF
Redundant FIM operation
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-28
Fuses
There are 16 fuses on each panel to protect the field circuits. The
factory installs 3.15 amp fuses (IEC) in all positions. Other fuses
appropriate for the load protected can be installed but must not exceed
a 4 amp UL/CSA rating. If other fuses are installed, the fuse rating
should be marked on the point’s data label. Table 7.2.6 shows fuse
data.
Table 7.2.6. Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Fuses
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Wickmann
Series
Characteristics
F1
to
F32
G5394--3150--0005
216 3.15
19 194
3.15 A
3.15 A 250 V (IEC)
Quick acting
5x20 mm Ceramic
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-29
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel
The High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel
(1984--4167--000x) services 32 discrete I/O points: 16 input/output
points (1--16) and 16 input-only points (17--32). Miniature solid state
relay modules are used for input and output control. The panel is CE
approved when MDIOL FIMs are used.
The panel is marked “HIGH DENSITY ISOLATED DISCRETE
TERMINATION PANEL” on the PWA.
The panel has a socket for one MDIOL FIM (10P53520006). Online
replacement and redundant FIM operation is not supported by this
panel. There are no fuses supplied for the field wiring.
Figure 7.2.13 shows the High Density Isolated Discrete Termination
Panel.
CAUTION
Solid state relays or modules may be hot. Avoid touching
these surfaces with bare skin.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-30
J591
Communication Port A
TBA
Power Strip
J970
Power Jack
FIM Address Label
J592
Communication Port B
Solid State Relay 32
Connector #2 (J560)
Points 17--32
(Input Only)
FIM
Connector #1 (J559)
Points 1--16
(Input and Output)
Solid State Relay 1
HD1,
Address Jumpers
A--F
Solid State Relay 4
Figure 7.2.13. High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-31
Field Wiring
Field wiring is landed on a Standard Remote Termination Panel, which
is connected to the termination panel with a marshaling panel cable.
Figure 7.2.14 shows the cabling. Connector #1 (J559) supports
input/output points 1--16. Connector #2 (J560) supports input points
17--32. Use Marshaling Panel Cable 1984--4298--xxxx for standard
applications and 1984--4345--xxxx for NEC/CSA applications.
The marshaling panel cable pin-out is shown in Table 7.2.7. Field wiring
is connected the same way as for the Isolated Discrete Termination
Panel.
1984--4298--xxxx
Marshaling Panel Cable
Points 17--32
(Input Only)
Points 1--16
(Input and Output)
1984--4298--xxxx
Marshaling Panel Cable
High Density Isolated
Discrete Termination
Panel
Standard Remote
Termination Panel
Figure 7.2.14. Field Wiring to a Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel
Strain Relief
RS3: Multipoint I/O
For strain relief, route the field wires through the fingers of the wire
manager assemblies (1984-4152-0003). To ease the task of routing
wires, the top pair of wire manager assemblies are factory-mounted and
the remaining assemblies are shipped loose. As you progress through
the wiring, mount the assemblies using the 1/4-inch fasteners provided.
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-32
Table 7.2.7. Marshaling Panel Cable Pin-Out
Point
Signal Pin
Return Pin
Point
Signal Pin
Return Pin
1/17
D2
Z2
9/25
D18
Z18
2/18
D4
Z4
10/26
D20
Z20
3/19
D6
Z6
11/27
D22
Z22
4/20
D8
Z8
12/28
D24
Z24
5/21
D10
Z10
13/29
D26
Z26
6/22
D12
Z12
14/30
D28
Z28
7/23
D14
Z14
15/31
D30
Z30
8/24
D16
Z16
16/32
D32
Z32
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-33
LVD Wiring Guidelines
The following is a set of rules that guide the installation of the High
Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel with Standard Remote
Termination Panels. The purpose is to ensure that installation and
application of these devices result in safe operation.
The rules below apply to the High Density Isolated Termination Panel;
two groups of points of 16 points each (1--16 and 17--32) independently
of each other, just as Isolated Discrete Termination Panel A is
considered independently from Isolated Discrete Termination Panel B in
a previous section. Each group of 16 points employs a Standard
Remote Termination Panel to terminate the field wiring. A
multiconductor cable with DIN connector on each end is used to
connect the Standard Remote Termination panel to a DIN connector on
the High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel. Two such
connections provide connectivity for all 32 Discrete I/O points.
Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) is no more than 30 volts rms, 42.4
volts peak and 60 volts DC. Hazardous voltage is any voltage above
SELV levels.
Also, when considering these rules, remember that different types of
voltages result in different relationships to each other. That is, AC
versus DC, opposite polarities of DC, and different phases of AC.
Field I/O Hazardous Voltage Applications
The applications at hazardous voltages described below are commonly
for AC circuits. However, some applications may include DC circuits of
hazardous levels. Therefore, both have been included.
Applications with
hazardous voltage
150 to 300 volts
Applications where any field I/O termination point within a group of 16
points (1--16 or 17--32) is a hazardous voltage above 150 volts, but not
more than 300 volts:
You may mix hazardous voltage I/O circuits in this voltage range if they
are all AC or all DC voltages and the same phase or polarity,
respectively, within that group of 16 points.
You must not mix any SELV I/O circuit in the same group of 16 points
(1--16 or 17--32) with hazardous voltage I/O circuits where the numerical
sum of the SELV level and hazardous voltage is greater than 150 volts,
regardless of phase or polarity.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-34
Applications with
hazardous voltage
150 volts or less
Applications where any field I/O termination point within the same group
of 16 points (1--16 or 17--32) has a hazardous voltage of 150 volts or
less:
You may:
D
D
D
D
Mix SELV I/O circuits with hazardous voltage I/O circuits, within
that group of 16 points, where the numerical sum of the highest
SELV level (AC or DC) and highest hazardous voltage (AC or
DC) does not exceed 150 volts. (Vrms + VDC (150 volts).
Mix hazardous AC voltage I/O circuits of different phases,
including 180°.
Mix hazardous DC voltage I/O circuits of opposite polarities.
Mix hazardous AC and DC voltage I/O circuits, provided the sum
of the worst case potential difference between the two voltages is
less than 300 volts.
You must not connect SELV I/O circuits within the same group of 16
points where hazardous voltage I/O circuits are also connected if the
numerical sum of the highest SELV (AC or DC) and highest hazardous
voltage (AC or DC) is greater than 150 volts, regardless of phase or
polarity.
Field I/O Voltage Applications with SELV Only
Where all field I/O circuits are SELV levels in a group of 16 points (1--16
or 17--32):
You may:
D
Mix any variety of SELV I/O circuits within that group of 16 points.
D
Mix any variety of SELV I/O circuits on all 32 points.
Maximum Current
The maximum current for any field I/O point on the termination panel
(points 1--32) is 1 amperes or less at 50_C term panel ambient
temperature depending upon the type of circuit and solid state relay
used. Input Modules are limited to less by their internal resistance.
D
D
RS3: Multipoint I/O
All points that use Output Modules, except 240 VAC, are limited
to 1 amp.
Points for 240 VAC Output Modules are limited to 0.5 amp.
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-35
Group-to-Group Field I/O Points
One group of 16 field I/O points (1--16 or 17--32) may contain SELV
levels while the other group of 16 field I/O points contains only
hazardous voltages up to 300 volts.
Each of the two group of 16 field I/O points (1--16 and 17--32) may
contain only hazardous voltages up to 300 volts, as described in “A.”
above. Because the two groups are independent up to 300 volts:
D
D
D
Both groups may be contain hazardous AC field I/O circuits up to
300 volts in each group with the circuits of one group being of a
different phase from the circuits of the other group.
Both groups may contain hazardous DC field I/O circuits up to
300 volts in each group with the circuits of one group being of
opposite polarity from the circuits of the other group.
One group may contain all DC voltages up to 300 volts while the
other group contains all AC voltages up to 300 volts.
Field Wiring for High Density Termination Panels
The field I/O wiring terminates at a Standard Remote Termination Panel
that can terminate up to 16 field I/O points (1--16 or 17--32). Two
Standard Remote Termination Panels, one for each group of 16 field I/O
points (1--16 and 17--32), are required to connect all 32 field I/O points
of the High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel.
The user shall supply overcurrent protection in-line for each field I/O
point at a location prior to connection of field I/O wiring to the Standard
Remote Termination Panel. Overcurrent protection consists of a fuse
and fuse holder approved for the application. To maintain proper
protection, the fuse is to have a current rating of not more than 3.15
amps @ 250 volts IEC, or not more than 4 amps @ 250 volts CSA or
UL, as applicable. The fuse holder is to have a minimum rating the
same as that of the fuse.
Thermal Considerations
240 VAC Solid State Relays, also called Optical Isolator Modules,
should only used if every other module is installed on the High Density
Isolated Termination Panel. This is needed to avoid exceeding the
thermal specifications of the module.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-36
I/O Wiring for All Isolated Discrete Termination Panels
Field wiring used for field I/O circuits of hazardous voltage is to have a
minimum insulation rating twice that of the working voltage of the circuit.
Extended Ambient Temperature Environments
Contact the Fisher-Rosemount Systems factory for assistance with
thermal loading requirements when installing the Isolated Discrete
Termination Panels A and B, and High Density Isolated Discrete
Termination Panels in I/O cabinets with extended ambient temperatures.
Label
Write the FIM address on the label and insert it in the label holder.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-37
Jumpers
Jumper HD1 specifies the termination panel address (A--D) of the panel.
The slot address is specified by the communication line. The factory
sets HD1 for address A.
Positions E and F specify the communication rate used. Position F
specifies the standard RS3 rate of 10.4 kb. This jumper should not be
moved.
Only two jumpers can be in place on HD1, one for the panel address
and one in position F.
Position 2--3 is ON. Position 1--2 is reserved for future use. Table 7.2.8
shows jumper values.
Table 7.2.8. High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Address
Jumpers
Position
A
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Effect
Termination panel address is A
(factory setting) (2--3 is ON)
B
Termination panel address is B
C
Termination panel address is C
D
Termination panel address is D
E
Not used
F
Factory setting, do not move
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-2-38
Solid State Relays
Miniature solid state relays, also called Optical Isolator Modules,
(G60350--xxxx) are solid-state, optically isolated relays that define each
contact point as an input or an output. See Table 7.2.9 for a listing of
the available units.
NOTE: Care must be taken to make sure that the proper type of
module is installed because input and output modules are mechanically
interchangeable.
CAUTION
The solid state relays can be hot enough to cause serious
burns.
Table 7.2.9. Solid State Relays
Part Number
G60350--
Model
Function
Output
Contact
Voltage
Color
0001
70M--IAC5--A
AC Input
None
180--280 VAC
Yellow
0002
70M--IDC5
DC Input
None
10--32 VDC
White
0003
70M--IAC5
AC Input
None
90--140 VAC
Yellow
0004
70M--ODC5
DC output
NO
5--60 VDC
Red
0007
70M--OAC5--A
AC output
NO
24--280 VAC
Black
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SP: 7-3-1
Section 3:
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
This section describes installing the:
D
D
MAIO16 Termination Panels
4--20 mA
10P54770001 (field wires landed on panel)
4--20 mA
10P54770002 (field wires landed on an MIO
marshaling panel)
Loop Power Module (LPM)
1984--4398--0001 or
10P57070001
MAIO16 FIMs
4--20 mA Input
10P54040004 or
10P57700005
4--20 mA Output
10P54080004
MAI32 Termination Panels
4--20 mA
10P53490001 (field wires landed on panel)
4--20 mA
10P53490002 (field wires landed on an MIO
marshaling panel)
MAI32 FIM
4--20 mA (32 Input Points)
10P53190004
The MAIO16 panel can serve 16 input points or 16 output points
depending on the FIM used. The MAI32 panel serves 32 input points.
Multipoint Analog I/O is used to read and control analog I/O points
(4--20 mA). It allows location of the I/O electronics Field Interface
Module (FIM) at the field wiring termination panel. The termination
panel can be mounted where the user desires (within communication
wiring length limits).
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-2
MAIO16 Termination Panel
This section covers installation of the:
D
MAIO16 4--20 mA Termination Panel:
with field terminals
with field terminals and
marshaling panel connector
D
Loop Power Module (LPM)
D
MAIO16 Field Interface Module (FIM):
4--20 mA Input 16 Point
4--20 mA Output 16 Point
10P54770001
10P54770002
1984--4398--0001or
10P57070001
10P54040004or
10P57700005
10P54080004
The panel is CE approved.
Figure 7.3.1 shows the panel. Table 7.3.1 lists the figure callouts.
I/O Points
The panel supports 16 analog input points or 16 analog output points.
Field wiring is landed directly on the --0001 panel using terminal blocks
TB1 through TB16. A multi-conductor cable and a remote marshaling
panel is used with the --0002 panel to land the field wiring at a remote
location.
A three-position terminal (+, --, and S) is used to connect field wiring to
the panel. All of the field wire shields are connected together within the
panel. TB18 provides a way to connect all field wire shields to the panel
chassis ground or to leave them floating.
Loop Power
A locally grounded source of loop power is required unless all points on
the panel are self-powered inputs. Loop power can be supplied by a
Loop Power Module (LPM) or from an external DC source with nominal
voltage from 24 to 28V. At no time may the loop power voltage exceed
29 VDC. A second LPM can be used to provide backup to the first LPM.
If the LPM is used with redundant FIMs, two LPMs are required.
Labels
A replaceable label (1984--4195--0010) is provided on top of the
termination panel label holder assembly. The label provides space at
the end to record the ControlFile Node address, Controller Slot
Address, Termination Panel (FIM) address (A--D), and Communication
Line. There is provision for recording both the primary and redundant
communication line addresses. The body of the label provides for
recording each point’s field connection (1--16) and the source of
external loop power (V+, V--).
Keying
The termination panel is keyed to prevent installation of any other type
of FIM. The keying does not prevent installing an input FIM when an
output FIM is desired. An alarm will be generated if an Analog Input
Block (AIB) finds an output FIM or an Analog Output Block (AOB) finds
an input FIM.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
9
RS3: Multipoint I/O
HD17
8
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
HD4
TB5
HD5
TB6
HD6
TB7
HD7
TB8
HD8
TB9
HD9
TB10
HD10
TB11
HD11
TB12
HD12
11
HD3
TB13
HD13
TB22
TB14
HD14
TB21
TB15
HD15
TB16
HD16
12
HD2
J597
TB17 TB18
17
HD1
TB20
16
TB19
LPM2
PORT B
HD 18
N HD 19
R
15
FISHER--ROSEMOUNT
FIM B
10
N
R
PORT A
13
FISHER--ROSEMOUNT
PORT C
SP: 7-3-3
1
2
14
3
4
5
6
17
ADDRESS
7
Figure 7.3.1. MAIO16 Termination Panel
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-4
Table 7.3.1. MAIO16 Termination Panel Components
No.
Description
No.
1
TBA Power Strip: For panel DC supply using
stranded wire. Allows daisy chaining of DC
power and access to panel chassis ground.
10
FIM A (J593): Input or Output FIM.
2
Power Jack (J974): For panel DC supply
using a 1984--0158--xxxx cable.
11
FIM B (J594): Optional redundant Input or
Output FIM.
3
TB18: Connects all field wiring shields (SH)
to chassis ground (CH) when jumpered.
12
LPM 2 (J596): Optional second Loop Power
Module.
4
TB17: External loop power terminal.
V+ is loop power pos. V-- is loop power neg.
13
Port C (J598): Not used.
5
TB1--TB16: Field wiring terminals for points
1--16 (+, --, shield).
14
Port A (J599): Odd-numbered
communication line for FIM A.
6
Marshaling panel connector (J597): Installed
on --0002 panel only.
15
HD18--HD19: FIM redundancy jumpers.
7
HD1--HD16: Point Type jumpers. Control the
supply of loop power to each field point.
16
Port B (J600): Even-numbered
communication line for redundant FIM B.
8
LPM 1 (J595): Loop Power Module.
17
9
HD17 Panel (Card Cage): Address
(A, B, C, or D).
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Description
Loop power supply jumpers TB19, TB20,
TB21 and TB22. Jumper at TB21 shown in
“holder” position. Jumper at TB22 shown in
the “fully installed” position.
position
CAUTION: SEE Loop Power SECTION
FOR INFORMATION ON PROPER
PLACEMENT OF JUMPERS FOR ALL
LOOP POWER OPTIONS.
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-5
MAIO Termination Panel Installation
See 7-1-1, Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring, for installation,
panel addressing, power wiring, communication wiring, redundancy, and
online replacement information.
CAUTION
Operation of the panel depends on the type of FIM (input or
output) installed. Be careful to install the correct type FIM
and be sure that both FIMs of a redundant pair are of the
correct type.
Loop Power
Loop Power can be supplied in any one of three ways:
1. Loop Power Module(s)
This option is used when the FIM and loop power are supplied by
the RS3 system DC bus or any DC supply unsuitable for direct
loop power.
In this case, loop power is derived from system power applied at
TBA Power Strip through single or redundant Loop Power
Module(s). A second LPM can be used to provide backup to the
first LPM.
When using one or two LPMs, remove all four jumpers at TB19
through TB22. Also install a short wire jumper from the V-terminal of TB17 to the SH terminal of TB18 to provide a loop
power ground reference, or leave a four tab jumper connecting
the V-- terminal of TB17 with the CH and SH terminals of TB18.
2. Combined FIM power and loop power
This option is used when a DC power supply such as the Remote
I/O Power Supply is located with the MAIO termination panel. A
single supply or redundant pair of supplies powers both FIMs and
loops.
In this case, loop power comes directly from a suitable power
supply (+24 to +28 VDC nominal) connected at TBA Power Strip
through loop power jumpers TB19--TB22.
For this option, all four jumpers at TB19 through TB22 must be in
the “fully installed” position with both tabs of the jumper installed
in the terminal block. The loop power supply must be ground
referenced at its negative side. At no time may the loop power
supply voltage exceed 29 VDC.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-6
3. External Loop Power
This option requires separate power wiring for FIM power and
loop power. There is no provision for redundant loop supplies on
the termination panel.
In this case a suitable power supply (+24 to +28 VDC nominal) is
connected at external loop power terminal TB17.
For this option, all four jumpers at TB19 through TB22 must be in
the “holder” position with only one tab of the jumper installed in
the terminal block. This prevents inappropriate installation of an
LPM later. The loop power supply must be ground referenced at
its negative side. At no time may the loop power supply voltage
exceed 29 VDC.
Loop power options 2 and 3 above require a ground referenced
external supply. This ground reference must be at or near the
termination panels. For supplies rated or fused at more than 7
Amps, the ground reference must be external to any termination
panel and TB17 V-- terminal should not be jumpered to TB18 CH.
Move the 4-tab jumper at TB17 and TB18, if installed, to the position
where tabs are in TB18 only and one un-installed tab is on each side
of TB18. Smaller supplies, including the Remote I/O Power Supply,
should be ground referenced at the termination panel by installing a
wire jumper from TB17 V-- to TB18 SH, or leaving the 4-tab jumper
connecting TB17 V-- to TB18 SH and TB18 CH.
A jumper (HD1--HD16) controls application of loop power to each point.
A second LPM can be installed to provide loop power redundancy.
Using the LPM with redundant FIMs requires use of redundant LPMs as
well. Figure 7.3.2 shows the LPM.
NOTE: If all input points are self-powered, there is no need for an LPM
or an external loop power supply. A local loop ground reference is still
required at the V-- terminal of TB17. In this case, place jumpers and the
V-- connection of TB17 as described in case 1 above for using an LPM.
Figure 7.3.2. Loop Power Module
The LPM draws power from the termination panel where it is installed.
It accepts redundant A and B supply voltages. Two LPMs can be used
on a termination panel to provide redundant operation when one will
supply the loop power if the other fails. They operate in a “hot standby”
mode and do not significantly share the load.
The LPM produces up to 380 mA of DC current at 25.0 to 25.5 VDC. It
is not adjustable.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-7
Field Wiring
Caution
Both signal wires of all input points must be constrained to
operate within the common mode range +29 to - 2 VDC or
erroneous results will be reported.
The condition in the CAUTION is automatically met for all system
powered inputs with an appropriate source of loop power. The ground
reference is the V-- terminal of TB17.
A self-powered input with a remote ground reference can operate with a
ground differential of up to +/-- 2 VDC. A self-powered input with no
other ground reference must be ground referenced at its point type
jumper HD1 to HD16.
Wire Landing
--0001
Field wiring is landed at terminal blocks TB1--TB16 on the --0001
MAIO16 termination panel. A Remote Marshaling Panel and cable are
used with the --0002 MAIO16 panel. The I/O Point Type jumpers
(HD1--HD16) are used with both panels. Field wiring is landed as
shown in Figure 7.3.3.
--0002
Figure 7.3.3. MAIO16 Field Wiring
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-8
The pin-out specification for the marshaling panel cable is shown in
Table 7.3.2.
Table 7.3.2. Marshaling Cable Pin-Out
Pin
DIN#
Signal
Pin
DIN#
Signal
Pin
DIN#
Signal
Pin
DIN#
Signal
1
D2
1+
10
D20
10+
33
Z2
1--
42
Z20
10--
2
D4
2+
11
D22
11+
34
Z4
2--
43
Z22
11--
3
D6
3+
12
D24
12+
35
Z6
3--
44
Z24
12--
4
D8
4+
13
D26
13+
36
Z8
4--
45
Z26
13--
5
D10
5+
14
D28
14+
37
Z10
5--
46
Z28
14--
6
D12
6+
15
D30
15+
38
Z12
6--
47
Z30
15--
7
D14
7+
16
D32
16+
39
Z14
7--
48
Z32
16--
8
D16
8+
17
B2-B30
Open
40
Z16
8--
9
D18
9+
18
B32
Shield
41
Z18
9--
Shield Grounding
All field wire shield terminals are connected together and to TB18 SH at
the termination panel. As shipped from the factory, TB18 SH and
TB18 CH are tied together and newer panels also connect this to TB17
V--. This grounds shields and loop power negative to chassis. In a few
cases where chassis ground is very noisy, the shields may need to be
tied to a quieter ground. TB18 SH may be connected to this ground. If
so, TB17 V-- should also be connected to the quieter ground.
Strain Relief
For strain relief, route the field wires through the fingers of the wire
manager assemblies (1984-4152-0003). To ease the task of routing
wires, the top pair of wire manager assemblies are factory-mounted and
the remaining assemblies are shipped loose. As you progress through
the wiring, mount the assemblies using the 1/4-inch fasteners provided.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-9
I/O Point Type
The ganged Point Type jumpers (HD1--HD16) are set to define each
point. Each jumper can be set fully to the left, centered, or fully to the
right. A point can be defined as:
D
Output
D
System-powered input
D
Self-powered input (with external ground reference)
D
Self-powered input (with ground reference at termination panel).
Figure 7.3.4 shows the field I/O point circuit. A three-position ganged
jumper is used to connect all but two of the pins. The jumper can be at
one of three positions: full left, centered, or full right.
FIM
Input or Output
Circuit
+LP
Field Wiring +
Terminal Block
--LP
--
S
Figure 7.3.4. Field I/O Point Circuit
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-10
Output Point
One of the three sources of loop power (described earlier) is required
for output points. The Output FIM distributes the power to each point.
All returns are connected to the loop power return. All Point Type
jumpers (HD1--HD16) must be set to the full left position as shown in
Figure 7.3.5.
1
--LP
(all 16 pts)
+LP
(all 16 pts)
+LP
--LP
2
3
+
--
S
4
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
Output constant-current driver in FIM
3
Field wiring terminal block
2
Jumper at full left position
4
Valve or I/P
Figure 7.3.5. MAIO16 Output Point
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-11
System-Powered
Input Point
A system-powered input point requires one of the three sources of loop
power (described earlier). The Point Type jumper (HD1--HD16) must be
set in the center as shown in Figure 7.3.6.
1
+LP
--LP
2
3
+
--
S
4
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
Input sense resistor in FIM
3
Field wiring terminal block
2
Jumper centered
4
Transmitter
Figure 7.3.6. MAIO16 System-Powered Input Point
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-12
Self-Powered
Input Point with
External Ground
Reference
A self-powered input point obtains its loop power from the transmitter or
other device. The point can be isolated from the other points by placing
the Point Type jumper (HD1--HD16) in the full left position as shown in
Figure 7.3.7. This should be done only when the loop is ground
referenced elsewhere in the loop, such as at the transmitter. Both the
negative and positive sides of the loop must remain within the +29 VDC
to --2 VDC range, relative to loop power negative TB17 V--.
CAUTION
The V-- terminal of TB17 must be tied to a suitable ground
if Loop Power Modules are used.
1
+LP
--LP
2
3
+
--
S
4
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
Input sense resistor in FIM
3
Field wiring terminal block
2
Jumper at full left position
4
Transmitter
Figure 7.3.7. MAIO16 Self-Powered Input Point with External Ground Reference
This configuration is useful when an additional device is placed in the
loop between the -- terminal and ground, or when a loop is referenced
to a positive supply, or when the loop is ground referenced at a remote
transmitter and there is some ground differential between the remote
ground and local ground. The differential must be less than 2 VDC.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-13
Self-Powered
Input Point with
Ground Reference
at Termination
Panel
A self-powered input point obtains its loop power from the transmitter or
other device. The point can be referenced to the loop power return by
placing the Point Type jumper (HD1--HD16) in the full right position as
shown in Figure 7.3.8. This jumper position should be used when there
is no other ground reference in a loop, such as when the loop is
powered by a floating supply at the field device.
1
+LP
--LP
2
+
3
--
S
4
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
Input sense resistor in FIM
3
Field wiring terminal block
2
Jumper at full right position
4
Transmitter
Figure 7.3.8. MAIO16 Self-Powered Input Point with Ground Reference at Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-14
Connecting Field Devices
Table 7.3.3 shows the 4--20 mA devices that can be connected to a
Multipoint Analog Termination Panel. The letters refer to diagrams in
Figure 7.3.9 to Figure 7.3.13.
CAUTION
To prevent equipment damage that could affect all points
on the FIM, check field wiring for appropriate voltage
before connecting it to the panel.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-15
Table 7.3.3. Device Types
Letter
in
Figure
Input or
Output
2-wire or
4-wire
Transmitter
With or w/o
Positive
Barriers
With or w/o
Other
Instruments
Power
Supply
Using Input or
Output FIM
A
input
2-wire
w/o barriers
w/o other inst.
system
Input
B
input
2-wire
w/o barriers
w/o other inst.
separate
Input
C
input
2-wire
w/o barriers
with other inst.
system
Input
D
input
2-wire
w/o barriers
with other inst.
separate
Input
E
input
2-wire
with barriers
w/o other inst.
separate
Input
F
input
2-wire
with barriers
w/o other inst.
separate
Input
G
input
2-wire
with barriers
w/o other inst.
system
Input
Not applicable
H
I
input
4-wire
w/o barriers
w/o other inst.
self
Input
J
input
4-wire
w/o barriers
with other inst.
self
Input
K
Not applicable
L
Not applicable
M
output
------------
w/o barriers
w/o other inst.
system
Output
N
output
------------
w/o barriers
with other inst.
system
Output
O
output
------------
with barriers
w/o other inst.
system
Output
P
output
------------
with barriers
w/o other inst.
system
Output
Q
output
------------
with barriers
with other inst.
system
Output
R
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Not applicable
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-16
A
B
--
--
--
--
+
+
+
+
FIELD DEVICE
TERM PANEL
FIELD DEVICE
TERM PANEL
-+
POWER
SUPPLY
------
------
input
2-wire
w/o barriers
w/o other instruments
system powered
C
input
2-wire
w/o barriers
w/o other instruments
separate power supply
D
--
--
--
--
+
+
+
+
FIELD DEVICE
TERM PANEL
FIELD DEVICE
TERM PANEL
-+
THIS LINE MAY BE
GROUNDED
-- +
-- +
OTHER
INSTRUMENT
OTHER
INSTRUMENT
POWER
SUPPLY
THIS LINE MAY BE
GROUNDED
------
input
2-wire
w/o barriers
with other instruments
system powered
------
input
2-wire
w/o barriers
with other instruments
separate power supply
Figure 7.3.9. 4--20 mA Inputs Without Barriers
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-17
E
F
POSITIVE
‘RETURN’
BARRIER
POSITIVE
‘SUPPLY’
BARRIER
+
--
+
+
-TERM PANEL
+
--
--
+
--
--
+
FIELD DEVICE
+
--
--
+
+
NOTE:
FIELD DEVICE
POSITIVE
‘SUPPLY’
BARRIER
+
POWER
SUPPLY
G
-TERM PANEL
input
2-wire
with barriers
w/o other instruments
separate power supply
-+
POWER
SUPPLY
------
+
--
--
Be sure that the loop power source
supplies adequate voltage for two
barriers.
-- input
-- 2-wire
-- with barriers
-- w/o other instruments
-- separate power supply
H
POSITIVE
BARRIER
+
--
+
+
--
+
--
--
TERM PANEL
------
FIELD DEVICE
Not Applicable to MAIO
input
2-wire
with barriers
w/o other instruments
system powered
Figure 7.3.10. 4--20 mA Inputs With Barriers
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-18
I
J
+
+
+
+
--
--
--
--
TERM PANEL
Y
TERM PANEL
Y
Y
+ --
POWER TO
TRANSMITTER
Y
POWER TO
TRANSMITTER
OTHER
INSTRUMENT
THIS LINE MAY BE
GROUNDED
------
------
input
4-wire
w/o barriers
w/o other instruments
self-powered
K
input
4-wire
w/o barriers
w/o other instruments
self-powered
L
Not applicable to MAIO
Not applicable to MAIO
Figure 7.3.11. 4--20 mA 4--Wire Inputs
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-19
M
N
--
--
--
--
+
+
+
+
TERM PANEL
TERM PANEL
THIS LINE MAY BE
GROUNDED
FIELD DEVICE
FIELD DEVICE
-- +
OTHER
INSTRUMENT
-----
-----
output
w/o barriers
with other instruments
system-powered
O
output
w/o barriers
w/o other instruments
system-powered
P
POSITIVE
‘RETURN’
BARRIER
POSITIVE
‘SUPPLY’
BARRIER
+
--
+
+
--
--
--
+
+
--
+
-+
--
TERM PANEL
TERM PANEL
+
-FIELD DEVICE
FIELD DEVICE
+
+
POSITIVE
‘SUPPLY’
BARRIER
--
-----
output
with barriers
w/o other instruments
system-powered
-----
--
output
with barriers
w/o other instruments
system-powered
Figure 7.3.12. 4--20 mA Outputs
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-20
Q
R
POSITIVE
‘SUPPLY’
BARRIER
+
--
+
+
+
--
--
TERM PANEL
-FIELD DEVICE
Not applicable to MAIO
+ --
OTHER
INSTRUMENT
-----
output
with barriers
with other instruments
system-powered
Figure 7.3.13. 4--20 mA Outputs
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-21
Labels
A replaceable label (1984--4195--0010), is provided on top of the
termination panel label holder assembly. The label provides space at
the end to record the ControlFile Node address (1--32), Controller Slot
Address (A--H), Termination Panel (FIM) address (A--D), and
Communication Line (1--8). There is provision for recording both the
primary and redundant communication line addresses. The body of the
label provides for recording each point’s field connection (1--16) and the
source of external loop power (V+, V--).
The underside of the label holder shows jumper settings,
communication line connections, and power connections.
Figure 7.3.14 shows the labels.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
RS3: Multipoint I/O
POINT 2
-- S
TB2
-- S
TB1
HD2
HD
POINT 3
-- S
TB3
POINT 4
-- S
TB4
HD4
POINT 5
-- S
TB5
HD5
POINT 6
-- S
TB6
HD6
POINT 7
-- S
TB7
HD7
POINT 8
-- S
TB8
HD8
POINT 9
-- S
TB9
HD9
+
HD12
HD13
POINT 10 POINT 11 POINT 12
-- S
-- S
-- S
TB12
TB10
TB11
HD10
HD11
+
POINT 13 POINT 14
-- S
-- S
TB13
TB14
HD14
HD15
+
POINT 15 POINT 16
-- S
-- S
TB15
TB16
HD16
FIM/LPM DC POWER
REDUNDANT SOURCES A AND B
-- S
PORT C
REDUND
EXT
LOOP
POWER
V+ V--
GROUND/
SHIELD
REF
SH CH
GROUND
SEE SERVICE MANUAL
A B RTN
A B RTN
TBA
PORT B
-- S
COMMUNICATION CONNECTION
-- S
PORT A
+
+
HD3
SINGLE FIM CONNECT ODD # COMM LINE TO PORT A
REDUNDANT FIM CONNECT ODD # COMM LINE TO PORT A
CONNECT EVEN # COMM LINE TO PORT B
+
POINT 1
HD1
JUMPER POSITION
SYSTEM POWERED INPUTS
LPM OR EXTERNAL LOOP POWERED
SELF POWERED INPUTS OR
SYSTEM POWERED OUTPUTS
SELF POWERED INPUTS
REFERED TO LOOP PWR RETURN
PRIMARY
COMM LINE
TP ADDRESS
CONTROLLER
CONTROLFILE
NODE
SP: 7-3-22
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Figure 7.3.14. MAIO16 Termination Panel Labels
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-23
Jumpers
Table 7.3.4 shows jumper values. Jumpers HD1 through HD16 control
the supply of loop power to each I/O point. Jumper HD17 controls the
card cage address of the termination panel. Legal addresses are A, B,
C, or D. Jumpers HD18 and HD19 control single FIM or redundant FIM
operation. Terminal block TB18 provides for grounding all field wiring
shields to chassis ground when TB18 SH is jumpered to CH. The panel
ships with this jumper in place. When using Loop Power Modules, a
short jumper wire must be installed from the V-- terminal of TB17 to the
SH terminal of TB18, in addition to the SH to CH jumper, or a 4-tab
jumper may be used to connect all three terminals.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-24
Table 7.3.4. MAIO Termination Panel Jumpers
Jumper
Value
Effect
HD1--HD16
Full left
Self-Powered Input Point with
external ground reference or Output
Point
Centered
System-Powered Input Point
Full right
Self-Powered Input Point with
ground reference at Termination
Panel
A at 1--2
Cage address A
(Factory setting)
B at 1--2
Cage address B
C at 1--2
Cage address C
D at 1--2
Cage address D
Both at “N” (1--2)
Normal single FIM operation
Both at “R” (2--3)
Redundant FIM operation
Requires two FIMs and two
communication lines
V--, SH and CH jumpered
(4-tab jumper installed)
Loop power negative and field
wiring shields connected to chassis
ground. Use with LPMs. (New
factory setting.)
SH to CH jumpered (4-tab
jumper straddling TB18 or
2 tab jumper installed)
Field wire shields connected to
chassis ground. Use with locally
grounded source of loop power.
(Old factory setting with 2 tab
jumper.)
SH to CH open
(Jumper removed)
Allows connecting shield to a
different ground reference than
chassis.
Jumpers fully installed,
absent, or in “holder for
loop position”.
Fully installed: Power at TBA used
for loop power. Holder position:
Loop power connected at TB17
Absent: LPMs used for loop power
HD17
HD18
HD19
TB17
TB18
TB19
TB20
TB21
TB22
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-25
LEDs
The MAIO16 FIM has 6 LEDs as shown in Table 7.3.5
Table 7.3.5. MAIO16 FIM LEDs
Meaning
LED
On: FIM Good
Flashing: FIM Inactive
(Green)
ON steady when the FIM is in normal operation.
Flashing when the FIM is disconnected from the field.
FIM Failure
(Red)
ON when FIM considers itself failed.
Flashing when the FIM is not communicating with the
Controller.
Port A Active
(Yellow)
Flashes when communication Port A is active.
Port B Active
(Yellow)
For factory use only.
Status 1
(Yellow)
Flashes steadily while the FIM operates.
Status 2
(Yellow)
Flashes a diagnostic code if the FIM is disabled and
the red LED is ON.
When the FIM boots up, the red LED goes ON, the green LED blinks
briefly and then goes ON, the red LED goes off, and the yellow “Port A”
LED begins to flash rapidly as the FIM communicates with the
Controller Processor. The yellow “Status 1” LED flashes regularly while
the FIM is in normal operation. The green LED blinks if there is no I/O
block for any point configured in the Controller Processor or if the FIM is
disconnected from the field due to redundancy operation, on-line
replacement operation, or communication failure.
If the FIM does not boot up with the green LED ON or flashing, check
the “Status 2” LED. If it flashes five times, pauses, and flashes five
times, check to see that the address jumpers are set correctly. If it is
flashing any other number, replace the FIM. Please record the number
and send it along when the FIM is returned for repair or replacement.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-26
The LPM has 2 LEDs as shown in Table 7.3.6
Table 7.3.6. LPM LEDs
LED
GOOD
(Green)
BAD
(Red)
None Lit
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Meaning
LPM functioning normally.
LPM out of specification or failed.
LPM out of specification, failed, or no input power.
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-27
MAI32 Termination Panel
This section covers installation of the:
D
D
MAI32 4--20 mA Termination Panel
with field terminals
with field terminals and
marshaling panel connector
MAI32 Field Interface Module (FIM)
10P53490001
10P53490002
10P53190004
MAI32 is used to read up to 32 4--20 mA analog input points. The FIM
is located on the field wiring termination panel. The MAI32 termination
panel can be remotely mounted within communication wiring length
limits.
Input Points
The panel supports 32 analog input points using two termination panel
addresses. The first address supports the Left Group of points
(L1--L16), the second address supports the Right Group of points
(R1--R16). An Analog Input Block (AIB) or a Smart Transmitter Input
Block (SIB) must be configured for each address. HART variables can
be addressed by configuring a Value Input Block (VIB).
Field Wiring
Wires can either be landed directly on the panel or at a remote location
using multi-conductor cables and remote marshaling panels.
Terminal blocks TB1--TB4 are used to connect field wiring to the panel.
All of the field wire shields are connected together within the panel.
TB21 provides a way to connect all field wire shields to the panel
chassis ground, tie them to an external ground, or leave them floating.
Connectors J701 and J702 are used when a remote marshaling panel is
desired. A combination of remote landing and local landing of field
wires can be used.
Loop Power
A source of loop power is required unless all points on the panel are
self-powered inputs. Loop power is supplied by an external DC source
(23 to 29 VDC) connected to TB23.
Labels
A replaceable label (1984--4195--0011) is provided on top of the
termination panel label holder assembly. The label provides space at
the end to record the ControlFile node address, the Controller slot
address, the two termination panel (FIM) addresses, and the
Communication Line number. The body of the label provides for
recording each point’s field connection and the source of external loop
power (V+, V--).
The underside of the label shows examples of field wiring.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-28
FIM Keying
The FIM and panel are keyed to prevent insertion of an incorrect FIM.
FIC Status
Screen
The Field I/O Status Screen (previously the FIC Status Screen) shows
the type of device connected to each controller. The MAI32 FIM will
have two entries, one for each cage address used. The type code is
“MAI32--x” where the “x” shows the card cage of the OTHER set of 16
points. Thus if the panel is addressed as A and C, the first entry will
show “MAI32--C” and the second will show “MAI32--A”.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-29
16
15
14
17
17
13
12
18
11
19
10
20
21
22
9
20
8
23
7
20
6
24
5
25
20
4
26
3
20
2
1
Figure 7.3.15. MAI32 Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-30
Table 7.3.7. MAI32 Termination Panel Components
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
HD33: Panel (Card Cage) address
jumpers.
14
Port B (J705): To daisy-chain the
communication line to another panel.
2
HD34: Loop power detect jumpers.
15
Port C (J704): Not used.
3
HDL1--HDL8: Point Type jumpers for
Left Points 1--8.
16
TBA Power Strip: For panel DC supply
using stranded wire. Allows daisy
chaining of DC power and access to
panel chassis ground.
4
FL1--FL8: Fuses for Left Points 1--8.
17
Power Jack (J983): For panel DC supply
using a 1984--0158--xxxx cable.
5
HDL9--HDL16: Point Type jumpers for
Left Points 9--16.
18
TB23: External loop power terminal.
6
FL9--FL16: Fuses for Left Points 9--16.
19
TB21: Connects all field wiring shields to
chassis ground when jumpered.
7
MAI32 Input FIM.
20
Shield Terminals (TB6--20): For field
wiring shields.
8
HDR1--HDR8: Point Type jumpers for
Right Points 1--8.
21
TB4: Field wiring terminals for Right
Points 9--16.
9
FR1--FR8: Fuses for Right Points 1--8.
22
Marshaling panel connector (J702)
serves Left Points 1--16.
10
HDR9--HDR16: Point Type jumpers for
Right Points 9--16.
23
TB3: Field wiring terminals for Right
Points 1--8.
11
FR9--FR16: Fuses for Right Points 9--16.
24
TB2: Field wiring terminals for Left
Points 9--16.
12
FIM LEDs.
25
Marshaling panel connector (J701)
serves Right Points 1--16.
13
Port A (J703): FIM Communication line.
26
TB1: Field wiring terminals for Left
Points 1--8.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-31
System Wiring
The MAI32 termination panel is connected to a controller in a
ControlFile via a single communication line as shown in Figure 7.3.16.
1
A
A
B
B
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
PeerWay
5
Controller in the ControlFile
2
ControlFile
6
Communication Line (shielded twisted pair)
3
Control Cable (1984--2783--xxxx)
7
MAI32 Termination Panel
4
Communication Termination Panel II
8
Field wiring (typically shielded twisted pair)
Figure 7.3.16. MAI32 System Wiring
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-32
Addressing
The MAI32 panel requires two Card Cage addresses which are set by
jumper HD33. The alphabetically lowest jumper at 1--2 specifies the
cage address for the Left Group of points (L1--L16). The next jumper at
1--2 specifies the address for the Right Group of points (R1--R16). The
parity (P) jumper must be at 1--2 to establish the correct address parity.
Use cage addresses A and B for the fastest scanning time. See
chapter 7 for more information on scanning rates. Two addresses must
be set.
Power
DC power for the panel can be supplied from the standard RS3 DC bus
or from another DC source. When you use the power jack (J983), use a
1984--0158--xxxx cable with a 2 Amp fuse in the DC Output Card.
When you use the TBA Power Strip, connect the wires to terminals “A”
and “Rtn”. Do not use both the Power Jack and the Power Strip at the
same time. The panel supports use of redundant (A/B) DC supplies.
Grounding
The panel is grounded by being fastened to a grounded surface or a
grounded DIN rail. In other cases, attach a ground wire to one of the
ground terminals on the TBA.
Communications
The single MAI32 FIM requires one communication line connected to
Port A. Port B can be used to daisy chain the communication line to
another destination. Port C is not used.
Loop Power
A source of loop power is required unless all points are self-powered
inputs. The external source of loop power must be attached to TB23.
The source must be in the range 23 to 29 VDC. The current draw will
be under 700 mA.
CAUTION
Do not use the same source to power the panel and to
supply loop power. This bypasses power isolation and can
result in field wiring faults propagating to the power
source.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-33
Field Wiring
Wire Landing
Field wiring can be landed directly at terminal blocks on the panel. TB1
and TB2 serve the Left Group of points. TB3 and TB4 serve the Right
Group. A Remote Marshaling Panel and cable can be used to land field
wires at a remote location. Connector J701 serves the Left Group of
points. Connector J702 serves the Right Group of points. Wiring can
be mixed with some points landing directly on the panel and others
landing at the remote marshaling panel. Field wiring is landed as
shown in Figure 7.3.17.
Figure 7.3.17. MAI32 Field Wiring
Shield Grounding
Field wire shields can be landed at the SHIELD terminals (TB6, 8, 10,
12, 14, 16, 18, 20). All field wire shields are connected together within
the termination panel. Jumpering Terminal Block TB21 lets you connect
all of the shields to the panel chassis ground. If TB21 is open, the
shields are connected together but are floating relative to the panel
ground. TB21 can also be used to connect the shields to an external
ground.
Strain Relief
For strain relief, route the field wires through the fingers of the wire
manager assemblies (1984-4152-0003). To ease the task of routing
wires, the top pair of wire manager assemblies are factory-mounted and
the remaining assemblies are shipped loose. As you progress through
the wiring, mount the assemblies using the 1/4-inch fasteners provided.
I/O Point Type
The Point Type jumpers (HDL1--HDL16, HDR1--HDR16) are set to
define each point. Each jumper can be set fully to the left or fully to the
right. A point can be defined as:
D
D
System-powered input
Self-powered input
Jumper fully left
Jumper fully right
NOTE: The negative (return) sides of all self-powered transmitters are
connected to the negative (return) side of the Loop Power source.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-34
Fuses
Each input point is individually fused. Do not use a fuse larger than
1/10 Amp 250 V.
A system-powered input point requires a source of loop power at TB23.
The Point Type jumper must be set fully to the left as shown in
Figure 7.3.18.
1
2
LP +
LP --
3
4
+
5
--
6
No.
Description
1
System-powered input point
2
Input sense resistor
3
Point Type Jumper set fully to the left for system-powered input
point
4
Fuse F1--F32
5
Field wiring terminal block: +, --
6
System-Powered transmitter
Figure 7.3.18. System-Powered Input Point
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-35
A self-powered input point requires no source of loop power. The return
sides of all points are connected to the Loop Power return, The Point
Type jumper must be set in the full right position as shown in
Figure 7.3.19.
1
2
LP +
LP --
3
4
+
5
--
6
No.
Description
1
Self-powered input point
2
Input sense resistor
3
Point Type Jumper set fully to the right for self-powered input point
4
Fuse
5
Field wiring terminal block: +, --
6
Self-powered transmitter
Figure 7.3.19. Self-Powered Input Point
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-36
The pin-out specification for the marshaling panel cable is shown in
Table 7.3.8.
Table 7.3.8. MAI32 Marshaling Panel Cable Pin-Out
Pin
DIN#
Signal
Pin
DIN#
Signal
Pin
DIN#
Signal
Pin
DIN#
Signal
1
D2
IN1+
10
D20
IN10+
33
Z2
IN1--
42
Z20
IN10--
2
D4
IN2+
11
D22
IN11+
34
Z4
IN2--
43
Z22
IN11--
3
D6
IN3+
12
D24
IN12+
35
Z6
IN3--
44
Z24
IN12--
4
D8
IN4+
13
D26
IN13+
36
Z8
IN4--
45
Z26
IN13--
5
D10
IN5+
14
D28
IN14+
37
Z10
IN5--
46
Z28
IN14--
6
D12
IN6+
15
D30
IN15+
38
Z12
IN6--
47
Z30
IN15--
7
D14
IN7+
16
D32
IN16+
39
Z14
IN7--
48
Z32
IN16--
8
D16
IN8+
17-31
B2-B30
Open
40
Z16
IN8--
9
D18
IN9+
32
B32
Shield
41
Z18
IN9--
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-37
LEDs
The MAI32 FIM has 6 LEDs as shown in Table 7.3.9.
Table 7.3.9. MAI32 FIM LEDs
Meaning
LED
On: FIM Good
Flashing: FIM Inactive
(Green)
ON steady when the FIM is in normal operation.
Flashing when the FIM is disconnected from the field.
FIM Failure
(Red)
ON when FIM considers itself failed.
Flashing when the FIM is not communicating with the
Controller.
Port A Active
(Yellow)
Flashes when communication Port A is active.
Port B Active
(Yellow)
For factory use only.
Status 1
(Yellow)
Flashes steadily while the FIM operates.
Status 2
(Yellow)
Flashes a diagnostic code (see Table 7.3.10) if the FIM
is disabled and the red LED is ON.
When the FIM boots up, the red LED goes ON, the green LED blinks
briefly and then goes ON, the red LED goes off, and the yellow “Port A”
LED begins to flash rapidly as the FIM communicates with the
Controller Processor. The green LED blinks if there is no I/O block
configured in the Controller Processor.
Table 7.3.10. MAIO Input “Status 2” LED Diagnostic Codes
Meaning
LED Code
RS3: Multipoint I/O
1
RAM failure.
2
Voltage failure, one or more internal voltages are out of tolerance.
3
Not assigned.
4
ADC failure.
5
Address jumpers on the Termination Panel are not set to A, B, C, or D.
6
Write or erase failure in FLASH.
7
Verification failure in BOOT or APP code.
8
Not assigned.
9
Not assigned.
10
Point diagnostic failure.
11
Not assigned.
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-3-38
Jumpers
All panel jumpers must be set for correct operation as shown in
Table 7.3.11.
NOTE: Three jumpers are required for the ADDRESS (HD33).
D
D
D
The alphabetically lowest jumper at 1--2 specifies the cage
address for the Left Group of points (L01--L16).
The next jumper at 1--2 specifies the address for the Right Group
of points (R01--R16).
The third jumper (P) must be at 1--2 to establish correct address
parity.
Table 7.3.11. MAI32 Termination Panel Jumpers
Jumper
Position
Effect
HDL01--HDL16
HDR01--HDR16
Full left
Point Type
Full right
HD33
One jumper
A--C at 1--2
Cage address for Left Group of points
L01--L16 (A is recommended)
ADDRESS
One jumper
B--D at 1--2
Cage address for Right Group of points
R01--R16 (B is recommended)
System-powered input point
Self-powered input point
P at 1--2
Required for correct parity
HD34
ENABLE
Enables detection of loop power loss
LOOP PWR
DETECT
DISABLE
Disables detection of loop power loss
TB21
SH and CH
connected
All field wiring shields are connected to panel
chassis ground
Shield
Grounding
SH and CH
open
All field wiring shields are connected together
and are floating with respect to panel chassis
ground
SH connected to
external ground
All field wiring shields are connected together
and are connected to the external ground
point
SH = Shield
CH = Chassis
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SP: 7-4-1
Section 4:
MIO Marshaling Panels
Field wiring can be landed directly on most Multipoint Discrete I/O
(MDIO) termination panels or can be connected closer to the field
devices by use of a Multipoint I/O (MIO) marshaling panel.
These panels are available:
D
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Standard Remote Termination Panel
MIO Marshaling Panels
SP: 7-4-2
Standard Remote Termination Panel
Figure 7.4.1 shows the Standard Remote Termination Panel
(1984--4344--000x) used to connect unshielded field wiring to a MDIO
termination panel. It is marked “STANDARD REMOTE TERMINATION
PANEL” on the printed wiring assembly (PWA). The panel can handle
currents up to 1 amp per point. No fuses are supplied for the field
wiring.
The panel snaps onto a standard DIN rail.
The label holder provides a place to record the address of the points
served by the panel. The panel is shipped with two sets of point labels
so the user may indicate the use of points 1--16 or 17--32.
J620
Connector to Termination Panel
Label Holder
16+ (32+)
1+ (17+)
Field Wiring Block, Positive
Field Wiring Block, Negative
1-- (17--)
16-- (32--)
Top View
1
2
1
3
2
4
3
5
4
6
5
7
6
8 9
7
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Side View
Figure 7.4.1. Standard Remote Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
MIO Marshaling Panels
SP: 7-4-3
The termination panel can be connected to a discrete I/O termination
panel with a Marshaling Panel Cable as shown in Table 7.4.1.
Table 7.4.1. Standard Remote Termination Panel, Marshaling Panel Cable
Application
Use Cable
Multi-FIM Termination Panel
1984--4299--xxxx
Multi-FIM Termination Panel, Redundant FIMs
1984--4319--xxxx
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel
1984--4298--xxxx
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel, NEC/CSA
1984--4345--xxxx
RS3: Multipoint I/O
MIO Marshaling Panels
SP: 7-4-4
RS3: Multipoint I/O
MIO Marshaling Panels
SP: 7-5-1
Section 5:
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
Operating electrical equipment in hazardous (classified) locations where
flammable gases, flammable liquids, or other combustible materials
exist requires special handling. One approach is to use equipment that
is intrinsically safe, that is, equipment where the energy supplied to the
hazardous area is not enough to ignite the materials present.
RS3
System
Normal Wires
IS BARRIER
Figure 7.5.1 shows the concept. The normal RS3 equipment is located
in the Safe (non-hazardous) Area. The device being controlled is
located in the Hazardous Area. An Intrinsically Safe Barrier, located in
the Safe Area, is used to isolate the Hazardous Area by limiting the
energy that can be sent into the area.
IS Wires
Safe Area
IS Device
Hazardous Area
Figure 7.5.1. Intrinsic Safety Example
RS3 systems are designed for connection to IS products specified by
Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. (FRSI). RS3 supports IS applications
with both MTLe Discrete and Analog IS Termination Panels if proper
installation practices are followed. Refer to RS3 Control Drawing for
Intrinsically Safe Associated Apparatus and Field Wiring as Used in
RS3 Equipment, 10P57190001, for complete recommendations and
requirements.
Standards for hazardous wiring practices include current versions of:
D
D
Europe
—
EN50014, Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive
Atmospheres: General Requirements
—
EN50020, Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive
Atmospheres: Intrinsic Safety “I”
Canada
—
RS3: Multipoint I/O
C22.1, Canadian Electrical Code Part 1
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-2
D
United States
—
ANSI/ISA RP12.6, Installation of Intrinsically Safe Systems for
Hazardous (Classified) Locations
—
NFPA 70, National Electrical Code
The rules and guidelines below apply to IS-associated RS3 equipment
and in some nations or localities, may be required by law. Where local
law or practices require deviation from these rules and guidelines, the
deviations must be reviewed by FRSI prior to implementation.
D
D
D
D
IS wiring and non-IS wiring cannot share the same cabinet cable
entry locations. In addition, IS wiring must meet one or more of
the following criteria:
—
Installed in a wireway separate from all non-IS wiring
—
Positively segregated from any non-IS wiring within an
enclosure or cable tray by means of a grounded metal
partition or an insulating partition in a wireway
—
Spaced at least 50 mm from any non-IS wiring and tied down.
The non-IS wiring must also be secured to prevent it from
violating the 50 mm spacing requirement.
Care must be taken in terminal layout and wiring methods to
prevent contact of IS and non-IS circuits. Some layouts will not
provide adequate separation if a wire becomes disconnected (for
example, when terminals are arranged one above the other). In
these cases, additional precautions such as tie-downs are
necessary.
Wiring to an IS device must be installed following the instructions
provided with each IS product. MTL provides these instructions
with their isolators.
Wire routing requirements within RS3 equipment enclosures are
provided in control drawing 10P57190001. This drawing is
included with all shipments of the MTL IS Analog Termination
Panels and MTL IS Discrete Termination Panels.
Figure 7.5.2 shows Panel A (10P5037000x). Figure 7.5.3 shows Panel
B (10P5049000x).
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-3
7
6
8
9
10
5
11
4
12
3
13
2
14
1
15
16
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
Isolator 16 -- Serves input points 31 and 32
9
Power Strip (TBD) for panel DC supply using
stranded wire (Allows daisy chaining of DC
power and access to panel chassis ground)
2
HD18 -- Common Line Fault Detect Jumper
10
Port B (TBB) -- Even-numbered
communication line for redundant FIM B
3
Silk-screen label showing relationship of
Isolators and I/O points
11
Port A (TBA) -- Odd-numbered communication
line for FIM A
4
Isolator 1 -- Serves input points 1 and 2 or
output point 1
12
HD1--HD16 -- Individual point Input/Output
and Line Fault Detect selection jumpers
5
Fuse Blown LED
13
FIM A (required)
6
Fuse -- 3.15 Amp, 250 V, IEC
14
HD17 -- Panel (Card Cage) address
(A, B, C, or D)
7
Power Jack (J636) for panel DC supply using
a 1984--0158--xxxx cable
15
Mounting holes (2) for wire Tagging Kit
8
HD20--HD21 -- FIM redundancy jumpers
16
Connector (J635) for ribbon cable to Panel B
Figure 7.5.2. MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel A
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-4
6
5
7
8
4
3
9
2
10
1
11
12
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
Fuse Blown LED
7
HD17--HD32 -- Jumpers that enable/disable
Common Line Fault Detect for the
corresponding isolator
2
Fuse -- 3.15 Amp, 250 V, IEC
8
FIM B (optional) for redundancy
3
Isolator 24 -- Serves output point 16
9
Mounting holes (2) for wire Tagging Kit
4
Silk-screen label showing relationship of
Isolators and I/O points
10
Power Jack (J982) for panel DC supply using
a 1984--0158--xxxx cable
5
Isolator 17 -- Serves output point 2
11
HD1 -- Panel (Card Cage) address
(A, B, C, or D)
6
Connector (J638) for ribbon cable to Panel A
12
Power Strip (TBD) for panel DC supply using
stranded wire (Allows daisy chaining of DC
power and access to panel chassis ground)
Figure 7.5.3. MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel B
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-5
MTL IS Termination Panel for Discrete Applications
The MTL discrete IS panel is implemented as a set:
D
MDIO MTL IS Termination Panel A
(10P5037000x)
D
MDIO MTL IS Termination Panel B
(10P5049000x)
The panels are marked “MDIO-MTLE I.S. ISOLATOR BARRIERS
TERMINATION PANEL A” and “MDIO-MTLE I.S. ISOLATOR
BARRIERS TERMINATION PANEL B” on the Printed Wiring Assembly
(PWA).
Panel A holds 16 isolators that can serve up to 32 input points (1--32),
or up to 8 odd-numbered output points (1--15) and 16 inputs, or any
other combination of inputs and outputs (up to 8 outputs). Panel B can
hold 8 isolators. These are used to serve the 8 even-numbered output
points (2--16). Panel B is required only when there are more output
points than can be served with Panel A or when FIM redundancy is
required.
NOTE: The Multipoint Discrete I/O Field Interface Module (MDIO FIM)
supports 16 input/output points (1--16) and 16 input-only points (17--32).
The 8 odd-numbered output points (1--15) are mapped to Panel A; the 8
even-numbered points (2--16) are mapped to Panel B.
MTL provides a number of galvanic isolator barriers to meet different
signal requirements. Hazardous-side field wiring is brought to a
connector at the top of the isolator.
NOTE: MTL refers to their galvanic isolator barriers as “isolators.”
Technical documentation and Application Notes available from MTL
include:
RS3: Multipoint I/O
D
Intrinsic Safety -- Principles and Practice
PS007
D
User’s Guide to Intrinsic Safety
AN9003A
D
MTL4000 Series Isolating Interface Units
Instruction Manual
D
Control drawing for each isolator
Various MTL
drawing numbers
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-6
An optional Wire Tagging Kit (10P50510001 for Panel A and
10P50510002 for Panel B) provides a place to record the field wire
assignment for each isolator. The label is carried by a bridge over the
isolators.
Figure 7.5.4 shows how the MDIO MTL IS Termination Panel is
attached to an RS3 ControlFile.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
10
Description
No.
1
2
ControlFile with Controller
Control Cable
(1984--2783--xxxx non-EMC)
(10P56510xxx EMC)
No.
Description
6
MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel A
7
IS field wiring (connects to top of isolators)
3
Communication Termination Panel II
8
Cable (1984--4186--9100) Panel A to Panel B
4
Communication Line (1984--4188--xxxx
shielded twisted pair) connected to Port A of
Panel A
9
MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel B
5
DC power for Panel A -- Connected to Power
Jack or Power Strip
10
DC power for Panel B -- Connected to Power
Jack or Power Strip
Figure 7.5.4. Discrete I/O with MDIO MTL IS Termination Panel A and Panel B
FIM redundancy requires use of Panel A, Panel B, two identical FIMs,
two communication lines, and a Redundant I/O Block (RIOB).
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-7
Mapping I/O points to MTL Discrete Isolators
Table 7.5.1 and Table 7.5.2 show the mapping of I/O points to isolators
on the MTL discrete panels.
Table 7.5.1. Mapping of I/O Points to MTL Discrete Panel A Isolators
Isolator
Position
Input
Point
Output
Point
Isolator
Position
Input
Point
1
1--2
1
9
17--18
2
3--4
3
10
19--20
3
5--6
5
11
21--22
4
7--8
7
12
23--24
5
9--10
9
13
25--26
6
11--12
11
14
27--28
7
13--14
13
15
29--30
8
15--16
15
16
31--32
Table 7.5.2. Mapping of I/O Points to MTL Discrete Panel B Isolators
Isolator
Position
Output
Point
17
2
18
4
19
6
20
8
21
10
22
12
23
14
24
16
25--32
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Comment
Isolator positions 17--24 serve even-numbered output points
Positions 25--32 are currently not used
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-8
DC Power
The MTL discrete isolators will function over the voltage range 20.7 to
36 VDC. The standard RS3 DC bus can range from 18 to 36 VDC.
CAUTION
The MTL discrete isolators can be operated from the
standard RS3 DC bus but you must be aware that the
isolators will stop operating at low voltage before the
system stops.
NOTE: Both discrete Panel A and Panel B require DC power
connections.
Communication Wiring
A single communication line is connected to Port A for normal
single-FIM operation. Two lines, connected to Port A and Port B, are
required for redundant FIM operation.
Field Wiring
Hazardous-side field wiring is brought to a connector at the top of each
MTL isolator. The hazardous-side wiring must follow local standards for
intrinsic safety.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-9
Line Fault Detection (LFD)
Line Fault Detection (LFD) is available as an option on some isolators.
Dual-channel inputs and all outputs can provide for the use of common
LFD. Some single-channel inputs can provide individual-point LFD.
The common LFD signal is returned on input point 32.
NOTE: You can use a mixture of common and individual LFD.
-
To use common LFD:
1. Set the common LFD jumper (HD18 on Panel A) to “ENABLE”.
common LFD is then enabled for both Panel A and Panel B.
2. For Panel A, set the appropriate jumper (HD1--HD16) for each
isolator as shown on the panel label or in Figure 7.5.5 or
Figure 7.5.6.
3. For Panel B, set the common LFD jumper for the isolator
(HD17--HD24) to “ENABLE”.
4. Configure input point 32 to receive the common LFD signal.
NOTE: The common LFD signal is delivered on input point 32. No
isolator is required to receive this signal. When common LFD is used,
you cannot install an isolator in position 16 of Panel A.
-
To use individual LFD:
1. Use an isolator with LFD in any position of Panel A.
2. Set the appropriate jumper (HD1--HD16) as shown on the panel
label or in Figure 7.5.5.
NOTE: Do not use LFD on MTL 4016.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-10
MTL Discrete Isolators
Input isolators can be used only on Panel A.
D
Dual-channel input isolators connect to both the odd- and the
even-numbered point served by the isolator position.
Dual-channel isolators with LFD may use common LFD.
NOTE: Do not use LFD on MTL 4016.
D
Single-channel input isolators connect to the odd-numbered point
and supply the LFD signal on the even-numbered point.
Therefore the corresponding even-numbered point on Panel B
cannot be used.
Output isolators can be used on either Panel A or Panel B. All output
isolators are single channel.
D
D
D
Output isolators connect to the odd-numbered point when used
on Panel A and to the even-numbered point when used on Panel
B.
Output isolators with LFD may use common LFD.
An output isolator on Panel A can serve the odd point and
another output isolator on Panel B can serve the adjacent even
point.
NOTE: Isolator position 16 (Panel A) cannot be used when common
LFD is enabled.
Table 7.5.3 lists the MTL discrete isolators available for use with RS3.
See the MTL product catalog for details.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-11
Table 7.5.3. MTL Discrete IS Isolators
Input Isolators
MTL P/N
MTL4016
Name
Two-Channel
Switch/Proximity Detector Interface,
With Line Fault Detection
Comment
Dual-channel input -- Use PH-REV to
have field agree with the distributed
control system (DCS).
Do not use LFD.
Output Isolators
MTL4021
Solenoid/Alarm Driver
Single-channel output -- Serves an
odd-numbered point on Panel A or an
even-numbered point on Panel B
MTL4023
Solenoid/Alarm Driver,
With Line Fault Detection
Single-channel output -- Serves an
odd-numbered point on Panel A or an
even-numbered point on Panel B -Common LFD is available
MTL4025
Solenoid/Alarm Driver,
Low Current Output
Single-channel output -- Serves an
odd-numbered point on Panel A or an
even-numbered point on Panel B
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-12
Panel A Jumpers
FIM Address: FIM address jumpers (HD17) are set as for any other
MIO panel. One jumper is set at 1--2 to specify address A--D. The
jumper at “F” must be at 1--2.
FIM Redundancy: The FIM redundancy jumpers (HD20 and HD21)
are set to “N” for normal single-FIM operation and to “R” for redundant
FIM operation.
Line Fault Detection: The common LFD jumper (HD18) must be set to
“ENABLE” if any isolator on either panel uses common LFD. Otherwise,
set it to “DISABLE”.
NOTE: The common LFD signal is available on input point 32. An
isolator serving point 32 is NOT required. An isolator cannot be
installed in position 16.
Figure 7.5.5 shows the settings for the per-isolator jumpers (HD1 to
HD16) when the point pair is used for input.
HD1 TO 16 JUMPER SETTINGS FOR INPUT(S)
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
I
I
I
O
O
O
INPUT(S) WITH
INDIVIDUAL LFD
INPUT(S) WITH
COMMON LFD,
ALSO ENABLE HD18
INPUT(S) WITH
NO LFD
Figure 7.5.5. Line Fault Detection Jumper Settings for Input Points
Figure 7.5.6 shows the settings for the per-isolator jumpers (HD1 to
HD8) when the point pair is used for output.
1
2
3
HD1 TO 8 JUMPER SETTINGS FOR OUTPUT(S)
4
1
2
3
4
1
OUTPUT(S) WITH
COMMON LFD,
ALSO ENABLE HD18
2
3
4
I
I
I
O
O
O
OUTPUT(S) WITH
INDIVIDUAL LFD
OUTPUT(S) WITH
NO LFD
Figure 7.5.6. Line Fault Detection Jumper Settings for Output Points
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-13
Panel B Jumpers
FIM Address: The Address jumpers (HD1) must be set to the same
address as used on Panel A.
Line Fault Detect: The per-isolator common LFD jumpers (HD17 to
HD24) are set to “ENABLE” if the isolator supports common line fault
detection. All other jumpers are set to “DISABLE”.
NOTE: The Common Line Fault Detect jumper (HD18) on Panel A must
be set to “ENABLE” for any of the per-isolator common LFD jumpers on
Panel B to be effective.
Fuses
Each panel has a fuse and a “Fuse Blown” LED. The maximum allowed
fuse size is 3.15 amp, 250 volt IEC.
Table 7.5.4. MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel Fuses
FRSI P/N
Wickman P/N
Littelfuse P/N
Characteristics
C53394--3150--0005
19 194
3.15 A
216 3.15
3.15 Amp
5x20 mm Ceramic 250 V IEC
Labels
Descriptive labels on the discrete panels show the relationship between
isolator positions and I/O points.
Each panel has a place to record the address of the primary FIM.
An optional label holder spans the length of the panel and provides a
place to record the field wiring connection to each isolator. The part
number is 10P5051000x.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-14
Mounting
MTL Discrete IS Termination Panels are the same size as other MIO
panels.
NOTE: To comply with CSA, NRTL, or CE standards, MTL panels must
be mounted in an enclosure that meets the requirements of the
corresponding standard.
Mounting in a System Cabinet: The MTL DIO Mounting Bracket
(10P57830001) can be used to mount two MTL panels side-by-side with
the safe area wire channel between them. A wiring duct, either labled
or blue in color, should be specified. If the discrete Panel A and Panel B
are mounted side-by-side, the connecting cable should be routed
behind the mounting bracket. This can only be done on the ends,
because the cable is two feet long.
Figure 7.5.7 shows system cabinet mounting of the MTL discrete panel.
Dimensions shown below are given as mm (in.).
4
1
2
3
2
1
76
(3)
5
7
No.
Description
6
No.
Description
1
MDIO Field Interface Module
5
Cabinet Rail
2
MTL Isolator
6
DIO Mounting Bracket
3
Label Holder
7
IS Wire Duct
4
Hazardous Area Wiring
Figure 7.5.7. MTL Discrete IS Panel Rack Mounting
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-15
Mounting in an I/O Cabinet or on a Panel:
MTL discrete IS panels can be mounted in I/O cabinets or on panels as
shown in Figure 7.5.8. The I/O cabinet panel is pre-drilled to fit. Other
panels must be drilled and tapped as shown in Figure 7.5.10.
Table 7.5.5 shows recommended hole sizes for various panel
thicknesses.
1
2
3
4
2
5
Analog
Discrete
6
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
MDIO Field Interface Module
4
IS Wire Duct
2
MTL Isolator
5
MAIO Field Interface Module
3
Label Holder
6
Mounting Panel
Figure 7.5.8. MTL IS Panel I/O Cabinet Mounting
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-16
Panels are normally mounted in pairs with the field wiring terminals
facing each other. This allows routing field wiring in the central channel
and system wiring on the sides as shown in Figure 7.5.9.
1
2
2
1
3
4
5
Description
No.
5
No.
4
Description
1
Panel B
4
DC power to panels A and B
2
Panel A
5
Communication line to panel A
3
IS field wiring
Figure 7.5.9. Panel Mounting Example
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-17
Figure 7.5.10 shows the location of MTL discrete IS panel mounting
holes. Dimensions shown below are given as mm (in.). Table 7.5.5
specifies the size of the mounting holes based on the thickness of the
panel.
148
(5.8)
TOP VIEW
400
(15.75)
SIDE VIEW
1
2
381
(15)
76
(3)
161
(6.33)
No.
1
Description
No.
Panel mounting hole
2
Description
DIN rail mounting holes
Figure 7.5.10. MTL IS Panel Mounting Holes
Table 7.5.5. Mounting Hole Sizes
Panel Thickness (mm)
Hole size (mm)
2
3.61
3
3.66
4
3.70
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-18
MTL IS Termination Panel for Analog Applications
The MTL Analog IS Termination Panel (10P50340001) is shown in
Figure 7.5.11. It is marked “MAIO-MTLE TERMINATION PANEL” on the
printed wiring assembly. The panel holds 16 isolators and can handle
either 16 input points or 16 output points depending on the FIM
installed.
Two FIMs are available:
D
MAI16
4--20 mA Input
10P54040004 or
10P57700005
D
MAO16
4--20 mA Output
10P54080004
The MAI16 serves 16 input points; the MAO16 serves 16 output points.
MTL provides a number of galvanic isolator barriers to meet different
signal requirements. Hazardous-side field wiring is brought to a
connector at the top of the isolator.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-19
7
8
6
9
5
10
4
3
2
11
1
No.
Description
12
No.
Description
1
HD3 Panel (Card Cage) address
(A, B, C, or D)
7
Power Strip (TBD) for panel DC supply using
stranded wire (Allows daisy chaining of DC
power and access to panel chassis ground)
2
Socket for optional redundant FIM B
8
Fuse Blown LED
3
FIM A (required)
9
Fuse -- 3.15 Amp, 250 V, IEC
4
Port B (TBB) -- Even-numbered
communication line for redundant FIM B
10
Isolator and point 16
5
Jumpers HD1--HD2 for FIM redundancy
11
Isolator and point 1
6
Port A (TBA) -- Odd-numbered communication
line for FIM A
12
Address label -- Write the address of the
primary FIM here
An optional label holder spans the length of the panel and provides a place to record the field wiring
connection to each isolator
Figure 7.5.11. MTL Analog IS Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-20
The MTL Analog IS Termination Panel is connected to an MPC II
Controller in a ControlFile via a communication line as shown in
Figure 7.5.12.
1
3
4
2
5
6
7
8
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
ControlFile
5
Communication Line (shielded twisted pair)
(two lines are required for FIM redundancy)
2
Controller in the ControlFile
6
DC power for MTL Analog IS Termination
Panel
7
MTL Analog IS Termination Panel
8
IS field wiring (connects to top of isolators)
3
4
Control Cable
(1984--2783--xxxx non-EMC)
(10P5651xxxx EMC)
Communication Termination Panel II
Figure 7.5.12. Analog I/O with MTL IS Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-21
DC Power
The MAIO FIM allows loop power between the FIM and the isolator in
the range 22 to 36 VDC. A Remote I/O Power Supply
(1984--4302--0000x) can be used to supply 27 ¦ 1 VDC. The panel
can use a redundant (A/B) DC supply.
Grounding
Grounding is accomplished by mounting the panel to a metal part that is
grounded. The metal tab on the termination panel must be used to
connect grounds. When the panel is mounted on a nonconducting wall,
a ground wire must be run to the ground terminal of the power strip.
Communication Wiring
A single FIM requires one communication line attached to Port A.
Redundant FIMs require two communication lines: an odd-numbered
line to Port A and the next even-numbered line to Port B. Use shielded
twisted pair wires such as 1984--4188--xxxx.
Field Wiring
IS field wiring is landed at terminals on top of the isolators.
Hazardous-side wire routing must follow local standards for intrinsic
safety.
Labels
The panel has a place to record the address of the primary FIM.
Fuses
The panel has a fuse and a “Fuse Blown” LED. The maximum fuse size
allowed is 3.15 amp, 250 volt IEC.
Table 7.5.6. MTL Analog IS Termination Panel Fuses
FRSI P/N
Wickman P/N
Littelfuse P/N
Characteristics
C53394--3150--0005
19 194
3.15 A
216 3.15
3.15 Amp
5x20 mm Ceramic 250 V IEC
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-22
MTL Analog Isolators
The MTL analog IS isolators that work with RS3 are listed below. See
the MTL catalog for details.
Table 7.5.7. MTL Analog Input and Output Isolators
Input Isolators
MTL P/N
Description
Comment
MTL4041B
Repeater power supply, 4/20 mA,
for 2 or 3-wire transmitters
(smart devices)
Single-channel input -- Works with 2 or 3-wire
4/20 mA transmitters and smart transmitters
MTL4041P
High-power repeater power supply,
4/20 mA, for 2 or 3-wire transmitters
Single-channel input -- Works with 2- or 3-wire
4/20 mA transmitters and smart transmitters
Output Isolators
MTL4045B
Isolating driver, 4/20 mA,
for I/P converters
Single-channel output -- Works with 4/20 mA
current/pressure (I/P) converters
MTL4046P
High-power isolating driver,
for HART valve positioners
Single-channel output -- Works with 4/20 mA
devices and HART valve positioners
HART = Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
Jumpers
FIM Address: The panel (card cage) address is set by jumper HD3.
Only one jumper is allowed at the 1--2 position to specify the address as
A, B, C, or D.
FIM Redundancy: The redundancy jumpers (HD1--HD2) must be at “N”
for single-FIM operation and at “R” for redundant FIM operation.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-23
Mounting
The panel can be mounted:
D
in a System Cabinet (19-inch rack)
D
in an I/O Termination Cabinet
D
on a flat panel (non-HART)
D
on DIN rails (non-HART)
NOTE: To comply with CSA, NRTL, or CE standards, MTL panels must
be mounted in an enclosure that meets the requirements of the
corresponding standard.
Two panels fit side-by-side on a DIO Mounting Bracket (10P57830001)
in a System Cabinet (see Figure 7.5.7). I/O Termination Cabinets are
available in 2x2, 2x4 and 2x5 sizes to hold two columns of panels with
2, 4, or 5 panels per column. The rear wall of the I/O cabinet is drilled
to fit the panels. Dimensions shown below are given as mm (in.).
TOP VIEW
148
(5.8)
1
400
(15.75)
381
(15)
NOTE: This panel is wider than
the standard MIO panel.
FRONT VIEW
2
76
(3)
177
(7.0)
No.
1
Description
Panel or Wall Mounting Holes (4) -Use M4x20 (8--32 x 3/4) Screws
No.
2
Description
DIN Rail Mounting Holes (2)
Figure 7.5.13. MTL Analog Panel Mounting Instructions
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SP: 7-5-24
Panels are normally mounted in pairs with the field wiring terminals
facing each other. This allows routing field wiring in the central channel
and system wiring on the sides as shown in Figure 7.5.14.
Figure 7.5.14. Analog Panel Wiring Illustration
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
RS3t
Site Preparation and Installation
Chapter 8:
PeerWay Interface Devices
Section 1:
Section 2:
Section 3:
Section 4:
VAX/PeerWay Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-1
QBI Hardware Kit for the MicroVAX II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MicroVAX II -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QBI Hardware Kit for the VAX 3xxx and VAX 4xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX 3xxx/VAX 4xxx -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Marshaling Panel LEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Board 1 (CPU Card) Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card) Jumpers . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-3
8-1-4
8-1-5
8-1-6
8-1-7
8-1-8
8-1-10
8-1-13
8-1-15
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-1
RS-232C Asynchronous Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 Asynchronous Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 Asynchronous Protocol Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 X.25 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 X.25 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE-Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 X.25 Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIA Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-4
8-2-7
8-2-8
8-2-9
8-2-11
8-2-12
8-2-13
8-2-14
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-1
HIA Direct Connection of PeerWays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIA Connection of PeerWays Using Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Jumpering for the HIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Jumper Setting for HIA Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Jumpering for HIA Connection Using Modems . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure HIA Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-2
8-3-4
8-3-6
8-3-6
8-3-6
8-3-7
8-3-8
Diogenes Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-1
Diogenes Interface TI Communications Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diogenes Communication Convertor Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-4
8-4-5
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Contents
SP: ii
Section 5:
RS3 Network Interface (RNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-1
Checklist for CE Compatible Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting System Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEDs and Reset Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the RNI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-3
8-5-4
8-5-6
8-5-7
8-5-7
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Contents
SP: iii
List of Figures
Figure
Page
8.1.1
VAX QBUS Interface Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-2
8.1.2
MicroVAX/PeerWay Interface Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-4
8.1.3
VAX 3000 -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-6
8.1.4
Circuit Card Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-9
8.1.5
Board 1 Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-10
8.1.6
Board 1 Memory Identification Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-11
8.1.7
Board 1 I/O Space Code Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-12
8.1.8
Board 2 Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-13
8.1.9
PeerWay Node Address Jumper Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-14
8.1.10
Board 2 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-15
8.2.1
Supervisory Computer Interface (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-2
8.2.2
SCI Cabling Connections (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-3
8.2.3
Possible SCI/Host Computer Communication Configurations:
RS-232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-4
8.2.4
Standard RS-232C Cable Connector with SCI as a Terminal . . . . . . . .
8-2-6
8.2.5
Standard RS-232C Cable Connector with SCI as a Modem . . . . . . . . .
8-2-6
8.2.6
RS-422 Cable Connector: Asynchronous Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-8
8.2.7
RS-422 X.25 Protocol Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-9
8.2.8
RS-422 Cable Connector: X.25 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-11
8.3.1
HIA Pair (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-1
8.3.2
HIA Cabling (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-2
8.3.3
PeerWays Connected by HIAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-3
8.3.4
HIA Modem Connection of PeerWays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-4
8.3.5
Con HIA Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-8
8.4.1
Diogenes Interface (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-2
8.4.2
Diogenes Interface (Back) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-2
8.4.3
Diogenes/RS3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-3
8.4.4
Diogenes TI Comm Card Jumpering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-4
8.4.5
Diogenes Communication Converter Box Jumpering
(Current Loop Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-5
8.5.1
RNI and Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-1
8.5.2
RNI Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-2
8.5.3
RNI Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-2
8.5.4
System Connections to the RNI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-4
8.5.5
RNI Ethernet Jumper Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-7
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Contents
SP: iv
List of Tables
Table
Page
8.1.1
MicroVAX/Peerway Interface Marshalling Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-7
8.1.2
Circuit Card Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-9
8.1.3
Board 1 Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-10
8.1.4
Board 2 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-15
8.2.1
Definition of Some RS-232C Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-5
8.2.2
RS-232C Signals and Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-5
8.2.3
Definition of Some RS-422 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-7
8.2.4
RS--422 Pins and Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-7
8.2.5
X.25 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-10
8.2.6
CE-Compliant Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-12
8.2.7
X.25 Clocking Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-13
8.2.8
EIA Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-14
8.3.1
HIA/Black Box Cable Assembly Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-5
8.3.2
CE Compliant Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-7
8.5.1
RNI LEDs
8-5-6
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
..................................................
Contents
SP: 8-1-1
Section 1:
VAX/PeerWay Interface
The Virtual Address Extension (VAX) QBUSÒ Interface is a link between
an RS3 and a Digital VAXÒ computer system. The VAX QBUS Interface
resides as a node on the PeerWay and connects to the VAX QBUS.
There are two QBUS to PeerWay Interface (QBI) kits for different types
of VAX.
D
D
QBI Hardware Kit, MicroVAX II (1984--2350--0001)
QBI Hardware Kit, MicroVAX 3xxx and 4xxx Series
(1984--2647--0001)
The VAX 3xxx/4xxx kit works with systems with BA213 or BA215
cabinets, such as the 3300, 3400, 35xx, 36xx, 3800, 3900, and the VAX
4000.
The kits share the PeerWay Interface board and one short cable. They
differ in the marshaling panel and the long cable.
See details for Host Mode in the PeerWay Interfaces Manual (PW) for
information on configuration.
Figure 8.1.1 shows the VAX QBUS Interface installed in a MicroVAX II
cabinet.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SP: 8-1-2
VAX Cabinet
VAX QBUS
Marshaling Panel
PeerWay Drop Cables
Special PeerWay A
Cable
Special PeerWay B
Cable
Figure 8.1.1. VAX QBUS Interface Installation
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SP: 8-1-3
QBI Hardware Kit for the MicroVAX II
The kit for the MicroVAX II consists of:
D
MicroVAX II -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel (MicroVAX II)
(1984--2533--0001) Marked “QBI” on the front panel.
D
QBUS Board 1 (CPU Card) (1984--3261--0002)
D
QBUS Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card) (1984--2510--0001)
D
Cable, QBUS Board 1 to Board 2 (1984--2504--9002)
D
D
Cable, QBUS Boards to Marshaling Panel (MP)
(1984--2335--9901)
PeerWay Drop Cables, MicroVAX (1984--2628--1006 and
1984--2628--2006)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SP: 8-1-4
MicroVAX II -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel
The MicroVAX/PeerWay Interface Marshaling Panel (1984--2533--000x)
is shown in Figure 8.1.2. One end of the QBUS Board to MP-MicroVax II
cable (1984--2535--9901) is connected to the connector behind the
Marshaling Panel, shown in the side view of Figure 8.1.2. The
Marshaling Panel is installed in a blank panel on the back of the
MicroVAX. The special PeerWay Drop cables (1984--2628--1006 and
1984--2628--2006) are connected to the front of the Marshaling Panel.
FAULT
Ä
Front View
FAULT
B1
RXA
TXA
RXB
Ä
TXB
A
. . . . . . . . . . .
Ä
Ä
B
. . . . . . . . . . .
Side View
Connector
Red ribbon of cable should be at
this end of the connector.
Figure 8.1.2. MicroVAX/PeerWay Interface Marshaling Panel
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SP: 8-1-5
QBI Hardware Kit for the VAX 3xxx and VAX 4xxx
The kit for the MicroVAX 3xxx or VAX 4xxx consists of:
D
MicroVAX II -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel (MicroVAX 3000)
Marked “RPQNA” on the front panel (1984--2622--0001)
D
Cover Plate, DEC (1984--2624--0001)
D
QBUS Board 1 (CPU Card) (1984--3261--0002)
D
QBUS Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card) (1984--2510--0001)
D
Cable, QBUS Board 1 to Board 2 (1984--2504--9002)
D
D
Cable, QBUS Boards to Marshaling Panel (MP)
(1984--2335--9901)
PeerWay Drop Cables, MicroVAX (1984--2628--1006 and
1984--2628--2006)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SP: 8-1-6
VAX 3xxx/VAX 4xxx -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel
The MicroVAX/PeerWay Interface Marshaling Panel (1984--2622--0001)
and Cover Plate (1984--2624--0001) are shown in Figure 8.1.3. One
end of the QBUS Board to MP-MicroVax II cable (1984--2335--9901) is
attached to the connector behind the Marshaling Panel. The
Marshaling Panel is installed in the cover plate and then in the back of
the MicroVAX. Special PeerWay Drop cables (1984--2628--1006 and
1984--2628--2006) are connected to the front of the Marshaling Panel.
FAULT
B2
B1
TXA
RXA
TXB
RXB
A
B
RPQNA
Figure 8.1.3. VAX 3000 -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SP: 8-1-7
VAX QBUS Interface Marshaling Panel LEDS
LEDs show activity of the interface and indicate board faults.
Figure 8.1.2 and Figure 8.1.3 show the LEDs. Table 8.1.1 gives the
meanings of the LEDs.
If B1 or B2 is ON, the corresponding card is bad.
B1 and B2 alternate ON and OFF after the Interface is powered up but
not yet booted.
Both B1 and B2 will be ON while the diagnostics are running. If they
stay ON, both cards can be bad.
Table 8.1.1. MicroVAX/Peerway Interface Marshalling Panel LEDs
LED
Description
B1
(RED)
Shows the condition of the CPU card. (Board 1)
B2
(RED)
Shows the condition of the PeerWay Interface card.
(Board 2)
TXA
(YELLOW)
Shows transmission of data to PeerWay A.
Blinks when data is sent.
TXB
(YELLOW)
Shows transmission of data to PeerWay B.
Blinks when data is sent.
RXA
(YELLOW)
Shows reception of data from PeerWay A.
Blinks when data is received.
RXB
(YELLOW)
Shows reception of data from PeerWay B.
Blinks when data is received.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SP: 8-1-8
VAX QBUS Interface Circuit Cards
The VAX QBUS Interface contains two circuit cards:
D
QBUS Board 1 (CPU card) (1984--3261--0002)
D
QBUS Board 2 (PeerWay Interface) (1984--2510--000x)
The circuit cards must be located in the VAX QBUS after the CPU and
memory cards and before any disk and tape controller cards. Two
complete quad slots must be reserved for the VAX QBUS Interface
circuit cards. No gaps can exist between cards in the VAX. If, by
moving the disk and tape controller cards or some other cards, a dual
slot gap exists, you must put a Digital Equipment Corporation Grant
Continuity Card (model M9047) into the empty dual slot.
Figure 8.1.4 shows proper installation. Board 1 should be in the right
quad slot. Board 2 should be in the left quad slot. The long cable that
is attached to the Marshaling Panel must be connected to the bottom
connector of Board 2. The short cable (1984--2504--9002) must be
connected from Board 1 to Board 2.
The VAX must be able to supply enough power to the circuit cards. The
requirements for each card are listed in Table 8.1.2.
NOTE: Be certain that the circuit boards are properly seated in the
VAX. Improper seating can result in operating problems that are difficult
to trace.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SP: 8-1-9
Board 1
1984--3261--000x
Board 2
1984--2510--000x
VAX CPU
Short Cable
1984--2504--9002
Long Cable
1984--2535--9901
Cabinet Adaptor
Red Ribbon of Cable
Figure 8.1.4. Circuit Card Installation
Table 8.1.2. Circuit Card Power Requirements
Item
Board 1
(CPU Card)
1984--3261--000x
Board 2
(PeerWay Interface Card)
1984--2510--000x
5 VDC current
4A
1.5 A
12 VDC
current
----
700 mA
Total Watts
20 W
15.9 W
AC bus loads
1 AC load
0 AC load
DC bus loads
1 DC load
0 DC load
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SP: 8-1-10
VAX QBUS Interface Board 1 (CPU Card) Jumpers
Board 1 contains the VAX QBUS Interface memory identification
jumpers and the DEC I/O space code jumpers. Figure 8.1.5 shows the
locations of these jumpers, Table 8.1.3 shows settings.
HD2
Memory
Identification
Jumpers
HD13--HD18
I/O Space Code
Jumpers
HD4--HD8
Figure 8.1.5. Board 1 Jumper Locations
Table 8.1.3. Board 1 Jumper Settings
Jumper
Setting
Function
HD2
2--3
Factory setting, do not move.
HD4--HD8
See text for data
I/O Space Code,
determines the base address used.
HD13--HD18
See text for data
Memory Identification,
first or second memory window.
HD29--HD30
Not used.
Memory Identification Jumpers: A VAX can hold up to two VAX
QBUS Interfaces. Each VAX QBUS Interface is assigned a memory
window by the memory identification jumpers. The two valid jumper
positions, are shown in Figure 8.1.6. Either jumper position can be
used. Note the jumper position because it must be entered into the
VAX.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SP: 8-1-11
1
2
3
HD18
HD18
HD17
HD17
HD16
HD16
HD15
HD15
HD14
HD14
HD13
HD13
4
Jumper positions to use the
first memory window.
1
2
3
4
Jumper positions to use the
second memory window.
Figure 8.1.6. Board 1 Memory Identification Jumper Positions
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SP: 8-1-12
I/O space code jumpers: The I/O space code jumpers determine the
base address used by the VAX QBUS Interface. The jumpers are
originally set for a base address of 766020 octal. If the VAX QBUS
Interface needs a base address other than 766020 octal, set these
jumpers for the required base address. Figure 8.1.7 details the I/O
space code jumper settings.
Base address
7 6 6 0 2 0
This digit is determined by jumpers HD4
and HD5. HD5 is the most significant
digit.
This digit is determined by jumpers
HD6, HD7, and HD8. HD6 is the least
significant digit and HD8 is the most
significant digit.
The 3--4 jumper position
represents a 0 value.
Never use the 1--2
jumper position.
The 2--3 jumper position
represents a 1 value.
1
1
2
3
2
3
4
HD4
HD4
HD5
HD5
HD6
HD6
HD7
HD7
HD8
HD8
4
1
These are the jumper
positions of the board as
shipped and represents
766020 octal.
2
3
4
These jumper positions represent 766540 octal.
HD4 is in the 0 value position and HD5 is in the 1
value position; they represent a value of 4 octal.
HD6 and HD8 are in the 1 value position and HD7 is
in the 0 value position; they represent a value of 5
octal.
Figure 8.1.7. Board 1 I/O Space Code Jumper Positions
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SP: 8-1-13
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card) Jumpers
Board 2 (PeerWay Interface) contains the PeerWay node address
jumpers. These jumpers are positioned to provide the PeerWay
address of this node. Figure 8.1.8 shows the location of these jumpers.
Figure 8.1.9 shows how these jumpers are positioned to indicate the
PeerWay node address.
Node address
jumpers
Figure 8.1.8. Board 2 Jumper Locations
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SP: 8-1-14
Sum of jumper values
+1
node address
Pin J1 J2 J3 J4 J5
1--2 1 2 4
8 16
2--3 0 0 0
0 0
Node Address = 15
J1 J3 J5
Sum of jumper values
0 + 2 + 4 + 8 + 0 + 1 = 15
J2 J4
Node Address = 29
Sum of jumper values
0 + 0 + 4 + 8 + 16 + 1 = 29
J1 J3 J5
J2 J4
Figure 8.1.9. PeerWay Node Address Jumper Values
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SP: 8-1-15
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card) LEDs
Board 2 (PeerWay Interface) has LED indicators, as shown in
Figure 8.1.10 and described in Table 8.1.4.
(Yellow) Communication to VAX
(Yellow) Communication from VAX
(Yellow) Static data update
(Yellow) Dynamic data update
(Yellow) Data scan
(Red) Fuse
(Red) Fuse
(Red) Diagnostics
(Green)
Figure 8.1.10. Board 2 LED Indicators
Table 8.1.4. Board 2 LEDs
Mode
LED Indications
Power on, but not yet booted;
board reset
The bottom two LEDs alternate on and
off and the bottom yellow LED is steady
on.
Diagnostics
The bottom red LED is steady on. The
yellow LEDs blink as diagnostics are
run.
Running
The green LED is steady on. The
yellow LEDs blink as indicated above.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SP: 8-1-16
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SP: 8-2-1
Section 2:
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
The Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI) provides an interface
between the RS3 and host computer systems. The SCI resides as a
node on the PeerWay. The SCI can be connected to the supervisory
computer by:
D
RS-232C Asynchronous Communication Protocol
D
RS-422 Asynchronous Communication Protocol
D
RS-422 X.25 Communication Protocol
The SCI consists of:
D
OI Card Cage
D
OI Power Regulator
D
OI PeerWay Interface
D
OI NV Memory
D
OI Processor
See the PeerWay Interfaces Manual (PW) for information on SCI
configuration.
Set jumpers on OI NV Memory to match the communications protocol in
use. See detail on the appropriate OI NV Memory card in the Service
Manual (SV) or the Service Quick Reference Guide (SQ) for jumper
setting information.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SP: 8-2-2
Figure 8.2.1 shows the SCI and components.
3
2
4
1
No.
Description
5
No.
Description
1
Power Switch and Cable
4
OI Processor
2
OI Power Regulator
5
OI NV Memory Board
3
OI PeerWay Interface
Figure 8.2.1. Supervisory Computer Interface (Front)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SP: 8-2-3
Figure 8.2.2 shows SCI connections.
1
2
3
4
5
6
No.
Connector
Cable
Comments
1
J938
PWRB
1984--0158--1xxx (B Bus)
(optional)
DC power B (optional)
2
J937
PWRA
1984--0158--0xxx (A Bus)
DC Bus to System Device (A Bus)
3
J936
POWER
SWITCH
10P53110001
Power switch and cable
4
J084
PEERWAY A
1984--0473--0xxx
PeerWay A Drop Cable
5
J083
PEERWAY B
1984--0473--0xxx
PeerWay B Drop Cable
6
J939
FAN
1984--5311--0001
Cable, OI Card Cage to DC Fan
Figure 8.2.2. SCI Cabling Connections (Rear View)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SP: 8-2-4
RS-232C Asynchronous Communications Protocol
The RS-232C port connects the SCI to a remote host computer when
using RS-232C asynchronous or RS-422/X.25 protocols. The SCI can
appear as either a terminal or a modem on the RS-232C port.
An RS-232C cable (10P54340xxx) is used to connect the SCI to a
remote host computer. Figure 8.2.3 shows possible connections using
the RS-232C port.
SCI Port
Appears as
Terminal
SCI
Modem
SCI Port
Appears as
Modem
SCI
Host
SCI
Host
SCI Port
Appears as
Terminal
Modem
Host
Host Port
Appears as
Terminal
Host Port
Appears as
Terminal
Host Port
Appears as
Modem
Figure 8.2.3. Possible SCI/Host Computer Communication Configurations: RS-232C Port
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SP: 8-2-5
Table 8.2.1 defines some RS-232C terms. Table 8.2.2 shows the
RS-232C connector pin assignments.
Table 8.2.1. Definition of Some RS-232C Terms
Signal
Meaning
TXD
Data Transmit
RXD
Data Receive
RTS
Ready to Send
CTS
Clear to Send
DSR
Data Set Ready
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
Table 8.2.2. RS-232C Signals and Connector Pin Assignments
Pin
Signal
Pin
1
----
14
2
TXD Data transmit
15
3
RXD Data receive
16
4
RTS Ready to send
17
5
CTS Clear to send
18
6
DSR Data set ready
19
-------------------
7
Signal ground
20
DTR Data terminal ready
8
DCD Data carrier detect
21
9
10
11
12
13
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
----------------
22
23
24
25
Signal
-------------------
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SP: 8-2-6
Figure 8.2.4 shows the female plug for the SCI and details pin functions
when the SCI appears as a terminal.
TXD -- Transmits Data to the Host
RXD -- Receives Data from the Host
RTS -- Tied to DTR in the SCI
CTS -- Ignored
DSR -- Ignored
Signal Ground
DCD -- When asserted by the Host
SCI transmit is enabled.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
DTR -- Asserted by the SCI
when ready to talk to the Host.
Modem
or
Host
Plug
Figure 8.2.4. Standard RS-232C Cable Connector with SCI as a Terminal
Figure 8.2.5 shows the female plug for the SCI and the pin functions
when the SCI is jumpered to appear as a modem.
RXD -- Receives Data from the Host
TXD -- Sends Data to the Host
RTS -- Ignored
CTS -- Tied To DCD in the SCI
DSR -- asserted by the SCI
when power is applied
Signal Ground
DCD -- asserted by the SCI
when ready to talk to the host
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
DTR -- When asserted by the Host,
SCI transmit is enabled.
Host
Plug
Figure 8.2.5. Standard RS-232C Cable Connector with SCI as a Modem
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SP: 8-2-7
RS-422 Asynchronous Communications Protocol
The RS-422 port on the SCI connects the SCI to the supervisory
computer with asynchronous or X.25 protocols. The SCI can be
connected to the supervisory computer or modem by an RS-422 cable
using a nonstandard connector on the SCI end (AMP HDC--20, P/N
205422--1 or equivalent).
The SCI cannot be jumpered to look like a modem or terminal when
using the RS-422 port. Cables from the RS-422 port to the host or
modem must provide the electrical configuration.
Table 8.2.3 defines some RS-422 terms. Table 8.2.4 shows RS-422 pin
assignments.
Table 8.2.3. Definition of Some RS-422 Terms
Signal
Meaning
TXD
Data Transmit
RXD
Data Receive
RTS
Ready-To-Send
CTS
Clear-To-Send
RXC
Receive Data Clock
TXC
Transmit Data Clock
Table 8.2.4. RS--422 Pins and Signals
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
----
9
----
2
----
10
TXC+ (X.25 only)
3
CTS+ Clear to send
11
TXC-- (X.25 only)
4
CTS-- Clear to send
12
RXC+ (X.25 only)
5
RXD+ Data receive
13
RXC-- (X.25 only)
6
RXD-- Data receive
14
RTS+ Ready to send
7
TXD+ Data transmit
15
RTS-- Ready to send
8
TXD-- Data transmit
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SP: 8-2-8
RS-422 Asynchronous Protocol Cabling
Figure 8.2.6 shows the male plug to be connected to the SCI and
indicates the pin functions for RS-422 asynchronous protocol.
Send data to host
-{ TXD
TXD +
Receive data from host
-{ RXD
RXD +
When asserted by host
SCI transmit is enabled
-{ CTS
CTS +
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
RTS--
Asserted by the SCI when it is
}
ready to talk to the Host.
RTS +
Host
Plug
Figure 8.2.6. RS-422 Cable Connector: Asynchronous Protocol
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SP: 8-2-9
RS-422 X.25 Protocol
For the X.25 protocol, the SCI is configured both logically and
electrically. The SCI logical configuration is its function in exchanging
data packets. Logically, the SCI can be the data circuit-terminating
equipment (DCE) or the data terminal equipment (DTE).
The electrical configuration of the SCI refers to whether it functions as a
modem or terminal. Electrically, the SCI functions as a modem if it is
directly connected to the host and as a terminal if it is connected to a
modem.
Figure 8.2.7 shows various RS-422 X.25 protocol connections.
Modem
Terminal
SCI
Host
DCE
(SCI is logically the DCE and electrically a modem)
DTE
Terminal
SCI
Terminal
M
M
Host
DTE
DCE
(SCI is logically the DCE and electrically a terminal)
Terminal
Terminal
M
SCI
M
X.25 Network
Host
DTE
DTE
(SCI is logically the DTE and electrically a terminal)
Figure 8.2.7. RS-422 X.25 Protocol Connections
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SP: 8-2-10
The X.25 parameters shown in Table 8.2.5 can be configured as
directed by the installation instructions provided by the vendor of the
host computer.
Table 8.2.5. X.25 Parameters
Parameter
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Description
K
The maximum number of unacknowledged packets at
both the link and network layers (1 to 7).
T1
The link level transmission timeout (10 to 10,000
milliseconds).
N1
The maximum network layer packet size (16 to 1024
bytes).
N2
The maximum number of link level retries (1 to 100
attempts).
T3
The link level idle transmit timeout (0 to 5000 seconds).
If zero is selected, the link layer never times out.
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SP: 8-2-11
RS-422 X.25 Cabling
For X.25 protocol, the cabling from the SCI to the modem or host
determines whether the SCI is electrically configured as a modem or
terminal. An SCI that implements X.25 protocol is shipped with a
custom cable that electrically configures the SCI as a modem. In X.25
protocol, this cable connects the SCI directly to the host, as in
Figure 8.2.8. The cable and RS-422 connectors carry the RS-422
electrical interface. If you want to configure the SCI electrically as a
terminal, you must design a cable that performs that task.
The clock jumpers on the OI NV Memory must be set for internal clocks
if the SCI is configured as a modem, or for external clocks if the SCI is
configured as a terminal.
Send data to host
{
TXD -TXD +
Receive data from host
-{ RXD
RXD +
When asserted by the host
SCI transmit is enabled
-{ CTS
CTS +
Asserted by the SCI
when it is ready to talk
RTS+ } to the Host.
RTS--
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
RXC-RXC+
}
Clocks the data received.
}
TXC+
TXC--
Clocks the Data
transmitted.
Host
Plug
Figure 8.2.8. RS-422 Cable Connector: X.25 Protocol
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SP: 8-2-12
Checklist for CE-Compliant Installation
Follow these rules to ensure CE compliance:
1. Use cables specified in Table 8.2.6 as needed.
2. Install the card cage and mounting bracket in a grounded system
cabinet.
3. Power the cage from a CE-approved power supply.
4. Use a CE-approved modem when a modem is required.
Table 8.2.6. CE-Compliant Cable Specifications
Cable
Part Number
Maximum Length
PeerWay Drop Cable
1984--0473--00xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
DC Power Cable, Bus To Product
1984--0158--0xxx
61 meters (200 feet)
DC Power Cable, Power Supply to Product
1984--1083--00xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
Fan Power Cable
1984--1605--9009
Standard
Cable, HIA to HIA
1984--2171--0004
1.2 meters (4 feet)
Shielded RS-232 cable assembly, SCI to PC
10P54340xxx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
Shielded RS-422 cable assembly, X.25/SCI
10P54390xxx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
Shielded RS-422 cable assembly, HIA to Black BoxE
10P54400xxx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SP: 8-2-13
RS-422 X.25 Clocking
The clock lines of the RS-422 port (TXC and RXC) are for X.25 protocol
only. TXC gives the transmit data clock signal and RXC the receive
data clock signal. The direction of the clock lines is determined by the
synchronous clock jumper settings on the NV Memory. If the SCI is
electrically configured as a modem, the jumpers are set for internal
clock and the clock lines are driven by the SCI at the configured internal
baud rate. In an SCI electrically configured as a terminal, jumpers are
set for external clock and clock lines supply clock signals to the SCI.
A synchronous clock can be supplied internally at 300, 1200, 1800,
2400, 3600, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K and many higher rates. The SCI
accepts any external clock in the range 300 to 200K baud. At baud
rates above 38.4K, multiple flags may be needed between packets to
assure 500 microseconds between messages.
NOTE: The NV Memory jumpers must match values entered on the
SCI Configuration screen.
Table 8.2.7 shows the X.25 clocking parameters.
Table 8.2.7. X.25 Clocking Parameters
Electrical Configuration
of the SCI
Nonvolatile Memory
Jumper Configuration
Source of Clock Signals
Direction of Clock
Lines
(TXC and RXC)
Modem
Internal Clock
SCI
Output
Terminal
External Clock
Modem
Input
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SP: 8-2-14
EIA Options
Select the EIA options on the SCI Configuration screen for
asynchronous protocol using the RS-232C or RS-422 ports. The
present implementation of X.25 protocol does not provide EIA options.
The EIA options available are: CTS, MODEM and NONE.
The CTS option is a hardware means of flow control. Flow control can
also be enabled in software by selecting XON and XOFF control on the
SCI Configuration screen. When the host sends XOFF, the SCI stops
sending messages until it sees XON. XON and XOFF control is not
implemented for X.25.
The EIA options are described in Table 8.2.8.
Table 8.2.8. EIA Options
Description
EIA Option
CTS
SCI configured as a modem:
When DTR (pin 20) is asserted by the host, the SCI
can transmit.
SCI configured as a terminal:
When DCD (pin 8) is asserted by the host, the SCI
can transmit.
SCI configured as a terminal:
The SCI monitors the modem Carrier Detect (CD)
signal to determine when the host has called in.
When DTR (pin 20) is asserted by the SCI, the
modem answers the phone and establishes the
carrier.
When DTR is dropped by the SCI, the modem
hangs up the line.
Unless dropped to hang up the line, this pin remains
asserted once software initialization is complete.
MODEM
DCD (pin 8) is asserted by the modem to inform the
SCI that the data carrier is detected.
NONE
No EIA option is selected.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SP: 8-3-1
Section 3:
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
The Highway Interface Adapter (HIA) connects two PeerWays. It
resides as a node on one PeerWay and communicates with another HIA
that is a node on the other PeerWay.
The HIA pair is connected to provide PeerWay-to-PeerWay
communications:
D
Directly, for adjacent PeerWays
D
By modem, for geographically separated PeerWays
The HIA consists of:
D
OI Card Cage
D
OI Power Regulator
D
OI PeerWay Interface
D
OI NV Memory
D
OI Processor
Figure 8.3.1 shows two HIAs and their components. See the PeerWay
Interfaces Manual (PW: 4) for configuring HIA software.
Empty Slot
Power Regulator
PeerWay
Interface
OI Nonvolatile Memory Board
Empty Slot
OI Processor
Power Switch and Cable
Figure 8.3.1. HIA Pair (Front)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SP: 8-3-2
HIA Direct Connection of PeerWays
Two HIAs providing a direct PeerWay-to-PeerWay connection are
typically contained in a shelf assembly side-by-side with an HIA Link
Cable joining the RS-422 connectors.
Figure 8.3.2 shows the rear view of two directly connected HIAs.
1
2
3
7
4
5
6
No.
Connector
1
J938
PWRB
1984--0158--1xxx (Bus B)
(optional)
DC power B (optional)
2
J937
PWRA
1984--0158--0xxx (Bus A)
DC Bus to System Device (Bus A)
3
J936
POWER
SWITCH
10P53110001
Power switch and cable
4
J084
PEERWAY A
1984--0473--0xxx
PeerWay A Drop Cable
5
J083
PEERWAY B
1984--0473--0xxx
PeerWay B Drop Cable
6
J939
FAN
1984--5311--0001
Cable, OI Card Cage to DC Fan
7
RS-422 (J086)
to
RS-422 (J086)
1984--2171--0004
The cable is 1.2 meters (4 feet) long.
Cable
Comments
Figure 8.3.2. HIA Cabling (Rear View)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SP: 8-3-3
FRSI recommends configuring PeerWays connected by HIAs to provide
alternate communication paths if of communications fail. Figure 8.3.3
shows four PeerWays connected by HIAs. Dual HIAs can be used as
shown at the right side of the figure. If communications fail between a
pair of HIAs, data can still be routed to the proper destination.
HIA
HIA
HIA
HIA
HIA
HIA
HIA
HIA
HIA
HIA
PeerWay 1
PeerWay 3
PeerWay 2
PeerWay 4
Figure 8.3.3. PeerWays Connected by HIAs
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SP: 8-3-4
HIA Connection of PeerWays Using Modems
Distant PeerWays can be connected by use of HIAs, Converters,
Modems, and a communication line as shown in Figure 8.3.4. This is
referred to as “HIA Modem”.
The HIA modem group at each end of the communication line consists
of:
D
HIA
D
Black BoxÒ Data Converter (Customer furnished)
D
HIA/Black BoxÒ Cable Assembly (1984--2859--00xx)
D
Synchronous Modem (Customer furnished).
The Data Converter is a Black BoxÒ IC454--187 (or equal) that converts
between RS-422 and RS-232 formats. Set the Data Converter to
modem operation on the HIA side and to terminal operation on the
modem side.
2
3
4
5
1
No.
Item
1
Cable 10P54400xxx from RS-422
(J086) to Black BoxE
2
Black BoxE Data Converter
3
RS-232C data cable
4
Modem
5
Communications line
Comments
The cable length (xxx) is in decimeters.
Maximum is 15.2 meters (50 feet)
Model IC454--187 (or equivalent)
Must be a shielded cable
Must be CE approved
Runs to a matching set connected to the other PeerWay
Figure 8.3.4. HIA Modem Connection of PeerWays
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SP: 8-3-5
An HIA/Black BoxÒ Cable Assembly (1984--2859--xxxx) is required
between the HIA and the Data Converter. The cable connects the
15-pin RS--422 connector on the HIA to the 37-pin RS-449 connector on
the Data Converter. Table 8.3.1 shows the cable pin assignments.
The modems must be set to agree with the rest of the equipment.
The OI NV Memory card jumpers and the Configure HIA screen must
be set to agree with the particular connections used.
Table 8.3.1. HIA/Black Box Cable Assembly Pin Assignments
Twisted Pair
Signal
Wire Color
RS-422
Connector (HIA)
RS-449
Connector
(Black Box)
1
RXD -RXD +
Black
Red
6
5
6
24
2
RTS -RTS +
Black
White
15
14
7
25
3
TXC -TXC +
Black
Green
11
10
5
23
4
RXC -RXC +
Black
Blue
13
12
8
26
5
TXD -TXD +
Black
Yellow
8
7
4
22
6
CTS -CTS +
Black
Brown
4
3
9
27
Pairs 1--6
Ground
Drain Wires
2
19, 20, 37
Jumper Wire
White
(.25 mm2, 24 Ga.)
7 TO 12
Jumper Wire
White
(.25 mm2, 24 Ga.)
25 TO 30
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SP: 8-3-6
OI NV Memory Jumpering for the HIA
The RS-422 Terminal/Modem jumpers on the OI NV Memory Card
determine the source of the HIA clock synchronization. OI NV Memory
Card section in the Service Manual shows jumper locations and settings
(SV: 3--6).
NOTE: The Configure HIA screen of each HIA must agree with the
jumper settings on that HIA.
OI NV Memory Jumper Setting for HIA Direct Connection
One HIA in the pair must be jumpered as a modem (internal clocking).
The other HIA must be jumpered as a terminal (external clocking).
The HIA jumpered as a modem (internal clocking) is the source of the
clock synchronization signal.
OI NV Memory Jumpering for HIA Connection Using Modems
Each HIA must be jumpered as a terminal (external clocking).
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SP: 8-3-7
Checklist for CE Compliant Installation
Follow these rules to ensure CE compliance:
1. Use cables specified in Table 8.3.2 as needed.
2. Install the card cage and mounting bracket in a grounded system
cabinet.
3. Power the cage from a CE approved power supply.
4. Use a CE approved modem when a modem is required.
Table 8.3.2. CE Compliant Cable Specifications
Cable
Part No
Max Length
PeerWay Drop Cable
1984--0473--00xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
DC Power Cable, Bus To Product
1984--0158--0xxx
61 meters (200 feet)
DC Power Cable, Power Supply to Product
1984--1083--00xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
Fan Power Cable
1984--1605--9009
Standard
Cable, HIA to HIA
1984--2171--0004
1.2 meters (4 feet)
Shielded RS-232 cable assembly, SCI to PC
10P54340xxx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
Shielded RS-422 cable assembly, X.25/SCI
10P54390xxx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
Shielded RS-422 cable assembly, HIA to Black BoxE
10P54400xxx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SP: 8-3-8
Configure HIA Screen
An HIA is configured with the Configure HIA screen (see Figure 8.3.5),
which displays the information necessary for HIA operation. Configure
each HIA on the PeerWay to which it is connected.
CONFIGURE HIA
Node number >10
PeerWay number 1
14- jul-92
(10 on PeerWay 1)
11:47:12
Other node
64 (32 on PeerWay 2)
Other PeerWay Þ2
Node 10 Configuration Information
Program version 11.xx
Boot versionx.xx
Distance penalty Þ24 Baud rate
Þ614400
Clock src ÞCLK_INT Link passing time
Slot width
Þ30
Pass time
Time correction
Þ1.0 s
Þ.00 sec/day
Þyes
Volume,Filename for Program Þxxx,xxxx
Volume,Filename for Config
Þxxx,xxxx
operation ÞSave HIA configuration to config file
ÞPress <ENTER> to Begin
CONFIG 1
Figure 8.3.5. Configure HIA Screen
The “Baud rate” field entry must match the baud rate used. For direct
connection this is 614400 baud. The modem connection baud rate is
determined by the modems or the converters used.
The “Clock src” field entry on the Configure HIA screen must match the
clock jumper position for each HIA used. Only “CLK_EXT” and
“CLK_INT” are allowed.
Pressing [PAGE AHEAD] from the Configure HIA screen calls up the
HIA Status screen. The HIA Status screen contains communications
diagnostic information.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SP: 8-3-9
See the PeerWay Interfaces Manual (PW) for a complete description of
the screens and for more information on HIA configuration.
An HIA pair can support up to 40 links over the HIA connection. The
number of available links can be viewed on the PeerWay Node screen
for the HIA.
NOTE: The Configure HIA screen of each HIA must agree with the
jumper settings on that HIA.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SP: 8-3-10
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SP: 8-4-1
Section 4:
Diogenes Interface
The Diogenes Interface connects an RS3 and a Rosemount DiogenesÒ
control system. The Diogenes Interface resides as a node on the
PeerWay and connects to the Diogenes via a TI Communications Card.
The Diogenes Interface consists of:
D
OI Card Cage
D
OI Power Regulator
D
OI PeerWay Interface
D
OI NV Memory
D
OI Processor Card
D
Diogenes TI Communications Card (7900--0408--0001)
D
Diogenes Communications Connection Box (Optional)
D
Diogenes Cables
The Operator Interface (OI) Nonvolatile (NV) Memory card must have
the terminal/modem jumpers in the terminal position. See the Service
Manual (SV: 3--6) for the location and setting of the jumpers.
Diogenes Interface Software must be loaded into the OI Processor card
and the PeerWay Interface NV Memory card.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Diogenes Interface
SP: 8-4-2
Figure 8.4.1 shows the Diogenes Interface and its components.
Empty Slot
OI PeerWay
Interface
OI NV Memory Board
Empty Slot
OI Power Regulator
OI Processor
Power Switch and Cable
Figure 8.4.1. Diogenes Interface (Front)
Figure 8.4.2 shows the connections on the OI Card Cage backside.
30 Volt
Power
PeerWay A
Redundant
30 Volt Power
(Optional)
Connection
for
ON/OFF
Switch
RS-232C
Cable to Diogenes
PeerWay B
Fan Power
(Red and Black Wires)
Figure 8.4.2. Diogenes Interface (Back)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Diogenes Interface
SP: 8-4-3
Figure 8.4.3 shows two methods of connecting the systems.
Diogenes
RS3
Direct RS-232 connection
Max 50 Feet
Cable 7900--0355--0005, --0006, --0007, or --0008
Diogenes
Diogenes
Interface
TI Comm
Card
Current loop RS-232 connection
Max 1 km
Max 50 Feet
Cable
7900--0166--000x
Cable
7900--0164--000x
Communication
Converter Box
RS3
Figure 8.4.3. Diogenes/RS3 Connections
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Diogenes Interface
SP: 8-4-4
Diogenes Interface TI Communications Card
The Diogenes Interface requires a TI Communications card
(7900--0408--0001) in one Console or SCI interface slot in the Diogenes
Card Cage. Refer to the Diogenes User’s Manual for information about
installing TI Comm Cards in the TI 960B.
Figure 8.4.4 shows the TI Comm Card jumper positions for an RS-232
connection and for a current loop connection.
TI Comm Card (7900--408--0001)
jumpering for RS-232 connection
TI Comm Card (7900--408--0001)
jumpering for current loop connection
Figure 8.4.4. Diogenes TI Comm Card Jumpering
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Diogenes Interface
SP: 8-4-5
Diogenes Communication Convertor Box
The Diogenes Communication Converter Box is only used for the
current loop connection.
The Converter Box must be jumpered for a Diogenes/RS3 current loop
connection. To access the jumpers, unplug the Communication
Converter Box, remove the four cover screws, and take off the cover.
Figure 8.4.5 shows the required jumper positions.
TERMINAL/MODEM
T
CONTROL
M
Y
N
CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY
Figure 8.4.5. Diogenes Communication Converter Box Jumpering (Current Loop Connection)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Diogenes Interface
SP: 8-4-6
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Diogenes Interface
SP: 8-5-1
Section 5:
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
The RS3t Network Interface (RNI) (10P53330001) provides a
connection between the PeerWay and an Ethernet Local Area Network.
It is a node on the PeerWay and a host on the Ethernet. Software in the
RNI provides a connection between PeerWay messages and Ethernet
messages. Figure 8.5.1 shows the RNI in the 19-inch mounting bracket
(10P53900001).
Figure 8.5.1. RNI and Mounting Bracket
Software installation is covered in the RNI Release Notes (RR) and
Installation Guide (RI). Application programming is described in the RNI
Programmer’s Reference Manual (RP). Service issues are covered in
the Service Manual (SV), Volume 2.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
SP: 8-5-2
Figure 8.5.2 shows the front of the RNI.
PW A/B
ERROR
ETHERNET
10 BASE T
HW GOOD
PEERWAY B
PEERWAY A
ETHERNET
10 BASE 2
HW BAD
1
2
No.
3
Item
CONSOLE /
RESET
SERIAL 1
SWITCH
4
5
COMM
6
18 -- 36 VDC
INPUT POWER
TMSTR
7
8
No.
9
Item
1
Ethernet 10BaseT connector
6
LEDs
2
PeerWay B drop cable
7
Console/Serial connector for terminal
communicating with the RNI
3
PeerWay A drop cable
8
Reset switch
4
Write-on label
9
DC power connector
5
Ethernet 10Base2 connector
Figure 8.5.2. RNI Front Panel
The write-on label, shown in Figure 8.5.3, provides space to record the
PeerWay Node address, the Ethernet host name, and which Ethernet
port is in use. The MAC Address (machine address) will be filled out at
the factory. This is the unique Ethernet address of the RNI.
PEERWAY NODE
E-NET HOST
MAC ADDRESS
E-NET 10 BASE T
NUMBER
E-NET 10 BASE 2
Figure 8.5.3. RNI Label
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
SP: 8-5-3
Checklist for CE Compatible Installations
These rules must be followed to ensure CE compliance:
1. Mount the RNI in the RNI Rack Mount Bracket (10P53900001).
2. Mount the RNI bracket in a properly grounded system cabinet.
3. Install the ferrite clamp next to the connector on the Ethernet
cable.
4. Use a EMC-approved source of DC power.
5. Connect the PeerWay Drop Cables to a CE-approved PeerWay
Tap.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
SP: 8-5-4
Connecting System Cables
The RNI connects to both an RS3 PeerWay and to an Ethernet Local
Area Network as shown in Figure 8.5.4.
2
1
A
B
4
3
5
7
6
8
No.
8
Description
No.
Description
1
PeerWays A and B
5
DC power cable
2
PeerWay Tap Boxes A and B
6
10BaseT or 10Base2 Ethernet connector
3
PeerWay Drop Cables A and B
7
Ethernet
4
RNI
8
Computers on Ethernet
Figure 8.5.4. System Connections to the RNI
DC Power: Use a 1984--0158--00xx cable for A bus power, or a
1984--0158--20xx cable for A/B power. Use a 10-amp fuse in the DC
Distribution Card. There is no power switch on the RNI.
PeerWay: The RNI is connected to the PeerWay by a set of standard
PeerWay Drop Cables (1984--0473--xxxx).
CAUTION
The RNI cannot supply adequate current to power an
Optical Tap Box or a PeerWay Extender (PX). It can power
a twinax Tap Box.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
SP: 8-5-5
Ethernet: The RNI connects to the Ethernet by a 10baseT twisted pair
or 10Base2 coaxial cable. Use of other Ethernet media requires an
external converter. The ferrite clamp (55P--0426--x001) must be
fastened next to the connector on the Ethernet cable for CE compliant
installation.
NOTE: The RNI is normally shipped jumpered for use with 10BaseT
twisted pair wiring.
Serial Port Cable: A cable (10P55180007) is supplied to connect your
ASCII terminal to the Console/Serial connector. The cable has a RJ-11
connector on each end. Two adaptors are provided: a RJ-11 to 9-pin
Dsub (10P55130001) and a RJ-11 to 25-pin Dsub (10P55130002). The
adaptor fastens to the serial port of your PC and then allows the cable
to connect to the RNI. This cable is used in the startup procedure and
for servicing the RNI. Use a terminal emulator program in your PC to
communicate with the RNI over the serial port. Set it for RS-232
communication using 9600 baud, 8 bits, no parity, and no handshaking.
Label: Write the PeerWay Node Number and the Ethernet device
name on the label.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
SP: 8-5-6
LEDs and Reset Switch
There are six LEDs on the RNI as shown in Table 8.5.1.
NOTE: When the red/green pair flash alternately, there is a message
on the serial port.
Table 8.5.1. RNI LEDs
LED
Color
Meaning
HW GOOD
Green
HW BAD
Red
COMM
Yellow
Blinks when internal communications occur in
normal operation.
PW A/B
Yellow
ON when PeerWay A is active.
OFF when PeerWay B is active.
The hardware has passed all diagnostic tests
and is running normally.
The hardware has failed one or more
diagnostic tests. The RNI is not operating.
Indicates failure of a diagnostic test if the red
LED is ON and this LED flashes. The number
of flashes indicates the failed test.
ERROR
Yellow
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
TMSTR
Yellow
CPU
ROM CRC
Memory Controller
Main Memory
68302 Static Memory
Main Memory Size
TRAP Exceptions
Transfer Error Acknowledge (TEA)
Exceptions
Read/Write Latch
Real Time Clock
Watchdog Interrupt
Ethernet Loopback
ON if the RNI is the PeerWay Tick-Master.
Pressing the RESET SWITCH makes the RNI reboot itself.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
SP: 8-5-7
Jumpers
Internal jumper HD1 selects Ethernet format as either 10BaseT or
10Base2. Figure 8.5.5 shows the location of the jumper. The default
type is 10BaseT. The selected Ethernet type is marked on the label.
You can change to 10Base2 by opening the case and moving the
jumper. Be sure to change the marking on the label.
Figure 8.5.5. RNI Ethernet Jumper Location
Configuring the RNI
The Ethernet network administrator will register the machine number
(MAC address) of the RNI and assign it a name in the network. The
PeerWay configuror will assign a PeerWay Node Number to the RNI.
This must be entered in the RNI configuration file on the host computer.
The RNI reads this file at boot time and thus determines the PeerWay
Node Number to use. The name and Node Number should be written
on the RNI label.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
SP: 8-5-8
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
RS3t
Site Preparation and Installation
Appendixes
Appendix A:
IEC and ISO Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Appendix B:
Acronyms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
RS3: Appendixes
Contents
SP: ii
List of Tables
Table
A.1
RS3: Appendixes
Page
IEC and ISO Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Contents
SP: A-1
Appendix A:
IEC and ISO Symbols
Table A.1 describes the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
and International Organization for Standardization (ISO) symbols used
in this manual.
Table A.1. IEC and ISO Symbols
Symbol
l
RS3: Appendixes
Publication
Description
IEC 417, No. 5031
Direct current
IEC 417, No. 5032
Alternating current
IEC 417, No. 5033
Both direct and alternating current
IEC 417, No. 5017
Earth Ground TERMINAL
IEC 417, No. 5019
Protective Conductor TERMINAL
IEC 417, No. 5020
Frame or Chassis TERMINAL
IEC 417, No. 5021
Equipotentiality
IEC 417, No. 5007
On (Supply)
IEC 417, No. 5008
Off (Supply)
IEC 417, No. 5172
Equipment protected throughout by
DOUBLE INSULATION or
REINFORCED INSULATION
ISO 3864, No. B.3.6
Caution:
Risk of electric shock
ISO 3864, No. B.3.1
Caution:
Refer to accompanying documents
IEC 417, No. 5041
Caution:
Hot surface
IEC 27--1, No. 101a
Power Factor
IEC and ISO Symbols
SP: A-2
RS3: Appendixes
IEC and ISO Symbols
SP: B-1
Appendix B:
Acronyms and Abbreviations
A
A
Ampere
AC
Alternating Current
A/D
Analog to Digital
ADLC
Advanced Data Link Controller
AIB
Analog Input Block
AIO
Analog Input/Output
AIO-R
Redundant Analog Input/Output
AIO-RS
Redundant Analog Input/Output with Smart Daughterboard
Amp
Ampere
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
AOB
Analog Output Block
ARB
Arbitration
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
A.S.H.R.A.E. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASIC
Application Specific Integrated Circuit
ASYNC
Asynchronous
AUI
Attachment Unit Interface
AWG
American Wire Gauge
B
BCC
Basic Command Console
BCD
Binary-Coded Decimal
BMI
Buffered Motherboard Interface
BNC
Baby “N” Connector
BRAM
Battery Backed Random Access Memory
BTU
British Thermal Unit
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SP: B-2
C
C
Celcius
CC
Command Console; Contact Controller
CE
Conformité Européenne (Marking that indicates compliance to all applicable
European directives)
CENELEC
European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization
CFM
Cubic Feet per Minute
CFS
Control File Status (an RS3 command line entry)
CH
Chassis
CIB
Contact Input Block
CIO
Contact Input/Output
CJC
Cold-Junction Compensator
cm
Centimeter(s)
cm3
Cubic Centimeters
CMOS
Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor
COB
Contact Output Block
Com.
Common
CP
Coordinator Processor
cpi
Characters Per Inch
CPLST
Coodinator Processor Line Status
cps
Characters Per Second
CPU
Central Processing Unit
CRC
Cyclical Redundancy Check
CRT
Cathode-Ray Tube
CSA
Canadian Standards Association (Canadian Approval)
CTS
Clear to Send
D
D/A
Digital to Analog
DAC
Digital-to-Analog Converter
dB
Decibel
dBm
Decibels above (or below) 1 Milliwatt
DC
Direct Current
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
DCE
Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment
DCS
Distributed Control System
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SP: B-3
DDP
Disk Directory PeerWay
DEC
Digital Equipment Corporation
DIB
Discrete Input Block
DIN
Deutsche Industrie Normenausschuss (a German national standards
organization)
DIO
Discrete Input/Output
DIP
Dual Inline Package
DMA
Direct Memory Access
DMAC
Direct Memory Access Controller
DNB
Data Terminal Not Busy
DOB
Discrete Output Block
DRAM
Dynamic Random Access Memory
DS
Disk Shutdown (an RS3 command line entry)
DSR
Data Set Ready
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DTACK
Data Transfer Acknowledge
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
DUART
Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
DVM
Digital Voltage Meter
E
ECC
Enhanced Command Console
EDAC
Error Detection and Correction
EEPROM
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
EEROM
Electrically Erasable Read-Only Memory
EIA
Electronic Industries Association
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatability
EMI
Electromagnetic Interface
EN
European Norm
EPROM
Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
ETS
Electrical Tap Set
F
F
Fahrenheit
FEM
Front End Module
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SP: B-4
FET
Field Effect Transistor
FIC
Field Interface Card
FIM
Field Interface Module
FMS
Flexible Media Stack
FO
Fiber Optic
FRSI
Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc.
FSA
Formatter/Sense Amplifier
ft
Feet
G
g
Acceleration of gravity at Earth’s surface
GAK
Gate Array Logic
GND
Ground
H
HARTR
Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
(HARTR is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation)
HCC
Hardened Command Console
HIA
Highway Interface Adapter
HOB
HART Output Block
hr
Hour
HVAC
Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
Hz
Hertz
I
ID
Identification
i.e.
Id Est (that is)
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
I/F
Interface
IGND
Isolated Ground
in.
Inch(es)
I/O
Input/Output
IP
International Protection
IP
Internet Protocol
I/P
Current to Pressure
IS
Intrinsic Safety
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SP: B-5
ISA
Instrument Society of America
ISO
Isolated
IT
Isolation Transformer
J
K
Kb
Kilobit (1024 bits)
KB
Kilobyte (1024 bytes)
KBI
Keyboard Interface Card
kg
Kilogram
kHz
Kilohertz
km
Kilometer
KMD
Kill Memory Dump
kVa
Kilovolt-ampere
KVI
Keyboard/Video Interface
L
LAN
Local Area Network
lb
Pound(s)
lbf
Pounds of Force
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LFD
Line Fault Detection
LLB
Local Loop Back
lpi
Lines Per Inch
LPM
Loop Power Module
LVD
Low Voltage Directive
M
m
Meter(s)
m3
Cubic Meters
mA
Milliampere
MAC
Media Access Control
MAIO
Multipoint Analog Input/Output
MB
Megabyte
MBM
Magnetic Bubble Memory
MC
MiniConsole
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SP: B-6
MDIO
Multipoint Discrete Input/Output
MDIOH
Multipoint Discrete Input/Output -- High-Side Switch FIM
MDIOL
Multipoint Discrete Input/Output -- Low-Side Switch FIM
MEG
Megabyte
MHz
Megahertz
MIB
Multiplexer Input Block
MIO
Multipoint Input/Output
mm
Millimeter
MLC
MultiLoop Card
MMI
Main Memory Interface
MOS
Metal-Oxide Semiconductor
MP
Marshaling Panel
MPC
MultiPurpose Controller
ms
Millisecond
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failure(s)
MTCC
Multitube Command Console
MTL
Measurement Technologies Limited
MTO
Master Terminal Operator
MUX
Multiplexer
mV
Millivolt(s)
mV/m
Milivolt(s) per meter
N
N/A
Not Applicable
NBS
National Bureau of Standards (American) -- This organization is now known
as the National Institute of Science and Technology.
N.C.
Normally Closed
NEC
National Electrical Code
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
nm
Nanometer(s)
NSm
Newton Meter(s)
No.
Number
N.O.
Normally Open
NRTL
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (American)
NRTL/C
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory/Canada (meets American and
Canadian standards)
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SP: B-7
NRZ
Non-Return to Zero
NV
Nonvolatile
NVRAM
Nonvolatile Random Access Memory
O
OBC
Output Bypass Card
OBU
Output Bypass Unit
OEM
Original Equipment Manufacturer
OI
Operator Interface
OSC
Oscillator
OTS
Optical Tap Set
P
PAL
Programmable Array Logic
PIOB
Pulse Input/Output Block
PIT
Parallel Interface Timer
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller
PLCB
Programmable Logic Controller Block
PLD
Programmable Logic Device
P/N
Part Number
ppm
Parts Per Million
psi
Pounds per Square Inch
PTM
Programmable Timer Module
PVC
Polyvinyl Chloride
PWA
Printed Wiring Assembly
PWB
Printed Wiring Board
PX
PeerWay Extender
Q
QBI
QBUS to PeerWay Interface
R
RAM
Random Access Memory
RBL
Rosemount Basic Language
RBLC
Rosemount Basic Language Controller
RCVR
Receiver
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SP: B-8
RF
Radio Frequency
RFI
Rosemount Factory Interface
RGB
Red-Green-Blue
RGRANT
Redundancy Grant
RIOB
Redundant Input/Output Block
RMON
Remote Monitoring
RMP
RS3 Millennium Package
rms
Root Mean Square
RNI
RS3 Network Interface
ROM
Read Only Memory
ROS
RS3 Operator Station
RREQ
Redundancy Request
RSEL
Redundancy Select
RTC
Real Time Clock
RTD
Resistance Temperature Detector
RTN
Return
RTS
Ready to Send
RX
Receive
RXC
Receive Clock
RXD
Data Receive
S
SAMA
Scientific Apparatus Makers Association
SCI
Supervisory Computer Interface
SCR
Silicon-Controlled Rectifier
SCSI
Small Computer System Interface
SEL
Selector
SELV
Separated Extra-Low Voltage
SH
Shield
SIB
Smart Transmitter Input Block
SMS
System Manager Station
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SRAM
Static Random Access Memory
SRU
System Resource Unit
SSC
Single-Strategy Controller
SSR
Solid State Relay
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SP: B-9
S/W
Software
SYNC
Synchronous
T
TB
Termination Board
TC
Thermocouple
TEA
Transfer Error Acknowledge
TI
Texas Instruments
TIB
Temperature Input Block
TIC
Time Interval Controller
TIL
Technical Information and Library Services
TTL
Transistor to Transistor Logic
TTY
Teletypewriter
TX
Transmit
TXMT
Transmitter
TXC
Transmit Clock
TXD
Data Transmit
U
UART
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
UDH
Unit Data Highway
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply
V
V
Volt(s)
VA
Volts Ampere
VAC
Volt(s) Alternating Current
VAX
Virtual Address Extension (a DEC family of computers)
VDC
Volt(s) Direct Current
VI
Volts Isolated
VIB
Value Input Block
V/m
Volts per meter
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SP: B-10
W
W
Watt(s)
WAN
Wide Area Network
X
XMTR
Transmitter
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SP: Index-1
RS3t
Site Preparation and Installation
Index
Numbers
10P
5037000x, 7-5-5
5049000x, 7-5-5
50510001, 7-5-6
50510002, 7-5-6
50930001, 5-8-2, 5-8-18
50960001, 5-8-2, 5-8-18
5264000x, 3-1-12
52700001, 7-2-1, 7-2-2
52820001, 3-1-14, 3-2-20, 3-5-6
52960001, 4-1-1
53190004, 7-3-1, 7-3-27
53490001, 7-3-1
53490002, 7-3-1
5331xxxx, 5-9-5
53330001, 8-5-1
5349000x, 7-3-27
53900001, 8-5-1
54040004, 7-3-1
54080004, 7-3-1
5409000x, 5-3-14
54340xxx, 8-2-4
54560001, 5-9-8
54590001, 6-1-13
54620001, 6-1-13
5477000x, 7-3-1
55030001, 2-7-7
55030002, 2-7-7
5503000x, 5-3-14
5662000x, 5-2-2, 5-2-4
56700015, 3-6-18
57010001, 2-7-7, 5-3-14
57070001, 7-3-1
57560001, 5-3-14
57700005, 7-3-1
1167--, 0016--000x, 5-6-11
12P, 0373x032, 3-6-14
1984-0158--00xx, 4-1-6, 5-5-10
0158--10xx, 4-1-6, 5-5-10
0158--20xx, 5-5-8, 5-5-9
0158--xxxx, 5-8-7
0283--00xx, 5-5-3
0373--00xx, 5-5-3
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
0373--xxxx,
0473--xxxx,
0474--xxxx,
0494--xxxx,
0498--0005,
0499--xxxx,
0500--xxxx,
0607--000x,
0620--000x,
0660--000x,
1065--000x,
1195--xxxx,
1196--xxxx,
1198--000x,
1264--000x,
1288--000x,
1460--000x,
1543--000x,
1605--0009,
2231--0001,
2335--9901,
2350--0001,
2350--100x,
2415--0001,
2456--000x,
2457--000x,
2458--000x,
2459--000x,
2504--9002,
2510--0001,
2526--0002,
2533--000x,
2535--9901,
2576--000x,
2616--000x,
2628--x00x,
2629--xxxx,
2647--0001,
2783--9045,
2859--00xx,
3062--00xx,
3211--0001,
3211--0002,
3214--0002,
3223--xxxx,
3261--0002,
3267--xxxx,
5-4-9, 5-5-1
4-1-7, 5-8-7
5-6-2, 5-8-15, 5-8-18
5-6-2, 5-8-15, 5-8-18
7-2-16
6-2-11
6-2-9, 6-2-13
6-2-6
6-2-1, 6-2-5
3-2-14
5-6-9
5-7-7
5-7-7
5-7-16
5-5-5
6-3-9
6-3-8
6-1-13, 6-1-17
3-1-21, 3-5-11
5-7-5, 5-8-2, 5-8-7
8-1-3, 8-1-5
8-1-1
5-7-14
6-1-13
6-2-1, 6-2-8, 6-2-13
6-2-1, 6-2-8
6-2-1, 6-2-8, 6-2-10– 6-2-12
6-3-11
8-1-3, 8-1-5
8-1-3, 8-1-5
6-1-1
8-1-3, 8-1-4
8-1-4
6-3-3
6-1-13, 6-1-17
8-1-3, 8-1-4, 8-1-5
6-2-2
8-1-1
5-9-11
8-3-4
6-2-3
5-7-5
5-7-9
5-7-9
3-3-9
8-1-3, 8-1-5
3-3-9
Index
SP: Index-2
3274--0001, 5-7-5
3278--000x, 5-9-17
4121--000x, 7-2-1, 7-2-16
4124--000x, 7-2-1, 7-2-16
4167--000x, 7-2-1, 7-2-29
4186--00xx, 7-2-16
4188--xxxx, 5-9-6, 5-9-11, 5-9-13
4195--000x, 7-2-5, 7-2-25, 7-3-21
4205--000x, 5-9-10
4237--0001, 2-3-5, 2-5-7
4237--0024, 2-6-1
4282--000x, 7-2-1, 7-2-11
4289--xxxx, 2-3-9
4290--xxxx, 2-3-9
4297--000x, 2-5-6, 2-6-1
4298--xxxx, 7-2-31
4299--xxxx, 7-2-12
4309--0004, 2-7-1, 5-3-20
4309--000x, 2-5-6, 2-6-1
4319--xxxx, 7-2-12
4329--0001, 2-7-1
4329--000x, 2-7-1, 5-3-20
4337--xxxx, 2-7-1, 2-7-11
4344--000x, 7-4-2
4345--xxxx, 7-2-31
4350--0001, 2-7-1
4350--000x, 5-3-20
4380--000x, 2-7-11
4398--000x, 7-3-1
4433--xxxx, 2-7-1, 2-7-11
5311--0001, 8-3-2
2X2 I/O cabinet, 2-6-1
2X5 I/O cabinet, 2-5-1
4--20 mA MUX Marshaling Panel, 6-2-1, 6-2-10
4X5 I/O cabinet, 2-5-1
50P, 05890103, 5-9-13
55P
0144x022, 3-6-14
0427xxxx, 7-2-26
0579x001, 2-3-7, 2-5-10, 2-6-3
0675x012, 3-6-14
7900-0164--xxxx, 8-4-3
0166--xxxx, 8-4-3
0355--xxxx, 8-4-3
0408--0001, 8-4-1, 8-4-4
AC Distribution Block, 2-7-1, 5-3-20
AC distribution system, installing, 5-2-1
AC entrance panel, 1-2-12
checkout, 5-2-6
dual AC feed, 5-2-4
single AC feed, 5-2-2
AC power
dual AC feed, 5-2-4
single AC feed, 5-2-2
AC/DC Distribution block, 2-7-1
AC/DC Power Supply, 5-3-1, 5-4-1
connecting to AC power, 5-3-13
installing, 5-3-1, 5-4-1
rack mounting, 5-3-3
sizing, 1-2-12
with battery backup
alarm contacts, 5-3-7
installing, 5-3-5
LEDs and controls, 5-3-8
without battery backup
alarm contacts, 5-3-10
installing, 5-3-10
LEDs and controls, 5-3-10
measuring output current, 5-3-12
Addressing, 3-6-7
alarm contacts, AC/DC Power Supply
with battery backup, 5-3-7
without battery backup, 5-3-10
Analog Card Cage, 6-1-1
address label, 6-1-9
Analog Marshaling Panel, 6-1-13
CE Checklist, 6-1-10
Fuses, 6-1-12
system connections, 6-1-2
Analog FlexTerm, 6-1-1
analog I/O, Multipoint, 7-3-1
Analog Marshaling Panel
4--20 mA devices, 6-1-22
Auxiliary Terminal Block, 6-1-17
Cold Junction Compensator, 6-1-17
field wiring, 6-1-19
I/O electronics redundancy, 6-1-31
installing, 6-1-13
pulse I/O devices, 6-1-30
temperature input devices, 6-1-28
attenuator
fixed optical, 5-7-13
repeater/attenuator, 5-7-14
Auxiliary Terminal Block, 6-1-17
A
A Bus DC Power Distribution Cable, 5-5-10
A/B Bus DC Power Distribution Cable, 5-5-8
AC
distribution system, 1-2-4
entrance panel, 1-2-12
power, 1-2-7
total load, 1-2-13
voltage regulation, 1-2-8
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
B
B Bus DC Power Distribution Cable, 5-5-10
Black Box
Data Converter, 8-3-4
HIA/Black Box Cable, 8-3-4
IC454--187, 8-3-4
Index
SP: Index-3
C
cabinet
floor mount I/O, 2-5-1
System Cabinet Series 1, 2-4-1
System Cabinet Series 2
dimensions, 2-3-2
field wire entry, 2-2-5, 2-3-12
grounding, 2-2-4, 2-3-7
joining, 2-3-5
securing to floor, 2-3-6
wall mount I/O, 2-6-1
Cabinet Joiner Kit, 2-3-5, 2-5-7
cable, 5-1-1
4--20 mA FEM to Marshaling Panel, 6-2-11
A Bus DC Power Distribution, 5-5-10
A/B Bus DC Power Distribution, 5-5-8
AC/DC Power Supply to DC Bus, 5-5-3
B Bus DC Power Distribution, 5-5-10
Cabinet Fan Jumper, 2-3-9
Cabinet Fan to AC Entrance, 2-3-9
communication, 5-9-6
ControlFile to MUX FlexTerm, 6-2-2
Controller to FlexTerm, 5-9-5
DC Bus to DC Bus Jumper, 5-4-9, 5-5-1, 5-5-3
DC Bus to System Device (A Bus), 4-1-6
DC Bus to System Device (B Bus), 4-1-6
DC I/O Power Cable, 2-7-1
FIM Communication, 5-9-6
HIA Link, 8-3-2
length limits, 5-8-15
lengths, 5-1-1
Local DC Power Supply, A Bus, 2-7-11
Local DC Power Supply, B Bus, 2-7-11
Marshaling Panel, 7-2-31, 7-4-3
maximum lengths, 5-1-1
MUX Cable Assembly 200 Points, 6-2-3
PeerWay Drop, MicroVAX, 8-1-3, 8-1-5
QBUS Board 1 to Board 2, 8-1-3, 8-1-5
QBUS Boards to MP, 8-1-3, 8-1-5
routing twinax PeerWay, 5-6-4
RTD or Voltage FEM to Marshaling Panel, 6-2-9
system cables, 5-1-1
Tap Box to Device, PeerWay Drop, 4-1-7
twinax PeerWay, 5-6-2
cabling, PeerWay Extender, 5-8-6
CE compliance, 5-8-4
Cold Junction Compensator, 6-1-13, 6-1-17
communication cables, 5-9-6
communication wiring, Multipoint I/O, 7-1-11
Communications Connect Box, 8-4-1, 8-4-5
Communications Connect Card V, 5-9-8
installing, 5-9-8
Communications Termination Panel, 5-9-10
condensation, 1-1-3
Configure HIA Screen, 8-3-8
connector, twinax PeerWay, 5-6-2, 5-6-11
Connector Crimp Tool, 5-6-11
console furniture
Series 1, 3-2-1
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Series 2, 3-1-1
Contact Card Cage, 6-3-3
FIC addressing, 6-3-5
installing, 6-3-3
jumpers, 6-3-6
Contact FIC, 6-3-8
installing, 6-3-8
jumpers, 6-3-8
Contact Field Interface Card, 6-3-8
Contact I/O, installing, 6-3-1
Contact Marshaling Panel, 6-3-11
field wiring, 6-3-14
fuse, 6-3-14
installing, 6-3-11
ControlFile, installing, 4-1-1
corrosive environment, 1-1-4
Crimp Tool Kit, 5-6-11
Current MUX Marshaling Panel, 6-2-1, 6-2-8,
6-2-10
D
Data Converter, 8-3-4
DC
distribution system, 1-2-4
load, 1-2-9
power, 1-2-9
DC Distribution Block, 5-3-20
DC Distribution block, 2-7-1
DC distribution system
cabling, 5-5-8
checkout, 5-5-11
installing, 5-5-1
DC I/O Power Cable, 2-7-1
DC Output Card, 5-5-5
fuses, 5-5-7
DC power cable, PeerWay Extender, 5-8-7
design guidelines, hybrid PeerWay, 5-8-15, 5-8-17
fiber optic segment, 5-8-16
twinax segment, 5-8-15
dimensions, keyboard, 3-3-2
DIN rail, 2-7-1
asymmetrical, 2-5-6, 2-6-1
G, 2-5-6, 2-6-1
hat, 2-5-6, 2-6-1
symmetrical, 2-5-6, 2-6-1
Diogenes
Communications Connection Box, 8-4-1, 8-4-5
installing, 8-4-1
Interface, 8-4-1
TI Communications Card, 8-4-1, 8-4-4
Direct Discrete Termination Panel
field wiring, 7-2-4
fuses, 7-2-10
jumpers, 7-2-7
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II, 7-2-1, 7-2-2
Discrete I/O, Multipoint, 7-2-1
distribution block
AC, 5-3-20
DC, 5-3-20
Index
SP: Index-4
dust, 1-1-8
E
EIA Options, 8-2-14
electrical PeerWay
cable, 5-6-2
grounding, 5-6-9
installing, 5-6-1
terminating, 5-6-9
Electrical PeerWay Tap, 5-7-9
Electrical Tap Box, 5-7-9
installing, 5-7-9
environment
ambient limits, 1-1-2
control, 1-1-15
corrosive effects, 1-1-4
dust, 1-1-8
electromagnetic radiation, 1-1-12
limits, 1-1-2
maintaining, 1-1-19
relative humidity, 1-1-3
shock & vibration, 1-1-11
static electricity, 1-1-12
equipment
storing, 2-1-2
transporting, 2-1-4
unpacking, 2-1-3
ESD, 1-1-12
Ethernet
cable, 3-6-10
hubs, 3-6-9
European Analog Marshaling Panel, Fuses, 6-1-14
F
FEM, field wiring, 6-2-5
fiber optic, I/O Converter, 5-9-17
fiber optic cable, 5-10-1
installing connectors, 5-10-3
optical PeerWay, 5-7-1
testing, 5-10-4
tie assembly, 5-8-7
troubleshooting, 5-10-13
Fiber Optic Cable Tie Panel Assembly, 5-7-5
Fiber Optic I/O Converter, 5-9-17
installing, 5-9-17
field communications, installing, 5-9-1
field wire
entry to floor mount I/O, 2-5-11
entry to Series 1 Cabinets, 2-4-7– 2-4-10
entry to Series 2 cabinets, 2-2-5, 2-3-12
entry to wall mount I/O cabinet, 2-6-4
routing to card cages, 2-4-10
routing to marshaling panels, 2-4-11
field wiring
4--20 mA MUX Marshaling Panel, 6-2-11
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Analog Marshaling Panel, 6-1-19
Multiplexer (MUX) FlexTerm, 6-2-5
Multiplexer FlexTerms, 6-2-1
Multiplexer Marshaling Panels, 6-2-1
RTD MUX Marshaling Panel, 6-2-13
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel, 6-2-9
FIM Communication Cable, 5-9-6
fixed optical attenuator, 5-7-13
floor mount I/O cabinet, installing, 2-5-1
furniture
Series 1, 3-2-1
Series 2, 3-1-1
fuse
DC Output Card, 5-5-7
label, Remote I/O Power Supply, 2-7-1
fuse label, Mark 1 Remote Power Supply, 5-3-20
G
G11262--, 1004, 5-8-7
G12243--00xx, 6-3-15, 7-2-26
G12885--, 000x, 5-6-2, 5-6-11
G50194--, 000x, 5-6-2
G51769--, xxxx, 5-8-18
G52931--000x, 5-7-13
G53373--0103, 5-9-6, 5-9-8, 5-9-11, 5-9-13,
5-9-21
G53394--, 0250--0005, 6-1-14
G53405--1001--4020, 2-5-6, 2-6-1
G60350--xxxx, 7-2-38
G60900-1022--0101, 2-5-11, 2-5-12, 2-6-4
4040--0101, 2-5-11, 2-5-12, 2-6-4
gas concentration, 1-1-5
Grant Continuity Card, 8-1-8
ground block, 2-3-7, 2-5-10
grounding
chassis interconnections, 1-3-2
communication lines, 1-3-7
earth ground connection, 1-3-3
electrical PeerWay, 5-6-9
I/O cabinet
floor mounted, 2-5-10
wall mount, 2-6-3
intrinsic safety, 1-3-9
optical and electrical tap box, 5-7-10
remote power supply, 1-3-7
system, 1-3-4
system cabinets, Series 2, 2-2-4, 2-3-7
H
Hardened Command Console
installing vibration protection, 3-4-3
keyboard labels, 3-4-11
making electrical connections, 3-4-5
securing to the floor, 3-4-5
HIA
Index
SP: Index-5
direct connection of PeerWays, 8-3-2
installing, 8-3-1
memory jumpers, 8-3-6
modem, 8-3-4
HIA Link Cable, 8-3-2
HIA Modem, 8-3-4
HIA/Black Box Cable Assembly, 8-3-4
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel,
7-2-1, 7-2-29
field wiring, 7-2-31
installing, 7-2-29
jumpers, 7-2-37
label, 7-2-36
solid state relays, 7-2-38
Highway Interface Adapter. See HIA
hubs, 3-6-9
hybrid PeerWay, 5-8-1
design guidelines, 5-8-15
I
I/O cabinet
2X5, 2-5-1
4X5, 2-5-1
floor mount
grounding, 2-5-10
installing Multipoint I/O termination panels,
2-5-13
joining, 2-5-7
remote power supply, 2-5-14
stabilizing, 2-5-9
vibration protection, 2-5-8
wiring 2X5, 2-5-11
wiring 4X5, 2-5-12
wall mount
grounding, 2-6-3
remote power supply, 2-6-6
wiring, 2-6-4
IAC5 Optical Isolator Module, 6-3-15
IAC5A Optical Isolator Module, 6-3-15
IC454--187, 8-3-4
IDC5B Optical Isolator Module, 6-3-15
IDC5F Optical Isolator Module, 6-3-15
installing
AC distribution system, 5-2-1
AC/DC Power Supply, 5-3-1, 5-4-1
with battery backup, 5-3-5
without battery backup, 5-3-10
Analog Card Cage, 6-1-1
Analog marshaling Panel, 6-1-13
Communications Connect Card V, 5-9-8
Contact Card Cage, 6-3-3
Contact FIC, 6-3-8
Contact I/O, 6-3-1
Contact Marshaling Panel, 6-3-11
ControlFile, 4-1-1
DC distribution system, 5-5-1
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Diogenes Interface, 8-4-1
electrical (twinax) PeerWay, 5-6-1
Electrical Tap Box, 5-7-9
fiber optic connectors, 5-10-3
field communications, 5-9-1
floor mount I/O cabinets, 2-5-1
HIA, 8-3-1
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination
Panel, 7-2-29
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel, 7-2-16
keyboard labels
Hardened Command Console, 3-4-11
Multitube Command Console, 3-3-10
Local Termination Board, 6-3-9
MAIO, 7-3-1
MIO marshaling panels, 7-4-1
modem connection to a printer, 3-3-16
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel, 7-2-11
Multiplexer Marshaling Panel, 6-2-1
Multipoint I/O, 7-1-1
MUX hardware, 6-2-1
optical attenuator, 5-7-13
optical PeerWay, 5-7-1
Optical PeerWay Tap, 5-7-5
Optical Repeater/Attenuator, 5-7-14
printer, 3-3-16
QBI, 8-1-1
Remote Communications Termination Panel II,
5-9-10
Remote I/O Power Supply, 2-7-1
Series 1 System Cabinets, 2-4-1
Series 2 System Cabinets, 2-3-1
Star Coupler, 5-7-16
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI), 8-2-1
twinax connectors, 5-6-11
Twinax PeerWay Tap, 5-6-6
VAX/PeerWay Interface, 8-1-1
vibration protection, Series 1 System Cabinets,
2-4-2
wall mount I/O cabinets, 2-6-1
Intrinsic Safety, 7-5-1, 7-5-2
Intrinsic Safety, MTL IS Termination Panels, 7-5-5,
7-5-18
intrinsic safety, 1-3-9
IS. See Intrinsic Safety
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel, 7-2-1, 7-2-16
field wiring, 7-2-18
fuses, 7-2-28
installing, 7-2-16
jumpers, 7-2-27
label, 7-2-25
solid state relays, 7-2-26
isolation transformer, 1-3-8
J
jumpers, NV Memory, RAM, 4-1-9
Index
SP: Index-6
K
keyboard labels, installing
Hardened Command Console, 3-4-11
Multitube Command Console, 3-3-10
L
label, Remote I/O Power supply fuse ratings, 2-7-1
LEDs
AC/DC Power Supply
with battery backup, 5-3-8
without battery backup, 5-3-10
Mark 1 Remote Power Supply, 5-3-16, 5-3-22
LFD. See Line Fault Detection
lightning
arrestors, 1-3-14
protection, 1-3-10
Line Fault Detection, 7-5-9
Local Termination Board, 6-3-9
field wiring, 6-3-10
fuses, 6-3-10
installing, 6-3-9
Loop Power Module. See LPM
LPM, 7-3-1
M
M9047, 8-1-8
MAI32 FIM, 7-3-1
MAI32 Termination Panel, 7-3-1, 7-3-27
MAIO, 7-3-1, 7-3-2
connecting field devices, 7-3-14
installing, 7-3-1
MAIO16, Termination Panel, 7-3-1
MAIO16 FIM, 7-3-1
MAIO16 Termination Panel, 7-3-2
Marshaling Panel
Current MUX, 6-2-10
RTD MUX, 6-2-13
Voltage MUX, 6-2-8
Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block, 6-1-13,
6-1-17
Marshaling Panel Cable, 7-2-31, 7-4-3
MDIO, 7-2-1, 7-2-2
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II, 7-2-2
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination
Panel, 7-2-29
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel, 7-2-16
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel, 7-2-11
MDIO MTL IS Termination Panel, 7-5-5
MDIO--MTL I.S.. ISOLATOR BARRIERS
TERMINATION PANEL B, 7-5-5
MDIO-MTL I.S. ISOLATOR BARRIERS
TERMINATION PANEL A, 7-5-5
MicroVAX II -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel, 8-1-3
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
MicroVAX/PeerWay Marshaling Panel, 8-1-4
MIO Marshaling Panels, installing, 7-4-1
modem connection to a printer, 3-3-16
motor generator, 1-2-24
mounting, PeerWay Extender, 5-8-5
moving the system, 2-1-1
MTL
4014, 7-5-11
4021, 7-5-11
4023, 7-5-11
4025, 7-5-11
4041B, 7-5-22
4041P, 7-5-22
4045B, 7-5-22
4046P, 7-5-22
MTL IS Termination Panels, 7-5-5, 7-5-18
Discrete Applications, 7-5-5
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel, 7-2-1,
7-2-11
communication wiring, 7-2-13
field wiring, 7-2-12
installing, 7-2-11
jumpers, 7-2-14
Multiplexer (MUX) FlexTerm, 6-2-1
Multiplexer FlexTerm, field wiring, 6-2-1
Multiplexer Marshaling Panel, 6-2-1
field wiring, 6-2-1
Multipoint Analog I/O. See MAIO
Multipoint Discrete I/O. See MDIO
Multipoint I/O
address jumpers, 7-1-4
addressing, 7-1-4
analog, 7-3-1
communication wiring, 7-1-11
discrete, 7-2-1
grounding, 7-1-8
installation, 7-1-1, 7-1-8
online replacement, 7-1-6
power wiring, 7-1-9
redundancy, 7-1-6
scanning rate, 7-1-5
system cabling, 7-1-1
Multitube Command Console
AC Distribution Box, 3-2-13
CRTs, 3-3-12
keyboard dimensions, 3-3-2
Keyboard Interface Card, 3-3-5
making electrical connections, 3-2-11, 3-5-3
modem connection to a printer, 3-3-16
printer, 3-3-16
MUX Cable Assembly 200 Points, 6-2-3
MUX FlexTerm, field wiring, 6-2-5
MUX Marshaling Panels, 6-2-8
N
Network, 3-6-2
NV Memory, RAM, jumpers, 4-1-9
Index
SP: Index-7
O
OAC5 Optical Isolator Module, 6-3-15
OAC5-1, 7-2-26
A, 7-2-26
OAC5--1, 6-3-15
OAC5--A Optical Isolator Module, 6-3-15
OAC5A5 Optical Isolator Module, 6-3-15
ODC5 Optical Isolator Module, 6-3-15
ODC5A Optical Isolator Module, 6-3-15
online replacement, Multipoint I/O, 7-1-6
optical attenuator, fixed, 5-7-13
Optical Isolator Module, 6-3-15, 7-2-26
Contact Marshaling panel, 6-3-15
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination
Panel, 7-2-38
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel, 7-2-26
miniature, 7-2-38
Optical PeerWay
establishing attenuation of test cable, 5-10-7
installing, 5-7-1
optical PeerWay
loss calculation, 5-10-6
repeater testing, 5-10-10
testing, 5-10-4
transmitter and receiver testing, 5-10-8
troubleshooting, 5-10-13
Optical PeerWay Tap, 5-7-5
optical PeerWay Tap, installing, 5-7-5
Optical Repeater/Attenuator, 5-7-14
optical Repeater/Attenuator, installing, 5-7-14
Optical Tap Box, connecting cables, 5-7-7
Optical Tap Set, installing, 5-7-5
Opto/Electric cable, 5-7-7
specifications, 5-8-20
switches, 5-8-10
tap box assembly, 5-8-2
twinax grounding, 5-8-9
Planning a Process Network, 3-6-2
power
AC consumption, 1-2-9
AC requirements, 1-2-7
AC voltage regulation, 1-2-8
AC/DC supplies, 1-2-12
battery backup, 1-2-25
consumption, 1-2-9
CRT & printer backup, 1-2-27
distribution overview, 1-2-4
dropout, 1-2-8
dual AC sources, 1-2-21
motor generator, 1-2-24
redundancy, 1-2-14
supplemental, 1-2-21
UPS, 1-2-21
power wiring, Multipoint I/O, 7-1-9
printer, 3-3-15
installing, 3-3-16
modem connection, 3-3-16
Process Network, 3-6-2
Process Network Addressing, 3-6-7
Q
QBI, MicroVAX II, 8-1-3
QBI Hardware Kit
MicroVAX 3xxx and 4xxx Series, 8-1-1
MicroVAX II, 8-1-1
QBUS Board 1, 8-1-3, 8-1-5
QBUS Board 2, 8-1-3, 8-1-5
P
R
PeerWay
drop cables, 5-8-7
electrical
grounding, 5-6-9
installing, 5-6-1
installing Tap Box, 5-6-6
twinax connectors, 5-6-11
grounding electrical tap boxes, 5-7-10
grounding optical tap boxes, 5-7-10
installing optical, 5-7-1
testing optical, 5-10-4
PeerWay Extender
cabling, 5-8-6
components, 5-8-3
configuration examples, 5-8-12
DC power cable, 5-8-7
hybrid PeerWay, design guidelines, 5-8-15
installing, 5-8-1
LEDs, 5-8-8
mounting, 5-8-5
radios, 1-1-12
reactivity coupon, 1-1-4, 1-1-6
humidity effects, 1-1-7
use, 1-1-6, 5-4-5
redundancy, Multipoint I/O, 7-1-6
relative humidity, 1-1-3
Remote Communications Termination Panel II,
5-9-10
installing, 5-9-10
Remote I/O Power Supply, 2-7-1, 2-7-7
instaling, 2-7-1
remote power supply, 5-3-14
ROS CRT
Hitachi 21”, 3-6-14
Iiama Vision Master 17”, 3-6-14
ViewSonic P810, 3-6-14
router, 3-6-19
routing, twinax PeerWay cable, 5-6-4
RPQNA, 8-1-5
RS-232C, asynchronous protocol, 8-2-4
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
Index
SP: Index-8
RS-422
asynchronous protocol, 8-2-7
X.25 protocol, 8-2-9
RS3 Millennium Package, 2--2--1
RS3, Operator Station, 3-6-12
RTD MUX Marshaling Panel, 6-2-1, 6-2-8, 6-2-13
field wiring, 6-2-13
S
SCI (Supervisory Computer Interface), 8-2-1
EIA Options, 8-2-14
RS-232C, 8-2-4
RS-422, 8-2-7
X.25, 8-2-9
screen, Configure HIA, 8-3-8
Series 1 Cabinets
cabinet air flow switch, 2-4-5
installing, 2-4-1
joining, 2-4-3
securing to the floor, 2-4-4
Series 1 Console Furniture, Operator Interface Card
Cage
CE-Compliant, 3-2-20
Non-EMC, 3-2-14
Series 1 Furniture, 3-2-1
Series 2 Console Furniture, 3-1-1
Operator Interface Card Cage, 3-1-14
Series 2 System Cabinets
dimensions, 2-3-2
grounding, 2-2-4, 2-3-7
joining, 2-3-5
securing to floor, 2-3-6
shock, 1-1-11
solid state relay
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel, 7-2-26
miniature, 7-2-38
specifications, Mark 1 Remote Power Supply,
5-3-17, 5-3-23
Standard Remote Termination Panel, 7-4-2
standard system cables, 5-1-1
Star Coupler, 5-7-16
installing, 5-7-16
static electricity, 1-1-12
storing equipment, 2-1-2
Supervisory Computer Interface. See SCI
supplemental power, 1-2-21
surge protector, 1-3-14
Suspended Cabinet, 3-1-12
System Cabinet
Series 1, 2-4-1
Series 2, 2-3-1
system cables, 5-1-1
system grounding, 1-3-4
System Manager Station, 3-5-1
System Managers Station, Operator Interface Card
Cage, 3-5-6
RS3: Site Preparation and Installation
T
T connector, twinax PeerWay, 5-6-2
terminator
100 ohm, 5-6-9
124 ohm, 5-6-9
twinax PeerWay, 5-6-9
TI Communications Card, 8-4-1, 8-4-4
tie assembly, fiber optic cable, 5-8-7
transformer, isolation, 1-3-8
transporting equipment, 2-1-4
twinax, cable length limits, 5-8-15
twinax PeerWay
cable, 5-6-2
grounding, 5-6-9
installing, 5-6-1
terminating, 5-6-9
Twinax PeerWay Tap, 5-6-6
installing, 5-6-6
U
uninterruptible power supply, 1-2-21, 3-6-20
unpacking
equipment, 2-1-3
system, 2-1-1
UPS, 1-2-21, 3-6-20
V
VAX/PeerWay Interface, 8-1-1
vibration, 1-1-11
vibration protection
I/O cabinets, 2-5-8
installing, 2-5-8
Series 1 System Cabinets, 2-4-2
Series 2 System Cabinets, 2-3-6
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel, 6-2-1, 6-2-8
field wiring, 6-2-9
voltage regulation, 1-2-8
W
wall mount I/O cabinet, 2-6-1
installing, 2-6-1
wall mounting bracket, 2-6-1
Wire Tagging Kit, 7-5-6
X
X.25 protocol, 8-2-9
Index
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement